Today’s News 9th February 2021

  • The (New Normal) War On Domestic Terror
    The (New Normal) War On Domestic Terror

    Authored (mostly satirically) by CJ Hopkins via The Consent Factory,

    If you enjoyed the Global War on Terror, you’re going to love the new War on Domestic Terror! It’s just like the original Global War on Terror, except that this time the “Terrorists” are all “Domestic Violent Extremists” (“DVEs”), “Homegrown Violent Extremists” (“HVEs”), “Violent Conspiracy-Theorist Extremists” (“VCTEs”), “Violent Reality Denialist Extremists” (VRDEs”), “Insurrectionary Micro-Aggressionist Extremists” (“IMAEs”), “People Who Make Liberals Feel Uncomfortable” (“PWMLFUs”), and anyone else the Department of Homeland Security wants to label an “extremist” and slap a ridiculous acronym on.

    According to a “National Terrorism Advisory System Bulletin” issued by the DHS on January 27, these DCEs, HVEs, VCTEs, VRDEs, IMAEs, and PWMLFUs are “ideologically-motivated violent extremists with objections to the exercise of governmental authority” and other “perceived grievances fueled by false narratives.” They are believed to be “motivated by a range of issues, including anger over Covid-19 restrictions, the 2020 election results, police use of force,” and other dangerous “false narratives” (e.g., the existence of the “deep state,” “herd immunity,” “biological sex,” “God,” and so on).

    “Inspired by foreign terrorist groups” and “emboldened by the breach of the US Capitol Building,” this diabolical network of “domestic terrorists” is “plotting attacks against government facilities,” “threatening violence against critical infrastructure” and actively “citing misinformation and conspiracy theories about Covid-19.” For all we know, they might be huddled in the “Wolf’s Lair” at Mar-a-Lago right now, plotting a devastating terrorist attack with those WMDs we never found in Iraq, or generating population-adjusted death-rate charts going back 20 years, or posting pictures of “extremist frogs” on the Internet.

    The Department of Homeland Security is “concerned,” as are its counterparts throughout the global capitalist empire. The (New Normal) War on Domestic Terror isn’t just a war on American “domestic terror.” The “domestic terror” threat is international. France has just passed a “Global Security Law” banning citizens from filming the police beating the living snot out of people (among other “anti-terrorist” provisions). In Germany, the government is preparing to install an anti-terror moat around the Reichstag. In the Netherlands, the police are cracking down on the VCTEs, VRDEs, and other “angry citizens who hate the system,” who have been protesting over nightly curfews. Suddenly, everywhere you look (or at least if you are looking in the corporate media), “global extremism networks are growing.” It’s time for Globocap to take the gloves off again, root the “terrorists” out of their hidey holes, and roll out a new official narrative.

    Actually, there’s not much new about it. When you strip away all the silly new acronyms, the (New Normal) War on Domestic Terror is basically just a combination of the “War on Terror” narrative and the “New Normal” narrative, i.e., a militarization of the so-called “New Normal” and a pathologization of the “War on Terror.” Why would GloboCap want to do that, you ask?

    I think you know, but I’ll go ahead and tell you.

    See, the problem with the original “Global War on Terror” was that it wasn’t actually all that global. It was basically just a war on Islamic “terrorism” (i.e., resistance to global capitalism and its post-ideological ideology), which was fine as long as GloboCap was just destabilizing and restructuring the Greater Middle East. It was put on hold in 2016, so that GloboCap could focus on defeating “populism” (i.e., resistance to global capitalism and its post-ideological ideology), make an example of Donald Trump, and demonize everyone who voted for him (or just refused to take part in their free and fair elections), which they have just finished doing, in spectacular fashion. So, now it’s back to “War on Terror” business, except with a whole new cast of “terrorists,” or, technically, an expanded cast of “terrorists.” (I rattled off a list in my previous column.)

    In short, GloboCap has simply expanded, recontextualized, and pathologized the “War on Terror” (i.e., the war on resistance to global capitalism and its post-ideological ideology). This was always inevitable, of course. A globally-hegemonic system (e.g., global capitalism) has no external enemies, as there is no territory “outside” the system. Its only enemies are within the system, and thus, by definition, are insurgents, also known as “terrorists” and “extremists.” These terms are utterly meaningless, obviously. They are purely strategic, deployed against anyone who deviates from GloboCap’s official ideology … which, in case you were wondering, is called “normality” (or, in our case, currently, “New Normality”).

    In earlier times, these “terrorists” and “extremists” were known as “heretics,” “apostates,” and “blasphemers.” Today, they are also known as “deniers,” e.g., “science deniers,” “Covid deniers,” and recently, more disturbingly, “reality deniers.” This is an essential part of the pathologization of the “War on Terror” narrative. The new breed of “terrorists” do not just hate us for our freedom … they hate us because they hate “reality.” They are no longer our political or ideological opponents … they are suffering from a psychiatric disorder. They no longer need to be argued with or listened to … they need to be “treated,” “reeducated,” and “deprogrammed,” until they accept “Reality.” If you think I’m exaggerating the totalitarian nature of the “New Normal/War on Terror” narrative, read this op-ed in The New York Times exploring the concept of a “Reality Czar” to deal with our “Reality Crisis.”

    And this is just the beginning, of course. The consensus (at least in GloboCap circles) is, the (New Normal) War on Domestic Terror will probably continue for the next 10 to 20 years, which should provide the global capitalist ruling classes with more than enough time to carry out the “Great Reset,” destroy what’s left of human society, and condition the public to get used to living like cringing, neo-feudal peasants who have to ask permission to leave their houses. We’re still in the initial “shock and awe” phase (which they will have to scale back a bit eventually), but just look at how much they’ve already accomplished.

    The economic damage is literally incalculable … millions have been plunged into desperate poverty, countless independent businesses crushed, whole industries crippled, developing countries rendered economically dependent (i.e., compliant) for the foreseeable future, as billionaires amassed over $1 trillion in wealth and supranational corporate behemoths consolidated their dominance across the planet.

    And that’s just the economic damage. The attack on society has been even more dramatic. GloboCap, in the space of a year, has transformed the majority of the global masses into an enormous, paranoid totalitarian cult that is no longer capable of even rudimentary reasoning. (I’m not going to go on about it here … at this point, you either recognize it or you’re in it.) They’re actually lining up in parking lots, the double-masked members of this Covidian cult, to be injected with an experimental “vaccine” that they believe will save the human species from a virus that causes mild to moderate symptoms in roughly 95% of those “infected,” and that over 99% of the “infected” survive.

    So, it is no big surprise that these same mindless cultists are gung-ho for the (New Normal) War on Domestic Terror, and the upcoming globally-televised show trial of Donald Trump for “inciting insurrection,” and the ongoing corporate censorship of the Internet, and can’t wait to be issued their “Freedom Passports,” which will allow them to take part in “New Normal” life — double-masked and socially-distanced, naturally — while having their every movement and transaction, and every word they write on Facebook, or in an email, or say to someone on their smartphones, or in the vicinity of their 5G toasters, recorded by GloboCap’s Intelligence Services and their corporate partners, subsidiaries, and assigns. These people have nothing at all to worry about, as they would never dream of disobeying orders, and could not produce an original thought, much less one displeasing to GloboCap, if you held a fake apocalyptic plague to their heads.

    As for the rest of us “extremists,” “domestic terrorists,” “heretics,” and “reality deniers,” (i.e., anyone criticizing global capitalism, or challenging its official narratives, and its increasingly totalitarian ideology, regardless of our specific DHS acronyms), I wish I had something hopeful to tell you, but, the truth is, things aren’t looking so good. I guess I’ll see you in a quarantine camp, or in the psych ward, or an offshore detention facility … or, I don’t know, maybe I’ll see you in the streets.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 23:40

  • Watch: F-15EX Flies For First Time As USAF Prepares For Deliveries 
    Watch: F-15EX Flies For First Time As USAF Prepares For Deliveries 

    Boeing reported earlier this week the first test flight of its upgraded version of the F-15 Eagle was “successful,” paving the way for two of these fighter jets to be delivered to the US Air Force later this quarter. 

    The F-15EX took off and landed from St. Louis Lambert International Airport in Missouri on Tuesday, completing a 90-minute test flight before returning to the airport.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Matt Giese, Boeing F-15EX’s chief test pilot, said the new fighter jet is packed with “advanced systems and software.” Boeing’s team on the ground monitored the aircraft’s performance during the flight test. 

    “Today’s successful flight proves the jet’s safety and readiness to join our nation’s fighter fleet,” said Prat Kumar, Boeing vice president, and F-15 program manager. “Our workforce is excited to build a modern fighter aircraft for the US Air Force.”

    The updated F-15 “is capable of incorporating the latest advanced battle management systems, sensors, and weapons due to the jet’s digital airframe design and open mission systems architecture,” Kumar said.

    The Department of Defense first requested eight F-15EX fighter jets that could be delivered as soon as this year. The military wants upwards of 144 of these fighter jets in the next five years. 

    Even though the Trump administration has spent tens of billions on F-35 fifth-generation fighters, the Air Force, for some reason, still wants to obtain a 45-year-old fourth-generation fighter. 

    The reason behind the move could be due to the F-35’s internal bomb bays aren’t large enough to carry hypersonic missiles. 

    The Air Force is expected to purchase the F-15EX without reducing the fleet of 1,763 F-35s that it has long planned. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 23:20

  • The Snowplow Test
    The Snowplow Test

    Authored by Rod Dreher via TheAmericanConservative.com,

    Los Angeles Times columnist Virginia Heffernan, who lives in Brooklyn Heights but who lives somewhere rurally to escape Covid, recently had a dilemma: her Trump-loving neighbors did something nice for her. 

    She doesn’t know what the right thing to do about it is.

    Now, stop right there.

    Normal people don’t have this problem.

    Normal people think, aww, how nice, and start thinking of ways to return the kindness.

    But normal people are not Harvard-educated New York-based liberal journalists.

    Hence Heffernan’s revealing column. Excerpts:

    Oh, heck no. The Trumpites next door to our pandemic getaway, who seem as devoted to the ex-president as you can get without being Q fans, just plowed our driveway without being asked and did a great job.

    How am I going to resist demands for unity in the face of this act of aggressive niceness?

    Of course, on some level, I realize I owe them thanks — and, man, it really looks like the guy back-dragged the driveway like a pro — but how much thanks?

    These neighbors are staunch partisans of blue lives, and there aren’t a lot of anything other than white lives in neighborhood.

    This is also kind of weird. Back in the city, people don’t sweep other people’s walkways for nothing.

    It takes a New Yorker to be confronted with someone doing something nice for them, and get suspicious about the angle. More:

    On Jan. 6, after the insurrection, Sen. Ben Sasse (R-Neb.) issued an aw-shucks plea for all Americans to love their neighbors. The United States, he said, “isn’t Hatfields and McCoys, this blood feud forever.” And, he added, “You can’t hate someone who shovels your driveway.”

    At the time, I seethed; the Capitol had just been desecrated. But maybe my neighbor heard Sasse and was determined to make a bid for reconciliation.

    So here’s my response to my plowed driveway, for now. Politely, but not profusely, I’ll acknowledge the Sassian move. With a wave and a thanks, a minimal start on building back trust. I’m not ready to knock on the door with a covered dish yet.

    I also can’t give my neighbors absolution; it’s not mine to give.

    Free driveway work, as nice as it is, is just not the same currency as justice and truth. To pretend it is would be to lie, and they probably aren’t looking for absolution anyway.

    :::::facepalm:::::

    Let me tell you something, Virginia: your neighbors probably have no idea who Ben Sasse is, and isn’t looking to reconcile with you, much less receive your absolution. They just wanted to do something nice for you, because you are their neighbor, and that’s what neighbors do for each other. The fact that you assume there must be some politically aware motive behind the action says a lot about you. I grew up in the rural South, and trust me, nobody stopped to ask what one’s politics were before doing something nice for them. This is not how people live outside of Blue State Cosmopolises.

    As for “absolution,” I kind of hope you do try to engage your Trumpist neighbors by descending from on high to tell them that you might be willing to wash their sins away with your pure milk of la-te-da liberal kindness. That would be fun to watch.

    The neighbors might know perfectly well that you hate Trump, but if they are like normal people, they don’t care. You’re their neighbor, and your driveway needed plowing. It didn’t occur to them to think that they needed to know anything else about you. Honestly, this kind of “MAGA-heads In The Mist” take really does call for putting on “Sweet Home Alabama,” blasting it at top volume, and shouting these lines against judgmental liberal hypocrisy:

    Now Watergate does not bother me.

    Does your conscience bother you? Tell the truth.

    No kidding, to people like Virginia Heffernan every check their own consciences? Do they believe that they are not sinners in need of forgiveness and mercy? Does Auden’s great command — “You shall love your crooked neighbour/With your crooked heart” — somehow not apply to them?

    I know a Latino immigrant who moved to a small Louisiana town for work. Years ago, I was talking to him about what his life there is like. He mentioned how much he enjoyed playing poker with a group of men he’d fallen in with. One of the men had a familiar name from my Louisiana childhood, and then I remembered that decades ago, that man — now quite old — had been a KKK leader in this state. I asked the Latino guy if he knew that.

    “Oh yeah,” he said. “But he’s really not a bad guy at all once you get to know him.”

    I thought: that’s small town life for you. It’s like that in the town where I grew up too. You just cannot afford to be mean to and judgmental of people, even if they have sinned and fallen short of the glory of God, which, believe me, you have done too. The guy you’ll need to call to saw up the tree that fell across your driveway might have MAGA and NRA stickers on his truck. He might also do it for you for free, because he knows you’ve been sick and have medical bills. Many of my friends today back in my hometown are liberals, and I’m sure life is not as pleasant for them in some ways as it would be if they lived in a blue city. But then again, very few people back home talk about politics, and certainly wouldn’t use politics as a reason not to be neighborly. If you live out in the country, you can’t afford to be that way, and besides, it just doesn’t matter that much to us.

    A story from St. Francisville, where I’m from: a liberal friend there told me that back in the late 1980s, a gay male couple moved to town. One of them was dying of AIDS, and wanted to live in the country for as long as his life was left. They started attending the local Episcopal church. My liberal friend said that nobody at the church flew rainbow flags (I speak metaphorically), but they also welcomed this couple, and cared for them with meals and chores and companionship, until the very end. If you had polled the congregation back then, you probably would have found very few who would have said much good about homosexuality. And back then, people were a lot more afraid of AIDS than they are today. But that did not matter. What mattered was that here, in front of us, in the flesh, were two people in need of our love and care. And that they received, because they were neighbors.

    That doesn’t make St. Francisville paradise. But it does make it humane, and livable.

    The local liberals may chafe at their minority status, but they’re nice people too. One of my best friends back home is super-liberal, and he wouldn’t think twice about rushing to help out a neighbor like Heffernan, whatever her politics. It just would not cross his mind to do anything else. This isn’t a left-right thing; it’s basic human decency. The lady who runs the coffee shop in my hometown is pretty liberal, and her clientele is no doubt mostly conservative, but nobody cares. Why should they care? Are you a kind person? Do you treat others with respect? Then you are welcome, even if your politics leave a lot to be desired, either way. I don’t know if it’s like this outside the South, but down here, it would be a sorry man who wouldn’t plow his neighbor’s driveway on account of she hates Trump.

    This Heffernan column is so revealing. Is that really how urban media liberals see the rest of America: as a place full of people as bitter and as judgmental as themselves? Heffernan’s column is what happens when people who have extraordinary power to shape the media discourse live in a political monoculture. It’s like the WEIRD phenomenon, in which psychological research to determine what is normative for humans has been done solely on Westerners, whose psychological profiles are very different from those of people from around the world. The baseline of normal behavior is actually quite misleading, the theory goes, because the psychology of people formed in Western, Educated, Industrialized, Rich, Democratic cultures is meaningfully different.

    A friend of mine lives in a country resort town that has been overrun during Covidtide with rich coastal liberals escaping the plague. He says that they have made life there miserable. They are snotty, entitled, and treat the locals as exotics to be patronized. He says they are bringing with them the same attitudes toward life that ruined California. I’d bet that Heffernan’s Trumpy neighbors are happy to help her, but they’ll also be happy to see the back of her too, carrying those high-and-mighty liberal attitudes back to New York.

    Bless her heart, Virginia Heffernan doesn’t know any better. She is the product of elite colleges and urban liberal media culture, and doesn’t understand that one doesn’t politicize neighborliness. One doesn’t look at one’s neighbors and sort the decent from the indecent based on how they vote. If our big-city newsrooms had more people in them who had some sort of real understanding of and sympathy for people like Heffernan’s snowplowers, we might not be such a divided country. But we all know that when the papers hire for “diversity,” they really mean they want to get ten different flavors of liberal.

    So, the Snowplow Test: Do you live in a place where people will plow your driveway without wanting something in return, because it’s the neighborly thing to do? If so, then that’s where you want to live. If not, well, better hope that when hard times come, you’ve made enough money to take care of yourself and your family, because you’re going to need it.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 23:00

  • Russia, Iran & China To Hold Joint Naval Drills As CENTCOM Chief Blasts Iran As "Driver Of Instability"
    Russia, Iran & China To Hold Joint Naval Drills As CENTCOM Chief Blasts Iran As “Driver Of Instability”

    On Monday Russia announced plans to hold joint naval drills with Iran and China in the Indian Ocean, according to Reuters, which cites comments made by Moscow’s ambassador to Tehran. Russian Ambassador Levan Dzhagaryan said, “The next multilateral naval exercises will take place in the northern part of the Indian Ocean in mid-February 2021.”

    It comes just after the USS Nimitz aircraft carrier was ordered out of its Mideast region of responsibility at the start of this month. The Nimitz is headed home to its base in Washington state, after Trump kept it in the Indian Ocean and gulf region on standby amid ratcheting tensions with Iran. Biden then ordered it home within his first couple weeks in office.

    Via TASS

    Russia, China, and Iran last held naval drills in the region in a December 2019 exercise. Amb. Dzhagaryan detailed in his comments initially given to Russian state media that the joint drills are expected to focus on “search and rescue” operations as well as maritime security focused on shipping. Interestingly it comes following the summer of 2019 ‘tanker war’ showdown with the UK and US.

    The announcement also comes just as the US, Japan, and Australia are conducting joint drills out of Guam specifically aimed at countering a theoretical future attack from big powers like China or Russia. These drills, dubbed Cope North 2021, are expected to run until Feb. 19.

    Also on Monday the head of US Central Command, Gen Kenneth McKenzie, issued his first public remarks since President Biden entered the White House last month.

    He blasted Iran as the main and “most challenging driver of instability” in the region, while further describing that Tehran and Washington are currently in a state of “contested deterrence”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Gen. McKenzie said, “For more than forty years, the Iranian regime has funded and aggressively supported terrorism and terrorist organizations, and defied international norms by conducting malign activities which destabilized not only the region but global security and commerce as well.”

    “Our presence in the region, mostly defensive in nature, has brought us to a period of contested deterrence with Iran,” he added. “This presence sends a clear and unambiguous signal about our capabilities and will to defend partners and international interests, a signal that has been clearly received by the Iranian regime.”

    The CENTCOM chief’s comments were surprisingly blunt at a moment it remains very up in the air whether Washington and Tehran will engage toward restoring the 2015 nuclear agreement, or JCPOA. Iran has told the US it must first drop sanctions if it hopes to restore participation, while Washington has made it clear Iran must take the first step toward restoring uranium enrichment caps per the deal’s stipulations.

    Gen. McKenzie’s bold remarks will certainly only add to the controversy and sense of uncertainty looming over the nuclear deal’s future fate. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 22:40

  • IMF Wants To Use "Digital Footprint Of Customers' Online Activities" To Assess Creditworthiness
    IMF Wants To Use “Digital Footprint Of Customers’ Online Activities” To Assess Creditworthiness

    Authored by Robert Wheeler via The Organic Prepper blog,

    For years, researchers have warned of a system in which the government controls every aspect of its citizens’ lives. Every citizen would have to rely entirely on the government to survive in this system. This system has been openly discussed for many years by the “ruling class.” Aka: those who have been allotted social credit (or not) and power based upon their views and opinions

    The system has already begun in China and is now spreading globally

    In a recent post, “What is Really New In Fintech,” on the IMF blog (International Monetary Fund), authors Arnoud Boot, Peter Hoffmann, Luc Laeven, and Lev Ratnovski suggest “rapid technological change” in the financial industry. Many social media and other online platforms are now creating and accepting payments. This revolutionary change in the banking world could change the face of finance forever. 

    As a result of this rapid change, the authors bring up the following questions:

    • What are the transformative aspects of recent financial innovation that can uproot finance as we know it?

    • Which new policy challenges will the transformation of finance bring?

    To answer these questions, the authors wrote: 

    Recent IMF and ECB staff research distinguishes two areas of financial innovation. One is information: new tools to collect and analyse data on customers, for example for determining creditworthiness. Another is communication: new approaches to customer relationships and the distribution of financial products. We argue that each dimension contains some transformative components.

    The authors mention the importance and functionality of “determining creditworthiness.” The method they want to use to do so can be found in the section labeled “New Types Of Information,” where they write (emphasis ours):

    The most transformative information innovation is the increase in use of new types of data coming from the digital footprint of customers’ various online activities—mainly for creditworthiness analysis.

    Credit scoring using so-called hard information (income, employment time, assets, and debts) is nothing new. Typically, the more data is available, the more accurate is the assessment. But this method has two problems. First, hard information tends to be “procyclical”: it boosts credit expansion in good times but exacerbates contraction during downturns.

    The second and most complex problem is that certain kinds of people, like new entrepreneurs, innovators, and many informal workers, might not have enough hard data available. Even a well-paid expatriate moving to the United States can be caught in the conundrum of not getting a credit card for lack of credit record, and not having a credit record for lack of credit cards.

    Fintech resolves the dilemma by tapping various nonfinancial data: the type of browser and hardware used to access the internet, the history of online searches, and purchases. Recent research documents that, once powered by artificial intelligence and machine learning, these alternative data sources are often superior than traditional credit assessment methods, and can advance financial inclusion, by, for example, enabling more credit to informal workers and households, and firms in rural areas.

    The type of browser used could potentially indicate a different ranking for browsers that heavily track users, like Chrome, vs. browsers that emphasize privacy, like Brave.

    So what does this all mean for our financial future?

    It means the IMF authors suggest the global banking network begin using a history of online searches and purchases to determine “creditworthiness.” In other words, do you read CNN and purchase sports memorabilia? You’re approved! Do you read The Organic Prepper and buy “conspiracy” or “prepping” material? We’re sorry, you can not be approved at this time based on your credit score.

    In Brandon Turbeville’s 2019 article Social Media, Universal Basic Income, and Cashless Society: How China’s Social Credit System Is Coming To America he wrote: 

    “Unbeknownst to most people, there appears to be a real attempt to create a system in which all citizens are rationed their “wages” digitally each month in place of a paycheck or ability to gain or lose money. This system would see any form of dissent resulting in the cut off of those credits and the ability to work, eat, or even exist in society. It would not only be the end of dissent but of any semblance of real individuality.”

    Turbeville outlines a plan to create a Universal Basic Income (UBI). The scheme, tied to a social credit system, will essentially cut off the financial lifeline to anyone who does not entirely tow the establishment line. I encourage you to take a look at the article and see for yourself how this scheme is coming together. For more information, here’s an article that compares UBI to modern feudalism.

    With Biden’s new administration that is openly more “global” in its outlook, the IMF has already stated that it will seek to reset its relationship with the United States and that Biden’s “commitment to multilateral institutions and his pledge to re-enter the Paris climate agreement should help the IMF advance its own targets.”

    And you thought it was challenging to gain approval before…

    The pairing of online history with credit scores is bad enough. Doing so has prevented many otherwise creditworthy citizens from accessing what they need to start businesses, buy homes, rent apartments, or buy cars. Some states have suggested laws that use your search history and social media when being assessed for your worthiness to purchase a firearm, and the Bank of America has made it incredibly clear just this past week that your purchases and financial records are by no means private.

    However, pairing both of those with the Universal Basic Income is even worse. We are fast approaching a time where even the slightest difference of opinion from the norm (i.e., the ruling class) can result in a complete freeze out of the “offender” from the entire society.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 22:20

  • BofA Spots A Demand Problem With Semiconductors
    BofA Spots A Demand Problem With Semiconductors

    BofA’s Michael Hartnett released a client note last Thursday titled “Big Fed, Big Tech, Big Yields.” The note had a lot of useful information. ZeroHedge Premium can see the report in full here. More importantly, within the chart pack, Hartnett outlined how the semiconductor book-to-bill ratio, otherwise considered an important leading indicator of demand trends, could be rolling over.

    The semiconductor book-to-bill is a ratio of three-month moving averages of worldwide bookings and billings for North American-based semiconductor equipment manufacturers. It’s widely used as a leading indicator of demand trends within the industry. 

    The data shown below shows semiconductor equipment bookings outpaced equipment billings on a three-month moving average since the steep drop at the beginning of the virus pandemic in early 2020 but has since stalled in early 2021. Hartnett overlays the PHLX Semiconductor Sector on a year-over-year basis with a red arrow pointing down, suggesting future demand issues within the industry could result in a correction.

    PHLX Semiconductor Sector has stalled out for the last four weeks. 

    Here are other notable charts Hartnett lays out in the client note: 

    Central bank liquidity versus the market cap of Apple, Amazon, Facebook, Google, Microsoft, Netflix, and Tesla. Thank the Federal Reserve for inflating the stock market bubble in tech. 

    Has China’s credit growth peaked? If so, this could have significant impacts on the global economy’s future growth. For more on this read, ““Peaking” China Credit Impulse Suggests Copper Prices May Have Topped.” Premium users can read a more in-depth analysis of China’s credit growth in a note titled “In Historic Reversal, China’s Credit Impulse Just Peaked: What This Means For Global Markets.” 

    … and of course, BofA’s Bull & Bear Indicator is at 7.5, nearing “extreme bullish” levels which would be above 8. 

    Despite the semiconductor shortage, the slump in the book-to-bill ratio suggests demand weakness could be ahead. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 22:00

  • Journalist Andy Ngo On How Antifa Wants To "Destroy Democracy"
    Journalist Andy Ngo On How Antifa Wants To “Destroy Democracy”

    Gabriel Nadales, a former Antifa activist who now works for Campus Reform’s parent organization, the Leadership Institute, sat down with journalist Andy Ngo to talk about his new book, Unmasked: Inside Antifa’s Radical Plan to Destroy Democracy.

    By unmasking Antifa’s true goal and exposing the group as an extremist illiberal movement, Ngo makes the case to show why the mainstream left should not support Antifa or the Black Lives Matter organization.

    Nadales and Ngo discussed how higher education promotes Antifa’s values while Ngo highlighted that several college professors were arrested amid the 2020 Portland Antifa riots.

    Finally, Nadales and Ngo touched upon Big Tech’s censorship of conservatives while Facebook and Twitter allow far-left Antifa militants to organize on their platforms.

    Watch the full interview below:

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 21:40

  • Hacker Tried To Poison Entire Florida Town By Raising Chemical Levels In Water Supply
    Hacker Tried To Poison Entire Florida Town By Raising Chemical Levels In Water Supply

    A town in Florida has been target of a hack which briefly altered chemicals in its water supply to “potentially damaging levels” according to local media reports. Federal and local authorities are currently investigating the computer network intrusion which happened last Friday morning, the alarming details of which are emerging Monday.

    Plant operators overseeing the small city of Oldsmar’s water supply began observing strange activity on their monitors. That’s when technicians noticed that sodium hydroxide levels (or lye), which is used to treat the city’s water in small amounts in order to control acidity while removing heavy metals, was being remotely pushed higher

    Water treatment plant file image, Getty

    Technicians noticed the chemical levels being subject of unauthorized external manipulation in real time and immediately moved to restore the sodium hydroxide input to its safe, correct levels. The AP detailed based on local reporting: “A plant worker first noticed the unusual activity at around 8 a.m. Friday when someone briefly accessed the system.” 

    “At about 1:30 p.m., someone accessed it again, took control of the mouse, directed it to the software that controls water treatment and increased the amount of sodium hydroxide, the report continued.

    The hacker or hackers have yet to be uncovered and apprehended. According to details announced by the county sheriff Bob Gualtieri and featured in Tampa Bay Times

    Someone remotely accessed a computer for the city’s water treatment system and briefly increased the amount of sodium hydroxide, also known as lye, by a factor of more than 100, Gualtieri said at a news conference Monday. The chemical is used in small amounts to control the acidity of water but it’s also a corrosive compound commonly found in household cleaning supplies such as liquid drain cleaners.

    “This is obviously a significant and potentially dangerous increase,” the Pinellas County sheriff added. 

    Control panel at a Miami water treatment plant, Getty Images

    He further explained that the hacker’s changes inside the system were detected before any damage was done that could affect the public: “The public was never in danger,” Gualtieri said additionally. “Even if the plant operator had not quickly reversed the increased amount of sodium hydroxide, it would’ve taken between 24 and 36 hours for that water to hit the water supply system.”

    The Oldsmar water treatment plant is responsible for supplying water to an estimated 15,000 residents along with dozens of businesses. It essentially appears the hacker was attempting to poison the drinking water for an entire town.

    Police press conference revealing the hack and its extent to the public on Monday:

    Currently the FBI and Secret Service have joined county sheriff efforts at attempting to trace the hack.

    The alarming incident comes following federal officials and cybersecurity experts over the past several years expressing anxiety over the vulnerability of vital US infrastructure to potentially devastating hacks, particularly from foreign entities, which could in some cases actually threaten lives.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 21:20

  • Parents Sue Robinhood After 20-Year-Old Son Commits Suicide Over Options Confusion
    Parents Sue Robinhood After 20-Year-Old Son Commits Suicide Over Options Confusion

    To better understand why Robinhood is so popular among millennial investors, it’s best to think about game design. The Robinhood stock trading app feels and plays very much like a video game, but of course, it’s a stock-trading game. The ‘in-game’ purchases are equities and options of real publicly traded companies. 

    During the pandemic, the platform erupted with young inexperienced traders, who could approve themselves on the app as ultra-sophisticated traders with the touch of a button. To date, Robinhood has close to 20 million users. 

    As we sadly detailed here, the devastating suicide of 20-year-old Alex Kearns last June, after discovering he faced a loss of over $700k on his massively-levered options account, exposed the very real downside of the speculative mania in the stock market. 

    In a note left for his family, Kearns said he had “no clue about what I was doing” and never intended to “take this much risk.”

    On Monday, Kearns’ parents filed a lawsuit, first obtained by CBS News, which accused Robinhood of “wrongful death, negligent infliction of emotional distress, and unfair business practices.”

    In the lawsuit, Dan and Dorothy Kearns allege Robinhood purposely targets young inexperienced customers, then within the app pushes them to engage in highly complex trades.

    They said the app also provided no “meaningful customer support” to resolve their son’s trade issues. 

    One weekend in June, Robinhood restricted Kearns account, indicating that his new balance totaled negative $730k. Robinhood sent another automated message detailing how he needed “immediate action” in resolving his account status by depositing $170k to settle up. 

    According to his parents’ lawyer, the money Kearns thought he lost may not have been lost because the options bets were structured. 

    “He thought he blew up his life. He thought he screwed up beyond repair,” Dan Kearns said. 

    When Kearns received the message from Robinhood, it appeared he freaked out. Without adequate customer support, the young inexperienced trader could not reach out to anyone for an explanation. All he received was an automated message from the company. 

    The messages read: 

    “Thanks for reaching out to our support team!” The email said, “We wanted to let you know that we’re working to get back to you as soon as possible, but that our response time to you may be delayed.” The company assigned him a case number, 06849753.

    “And their response was a canned reply,” his father said. “Basically, ‘We’ll get back to you later.'”

    His father went on to say all his son wanted were answers, but Robinhood didn’t have any. 

    Sadly, the day after Kearns committed suicide. Robinhood sent his account an automated email said the trade issue had been resolved and owed no money. 

    Here’s what the message said:

    “Great news!” The email read, “We’re reaching out to confirm that you’ve met your margin call and we’ve lifted your trade restrictions. If you have any questions about your margin call, please feel free to reach out. We’re happy to help!”

    Critics of Robinhood, such as William Galvin, Massachusetts Secretary of the Commonwealth and the chief financial regulator in the state of Massachusetts, said the online discount brokerage firm has been “very deliberate” in suckering new, inexperienced investors onto its platform. 

    In December, Galvin’s office filed a complaint against Robinhood that said the investing app is very much modeled after a video game. 

    In Massachusetts alone, Galvin said there had been more than 600 examples of Robinhood users who shouldn’t have been approved for complex options trading. 

    Before Kearns killed himself, he wrote a note to his parents that read: 

    “How was a 20-year-old with no income able to get assigned almost $1 million worth of leverage?” He added, “The puts I bought/sold should have canceled out, too, but I also have no clue what I was doing now in hindsight. There was no intention to be assigned this much and take this much risk, and I only thought that I was risking the money that I actually owned. If you check the app, the margin investing option isn’t even ‘turned on’ for me. A painful lesson. F*** Robinhood.”

    … and keep in mind, Robinhood’s business model relies upon payment for order flow to market makers, such as Citadel, as their only profit engine instead of trading commissions. This means that Robinhood has to continue attracting new users to boost revenues. 

    Robinhood is also facing multiple class-action lawsuits from customers over its decision to restrict GameStop trading and other popular meme stocks, leading to steep losses for customers.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 21:00

  • Vietnam Culls 100,000 Poultry As Bird Flu Spreads To 14 Provinces
    Vietnam Culls 100,000 Poultry As Bird Flu Spreads To 14 Provinces

    Reuters reports Vietnam has culled more than 100,000 chickens this year as an outbreak of the avian flu hits poultry farms in more than one dozen provinces.

    The Vietnamese government released a statement on Monday outlining how the highly pathogenic H5N1 and H5N6 bird flu strains have spread across 14 provinces in 39 days. 

    To mitigate the spread, the government has culled more than 100,000 chickens. 

    “The risk for the outbreaks to spread on a larger scale is very high,” the statement said.

    Vietnam’s total poultry flock is around 460 million birds. So the outbreak is not sizeable but definitely notable as bird flu outbreaks have been reported in the country over the last few years.

    Meanwhile, the country culled tens of thousands of pigs in late 2020 to curb the spread of African swine fever. 

    The outbreaks have been manageable for the country’s Department of Animal Health. If there is more spreading, readers should be on the lookout for government travel restrictions around outbreak areas. So far, none have been posted.

    Last week, we reported that China, a country that borders Vietnam, has had what one farmer told Reuters African swine fever contagion “is bad” right now. This has kept Chinese pig prices elevated, with possible meat shortages later in the year.

    ADMCF Wildlife tweeted “While #COVID19 has our attention, don’t forget all the other zoonotic risks out there! Multiple ongoing outbreaks leading to import bans by HongKong Gov.”

    • H5N8 avian flu in the UK
    • H5N8 avian flu in South Korea
    • H5N8 avian flu in Denmark
    • H5N8 avian flu in Hungary

    Readers should keep an eye on further developments of the bird flu and African swine fever possibly spreading around Asia and even Europe.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 20:40

  • China To "Seriously Sanction" Any Boycotters Of 2022 Beijing Winter Olympics
    China To “Seriously Sanction” Any Boycotters Of 2022 Beijing Winter Olympics

    Chinese state media is threatening Western officials and nations with “serious sanctions” should there be any largescale attempt to boycott the China-hosted Winter Olympic games scheduled for 2022.

    It comes amid a growing and increasingly growing movement, centered especially out of Canada, which is seeking to do just that. A number of Canadian MPs are currently calling for a boycott based on widespread and persistent reports that Communist authorities in China are carrying out systematic persecution of ethnic Uighur Muslims in Xinjiang region.

    The movement to hold China to account was picked up in The Guardian late last week, which highlighted the well-organized efforts of over 180 human rights groups that have called for the boycott.

    “The coalition of groups – primarily regional associations in support of Tibet, Taiwan, the Uighur community and Hong Kong – said the hopes in 2015 that awarding Beijing the Games would be a catalyst for progress, had faded,” The Guardian wrote while citing an ‘open letter’.

    Advocates of a boycott are angry that China was awarded the 2022 games in the first place. They write in the open letter which is now gaining global traction:

    “The IOC [ International Olympic Committee] refused to listen in 2008, defending its decision with claims that they would prove to be a catalyst for improved human rights. As human rights experts predicted, this decision proved to be hugely misplaced; not only did China’s human rights record not improve but violations increased substantially without rebuke.”

    “Now, in 2021, we find ourselves back in the same position with the IOC who are refusing to act despite the clear evidence of genocide and widespread and worsening human rights failures.”

    Calls for a boycott prompted a reaction out of the White House, with spokeswoman Jen Psaki days ago saying, “We’re not currently talking about changing our posture or our plans as it relates to the Beijing Olympics.”

    However, this didn’t satisfy Chinese state media, which is now issuing preemptive threats over the matter.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Sunday prominent state media mouthpiece Hu Xijin, who as the English language Global Times editor often echoes the thinking of government leaders in Beijing, tweeted that “China will seriously sanction any country that follows such a call.”

    He further called the movement for a boycott “unpopular” and unlikely to gain serious traction; however, given his fierce reaction he no doubt sees it as a significant “threat” to China’s prestige and reputation.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 20:20

  • Biden Warns China Should Expect "Extreme Competition" From US
    Biden Warns China Should Expect “Extreme Competition” From US

    During his wide-ranging interview with CBS televised just ahead of the Super Bowl Sunday night, President Biden said China is in for “extreme competition” from the United States under his leadership while still urging for the two economic powerhouses to establish a new relationship which avoids conflict. 

    “I know him pretty well,” Biden said in the “Face the Nation” interview while saying that when he next speaks to President Xi the two will have “a whole lot to talk about.” But Biden also vowed to hold Beijing to account for its severe human rights abuses – in reference to widespread reports of severe persecution and ‘reeducation camps’ targeting the ethnic Uighur Muslim minority.

    Via AP

    “I’ve said to him all along that we need not have a conflict,” Biden said of his Chinese counterpart.

    “But there’s going to be extreme competition . . . I’m not going to do it the way Trump did. We’re going to focus on international rules of the road.” Biden still made it clear he does not intend to go “softer” on China when compared to Trump. On this point, FT noted in its review of Biden’s latest comments:

    Biden, who spent considerable time with Xi as vice-president to Barack Obama, said the Chinese leader was “very bright” but “doesn’t have a democratic, small D, bone in his body”. At one point during the Democratic primary race last year, Biden described him as a “thug”. 

    In the first three weeks of the administration, senior US officials have taken a hard rhetorical stance towards China over everything from its rights record in Xinjiang and Hong Kong to its military activity near Taiwan.

    Here’s a clip of the key part of the latest CBS interview wherein Biden said:

    But there’s gonna be extreme competition. And I’m not going to do it the way he knows. And that’s because he’s sending signals as well. I’m not gonna do it the way Trump did. We’re gonna focus on international rules of the road.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Indeed based on the latest statements on China out of Antony Blinken, the White House plans to continue Trump’s pressure campaign despite Biden’s assertion he’ll go about it differently.

    Biden’s claim is that unlike Trump, he’ll keep a “tough” stance on China but in a way that focuses on the “international rules of the road” – though it’s unclear precisely what this vague statement means.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 20:00

  • Government Fail: "We've Turned Teens Into Lockdown Lab Rats"
    Government Fail: “We’ve Turned Teens Into Lockdown Lab Rats”

    Via 21stCenturyWire.com,

    The verdict is clear: the imposition of lockdowns and social distancing, along with delays in getting children and adolescents back into schools – has been fatal for society, creating a slow motion mental health explosion that could last for decades.

    To anyone actually paying attention, warnings and concerns have been raised for months by many different people and advocacy groups, but rather than considering the spectre of permanent arrested development, governments have such dismissed concerns as a low priority in relation to ‘stopping the spread of the virus.’ Instead, virtue-signalling individuals in government, along with teachers unions, have retreated into the irrational world hypochondria and paranoia and leaving the youth hanging out to dry in the process – despite the fact that near zero risk of young people ever becoming ill from COVID-19. Similarly, most teachers are similarly in a low risk of ever becoming seriously ill from coronavirus.

    Last summer, an open letter was sent to UK Education Secretary Gavin Williamson, outlining the damage done by the government China-inspired reactionary ‘mitigation’ measures, and called for a return to ‘normal life.’ The letter was signed by more than 100 specialists in psychology, mental health and neuroscience, and published in The Sunday Times, stating:

    “As experts working across disciplines, we are united as we urge you to reconsider your decision and to release children and young people from lockdown.

    “Allow them to play together and continue their education by returning to preschool, school, college and university, and enjoy extra-curricular activities including sport and music as normally, and as soon, as possible.”

    Seven months later, the situation has deteriorated even further. The psychological impact is no longer a potential harm, it’s now manifest.

    Timandra Harkness at UnHerd writes…

    Last year an experiment was carried out on a group of adolescents to see how they would respond to being denied contact with others of the same age. The results were stark — starved of interaction with their own generation, the adolescents subsequently grew up to be more angry and fearful, drank more alcohol and found it harder to interact with others.

    The adolescents in questions were, of course, rats, but many of their human equivalents might wonder if a similar experiment was being carried out on them, too. Certainly it’s not a good time to be a kid. Teenagers in previous national crises risked being bombed out of their houses, killed by polio or Spanish Flu, or being sent to fight in the trenches. What Covid is wreaking is relatively invisible, and while the disease dominating the world is vanishingly unlikely to kill anyone under 25, there is a parallel epidemic of anxiety and depression crushing its way through young minds. The Royal College of Psychiatrists is warning that the psychological damage caused by the last 12 months could last for years.

    Rates of referral to child and adolescent mental health services were already alarmingly high before the pandemic; in the last year, they’ve gone up by 20%, to nearly 1 in 20 as teenagers are forced to stay home with their stressed families and live their entire lives through a screen: education, entertainment, their grandparents’ funerals and their own school-leaving prom. And, most important for teenagers, their social life.

    Adolescents need their social life the way babies need food, sleep and warmth. Everything from neuroscience to centuries of human experience tells us that the process of becoming an adult happens through spending less time with parents and more time with peers. By hanging out with friends and classmates, developing our first sexual and romantic attachments, competing and admiring, going too far and having to repair social bonds, we learn to be autonomous and independent — just as our rat cousins do.

    And yet, as the researchers on the rat experiment noted, findings in rodents don’t map simply onto human teenagers. For a start, none of the rats driven to drink by their solitary confinement had access to social media.

    Ever since teenagers first discovered that the smartphone in their pocket could connect them, not only to a boundless world of human knowledge and feline video action, but to their friends, rivals and potential love interest, adults have worried the damage it is doing. A January 2021 report on young people’s wellbeing and mental health is the latest to associate “heavy social media use” with worse wellbeing, especially for girls…

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 19:40

  • Manhattan Office Supply Soars To Record As Remote-Working Dominates 
    Manhattan Office Supply Soars To Record As Remote-Working Dominates 

    New York City’s commercial real estate is still on shaky ground. A new report shows a record amount of office space available in Manhattan as remote working continues to dominate. 

    Citing a new report via investment management firm Colliers International, Bloomberg says office availability increased to 14.9% in January, the highest since the Dot Com bust (2000). 

    Leasing plunged by 47% over the month compared with the same period last year. Asking rents are on a waterfall trajectory, falling for the seventh consecutive month to $73.65 a square foot, the lowest in three years. Not even at these prices are companies willing to set up shop or expand office space in the borough. 

    Supply is another issue. Since the pandemic began, companies based out of densely packed skyscrapers shifted employees to home and have made some of those working environments permanent. This has led to companies reducing their overall corporate footprint. 

    While the borough’s overall commercial real estate conditions have a negative outlook, there were some signs of optimism. “Leasing in Manhattan reached 1.9 million square feet (about 176,500 square meters) in January, the highest level since July, and 20% higher than the 2020 monthly average,” said Bloomberg.

    One notable large lease was Beam Suntory, an American company named Suntory Beverage & Food Ltd, leasing a 100,000 square feet space at 11 Madison Ave.

    As we noted last month, the return of office workers to the financial district has been nothing short of a disappointment as foot traffic slumps, yet again. 

    Source: Bloomberg 

    The low rate of office workers returning to Manhattan mixed with a record amount of office space available doesn’t bode well for the borough’s recovery. As a whole, the city will lag the rest of the country by a couple of years in terms of an economic recovery. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 19:20

  • "The Herd Is Coming": Novogratz Sees Bitcoin At $100,000 As "Every Company" Buys It
    “The Herd Is Coming”: Novogratz Sees Bitcoin At $100,000 As “Every Company” Buys It

    Exactly one month ago, following MSTR’s latest purchase of bitcoin which helped push its stock to all time highs, we laid out a simple case for “How bitcoin hits $100,000 next” which boiled down to just one observation: “countless other publicly-traded firms will now rush to convert all their cash (and more) into bitcoin” an observation which was based on something we noticed two months earlier, namely that very soon it would be “cool” – not to mention lucrative – for corporations to buy bitcoin, and once that bandwagon was unleashed, $100,000 bitcoins would be just a matter of time.

    Incidentally, that was also when we – correctly – predicted that Elon Musk would become the first mega-corporation to convert a substantial portion of his cash into bitcoin:

    One such company which we are convinced will announce it is converting billions of its existing cash into bitcoin, is none other than Tesla, whose CEO Elon Musk was urged by MSTR CEO Saylor to make a similar move with Tesla’s money. And since Musk, already the world’s richest man thanks to the most aggressive financial engineering on the planet, has never been one to shy away from a challenge, we are absolutely confident that it is only a matter of time before Tesla announces that it has purchased a few billion in bitcoin.

    It took one month for Elon Musk to do just that.

    We bring all this up (again) because in the latest example that imitation may well be the sincerest form of analytical flattery (by billionaires), late on Monday, billionaire bitcoin preacher Michael Novogratz, the founder of cryptocurrency investment firm Galaxy Digital, said he sees Bitcoin “more than doubling to $100,000 by the end of the year” – sounds nice-round-numberishly familiar – spurred higher as more companies allow customers to use the token to make purchases, a thesis and price target first laid out here on Jan 9.

    Shortly after we tweeted the following rhetorical musing earlier today…

    … which we subsequently refined by suggesting that every company will now scramble to generate the kinds of stock returns that Microstar had achieved in the last 12 months, surpassing even TSLA in percentage terms as it accumulated “billions and billions” of bitcoin.

    … Novograts appeared on Bloomberg TV and said almost verbatim what we have been saying for the past month, namely that “you’re going to see every company in America do the same thing,” referring to TSLA’s $1.5BN purchase, which should propel the crypto to the stratosphere. And furthermore, between corporations adding Bitcoin to treasury funds and the city of Miami also considering adding the cryptocurrency to its balance sheet, “It doesn’t have to be a lot. It’s the messaging that matters, you’re seeing the herd here, and it’s coming.”

    Also repeating what we said in Jan, Novo – whose net worth hit an all time high today in the “billions and billions”, said that other companies would consider moving excess reserves into Bitcoin, perhaps as a hedge against inflation or against a falling dollar.

    Or just to telegraph to their investors to buy their stock, since buying bitcoin is the “cool” thing now, and lead to even faster bonuses than stock buybacks.

    While his enthusiasm was hardly shared by his Bloomberg hosts some of whom have been spectacularly wrong about bitcoin for year and year and years (which is ok because they’ve also been wrong about everything else too), Novogratz said Elon Musk was a “genius” in his decision to “listen to the people,” or weighing the interests of a rising generation.

    “One of the things that connect Bitcoin, and Tesla and solar stocks and ESG investing is millennials and Gen Z, young people are buying into the future, and they see cryptocurrencies — Bitcoin and other currencies — as their currencies.

    To be sure, skeptics will remain, in no small part due to Bitcoin’s infamous volatility – just a few days ago it plunged 25% before soaring by 50% days later  – has made it difficult for usually risk-averse CFOs to make it a regular part of corporate treasuries, however, with Elon Musk “breaking the seal” so to speak, the stigma of diversifying into such a volatile asset class is now gone and on the contrary, everyone will now scramble to buy some while they still can in hopes of levitating their stock and equity-linked comp in the process.

    In other words, “bitcoin is the new buyback.”

    “Now you got the biggest, the wealthiest man in the world and one of the biggest stories doing it,” Novogratz said. “You’ve got to think other CFOs and CEOs are saying, what should we be doing?”

    Why buying of course, as we said first in November.

    Full Bloomberg TV interview below:

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 19:00

  • China Arrests High Profile Australian Journalist On Spy Charges 
    China Arrests High Profile Australian Journalist On Spy Charges 

    Fueling tensions amid an already spiraling trade dispute between the two countries, China has formally arrested an Australian citizen and journalist after she was initially detained under mysterious circumstances last summer.

    The now formal arrest of Cheng Lei is under charges of “illegally supplying state secrets overseas” after she long worked as a popular news anchor and analyst for China’s state-run English language news service, CGTN.

    The Australian government has long protested her detention and calls the allegations “baseless” after she was held under a law which gives Chinese authorities the ability to hold and interrogate a suspect for up to six months with no formal charges or access to lawyers.

    A Chinese Foreign Ministry statement said that “China’s judicial authorities have carried out investigation in accordance with the law, they concluded this Australian citizen conducted illegal activities on supplying state secrets overseas so in accordance with law they approved her arrest of February 5. This case is underway,” according to Australian national news.

    “We hope the Australian side will respect China’s judicial authority and stop interfering in China’s legal handling of this case in any way,” the statement added.

    When she initially “disappeared” into Chinese detention, fueling wide speculation as to her fate, Beijing officials indicated she was “suspected of carrying out criminal activities endangering China’s national security.”

    Australian consular officials said they’ve visited Cheng six times since her detention, most recently at the end of January, and it’s as yet still unclear exactly what Beijing is alleging, or whether they have evidence of alleged spying or espionage.

    Meanwhile, over the weekend Australian Foreign Minister Marise Payne issued a statement saying Canberra “has raised its serious concerns about Ms. Cheng’s detention regularly at senior levels, including about her welfare and conditions of detention.” Payne added that “We expect basic standards of justice, procedural fairness and humane treatment to be met, in accordance with international norms.”

    Some are speculating that China is upping the ante dramatically in terms of leverage amid the ongoing trade spat which has seen China block key Australian commodities exports. However, Beijing is insisting it is conducting a lawful and legitimate investigation.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 18:40

  • Biden Appears To Be Expanding The US Occupation Of Syria
    Biden Appears To Be Expanding The US Occupation Of Syria

    Authored by Jason Ditz via AntiWar.com,

    According to the Syrian Observatory for Human Rights, some 50 vehicles in a US military convoy crossed into Syria this weekend and headed for bases in the nation’s northeast Hasakeh Province.

    Details aren’t clear on why the convoy arrived, beyond delivering equipment. The Observatory noted this is the ninth such convoy to enter Syria in 2021, meaning nearly two convoys per week are showing up.

    File image of US convoy entering Syria in past years, AFP/Getty

    While there has been no official announcement on a policy change, this speaks to the Biden Administration’s intentions in Syria, or at least intentions to not leave Syria.

    The US has very limited troop presence left in Syria, and President Trump made much of the remnant just being there to loot oil. With reports of ISIS seeking a resurgence there, it seems the US may have found itself another war, or at least a continuation of the existing war.

    A return to Obama-era priorities in Syria could set the stage for a bigger fight, as they were very keen to impose regime change in Syria before, and may be following the Libya model that saw Moammar Gadhafi deposed, killed, and Libya turned into the wreck it remains to this day.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Citing SOHR, one regional report notes:

    According to the Britain-based monitoring group, “this is the ninth Coalition convoy to enter Syria since the beginning of 2021.”

    Nothing Biden has said would suggest otherwise, with the Kurdish YPG expecting a new influx of US support. Some of this will be done under the guise of fighting terrorism, some on claimed US interests in the region.

    No longer content to rob a single oilfield, the US may once again have designs on much more.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 18:20

  • With Scorching Economy Set To Overheat, Goldman Brings Forward First Rate Hike Estimate
    With Scorching Economy Set To Overheat, Goldman Brings Forward First Rate Hike Estimate

    How quickly things change.

    Just nine short months ago, in May 2020, the market did something it had never done before: it pushed Fed Fund futures for January 2021 negative, meaning that last spring bond traders were betting that sometime around today, overnight rates in the US would be negative as the US economy entered the final stretch of its Japanification implosion.

    Since then things haven’t quite worked out as expected, with long rates rising sharply and the 30Y today briefly breaching 2% for the first time since February 2020, on the back of surging breakeven rate, which rose by 1bp point to touch 2.21%, eclipsing a 2018 high of 2.2078%, and rising to the highest level since 2014 as markets increasingly price in far higher inflation over the next decade.

    And while the market would love to have its bubble-blowing zero-interest rate cake and eat it too for the next several years – as the Fed refuses to hike rates for the foreseeable future now that it is prepared to let the economy “run hot” indefinitely – that is unlikely to be the case especially with BMO calculating that just the surging price of commodities is already tantamount to a 4% headline inflation.

    And sure enough, already we are getting the first rumbling of what could be the next market crisis (which, recall, will be catalyzed by sharply higher inflation which will force the Fed to taper QE first and eventually to hike rates).

    In a note published this afternoon, Goldman hiked its assumption for additional fiscal measures to $1.5 trillion…

    With the passage of the budget resolution (Feb. 5), Congress has completed the first of two steps to provide additional COVID-relief funding along the lines of President Biden’s proposal.Next, committees will draft and vote on legislation. We expect this late in the nweek of Feb. 8. At this stage, we will learn much more about the details, size,and timing, of particular provisions.However, the key decision might not be made for another few weeks, when the Senate is likely to take up its version of the COVID-relief bill. By that point,centrist Democrats who have been the limiting factor on the size of the bill will need to decide how large a bill they are willing to support. We think this amount is likely to be higher than the $1.1 trillion (5% of GDP) wenhad previously assumed, and we are raising of assumption for additional fiscal measures to $1.5 trillion (6.8% of GDP)

    This is a sizable increase – Goldman estimates that the extra $400bn in stimulus is equivalent to nearly 2% of GDP – one which bumps the bank’s Q2 growth forecast from 10% to 11% and taking annual growth in 2021 and 2022 up by about 0.2% each year, to 6.8% and 4.5%respectively.

    At this point, it becomes clear that last week’s warnings from Larry Summers and Olivier Blanchard that the US economy is set to overheat are clearly coming true, which is also why Goldman has to anticipate how the Fed will response to this outlier growth, and inflation.  And it does so in a way that is unlikely to be welcome by the market, because whether it wants to or not, Goldman has to concede that such scorching GDP growth will inevitably mean an earlier tightening by the Fed, and sure enough this is what the bank’s chief economist Jan Hatzius has forecast:

    In light of the upgrade to our growth forecast, the larger-than-expected decline in the unemployment rate in January, and signs of a firmer inflation outlook, we have brought forward our forecast for the first rate hike from the second half of 2024 to the first half.  We expect the FOMC to start tapering its asset purchases in early 2022.

    Since every other banks tends to immediately imitate anything that Goldman’s econ department proposes, we expect that in the coming days we will see a barrage of sellside reports predicting that the first rate hike will be pulled back to early 2024 (or even late 2023 by those banks who really want to impress their clients with their originality), and while stocks will likely ignore this truncated tightening calendar for now, it is only a matter of time before trader euphoria pops once the realization that the Kool-aid is coming to an end starts becoming the dominant narrative.

    The only caveat is that since nobody really knows how long the Fed will allow the economy to “symmetrically” overheat as per its recent Average Inflation Targeting adjustment, those betting that the bubble bursting comes any time soon will likely end up facing substantial losses. Our advice: wait for the Fed to start leaking trail balloons of “first rate hikes.” That will be the hawkish signal that it’s finally time to get out of Dodge.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 18:00

  • Montana Aims To "Save Women's Sports" From Biden's Executive Order
    Montana Aims To “Save Women’s Sports” From Biden’s Executive Order

    Authored by Abigail Streetman via Campus Reform,

    The Montana House Judiciary Committee passed House Bill 112 in a 62-38 vote on Jan. 25, requiring public school athletes to participate in sports according to their biological sex. 

    The bill, named the “Save Women’s Sports Act” is sponsored by Rep. John Fuller, who told Campus Reform, “I have spent my life’s career defending children, helping them achieve their dreams and advocating for the benefits of sports and athletics for everyone.” 

    The bill passed the Montana House within days of President Joe Biden signing an executive order that would allow biological males who identify as females to compete in women’s sports, as Campus Reform previously reported

    According to United States v. Virginia, 518 U.S. 515, 533 (1996) “‘Inherent differences’ between men and women, we have come to appreciate, remain cause for celebration, but not for denigration of the members of either sex or for artificial constraints on an individual’s opportunity.”

    All-American track athlete Doriane Lambelet Coleman, tennis champion Martina Navratilova, and Olympic track gold medalist Sanya Richards-Ross recently wrote, “the evidence is unequivocal that starting in puberty, in every sport except sailing, shooting, and riding, there will always be significant numbers of boys and men who would beat the best girls and women in head-to-head competition. Claims to the contrary are simply a denial of science.”

    A study by the Journal of Applied Physiology found that on average women exhibit about 40 percent less upper body strength and 33 percent less lower-body strength than men. 

    If signed into law, HB 112 would take effect on July 1. 

    Montana’s House voted on a similar piece of legislation on January 25. 

    HB 113 would create the “Youth Health Protection Act.” This act would prohibit health care providers from “prescribing, providing, or administering gender transition procedures to a minor.” The bill failed to pass; a motion to reconsider also failed.  

    At least seven other states have proposed similar legislation.

    Kentucky, Oklahoma, North Dakota, and New Hampshire have joined Montana with their own versions of the “Save Women’s Sports Act.” New Hampshire, Texas, Utah, Mississippi, and Missouri have all introduced legislation that is similar to Montana’s HB 113.

    “I would hope that every state would follow Montana’s example, however, that probably won’t be the case,” Fuller said.

    South Dakota House Bill 1076 would require that citizens’ birth certificates reflect their biological sex, and may not be changed as the result of a gender transition surgery. The House was scheduled to vote on this bill on January 26. 

    However, Health and Human Services deferred to the 41st legislative day. 

    Alabama Senate Bill 10, the “Vulnerable Child Compassion and Protection Act,” prohibits gender transition therapy for minors and also forbids concealing related information from parents. The bill was referred to committee on February 2. 

    “Societies should be judged by how they protect the vulnerable in their midst and yesterday, Montana made a historic statement that they matter,” Fuller said.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 17:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 8th February 2021

  • The UK-EU Clash Over Northern Ireland Will Have Grave Consequences
    The UK-EU Clash Over Northern Ireland Will Have Grave Consequences

    Authored by Patrick Cockburn,

    “Get your retaliation in first,” is a cynical old saying in Northern Irish politics that means you hit your opponent whenever you can without waiting for a provocation. It neatly captures the violent traditions of the province and explains why the political temperature there is always close to boiling over.

    Imagine then the pleasure of those unionists who had always opposed the Northern Ireland Protocol, which places the new EU/UK commercial frontier between Northern Ireland and mainland Britain, to find that they had been genuinely provoked by the European Commission. In a classic cock-up, but one with grave and lasting consequences, Brussels had briefly called for a “hard border” between Northern Ireland and the Republic of Ireland, something it had repeatedly told Britain was an anathema because it would endanger the Good Friday Agreement and open the road to communal violence.

    Yet here was a glaring example of the EU selfishly backtracking on its own warnings and fecklessly reopening one of the most explosive issues in European politics, the culpable purpose of this being to stop vaccines capable of saving the lives of British pensioners from being exported from the EU to the UK.

    The Commission was instantly struck by a hail of abuse for its folly and it promptly withdrew the proposal with embarrassment, but for almost the first time in four years the EU was on the back foot in its relationship with Britain. No wonder Michael Gove was openly gloating as he told the House of Commons that the European Commission’s action had been condemned by everybody from the Archbishop of Canterbury to the former prime minister of Finland. And there was indeed some innocent pleasure to be had in watching somebody as poised and ostensibly competent as the Commission president, Ursula von der Leyen, get quite so much egg on her face.

    She had presumably miscalculated or ignored, as have so many politicians before her, the extreme combustibility of Northern Irish politics, or failed to notice how far they had already been inflamed by the creation of an Irish Sea EU/UK commercial border at the start of this year. Such flames are not be easily put out, whatever calming noises may come from Brussels, London and Dublin.

    Port officials in Belfast and Larne, who actually conduct the border checks, have stopped working on the grounds that they fear for their safety. A piece of graffiti has appeared on a wall in Larne reading: “All Border Post Staff are Targets.” For weeks, the media had been full of stories about frustrated Northern Irish businesses facing ruin because of the new border checks.

    Ever since Boris Johnson openly betrayed the unionists and signed the Irish protocol, they have felt the ground shifting under their feet and, they found to their horror, apparently shifting inexorably towards a united Ireland. They complain that even the British Army was having to fill in EU forms to bring military equipment into the province (it turned out that they were doing so, though they did not have to under the terms of the Protocol). An element of “getting your retaliation in first” surfaces here since, under pressure from those even more hard line than themselves, the Democratic Unionist Party leadership which – along with Sinn Fein – heads the government in Northern Ireland, has switched its stance. Instead of reluctantly enforcing the Irish Protocol, it now opposes it.

    One of DUP ministers, Edwin Poots, ordered the withdrawal of the port inspectors, though the police had told him that they did not believe the inspectors were under threat from loyalist paramilitaries. Poots claims the police did not have “a full understanding of the risks” – and in the long term he is probably right.

    The bizarreness – and potential dangers – of the permanent crisis in Northern Ireland cannot be over-stated. By leaving the EU, Britain created a new UK/EU frontier the effect of which would be to the benefit of either the unionists/protestants or the nationalists/catholics. A repartitioning of Ireland by resurrecting a physical barrier along the 300-mile-long land border was never feasible, if only because it largely runs through nationalist/catholic majority areas where any new customs posts would be burned or wrecked as soon they were established. Now the unionist/protestant community is extending a similar veto over an “Irish Sea border”.

    In other words, the frontier between Britain and the EU is a disputed no-man’s land where two communities struggle ceaselessly for dominance. This is something that will affect – and probably poison – future relations between London and Brussels for decades to come. Brexit automatically destabilised Northern Ireland and now Northern Ireland is going to destabilise Brexit Britain.

    But the embattled province will not be the only friction point, only the one with greatest potential for violence. Boris Johnson won the general election of 2019 by claiming that he would “Get Brexit Done”, promising that relations between Britain and the EU would soon achieve a stable equilibrium. But that is precisely what is not happening. Instability is built into the Withdrawal Agreement, and the row over vaccines and the Irish Protocol is only a precursor to decades of friction.

    Britain will be permanently in the position of negotiating and renegotiating access to the single market for its goods and services. It will, moreover, be negotiating from a position of weakness and will be continually forced to make concessions – as was so often the case during its negotiations to leave the EU. British fishermen, once the symbol of the benefits to come of enhanced British sovereignty, have become the first visible casualties of this new and unequal balance of power.

    Remainers once fantasised about the day when Leavers would see the ruinous errors of their ways in exiting Britain’s largest market and lament their folly. But the exact opposite is likely to happen: the EU will in future fight for its 27 members’ interests with even less regard for the views of the British government and British public opinion than it did before.

    A Brexiteer government and pro-Brexit media will inevitably respond by scapegoating Brussels for everything that goes wrong in Britain, accusing it of overbearing behaviour and unfair practices. They may even be right, but this will not do them any good, simply because the EU has the stronger hand of cards.

    Just at the moment the government can say – though not too loudly – that the advantages of speedy national action, unobstructed by the restraints imposed by an unwieldy EU alliance, are exemplified by its swift development and rolling out of the coronavirus vaccine, but this type of success is unlikely to be often repeated.

    On the contrary, the outlook is that Britain will remain obsessed by its relations with the EU – and that those relations will generate continuous friction. The economic relationship may begin to sort itself out in time, but at the cost of much bad political blood while Brexit turbo-charges Irish and Scottish separatism. The furore in Northern Ireland is not an atypical hangover from the past, but the first instalment of a permanent confrontation between Britain and the EU.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/08/2021 – 02:00

  • Living Off Grid As The Collapse Of Society Approaches: "Why Aren't More People Doing This?"
    Living Off Grid As The Collapse Of Society Approaches: “Why Aren’t More People Doing This?”

    Authored by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    You don’t have to be a cog in the system.  For most of us, the only option that was presented while we were growing up was to get on the hamster wheel and run as fast as we could.  You know what I mean – go to school, get a job, pay a mortgage, prepare for retirement, etc.  But it doesn’t have to be that way.  If you truly want to unplug from the system and live your life off the grid, you can.  Of course it isn’t easy, but nothing in life really worth doing ever is.

    Sadly, the lives of most people are defined by the matrix that the vast majority of us are connected to on a daily basis.  In most cases, your income and status in society are defined by whatever “job” has been given to you by whichever corporation you are currently working for.  We like to call ourselves “employees”, but in essence we are basically corporate servants.

    Of course most people feel like they can’t quit their corporate jobs because each month they have to make payments on mortgages, auto loans and credit card debts that they owe to giant corporate financial institutions.

    And most people also feel the need to constantly “prepare for retirement” by pouring money into corporate securities in the rigged game that we call “the stock market”.

    But what is going to happen to all of them when our economic and financial systems completely implode?

    During this current economic downturn, millions upon millions of Americans have already lost their jobs, and it is being reported that millions of Americans could potentially be evicted from their homes in 2021.

    When things go bad, it is the little guy that gets crushed first.

    But you don’t have to wait around for that to happen.

    An increasing number of Americans have decided that living off the grid is the way to go.  For example, 65-year-old Bob Wells will never have to make a mortgage payment or pay rent ever again.  He lives on public lands in his GMC Savana, and he uses solar power to run his 12-volt refrigerator.  In recent years he has become internationally known for his YouTube channel named “Cheap RV Living”, but it wasn’t always this way.

    In fact, his decision to adopt a nomad lifestyle was originally sparked by deep dissatisfaction with the corporate job that he was working

    Before becoming a nomad in 1995, Bob lived in Anchorage, Alaska, with his wife and two boys. He worked as a union clerk at the same Safeway where his father had worked until retirement, only to die two years later.

    Bob didn’t want his father’s fate, but there he was. As days became decades, he went to a job he hated, worked with people he didn’t like, to buy things he didn’t want. By his own telling, he was the living embodiment of Thoreau’s “quiet desperation”. He knew he wasn’t happy, but it never occurred to him to live differently.

    When he suddenly found himself divorced, Bob made a dramatic choice that changed his life forever

    Then, when he was 40 years old, the divorce happened. After paying alimony and child support, he was taking home $1,200 a month, $800 of which went towards rent.

    One day, fretting about impossible finances, he saw a green box van for sale and thought: “Why don’t I buy that van and move into it?” The idea struck him as crazy, but with the prospect of homelessness closing in, he drained the last $1,500 in his savings account and bought the van that was just “too ratty-looking” for its previous owner. He gave his landlord notice that night, threw a sleeping pad in the back of his new home, and cried himself to sleep.

    Today, he has hundreds of thousands of online followers, and he is even featured in a new film called “Nomadland”.

    But despite all of that success, he will continue to live in his GMC Savana.

    For others, living in a van is not a palatable option, but they have still chosen to live off the grid.

    Over in the UK, a British couple named Matthew and Charis Watkinson have fully embraced a philosophy known as “collapsology”

    NO bills, no mortgage, an endless supply of homegrown grub and even a hot tub to relax in – welcome to the world of two Brits prepared for the end.

    Essex vets Matthew and Charis Watkinson gave up the rat race for the good life in the Welsh countryside after reading about ‘collapsology’, a movement based around the theory that society as we know it could fall apart.

    Wouldn’t it be great to have no bills every single month?

    Matthew and Charis gave up their £30,000-a-year jobs, and now they produce their own food on three acres of land in Pembrokeshire

    Matthew and Charis, 35, bought three acres of land in Pembrokeshire for £35,000 and spent a further £25,000 on building a house, chicken coops, greenhouses, a horse poo-powered gas cooker and even a hot tub.

    They are entirely self-sufficient, installing solar panels, growing their own fruit and veg, building beehives, rearing up to 140 chickens and converting lorries and flatbed hay trailers into zero-carbon living quarters.

    If the collapse of our society greatly accelerates, they are ready.

    Meanwhile, they don’t have to get up at the crack of dawn every morning and drag themselves to corporate jobs that they absolutely hate.

    As I was preparing this article, I was reminded of a Reddit post that I saw earlier today…

    I don’t understand how people would rather have a job than be dead. I genuinely don’t understand the motive. I picked a field I love, I became educated, I have had multiple jobs that are vastly different from each other and every one gives me the same overwhelming feeling of “I’d literally rather die than do this”. It’s been every job I’ve ever had, even before graduating college. I simply don’t feel rewarded when I put in effort to complete a task, I never get fulfillment out of a job well done. I don’t understand how people do this their whole lives

    Have you ever felt that way?

    I think that most of us have.

    Matthew and Charis may have simple lives, but they are absolutely thrilled to be free of the system…

    “We’ve built a farm for a lot less than £100,000 and it’s all ours.

    “We don’t owe anybody any money and we don’t have any bills – why aren’t more people doing this?”

    I think that is a perfect question.

    Why aren’t more people doing this?

    If you hate what your life has become, maybe it is time for a big change.

    Countless others have gotten free from the system, and you can do it too.

    *  *  *

    Michael’s new book entitled “Lost Prophecies Of The Future Of America” is now available in paperback and for the Kindle on Amazon.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 23:30

  • China's New Type 15 Lightweight Tank Enters Service In Xinjiang To Protect Western Borders 
    China’s New Type 15 Lightweight Tank Enters Service In Xinjiang To Protect Western Borders 

    China and Russia are rushing to field new tanks while the US continues to operate M1 Abrams designed more than four decades ago. 

    According to intelligence firm Janes Information Group, the latest installment that the US is falling behind the modernization curve is China’s new lightweight battle tank has formally entered service. 

    On Jan. 30, China North Industries Group Corporation announced on state-owned television that Type 15 (also known as ZTQ-15) lightweight battle tank entered service with the Xinjiang Military Command of the People’s Liberation Army Ground Force (PLAGF).

    China Central Television (CCTV) said an undisclosed number of Type 15s were delivered to a PLAGF regiment in Xinjiang. CCTV broadcaster said it was “the first lightweight tank to join the military command.”

    The broadcaster said the Type 15s are outfitted with special oxygen equipment to allow the tanks to operate at high altitudes. 

    Janes said no confirmation on how many Type 15s were deployed, but it appears these new tanks will significantly increase PLAGF’s combat capabilities in the region. 

    “The Type 15 tank is easy and flexible to operate and has high mobility, as it is equipped with a new engine designed for plateau missions and an oxygen producer. It also uses new armor materials and stealth technologies, so it has reduced weight but better protection and stealth functions,” Zhang Hongjun, a master sergeant class one at the regiment, told CCTV.

    The new tanks are much lighter than the People’s Liberation Army’s Type 96 and Type 99 tanks, allowing it to become a rapid response ground-based weapon, with a maximum top speed of 43 mph.

    “It also has advanced fire control and weapons systems, and extra battlefield situational awareness capabilities, particularly the ability to identify friends or foes, providing significant convenience to the troops,” Hongjun said.

    The new tanks appear to be safeguarding China’s western borders. More specifically, Beijing has a significant “core interest” in the northwest Xinjiang province where it houses massive re-education camps of Uighur Muslims. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 23:00

  • The GameStop Saga Unravels 'Stakeholder Theory'
    The GameStop Saga Unravels ‘Stakeholder Theory’

    Authored by Jeff Deist via The Mises Institute,

    The GameStop saga shows some “equity” movements are more equal than others…

    Stakeholder theory, the corporate version of social justice, attempts to install this hopelessly amorphous concept of “equity” in the business world. Equity, unlike equality, demands different treatment of individuals and different distribution of resources based on need, identity, and historical injustices. But now equity has evolved beyond a political buzzword, and finds growing support in calls for stakeholder capitalism. The animating impulse in big corporate boardrooms today requires cultivating an image of social responsibility. Under this theory business firms should entertain all kinds of noneconomic goals and outcomes. No longer may owners simply concern themselves with profit or loss, but instead must consider the broader societal implications of everything their business does. Whether corporate leaders concern themselves with social justice out of genuine desire or merely to avoid backlash is an open question, but the events of 2020 clearly changed the conversations in boardrooms.

    Under the old conception, businesses have four primary elements, namely owners, managers, employees (or vendors), and customers.

    All four have skin in the game, which is to say their own money or income is involved.

    The notion of stakeholders inverts this paradigm and grants a degree of power over ostensibly private businesses to those who take no risks and provide no benefit. By undermining the suddenly old-fashioned idea of profit and loss as the guiding principle for business, stakeholder theory calls into question the very existence of millions of businesses big and small—in fact their grubby and narrow focus is simply to make money.

    To suggest that the general public or society at large ought to be a de facto partner in any business, based on the interconnected nature of any economy, is to suggest an unlimited and wholesale attack on the concept of private ownership. It is patently antiproperty and implies collectivism by its very conceptual foundation. It insists everyone in society ought to have an interest in and some say over what ostensibly private firms do—and not only with respect to their profits, but even their business practices and mission. Stakeholder theory even creates a starring role for the earth itself, as the ultimate nonrenewable resource which is dubiously always in peril from business.

    Societal ownership of business firms traditionally takes three prominent forms, specifically socialism, communism, and fascism. But in 2021 these terms fail to shock or alarm us as they once did. The constant use of attenuated language makes us almost immune to powerful words that ought to be used judiciously. Socialism is increasingly popular, while fascism is the pejorative increasingly aimed at market capitalism. The newspeak of equity and stakeholders is yet another “third way” bridge blurring the distinction between private and state, between the economic means and the political means. And to be fair, equity and stakeholder movements per se do not represent outright socialism (or fascism) in either the Misesian or Rothbardian sense. We still have stock markets, we still have private owners, and we still have profits and losses. The equity revolution takes place within the form, as an evolution rather than a deviation.

    Enter GameStop and its Reddit WallStreetBets bros, determined to prop up the fading retailer’s stock price in the face of intense short-selling pressure by powerful and rich hedge funds. This uprising, whether motivated by greed, gamer culture, or sheer spite against perceived Wall Street fat cats, is as much imbued with notions of fairness and societal benefit as any protest movement.

    Yet suddenly the champions of stakeholder theory, like the predictably despicable Washington Post, find themselves singing a new tune about vulture capitalists, deciding that hedge fund short sellers are the good guys in the story.

    After all, stakeholder theory means investment funds and major corporations have the right—or even the duty—to make uneconomic decisions. Broader societal interests, not just bottom-line profits and shareholder value, must be considered. So funds and companies frequently invest in supposedly green but inevitably less efficient technology, make donations to left-wing social causes like Black Lives Matter, and give money to a variety of charities. These actions may in fact provide long-term economic benefits from a positive public image, but they do not directly increase share prices or dividends.

    Redditors have the same right. Correctly or not, they see social benefit in causing financial losses for hedge funds with short positions looking to profit off GameStop’s stock decline and anticipated eventual bankruptcy (due to downloadable games obviating any need for retail outlets). If Koch Industries can be characterized as a nasty fossil fuels polluter whose profits fund captured antidemocratic right-wing think tanks, why can’t Redditors similarly portray hedge funds as evil tools for the 1 percent to get even richer on the back of a struggling retail chain? The notion of rich Wall Street investment bankers using their inordinate financial power to rip the marrow out of a dying industry’s carcass used to excite the Left. Now that same narrative somehow becomes an alt-right populist slander, one used by Reddit bros in their evil plot to manipulate the GameStop price.

    In truth there are no victims in this tale. Perversely, the celebrated former Fed chair and current Treasury secretary Janet Yellen was paid more than $800,000 by Citadel LLC—another player in the GameStop story. Should her “equity” be redistributed? Just yesterday GameStop stock dropped nearly 60 percent and has lost $400 per share from its recent all-time high. And while it all seems like a manipulated and even immoral series of events, we should remember that nobody put a gun to anyone’s head. The WallStreetBets group collectively chose to put their own money at play, knowing they were pumping the share price and could not all get out at once or even at a profit. Melvin Capital and other hedge funds heavily invested in shorting GameStop chose to take a significant risk, and their due diligence certainly could have included understanding and monitoring Reddit investment boards. As economist Peter Earle recently said, if you get in the ring, you might get punched.

    The purpose of capital markets is price discovery. They help investors and businesses allocate capital to its best and highest uses, however imperfectly and haphazardly. Short traders, long traders, so-called insider traders, futures traders, derivative contracts, speculators, gamblers, colluders, and even naked short sellers all serve this imperfect process. All of these individuals and mechanisms constantly recalibrate and react to changing conditions, bringing a public company’s performance (and share price) into greater clarity. And any firm not wishing to subject itself to the vagaries of fickle equity markets or public campaigns can simply remain private and fund itself through operations or private placements.

    The process is imperfect because humans are imperfect. It can manifest in fits and starts, and demonstrate deep irrationality or even mania. But the alternative is nothing less than creeping socialism by another name, whether stakeholder capitalism or otherwise. When your atavistic and deficient theory backfires on you, look for a mirror rather than a congressional bailout. Everything is not everyone’s.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 22:30

  • Pizza Hut To Begin Drone Deliveries In Israel 
    Pizza Hut To Begin Drone Deliveries In Israel 

    Drones will significantly revolutionize last-mile logistical networks over the coming years. Companies from Amazon to UPS to Walmart and others are quickly working to pilot test drones for last-mile deliveries, with the hope that one day these autonomous aerial vehicles will be embedded in their supply chains to create higher efficiencies. 

    The topic gains further significance in Israel, where Pizza Hut will pilot test drone deliveries in June. The company partnered with Dragontail Systems where the tests will be conducted at a single store in Bnei Dror. 

    Source: Dragontail Systems

    According to WSJ, Pizza Hut Israel won’t be flying pizzas directly to customers’ homes but instead will drop them off at government-approved hubs, such as ones that could be designated in parking lots. Delivery drivers will be able to retrieve the pies from the drone and complete the delivery’s final stretch. 

    “Drone delivery is a sexy thing to talk about, but it’s not realistic to think we’re going to see drones flying all over the sky dropping pizzas into everyone’s backyards anytime soon,” Ido Levanon, CEO and director for Dragontail Systems, which will be handling the drone trial, told WSJ.

    During the test, the country’s Ministry of Transportation has allowed an “air bubble” measuring 50 square miles north of the country, where the Pizza Hut drones can safely operate. 

    WSJ noted that Pizza Hut’s Bnei Dror store will be armed with a fleet of drones that could serve up to 7,000 additional households. 

    Ahead of the big test, Dragontail will be operating its cargo drones six times a day to perfect commercial operations. Pizza Hut and Dragontail hope the flights this summer will be enough data for the government to analyze to approve a more widespread drone delivery service at other stores. 

    There’s one problem, the transportation agency has restricted the drones to a cargo payload of only 5.5 pounds. There is a plan to increase the cargo payload to 22 pounds, which would allow it to carry multiple pizzas and bottles of soda. 

    With more people shopping from home in the virus pandemic, the need for faster delivery times has become a priority and concern for many consumers. The proliferation of drones integrated into last-mile deliveries will become a reality not just in Israel but in many other countries in the coming years. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 22:00

  • "We Cannot Mince Words": San Francisco Education Official Denounces Meritocracy As Racist
    “We Cannot Mince Words”: San Francisco Education Official Denounces Meritocracy As Racist

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    Alison Collins, the Vice President of the San Francisco Board of Education, has declared meritocracy to be racist even in the selection of students at advanced or gifted programs. As we have previously discussed, this has been a building campaign in academia as educators and others denounce selection based on academic performance through testing. At issue in San Francisco is Lowell High School where top students were selected through testing and grades.  Most cities have such gifted programs or institutions, though we have discussed calls for the elimination of all gifted and talented programs in cities like New YorkLowell had a majority of white and Asian students and only two percent of its student body were African-Americans. Collins and other board members want to abolish the merit-based selection in favor of a blind lottery system.

    Collins’ remarks from a San Francisco Board of Education public meeting in October 13, 2020 were only recently posted by Sophie Bearman of San Francisco’s online publication Here/Say Media. In the meeting, she declared:

    “When we talk about merit, meritocracy and especially meritocracy based on standardized testing… those are racist systems… You can’t talk about social justice, and then say you want to have a selective school that keeps certain kids out from the neighborhoods that you think are dangerous.”

    Collins made the statement in support of a resolution, entitled “In Response to Ongoing, Pervasive Systemic Racism at Lowell High School,” authored by Collins, Board President Gabriela Lopez, Commissioner Matt Alexander, and Student Delegates Shavonne Hines-Foster and Kathya Correa Almanza.

    Newsweek quotes at least one Lowell teacher who objects to the elimination of the school as a place for top performing students and said that the system is blind on race and designed to reward “the hardest working kids in terms of academics.”

    Gifted programs and elite academic schools are designed to allow students to reach their full academic potential with other students performing at the highest level of math and other disciplines. It is often difficult for such students to reach that potential in conventional settings. Teachers have to keep their classes as a whole moving forward in subject areas. That often means that academically gifted children are held back by conventional curricula or lesson plans. Those students can actually underperform due to boredom or the lack of challenging material. Many simply leave the public school system.  Moreover, students tend to perform better with students progressing at their similar level. Teachers can then focus on a lesson plan and discussions that are tailored to students at a similar performance level.

    Moving to a lottery system at Lowell would obviously convert the school into a conventional academic program.  We can debate the value of having such schools to cater to the most advanced students. I believe such schools are important components to public education. We not only reward students for their considerable academic achievement but guarantee all students that they can progress as far as their interests and capabilities will take them. These schools are the source of pride in many cities in showing the full potential of high school students in science and other fields.

    I do not agree that meritocracy is inherently racist. Students of all races benefit from such schools. While there is clearly less diversity at Lowell, the best solution is not to eliminate such programs but to work harder in the earlier grades to allow minority students to excel (and ultimately gain admission to such programs).

    There is a need for meritocracy in academia and society at large. Indeed, such scores offer race-neutral systems for advancement. While subjects like math have been declared racist (and a University of Rhode Island professor recently declared all of science, statistics, and technology to be “inherently racist”), these are fields that allowed many intellectuals of color to advance.

    We have to have systems of objective comparison in the ability and performance of students in academia. We use such tests and scores for the selection of students admissions to college and society uses such systems for business and professional advancement. The world is becoming a far more competitive place. Other countries are not abandoning meritocracy. They are pushing their most most talented students to achieve even more in specialized programs and advanced courses. We need to do the same if we are going to remain competitive as a nation. Eliminating elite programs like Lowell removes an opportunity not just for these students but our society as a whole.  These are some of the best developing minds in our country and they should be allowed to reach their full potential through special schools and programs.

    I have been a huge supporter of public schools my whole life. While my parents could afford private schools, they helped form a group to keep white families in the public school system in Chicago in the 1960s and 1970s. They wanted their kids to be part of a diverse school environment. I also sent my kids to public schools for the same reason. I view our public schools as important parts of our society as we shape future citizens.

    This efforts in San Francisco and New York will only encourage more families to leave our public school systems and potentially increase rather than reduce problems of diversity in our student bodies. The need to achieve greater diversity in top public high schools is real and needs to be addressed. However, the solution is to create better educational opportunities for younger students to lift them up rather than lower (or eliminate) entry standards at these schools. That is certainly harder than just imposing a lottery system for all schools but it preserves the opportunity for high advancement for students of all races.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 21:35

  • The Semi Chip Shortage Is Turning Into A Crisis
    The Semi Chip Shortage Is Turning Into A Crisis

    For the better part of the last month we have been writing about how the shortage in semiconductors has wreaked havoc on the auto industry. 

    Now, it looks as though the shortage is going from being a nagging pain in the auto industry, to a full scale crisis that is also affecting consumer electronics like phones and gaming consoles. 

    It is now being referred to as the “most serious shortage in years”, with Qualcomm’s CEO saying last week that there were now shortages “across the board”, according to Bloomberg

    But it isn’t just Qualcomm executives speaking out: other industry leaders have warned in recent weeks that they are susceptible to the shortages. Apple said recently that its new high end iPhones were on hold due to a shortage of components. NXP Semiconductors has also warned that the problems are no longer just confined to the auto industry. Sony also said last week it may not be able to to fully meet demand for its new gaming console in 2021 due to the shortage. Companies like Lenovo have also been feeling the crunch.

    Neil Mawston, an analyst with Strategy Analytics, said: “The virus pandemic, social distancing in factories, and soaring competition from tablets, laptops and electric cars are causing some of the toughest conditions for smartphone component supply in many years.” 

    Mawston says that prices for some smartphone components are up as much as 15% the last 6 months. 

    At the center of the shortage is Taiwan and its largest company Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co. The company now sits astride a larger political crisis between China and Taiwan while Biden officials in the U.S. work to find solutions, not only for the semiconductor issues, but for the larger conflict developing between the two nations. 

    To make matters worse, Huawei is being blamed for hoarding components in 2020 (almost as if they knew this was going to happen). This set off other manufacturers to do the same. According to the report:

    Industry executives also blame excessive stockpiling, which began over the summer when Huawei Technologies Co. — a major smartphone and networking gear maker — began hoarding components to ensure its survival from crippling U.S. sanctions. Led by Huawei, Chinese imports of chips of all kinds climbed to almost $380 billion in 2020 –– making up almost a fifth of the country’s overall imports for the year.

    Rivals including Apple, worried about their own caches, responded in kind. At the same time, the stay-at-home era spurred sales of home appliances from the costliest TVs to the lowliest air purifiers, all of which now come with smart, customized chips. TSMC executives said on its two most recent earnings calls that customers have been accumulating more inventory than normal to hedge against uncertainties, a maneuver they see persisting for some time.

    “There’s a chip stockpiling arms race,” said Will Bright, co-founder and chief product officer at Drop. Analyst Mario Morales of IDC said: “A lot of it can be traced back to the second quarter of last year, when the whole world basically shut down. Many auto companies shut down manufacturing and their suppliers re-prioritized. Not until the second half will we see relief for some of these markets.

    While the extent of the damage on consumer electronics remains to be seen, the shortages are expected to cost $61 billion worth of sales in the auto industry. Recall, we noted just days ago that GM and Ford had joined Nissan in cutting production due to the shortage. 

    Mid-day on Wednesday the U.S. automaker announced that the shortage would “impact production in 2021”, according to StreetInsider. The company said in a statement that “semiconductor supply for the global auto industry remains very fluid”.

    It continued: “Our supply chain organization is working closely with our supply base to find solutions for our suppliers’ semiconductor requirements and to mitigate impacts on GM. Despite our mitigation efforts, the semiconductor shortage will impact GM production in 2021.”

    The automaker said it is “currently assessing the overall impact, but our focus is to keep producing our most in-demand products – including full-size trucks and SUVs and Corvettes – for our customers.”

    Nissan also announced Wednesday that it had fallen victim to the shortage. As a result, Nissan said it would suspend some truck production at its Mississippi plant due to the shortage of chips. Nissan is struggling to make “short term production adjustments”, according to Yahoo Finance, at its plants in North America.

    The stoppage is starting with three non-production days at the Canton, Mississippi plant. Further delays could continue if the semi shortage continues to negatively affect business. 

    We also noted just hours ago that Ford had also announced it was making more production cuts and temporary layoffs at its Chicago Assembly Plant. The most recent round of layoffs is also being attributed to the supply chain disruptions in semiconductors, according to The Pantagraph

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 21:10

  • Protecting Your Capital During A War
    Protecting Your Capital During A War

    Authored by ‘Fritz’ via Asia Stock Report,

    Wars are one of the greatest destroyers of capital.

    In Barton Bigg’s book “Wealth, War & Wisdom”, he makes the case that to protect your capital during a war, investors need to own diversified portfolios of stocks and property in safe regions. The book chronicles the experience of investors during World War II: whose wealth was destroyed and why. And what you could have done to protect your wealth.

    Biggs comes to the conclusion that the following asset classes were best at preserving wealth, ranked from best to worst:

    1. Survival goods

    Prices for daily necessities shot up during the war. And so, the people who got rich were often the black marketers. The black market was the most lucrative profession and the best source of wealth as the war raged on. Stocks, land, real estate and businesses on the other hand, worked only if you had a very long-term horizon.

    What black marketers did was hoarding survival goods such as clothing and food and then selling them at high prices to desperate fellow citizens. Then using their black money to buy and hoard gold.

    In Japan, people became increasingly desperate as the war progressed. Becoming cold and hungry, paying up for clothes, food and whatever other survival goods they could get their hands on. Even selling land at fire-sale prices in order to survive. Biggs tells stories of people involved in the sourcing of black market construction material for the rebuilding of bombed out cities, making fortunes in the process.

    After liberation, known black marketers were often physically abused and their property seized, especially in Italy. But others managed to use their ill-gotten wealth to buy real businesses after the war. In the end, black marketers ended up ahead of almost everybody else.

    Desperate Japanese citizens queuing up for food rations

    2. Art, gold and jewelry

    Gold and jewelry is portable, liquid and easily protected compared to building structures. Throughout the early 1940s it remained easy to transfer gold and jewelry to Switzerland from almost anywhere in Europe. So jewelry and gold played a crucial role in preserving wealth for any individual that stayed within an occupied country.

    The difficulty was to hide jewelry from thieves and occupying forces.

    You could hide jewelry in deposit boxes. But as happened in France in the early 1940s, French banks had to report to the Germans the contents of all safe deposit boxes. The contents of those safe deposit boxes were then transferred to Germany.

    Another option was to stash jewelry at home. The downside of keeping jewelry inside your home is that bombing campaigns tend to lead to an increase in crime, as experienced in Britain throughout the 1940s. As Barton Biggs says “war unravels the bonds of civil society”. A rich old lady he knew “slept with [her] jewelry instead of her husband for four years” out of fear it would be stolen from her. Anything ostentatious was stolen.

    In Italy, some families banded together, moved their prized possessions to defensible villas in the hills and stood ready to fight for their lives, all while desperate groups wandered the countryside searching for loot. You had to protect your property with your life. In countries occupied by Germany, informants told German officers where jewelry was stashed and large estates were often ransacked by them. Con artists flourished, often promising to hold jewelry safe on behalf of others, then running off to a far-away land never to be seen again.

    A safety box outside the country would have kept jewelry safe. But you had to keep them secret. When your neighbours’ children are starving, they will do anything – including reporting you to occupying forces.

    Jewelry is more liquid than property, so it could readily be swapped for necessities such as food and medicine. At a discount, of course. In an occupied country filled with informers and treachery, you had to watch your back when transacting in jewelry. Or accept a large discount from better-known black market dealers.

    In Soviet-occupied countries, Soviet soldiers often fancied watches and jewelry and had no qualms murdering to get them. The Red Army was also used by high Soviet officials to help plunder for them. Clothes, cars, fine china, jewelry, art and grand pianos were shipped back to Russia. So jewelry did not preserve wealth effectively in countries occupied by Soviet forces.

    Art performed poorly as a wealth preserver during WWII. It is vulnerable to destruction by fire, can easily be damaged, quickly plundered and is difficult to hide. But if you had capital to buy them during the war, you would have made a fortune. Keynes famously went on a mission to Paris in the spring of 1940 to buy, to the sound of howitzers, two Cézannes and two Delacroix that subsequently appreciated 40x in the next four decades.

    The Cézanne painting purchase by Keynes in the spring of 1940

    3. Overseas assets

    Overseas assets also helped preserve wealth. Especially if kept in safe jurisdictions such as Switzerland. That was especially the case for individuals in occupied countries, whose domestic wealth was often confiscated by authorities. The key was to keep bank accounts in overseas countries secret – from tax authorities and even from friends & family.

    That said, getting money out was not always easy as exchange controls and taxes often ate up a large portion of the capital. For example, by the end of the 1930s, Jewish business owners in Germany had to accept large discounts if they wanted to sell their businesses – often at 50% of fair value. Even homes had to be sold at discounts. And if they wanted to bring money out of the country, they had to pay exorbitant foreign exchange taxes of up to 90%.

    Even overseas assets were expropriated in some cases. In the early 1940s, the UK the government became short of US Dollar for purchases of war materials. So the Chancellor of the Exchequer decreed that British citizens who owned US stocks had to report them to the Bank of England, and they were then sold to fund munitions purchases. The holders of those US stocks received a credit in pounds for the proceeds of the sales. Keeping your foreign assets secret remained key in avoiding confiscation.

    A private bank in Zermatt, Switzerland with underground bunkers and storage facilities for gold

    4. Domestic stocks

    The experience of WWII is that stocks generally did preserve wealth. But stocks had substantially higher returns if their home country was on the winning side. Losing the war and becoming occupied destroyed a country’s long-term return in equities.

    It wasn’t a smooth ride. The US stock market was sleepy during the war and stock prices fell to very low levels. A seat on the New York Stock Exchange cost only $17,000 in 1942, roughly 97% lower than the peak of $625,000 in 1929. And P/E ratios stayed low throughout the war. In 1942, the median P/E ratio for 600 representative stocks was only 5.3x. Only 10% of stocks traded at a P/E multiple over 10x trailing earnings.

    Stocks reflected the success each country’s military advances or setbacks. The British stock market bottomed right before the Battle of Britain in 1940, when it successfully staved off a German invasion. The German market peaked when German troops reached Moscow in 1941, just prior to the setback in Stalingrad. The bottom for the US market in May 1942 coincided with the Battle of Midway, when US forces dealt a decisive blow to the Japanese Navy.

    So if you own stock in a particular country, you better have conviction that it can win a war and avoid becoming occupied territory.

    War spending via budget deficits was generally positive for the domestic stock market in nominal terms. From 1932 until the 1937-38 high – a period of record deficit spending – Germany was the best stock market in the world. After a brief respite, the market continued to rally all the way to the Battle of Stalingrad. This period was characterized by booming military production and eventually soaring profits from low-cost forced labour from France, Poland and Holland. Eventually however, budget deficits led to a drain of foreign currency reserves that made it difficult to keep up elevated spending levels. Stock prices stopped rising.

    After Germany’s defeat at the Battle of Stalingrad, the Nazi government finally imposed controls on stock prices for the remainder of WWII to conceal the damage. No German could legally sell shares without first offering them to the Reichsbank, which had the option of buying them at 1941 prices in exchange for rapidly depreciating government bonds. After the war, the German stock market absolutely collapsed as you can see from the below chart.

    Germany’s CDAX index

    Holding stocks through the war required a nerve of steel. At market bottoms in the US, the UK and elsewhere, newspaper commentary was consistently negative and pessimistic. In every allied country, the market bottomed during major negative events, such as the Dunkirk evacuation and the fall of France to the Nazis.

    UK Financial Times, 30 Industrials index

    Likewise, the US stock market bottomed during the Battle of Midway, when newspaper commentary was largely negative. By the time of German surrender at Stalingrad, the US market had already risen well over 50%. So owners of US stocks had to stomach holding these stocks in the face of negative – or even catastrophic – news.

    US Dow Jones Index

    In Japan, newspapers and radio broadcast only good news about the course of the war. But in elite tea houses in Tokyo, information about the progress of the war was passed around to intelligent observers. Hence, the stock market correctly discounted Japan’s prospects of a victory in the war. The market fell gradually as the war progressed and collapsed completely in 1945 as Japan was defeated in a final blow. In real terms, Japan’s stock prices fell roughly 26% per year from 1940 to 1949. In nominal terms stocks did actually rise despite the spectacular defeat in 1945.

    Japan stock market price index (real + nominal), as estimated by Citigroup

    Stock markets in occupied territories performed poorly during WWII. Inflation was almost twice as high in the loser countries than in the countries that managed to avoid the war. The countries at risk of becoming occupied were primarily those in close proximity to Germany, Soviet Union, Italy and Japan: European countries and Southeast Asia.

    During WWII, a number of stock markets had “permanent breaks” with the market closing and never restarting again. That happened in Hungary, Czechoslovakia, Romania, Poland and Finland when they were taken over by the Soviet Union. Communism is clearly the greatest enemy of wealth preservation.

    Private wealth in Singapore and Hong Kong also suffered immensely in 1942-45 when they were taken over by Japan.

    Stock markets in countries that were occupied by the Germans also suffered, though some emerged unscathed: including Austria, Denmark and Holland. Many families in Holland were able to keep their homes, land and small enterprises during the entire occupation. If you were Jewish or an enemy of the state, your property was seized just like in Germany.

    France was treated poorly by their German occupiers. French were deemed not Aryan enough to be treated as equals. French patents, equipment and skilled workers were “temporarily” transferred to Germany, gutting French industry from intellectual property. Other French companies prospered mightily from military contracts. French inflation was 20% per year during the war and rose to 60% in the years following the war, completely destroying the economy. French stocks helped preserve wealth somewhat, but in real terms the stock market fell drastically throughout the 1940s.

    France SBF-250 index, adjusted for inflation

    5. Property

    Physical property is a dangerous thing to posses in wartime. It often gets stolen, bombed, destroyed or expropriated.

    In Nazi Germany, unless you were Jewish, property rights were generally respected. But in occupied countries of Eastern Europe, prime real estate were almost always expropriated. High-profile mansion and real estate were often used by the Wehrmacht or confiscated to become country estates for top German officers. In Hong Kong, the Chinese found that all their money and home on Victoria Peak were worth very little when the Japanese occupied the city in 1942.

    Hyperinflation caused a particular problem, as interest rates rose to radical levels. Landowners who had paid off their mortgages on the other hand survived, and business owners who had repaid their loans became unencumbered owners of real property.

    If you left property, getting it back after the war proved to be difficult in many cases. But if local property records remained intact, land often preserved wealth.

    UK and US real estate lost value during the war, with prices falling to very low levels. Rents in Wall Street office buildings were as low as $1/sqft. A seller of a New York hotel had difficulties finding buyers, even at one time annual earnings.

    A working farm often protected both wealth and your life, providing safety and food. There are number of anecdotes of affluent French families that shuttered their Paris houses in 1940 and retreated with their most precious possessions to family farms in the deep countryside, living in relative comfort through the war.

    Remote farmland in the French alps during World War II

    6. Fixed income securities

    Budget deficits and war spending spells disaster for the ownership of government bonds. Even in the loser countries, stocks tends to beat bonds, and bonds tend to beat short-term bills and demand deposits.

    Due to Japan’s deficit spending on war materials, prices rose 3,280% from 1930 to 1949. That caused a carnage in Japanese government bonds, which lost roughly 17% per year from 1940 to 1949.

    German government bonds saw their purchasing power erode roughly 21% per year in the 1940s, or a loss of 90% during the 1940s.

    In Italy, owners of fixed income securities were impoverished by the war. Government bonds lost 27% per year in real terms in the 1940s and government bills lost 30% per year.

    Other European countries did not fare much better, as you can see from the below table:

    Total real returns of a number of European countries

    Conclusion

    The best in-country stores of wealth are non-ostentatious property, such as remote farmland or vineyards. Just make sure the mortgages are paid off. Jewelry and gold are crucial since they can be readily exchanged for daily necessities.

    The best out-of-country stores of wealth are equities, jewelry and land. They should be stored in safe jurisdictions, protected by geography, rule of law and a strong national defense. The United States, New Zealand, the United Kingdom and Switzerland come to mind. Don’t be tempted to sell just because news go from bad to worse. And maintain a well-diversified portfolio of stocks.

    The biggest lesson of all might be to avoid fixed income instruments, including government bonds and demand deposits. Especially in countries at risk of becoming occupied by communist forces.

    Those are the key investing lessons from World War II.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 20:45

  • Creator Of The Bond VIX: The Coming "Monetary Hurricane" Is A White Swan
    Creator Of The Bond VIX: The Coming “Monetary Hurricane” Is A White Swan

    By Harley Bassman, creator of the MOVE index, aka the “VIX for bonds”

    Much is written about the Black Swan, famously described by Nassim Taleb in his 2001 book, Fooled by Randomness, and smartly summarized by Malcolm Gladwell in The New Yorker’s April 22, 2002 publication.

    As a reminder, the Black Swan is a metaphor that describes an event that comes as a surprise, has a major impact on markets or society, and is often considered painfully obvious with the benefit of hindsight.

    This begs the question of why we often ignore, to our detriment, the more commonplace White Swan. Daniel Kahneman won the 2002 Nobel Prize in economics for shining a bright light on how cognitive bias leads to poor decision making. Seemingly by nature, people overly worry about low probability events and diminish their concern for truly risky behaviors. For example, many people are terrified of being bitten by a shark or struck by lightning, but then hop into a taxi and fail to snap on their seat belt.

    As the calendar rolled into 2020, the MOVE Index was under 50 while the more widely watched VIX Equity volatility index was kissing 12. There are no reasonable statistics to comprehend such levels, they are just too low. And of course, my in-box was bulging with investors wanting me to reveal the next “surprise” that would shock the market out of its doldrums. I could only reply that if I knew, it would (by definition) not be a surprise.

    Notwithstanding that Bill Gates offered a TED Talk in 2014 on the risk of a Global pandemic, and that a dozen such science fiction movies were available on Netflix, indeed COVID-19 was a Black Swan surprise. What is no longer a surprise is the Government’s proposed Monetary and Fiscal solutions to the havoc that COVID has wreaked.

    At this stage, discussing the merits of the Fed’s policies is pointless; it’s an activity best held in states where weed is legal. As pictured on the prior page, there seems to be no level of balance sheet expansion that is too high.

    Not only is the FED employing QE (Quantitative Easing) to dampen an interest rate increase that would be extremely bothersome to our vastly over-leveraged economy, but they have signaled they will fund the expansion of Fiscal spending.

    Again, a debate about whether this is good public policy is moot; a huge Fiscal impulse is coming, and it will be funded mostly by debt issued to the FED.

    Economic purists will insist that this is not “money printing” since the US Treasury is independently selling bonds into the market via public auctions. Many of these bonds are purchased by Wall Street ‘primary dealers’ (sometimes referred to as Vampire Squids) who soon sell them to the FED for a small profit. Of course, this is “money printing” in the same way that one “borrows” beer at a Super Bowl party.

    As a reminder, notwithstanding COVID, the financial road we are traveling has been paved with good intentions, especially by the FED; the pity is the expected result did not occur.

    The GFC in 2008/09 revealed that the US had too much debt, both public as well as private. The FED recognized that there are only two ways out of a debt crisis – either default or inflate, with the caveat that inflation is simply a slow-motion default.

    Since the market would not allow the FED to reduce its balance sheet via asset sales (or even the slow bleed of letting bonds  mature), the alternate solution was to create inflation as a way to reduce the value of debt. This policy was reinforced by the FED’s most recent communications where they indicated they would not mind inflation rising above their 2.0% target (for a short time).

    The original plan was for the FED’s largess to inflate middle class wages; instead, the inflation occurred in assets, most notably in Global Equities.

    When one hears hoof beats, look for horses not zebras. There is no reason to ruminate over exotic possibilities when the problems we face are quite clear. Once again, ignore the merits of the public policy response – what is important is that there is wide support from both the Democrats and Republicans to offer significant Fiscal relief supported by massive Monetary expansion.

    Will this be inflationary – Yes; but it is unclear how soon.
    I made the case in my December 2, 2020 commentary, ”The Wages of Fear”, that demographics will set ablaze the dry kindling of printed money sometime between 2023 to 2025; and nothing has occurred to change that prediction. What is clear is that a financial bubble is being inflated, and there is risk on both sides of the distribution. Ordinarily the bloviating pundits advise one to sell assets, or perhaps execute some sort of hedge such as buying puts or selling covered calls. They are looking in the wrong direction.

    While I am not a stomping bull, the approaching monetary hurricane could well make the “surprise” a further rally in equities. Printed money should elevate stocks; either via a continued flow into assets, or into the pockets of consumers who will spend it and thus increase corporate profits. (Yes, higher taxes could be an offset, but let’s save that for another Commentary.)
    As noted, inflation is an eventual certainty, so one should own real assets; and over the longest run stocks will hold their real value. Notwithstanding the Robinhood day traders, stock equity is an ownership right in a real company. Weimar Germany is the nightmare scenario for inflation; but contrary to expectations, stockholders were protected. While the German Papiermark vs. USD exchange rate exploded (4.2 Trillion per USD), the German Stock Index, currency adjusted into USD, held its value. As such, when faced with nominal inflation – Do not sell call options.

     

    Below is the “skew” of Implied Volatility (IVol) for options that expire in one-year for SPY – S&P 500 ETF, and before Game Stop, one of the market’s most actively traded securities. The path of this line details the IVol used in the pricing models for various strikes. The 100% dot is the current market level of 375 (or 3750 on the S&P 500 Index); similarly, 80% would be a strike of 300 while 120% would be a strike of 450.

    The IVol for an at-the-money option of 23.0% is not unreasonable since SPY realized such a volatility as late as last September when the market stabilized near 350. Similarly, an IVol of 31% is not crazy for a strike of 300 since SPY had such a volatility when it was near that level last June.

    What is anomalous is that the 450 strike sports an IVol of only 16.9%, a level not too far from the level realized from 2018 to 2019 – before COVID.

    The blue line profiles the skew for options that expire in two years with Ivols of 28.50%, 23.0%, and 18.75% respectively for similar strike levels.

     

    Consider the results of the table above for two-year expiry options on SPY; is the risk of reaching the COVID lows (-36%) the same as a 20% rally by 2023 ? (Call px = Put px) I will not quibble with the put price as it offers “earthquake” insurance; but within the context of current events, the call price is too cheap.

    By many measures the S&P 500 is expensive; in fact, the loudest pundits cite that we are in a “bubble”. I will submit those indicators are not false, but they ignore that the Fed’s lips are tightly wrapped around a larger financial balloon. The chart below maps the relative value of US equities to real interest rates; this is what supports my view that stocks are “fair”. However, if $1.9 Trillion of fiscal stimulus is funded by the Fed holding real interest rates below zero, the surprise will be north. As such, I want to be long the distant strike call options; not because I know I am right, but rather it is so inexpensive to be wrong.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 20:33

  • America's Top Union Boss Nervously Slams Biden Over Keystone XL Decision
    America’s Top Union Boss Nervously Slams Biden Over Keystone XL Decision

    America’s top union boss isn’t happy that President Biden canceled the Keystone XL pipeline his first day in office, and doesn’t think promises of ‘retraining’ programs are much consolation for union workers who will find themselves unemployed.

    “If you destroy 100 jobs in Greene County, Pennsylvania, where I grew up, and you create 100 jobs in California, it doesn’t do those 100 families much good,” said AFL-CIO president Richard Trumka in comments which aired Sunday evening on “Axios on HBO.”

    Axios notes that there are significant tensions between environmentalists, the Biden administration team addressing climate change, and segments of the labor movement. By canceling the Keystone XL project, approximately 1,000 existing union jobs and 10,000 protected construction jobs are estimated to have been lost.

    Trumka, who fully supported Biden’s run for president, told Axios’ Jonathan Swan that he thought Biden’s decision to cancel the pipeline project his first day in office, without pairing it with an initiative that would create as many (or more) jobs as would be lost, was a bad move.

    “If you’re looking at a pipeline and you’re saying we’re going to put it down, now what are you going to do to create the same good-paying jobs in that area?” asked Trumka, who “appeared to be uneasy – pausing for a few seconds and ducking the question — when asked whether he was comfortable with Biden’s plan to ban fracking on federal lands,” according to the report.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    More via Axios:

    The bottom line: Trumka, who started his career as a coal miner, signaled he will have no patience for promises of retraining programs as consolation for union workers forced from their jobs.

    • “You know, when they laid off at the mines back in Pennsylvania, they told us they were going to train us to be computer programmers.”
    • “And I said, ‘Where are the computer programmer jobs at?’ ‘Uh, they’re in, uh, Oklahoma and they’re in Vegas and they’re here.’ And I said, ‘So, in other words, what we’re going to be is unemployed miners and unemployed computer programmers as well.'”

    People “love where they live and they love the people in that area,” Trumka said. “And to them, that’s home. And that’s their culture.”

    • “I think what doesn’t get understood quite enough in the country, particularly in D.C. politics, is that that culture is very, very important to the people who live there.”

    Meanwhile, Biden’s climate ‘guy’ – John Kerry, suggested that unemployed pipeline workers can just ‘make solar panels.’

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 20:10

  • "Mind-Boggling Liquidity": Nobody Is Paying Attention To The $1.1 Trillion Flood About To Hit Markets
    “Mind-Boggling Liquidity”: Nobody Is Paying Attention To The $1.1 Trillion Flood About To Hit Markets

    Amid the ongoing Reddit short squeeze drama which had traders glued to their trading terminals for much of the past two weeks, quite a few may have missed the biggest news of the past week which was the publication of the Treasury’s latest Borrowing forecast, according to which the US expects to borrow just $275BN in the current quarter, down a whopping 75%, or $853 billion, from its November 2020 projection of $1.127 trillion.

    The reason for this plunge in funding needs is because the Treasury now expects that it simply won’t need to borrow as much debt as the end-of-March cash balance held in the Treasury General Account (TGA, which is simply the Treasury’s cash balance held at the Fed) would plunge to just $800 billion, down a record $929BN from $1.729 trillion at Dec 31, 2020 (as an aside, the reason why the cash was so high as year end is because the Treasury never got around to actually disbursing the latest stimulus package in December, and it’s also why as the Treasury said “the decrease in privately-held net marketable borrowing is primarily driven by a higher beginning-of-January cash balance as a result of lower-than-assumed expenditures.”)

    In other words, had Trump used up roughly $1 trillion in cash the Treasury had previously budgeted for spending on fiscal stimulus, there would be no surprises today, and instead of the cash balance dropping to $800BN in this quarter, it would have done so last quarter (we discussed this last November in “The 2021 Liquidity Supernova: Step Aside Fed – US Treasury Will Unleash $1.3 Trillion In Liquidity“). Instead, the Treasury now expects the decline in the cash balance this quarter – which is being spent to fund last December’s fiscal stimulus – to be the main driver of funding needs.

    It doesn’t end there, because one quarter later, the Treasury expects to borrow just $95BN  – the lowest in two years quarters – and finish the June quarter with a cash balance of only $500BN, a reduction of $300BN for the quarter, the lowest in six quarters and less than 30% of the average cash balance at the end of the latest three quarters ($1.74BN).

    Looking beyond that, we have to go back to an analysis we put together back in November, which cited calculations from Morgan Stanley, according to which unless the debt ceiling deadline – which this year falls on Aug 1, 2021 – is extended well in advance, starting on this date, the US Treasury will not be able to issue any additional debt above and beyond what it needs to cover existing debt obligations. However, what few may be aware of, is that there is a clause written into the law that prohibits the TGA from rising above levels prior to the debt ceiling deadline, which was in 2019.

    This means that based on the 2019 debt ceiling, the Treasury cash will need to fall even more, down to just $200 billion by August 1, and as the chart from MS below shows, depending on the upcoming political fight over the debt ceiling, it could end up being quite a mess.

    Said otherwise, the market is about to see a flood of $800BN in extra liquidity over the next 6 weeks, and a total of $1.1 trillion in the next 10 weeks, and then potentially another $300 billion in the subsequent two months. With the TGA cash currently at just under $1.6 trillion, it means that the US Treasury may unlock as much as $1.4 trillion in liquidity over the next 6 months, nearly double the liquidity coming from the Fed over the same time period which will be $720 billion ($120BN x 6 months)!

    This, not too put it lightly, is a huge deal with major market implications (and is why three months ago we said to buy everything ahead of an unprecedented dollar devaluation orgy” simply based on this analysis).

    First, recall that one of the early (and completely false) reasons cited for the Sept 2019 repo crash, was the modest spike in Treasury cash balances around that time, which also resulted in substantial reserve drain among banks (mostly JPMorgan) which were desperate for more QE. As a result, we almost immediately got “NOT QE” (which, of course, was absolutely QE) and hundreds of billions of reserves were injected into the system by the Fed but not before markets had to tumble to spur the Federal Reserve into acting.

    Well, what is happening now is just the opposite and many, many times bigger, as almost one trillion reserves are about to be injected into the system as cash is drained from the Treasury’s account at the Fed. As we said on Monday, “as Treasury cash balances plunge, banks will see their reserve levels soar by roughly $900 billion this quarter, a move that will lead to significant risk asset upside if previous instances of reserves growth are any indication.”

    Second, there are major implications for the rates market where the recent flood of bill issuance is set to hit a brick wall: as we said on MOnday, the plunge in short-term debt (Bill) issuance – since there will no longer be an urgent need to keep cash balances in the $1+ trillion range – will compress short-term spreads (effective FF through 3M) to zero – or even negative – as there is suddenly a flood of liquidity which could prompt the Fed to engage the fixed-rate borrowing facility or even nudging the IOER higher. Indeed, on Friday we saw just this move as the 2Y TSY dropped to the lowest yield on record.

    Those looking for more details can read our November preview of this event (“The 2021 Liquidity Supernova: Step Aside Fed – US Treasury Will Unleash $1.3 Trillion In Liquidity“), or read the below explanation from Larry McDonald, author of The Bear Traps Report, who last week put together an exhaustive summary of the implications of the TGA plunge.

    Again What is the TGA? The US Treasury’s General Account

    The TGA is the mechanism through which Treasury makes payments. It’s the checking account through which the government makes all its payments. This checking account is located at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. It’s where tax payments are deposited and where funds from Treasury debt auctions are collected. So when the TGA changes, that affects deposits at the Federal Reserve. Ultimately, monetary policy, and Quantitative Easing, is conducted through the TGA. It’s important. Of course, last year the TGA grew. It moved up from its usual range of $300 million/$500 million to, since May, well over $1 trillion. The thought had been that $1 trillion would be released into the economy to stimulate it prior to the November election. Didn’t happen. Congress stalled.

    Go Big or Go Home?

    Enter “Go Big or Go Home” Yellen. What’s she gonna do now? There will be another Covid relief bill of some kind. She’ll be the one cutting the checks through the TGA. This will release money out of the TGA and that means there will be a lot more money in the system. Yellen has $1 trillion burning a hole through her pocket. Additionally, QE is pumping money in at $120 billion clips a month. The combo of a near $1 trillion check and $120 billion monthly QE is the monetary equivalent of eating a banana split after downing an Italian hero sandwich. The market will be stuffed with reserves.

    The money will in part be put into the short end of the curve (already anticipated as we can see in super low LIBOR recently, and low T-Bill yields etc.). Some of the tidal wave of money will find its way into stocks and commodities. Some will find its way to higher prices for goods and services. This is the mirror opposite of 2018/2019 when traders fretted that treasury issuance would overwhelm their desks. This led to higher rates and a higher dollar… The 2019 events drama reached its September 2019 climax when the Fed was forced to introduce QE light. What an embarrassment, after pounding the table for 2 years on the wonders of committed balance sheet REDUCTION, up to $50B a month in Q1 2019, they reversed 2x. First in January 2019 by stopping the expansion, THEN again in September 2019 by restarting QE. Reflation assets (EM, global cyclicals ripped higher from Sept to the start of Covid risk in Feb 2020). Both times the beast inside the market reversed the academics at the Fed. Traders > educators in this case.

    So now there will be mind-boggling liquidity, no vig in the front end, and a weaker dollar to boot. Nothing is guaranteed when it comes to fiat currencies, but fiat currencies are in a race to the bottom. Given the upcoming drawdown of the $1 trillion in the TGA , it’s a race the US is likely to win.

    Recap with more Complexity, Digging Deeper

    One of the questions hanging over asset markets going into 2021 was what would happen to the TGA account. The TGA is the Treasury’s General Account which is how the Treasury makes payments. As we saw last year, the TGA was built up to levels much higher than they traditionally get to. In the past, the level of the TGA has traditionally been between $300-500 billion. Currently, and pretty much since May of last year, the TGA has been over $1 trillion, which is well above its historical norm.

    Going back to Q3 of 2020 there was a lot of speculation that the previous administration would use the massive levels of TGA to get more stimulus into the economy before the elections in November. However, that never really transpired and more covid relief was not passed by congress until after the election.

    This setup the question for Secretary Yellen in terms of how she would manage the TGA, especially into the likelihood of another covid relief bill. The market has gotten its answer as Yellen and the Treasury plan to draw down the TGA balance back to more historical levels. The consequences of this are simple, a lot more reserves in the system. The combination of Fed QE running at $120 billion a month and around a trillion-dollar drawdown in the TGA level means that the levels of reserves in the system will be massive.

    The combination of less short term issuance and massive QE will continue to put pressure on front end yields. This has been seen in very low LIBOR settings, low T-bill yields, and a lower setting in the effective fed funds rate. This pressure on the front end will continue to come especially in light of less front end issuance as the Treasury draws down their TGA balance.

    The market in the first quarter of this year is basically setting up for the inverse of 2018/2019, where funding markets have begun to get stretched. The story in 2018/19 was that Treasury issuance would overwhelm the market and lead to this crowding out of assets as dealers had to move funding to take down treasuries. Now, the problem is flipped. There are so many reserves in the system already from the Fed’s QE, and now it is going to get another increase via the TGA. So if 2018/19 was the story of issuance crowding out the market and putting pressure on funding markets which led to a higher dollar, this rendition could lead to the opposite.

    With that said, we think the correlation between net issuance and asset prices is a bit overstated. Yes, there will be a ton of liquidity on the back of these moves from Treasury, but in terms of marginal drivers, it will matter most in funding markets and the front end of the treasury curve. The other part of this is, this UST funding announcement doesn’t include the impact of whatever $1.9tln will come from the White House and congress.

    Overall: the story is that reserves are everywhere and more are coming. In theory, over the near term, we are setting up for an inverse of 2018/19, which means front-end yields, funding markets etc. will be flushed and liquidity in the system will be at very high levels.

    So while the bullish case is clearly there – after all a $1.1 trillion reserve injection all but assures higher risk prices, the only question is by how much, some – such as JPM’s Nick Panigirtzoglou – have taken on a more hedged position, even though even the JPM admits that a $800BN spike in reserves in just two months would be a major market event…

    • The US Treasury signaled this week a strong intention to reduce its Treasury General Account (TGA) balance at the Fed, from its current level of close to $1.6tr to $500bn by mid-2021.
    • Such a sharp decline would mechanically bolster the liquidity in the US banking system, i.e. the amount of reserves, by $1.1tr by mid year

    … noting that “a halving in the TGA in just under two months would be a significant decline, in particular given the slow conversion of PPP loans to grants thus far with just over $100bn converted between October and mid-January.”

    Yet within this broader tidal wave in reserves, Panigirtzoglou believes that the immediate impact will be relatively modest, and explains why below, first focusing on his view of narrow vs broad liquidity “plumbing” dynamics in the market (which differ substantially from those of repo god Zoltan Pozsar so take them with a giant grain of salt)…

    What are the implications for liquidity from a prospective large reduction in the TGA balance over the coming months? We argued before that liquidity should be split into two different components: 1) narrow or banking sector liquidity, which is created by the injection of excess reserves into the banking system; and 2) broader liquidity or money supply, which is the amount of cash or deposits held by the non-bank sectors of the economy such as households, non-financial corporations and financial intermediaries such as asset managers, pension funds and insurance companies. This broad liquidity is in turn primarily a function of QE related purchases by central banks and bank lending to the real economy by commercial banks. In general, these two components of liquidity are interrelated but are not necessarily mechanically linked and are thus distinct. For example, QE bond purchases, by injecting reserves into the banking system, increase narrow liquidity, but they do not necessarily increase broad money supply. Bond purchases can result in an increase in money supply either directly, e.g. if the central bank buys bonds from a non-bank entity such as a pension fund, this automatically expands the assets (reserves) and liabilities (deposits) of the banking system; or indirectly, when central banks’ quantitative measures induce higher bank lending in the economy.

    … and then expands this analytics framework to how $1.1 trillion in reserves will impact assets:

    A sharp decline in the TGA balance and the resulted $1.1tr increase in the stock of reserves in the US banking system would bolster banking sector liquidity i.e. narrow liquidity but will have no direct implications for broad liquidity, i.e. the cash balances of non-bank investors as captured by money supply. This is because a decline in the TGA balance would have no overall impact on the size of commercial bank’s balance sheet as it would effectively replace government debt with reserves in commercial bank’s asset side and TGA balances with reserves in the Fed’s liability side. These reserves or narrow liquidity reflect the amount of reserves commercial banks have with central banks in excess of what they would need to meet usual liquidity needs. Given that the banking system cannot get rid of reserves in aggregate, these zero yielding reserves become the “hot potato” that banks try to pass to other each until the relative pricing across money market instruments is adjusted enough to remove the incentive for banks to get rid of these reserves. In other words, narrow liquidity tends to reverberate within the money market space and suppress yields at the front end of the yield curve with little implication for the longer end of the yield curve or other asset classes such as equities.

    Needless to say, we completely disagree here and merely bring up the historical record: the Sept 2019 repo crash first spiked a violent market correction and only then did the Fed conceded to inject more liquidity. It stands to reason that the equity response now will be the opposite as we are now facing a mirror image of the liquidity picture in 2019. In any case, going back to the JPM quant:

    But even with the money market space, given the US banking system is already flooded with $3.2tr of reserves, well above a neutral level which we envisage at below $2tr, an additional $1.1tr of reserves would not make much difference in the current conjuncture. Indeed, after the sharp increase in reserves during 1H20, volatility in Fed funds – IOER spreads and SOFR – IOER spreads have already significantly reduced (Figure 2). The additional injection is likely to put some downward pressure on these rates to grind toward the zero lower bound of the Feds funds target range, supporting somewhat demand for shorter-dated Treasuries as banks seek some yield and duration. However, our projections for the global bond supply-demand balance in 2021 already incorporated only a relatively modest deterioration in G4 commercial bank demand from last year’s record levels.

    Summarizing JPM’s view, we find it surprisingly restrained in its optimistic assessment…

    In all, we see little impact from a prospective TGA balance reduction on broad liquidity and thus on other asset classes outside money markets or the front end of the UST yield curve. And the actual path of the TGA decline may differ from the Treasury’s forecasts not least as they do not potential additional fiscal stimulus into the projection.

    … then again it comes from the same JPM analyst who has been desperately trying to talk down bitcoin for the past 4 months, most recently just two weeks ago. Well, with bitcoin hitting $41,000 this morning and all other cryptos at all time highs, not only have those who listened to Panigirtzoglou worse off, but maybe Nick has become the “big JPM fade”. In any case, we are confident that it is only a matter of time before his Croatian colleague, the permabullish Marko Kolanovic takes the other side of the euphoria trade from Panigirtzoglou… as would we by the way.

    In any case, with $1.1 trillion about to hit the market, perhaps now is not the time for nuance and instead a more shotgun approach is appropriate, which is why we like Larry McDonald’s take as it cuts to the chase, and more importantly, is correct:

    The combo of a near $1 trillion check and $120 billion monthly QE is the monetary equivalent of eating a banana split after downing an Italian hero sandwich. The market will be stuffed with reserves.

    Of this we are certain. What does remain an open question is at what S&P level – 4,000? 4,500? moar? – will the Fed finally realize what it and the Treasury have done, and intervene by warning markets that it is about to pull its pedal off the gas, especially with a chorus of dovish, establishment progressive economists such as Larry Summers and Olivier Blanchard now warning that a $1.9 trillion stimulus could overheat the economy (yes, democrats warning of such a thing as too much stimulus – now we’ve seen it all). In fact, the next big risk is increasingly shaping up as a hawkish reversal by the Fed some time around July/August, when the Treasury cash balance tumbles to $200BN or so and when the S&P is in the the low to mid-4000s…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 19:55

  • Washington Post Says COVID Lab Accident "Plausible" And "Must Be Investigated"
    Washington Post Says COVID Lab Accident “Plausible” And “Must Be Investigated”

    Exactly one year ago today, Zero Hedge was ‘enjoying’ our suspension by Twitter after we pointed out that scientists from the Wuhan Institute of Virology had been experimenting on bat coronaviruses, and that investigators trying to determine the origins of the COVID-19 outbreak might want to have a word with them.

    We later reported that the same scientists had been using ‘gain-of-function‘ research to make bat coronaviruses more transmissible to human beings – for which they were roundly criticized in 2015.

    Thus, it seemed only logical that the possibility of a lab escape at ‘ground zero’ was at least non-zero, and should be investigated alongside the ‘natural origin’ theory which posits that the virus jumped from bats to an intermediary species, which then infected a cluster of people at a Wuhan wet market. According to a study published in The Lancet, 66% of patients admitted to Wuhan hospitals (27 out of 41) as of January 2nd, 2020 had been exposed to the Huanan seafood market.

    Since then, the lab leak hypothesis has gained traction – and has been elevated to let’s at least investigate status by legitimate bodies.

    Three weeks ago, the US State Department announced that while they haven’t determined whether the COVID-19 pandemic “began through contact with infected animals or was the result of an accident at a laboratory in Wuhan, China,” the US government “has reason to believe that several researchers inside the WIV became sick in autumn 2019, before the first identified case of the outbreak, with symptoms consistent with both COVID-19 and common seasonal illnesses.

    And in late January, A World Health Organization (WHO) adviser who previously worked under President Clinton and then-Senator Joe Biden said that COVID-19 was most likely an accidental lab leak.

    Which brings us to the Washington Post, whose editorial board on Sunday suggested that the lab leak hypothesis was “plausible” and “must be investigated.”

    Many scientists have speculated that the virus leaped from animals, such as bats, to humans, perhaps with an intermediate stop in another animal. This kind of zoonotic spillover has occurred before, such as in the West Africa Ebola outbreak in 2014.

    But there is another pathway, also plausible, that must be investigated. That is the possibility of a laboratory accident or leak. It could have involved a virus that was improperly disposed of or perhaps infected a laboratory worker who then passed it to others.

    * * *

    Update (0810ET): After publication, we learn that Chinese Ambassador, Cui Tianki, has called for the WHO to investigate the United States to see whether the pandemic may have originated here.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * *

    The Post then notes that “Published papers show that some of these institutions have been very active in coronavirus research. The most active is the Wuhan Institute of Virology, where Shi Zhengli leads a research team that has extensively studied and experimented on bat coronaviruses that are very similar to the one that ignited the global pandemic.”

    Also noted is Shi’s response to the virus – which was to ‘check her laboratory records to see whether there had been any mishandling of experimental materials,’ and that the genetic sequence of COVID-19 did not match a similar coronavirus her team had sampled in caves in China, which “really took a load off my mind,” she told Scientific American. “I had not slept a wink for days,” Shi claimed.

    In reality, the cave-culled virus, RaTG13, was reportedly 96.2% identical to SARS-CoV-2, however in September, researchers in India concluded that “the RaTG13 genome had serious issues and all data related to it required a full review.”

    The Post remains skeptical of Shi’s claims.

    But that must not be the end of the story. China actively covered up the early stages of the pandemic, concealed the transmissibility of the virus from its own people and the world, and punished Wuhan doctors who expressed worry about it in late December 2019. President Xi Jinping did not warn the public in China or abroad until mid-January.

    Since then, Chinese officials and scientists have advanced a host of dubious theories to suggest the origin of the virus was beyond China’s borders: perhaps brought to China by contaminated packaging of frozen food from abroad or from the U.S. military biodefense laboratory at Fort Detrick, Md., or from mink farms. The disinformation only heightens suspicions that China is trying to distract from or conceal something. –Washington Post

    And while we recommend (we know…) reading the rest of the Post‘s Editorial Board here – where they discuss ‘gain of function’ research, a mysterious database, and RaTG13, among other things – prepare yourselves for some serious damage control by the World Health Organization (WHO), who was finally allowed into Wuhan in search of evidence supporting the natural origins theory.

    The field trip prominently included Peter Daszak – president of EcoHealth Alliance, a non-profit group that has received millions of dollars of U.S. taxpayer funding to genetically manipulate coronaviruses with scientists at the Wuhan Institute of Virology. Of note, Daszak drafted a February, 2020 statement in The Lancet on behalf of 27 prominent public health scientists which condemned “conspiracy theories suggesting that COVID-19 does not have a natural origin.”

    So, the not exactly unbiased Daszak and his team are preparing to release ‘important clues’ found during their investigation, according to Bloomberg. Daszak reports that the main findings will likely be released before Feb. 10, and that the Hunan fresh produce market in central Wuhan was “especially useful” –  which was sanitized after its closure last January. That didn’t mean there were no clues, apparently.

    Investigators looked further and found “important clues” about the market’s role, Daszak said, declining to elaborate.

    “Right now, we’re trying to tease everything together,” he said. “We’ve looked at these three strands separately. Now we’re going to bring it together and see what everything tells us.”

    While the food market was shuttered and cleaned almost immediately after cases were recognized, “it’s still pretty intact,” Daszak said. “People left in a hurry and they left equipment, they left utensils, they left evidence of what was going on, and that’s what we looked at.” –Bloomberg

    Whatever the WHO team comes up with should, at minimum, make for some great reading.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 19:55

  • Fossil Fuels Aren't Going Anywhere
    Fossil Fuels Aren’t Going Anywhere

    Authored by Irina Slav via OilPrice.com,

    “There is no scenario where hydrocarbons disappear,” the chief executive of Baker Hughes, Lorenzo Simonelli, said during his keynote speech at this year’s annual meeting in the company. Like other executives from the industry, Simonelli acknowledged and welcomed the energy transition, but he noted that a 100-percent renewable energy scenario was simply not possible.

    There is plenty of evidence this is indeed the case, despite the hopes and ambitions of many environmental advocates.

    These hopes and ambitions imagine a world where human activity is powered from electricity only, and this electricity in turn is being generated using only renewable energy sources such as solar, wind, and hydropower.

    Such a world, however, is unrealistic.

    Take Germany, for example. The country, which is among the EU members with the most renewable energy capacity, has not produced a single Watt of solar energy since the start of this year. The reason: it’s winter. It is producing solid amounts of wind power, that’s for sure, but it is also generating power from the most despised fossil fuel of all: coal.

    At the time of writing its carbon intensity was 264 grams of CO2 equivalent per kWh. That was comparable to the carbon intensity of another poster girl for renewables in Europe, Denmark, which is currently getting most of its energy from wind power.

    So, it seems building renewable capacity in itself is not a silver bullet solution to the emissions problem. In fact, if you build it too quickly without adding substantial storage capacity, it could backfire. This was most recently evidenced by a narrow miss of a major blackout in Europe prompted by a minor problem at a Croatian substation that rippled through the continent, highlighting the importance of maintaining the grid at a constant frequency—something renewables cannot do because of their intermittent generation.

    Even Denmark has thermal power plants to secure the baseload any grid needs to function properly and eliminate or at least reduce the risk of blackouts.

    But back to Simonelli’s prediction about the guaranteed future of oil and gas. This future won’t be like the past. The world is firmly on course to change the way it generates and uses energy. Both Simonelli and the other keynote speaker at Baker Hughes’ AM2021, IHS Markit’s Daniel Yergin, recognized that. It is simply that this change will not be limited to a build-up of solar- and wind-generating capacity.

    Energy efficiency, for one, will be a big part of the transition.

    Efficiency has been pushed out of the spotlight recently, replaced by things like green hydrogen and the constant emission-reduction narrative, but it has not gone away. According to Baker Huges’ Simonelli, efficiency alone could help meet as much as 27 percent of the Paris Agreement climate change targets. On a global scale, this is a massive amount of emissions cut, at a rate of half a gigaton annually.

    In addition to efficiency, there are all the commitments Big Oil is making under pressure from investors, regulators, and activists. Every supermajor now has a renewable energy transition plan, some more ambitious than others. All the plans, however, involve pouring billions of dollars into what is essentially a move away from these companies’ core business of extracting oil and gas from the ground, at a carbon and methane emission cost, of course.

    This shift to renewables might raise some doubts about whether oil and gas will really remain indispensable.  However, the facts suggest that they probably will. There are still millions of people around the world without access to any electricity, and going renewable straight out of the gate for many of these people is simply not an option, for a number of reasons including cost—yes, even though solar panel costs are dropping like WTI in April 2020—and logistics problems. Going green only appears cheaper than sticking with fossil fuels. But it isn’t.

    As IHS Markit’s Yergin pointed out in his speech, emerging economies will continue to rely heavily on fossil fuels, despite other regions’ efforts to reduce their own reliance on them. Even if solar panels become free at some point, it is not just panels that go into the making of a solar farm: it also needs components such as inverters and a link to the grid, plus storage, for best results. This alone is enough to guarantee the long-term future of oil and especially gas as an indispensable part of the world’s energy mix.

    So, if oil and gas are not going anywhere, can we at least make them a bit cleaner? We certainly can, according to both Simonelli and Yergin, as well as to many other industry experts. Carbon capture is the second element of oil and gas’ long game, besides efficiency. True, carbon capture technology is still quite costly but, as in solar and wind, costs are on their way down. From a lot of talk and little action, carbon capture is on its way to becoming a feature of the energy transition. Why? Because “the numbers don’t work without it,” as Daniel Yergen said.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 19:30

  • National Guard And Razor Wire Everywhere: DC Gets Dystopian As Impeachment Trial Kicks Off
    National Guard And Razor Wire Everywhere: DC Gets Dystopian As Impeachment Trial Kicks Off

    Next week, the country will gather round to watch Democrats argue why former President Trump should be convicted for inciting the Jan. 6 ‘Capitol Riot,’ after the House impeached him on one count of “incitement of insurrection.”

    To prepare for the trial, DC Homeland Security and Emergency Management chief, Christopher Rodriguez, is maintaining a dystopian backdrop of armed National Guard troops and razor wire-topped security fences.

    We must demonstrate an overt security presence in D.C., at least for now,” Rodriguez said at a House Homeland Security Committee hearing last week. “We believe that this posture is essential to ensuring that the Metro Police Department can deploy resources to all parts of the city during an emergency.”

    Photo via @Revolov

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Members of the U.S. National Guard gather outside of the U.S. Capitol on Feb. 5.  Photographer: Al Drago/Bloomberg

    Walkways and green spaces around the Capitol and adjacent congressional office buildings that are normally plied by tourists and joggers have been off limits since the Jan. 6 riot.

    Instead, there are rifle-toting National Guard troops — part of a contingent of several thousand assigned to assist with security — stationed with Capitol police at a checkpoints for entry to the grounds. In addition there are 500 members of the District of Columbia National Guard on standby as a quick reaction force.

    It’s surreal,” said Representative Andy Kim, a New Jersey Democrat. “I’ve worked in a lot of tough areas before, it is very intense to see this level of structure with such a massive perimeter put forward. –Bloomberg

    Approximately 7,000 National Guard personnel will remain in DC – left behind after more than 20,000 Guradsmen were deployed to Joe Biden’s inauguration to protect against a ‘right-wing extremist threat’ that never materialized. By mid-march, the number of Guard will be reduced to 5,000.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Democratic impeachment managers are expected to argue that Trump’s election fraud claims inspired a cadre of supporters to ‘storm the capitol’ (they walked through an open door), and that the ‘insurrectionists’ led by ‘QAnon Shaman’ were attempting to gain control of the United States (only to take selfies with Capitol Police and walk out un-arrested). In total, five people died during the incident – including a protester who was shot dead by Capitol Police for trying to breach an interior barricade.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    More footage from the Jan. 6 ‘insurrection’:
    “Any chance I could get you guys to leave?”
     
    This is like, the sacredest place.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Trump’s impeachment defense team, meanwhile, is expected to show a montage of prominent Democratic lawmakers calling for insurrection against the Trump administration, and what we assume will include footage of 2020 anti-police riots.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Defense attorneys will undoubtedly mention that Trump told his supporters to ‘stay peaceful‘ and then ‘go home now,’ because ‘we have to have peace.

    All Democrats plus 17 Republican Senators would be required to cross the two-thirds threshold to convict Trump. As Bloomberg notes, however, “A test vote in the Senate last month indicated that a few GOP members are willing to break with the former president, but far fewer than the level needed to bar him from serving in public office again.”

    Perhaps an encore performance by Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez recounting her near death experience will convince at least 17 Republicans to break ranks?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 19:05

  • State Legislatures Eye Sound Money Reforms
    State Legislatures Eye Sound Money Reforms

    Submitted by Jp Cortez,

    More state lawmakers than ever are introducing sound money legislation in the opening days of the 2021 legislative session.

    Several states will consider measures to remove sales or general excise taxes from the purchases of gold, silver, and other precious metals.

    Many other states will weigh bills to eliminate income taxes on gold and silver.

    Still others will decide whether state funds can be held in physical gold and silver — and may even consider establishing a state-chartered bullion depository.

    With debt-funded spending and money-printing in our nation’s capital at breakneck speed, will states see the wisdom of enacting measures to counteract these policies of currency debasement?

    Here’s a rundown on newly introduced state legislation:

    In Mississippi, House Bill 375, sponsored by Representative Henry Zuber and Representative Brady Williamson, and House Bill 978, sponsored by Representative Joel Bomgar, include language to exempt precious metals from sales taxes.

    Two of Mississippi’s neighbors, Alabama and Louisiana, have already exempted precious metals from sales taxes – so the Magnolia State will continue to be at a competitive disadvantage if it maintains its current policy of taxing real money.

    South Carolina’s Representative Stewart Jones just introduced three sound money measures. House Bill 3378 excludes from gross income any net capital gain derived from the exchange of precious metals bullion.

    And Jones’s House Joint Resolution 3379 would create a committee to explore the feasibility of a state-chartered metals depository. Finally, the representative from Laurens, South Carolina, has put forward House Bill 3377, which reaffirms that gold and silver are money.

    Building on prior efforts to make precious metals purchases tax-free, Tennessee Senator Rusty Crowe introduced Senate Bill 251.

    Meanwhile, Tennessee Representative Bud Hulsey and Senator Paul Rose introduced House Bill 353 and Senate Bill 279, respectively. These bills would create a study commission regarding a gold depository for the Volunteer State and a report of findings to the state Senate and House of Representatives.

    In Arkansas, a measure that would eliminate the sales tax on precious metals purchases has been submitted for introduction by Representative Delia Haak, Representative Robin Lundstrum, and Senator Mark Johnson. Senator Johnson introduced a similar measure in 2019.

    In Alabama, Representative Andrew Sorrell will re-introduce a measure to remove income taxes from gold and silver. While Alabama enacted a precious metals sales tax exemption into law in 2018, the original bill sponsor, Senator Tim Melson, plans to introduce a bill this year to clear up some ambiguity in the 2018 language and to push out a sunset provision for another 5 years.

    Way to the west, Representative Val Okimoto and Representative Dale Kobayashi in Hawaii have introduced House Bill 1184, a measure to exempt precious metals from Hawaii’s general excise tax.

    And Idaho Representative Ron Nate and Senator Steven Vick have put forward House Bill 7 to permit the State Treasurer to hold a portion of state funds in physical gold and silver. Idaho hope to join Ohio and Texas as one of the few states make such a move to secure state assets against the risks of inflation and financial turmoil and/or to achieve capital gains as measured in Federal Reserve Notes.

    Washington State removed sales taxes against sound money decades ago, but a lawmaker hopes to take it a step further. House Bill 1417, introduced by Representative Rob Chase and co-sponsored by Representative Bob McCaslin, seeks to eliminate all Evergreen State taxes on the only form of money mentioned in the U.S. Constitution.

    Sound money forces could face some defensive battles in 2021 as well.

    Fortunately, there are now 39 states that have removed some or all sales taxes from precious metals. But during the shortened 2020 session, revenue-hungry politicians in Maryland, Pennsylvania, and Washington State tried to buck the trend and repeal those sales tax exemptions.

    All three of these recent attempts to reinstate taxes on the monetary metals have been defeated, but taxpayers should be wary of their return.

    By communicating with lawmakers, providing testimony, and igniting a vocal grassroots response, the Sound Money Defense League and its allies continue to make the case for sound money and to defend the existence of current sound money policies.

    Massive debt-financed government spending in response to COVID-19 has reemphasized the importance of sound money.

    As state legislatures and Congress consider actions in the face of a global pandemic and an unprecedented economic meltdown, they would be wise to remove the disincentives that stand in the way of protecting citizens and their states with sound, constitutional money.

    *  *  *

    Jp Cortez is the Policy Director for the Sound Money Defense League, a non-partisan, national public policy group working to restore sound money at the state and federal level and publisher of the Sound Money Index.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 18:40

  • "This Is The Wildest Market I've Ever Seen": Druckenmiller's Must-See Goldman Interview
    “This Is The Wildest Market I’ve Ever Seen”: Druckenmiller’s Must-See Goldman Interview

    On January 29, Tony Pasquariello, global head of Goldman Hedge Fund Coverage (whose observations we have frequently profiled on these pages) spoke to investing legend Stanley Druckenmiller, head of the Duquesne Family Office, about his current outlook on the market, his approach to risk management throughout his career, and his perspective on the conversation surrounding the role of capitalism in American society. The result was a fascinating conversation that was anything but the canned talking points one would  expect from such a high level interview (h/t to @JohnStCapital for bring it to our attention).

    Without missing a beat, Druck admitted that this “is the wildest cocktail I’ve ever seen in trying to figure out a roadmap.” Below we summarize some of his key observations.

    “The recession we had was 5x the average since WWII but it occurred in 25% of the time,” Druckenmiller said adding that “more bizarrely in a year when 11 million more people were unemployed, we had the largest increase in personal income in 20yrs during an economic downturn, due to massive policy support. The CARES Act added trillions in fiscal stimulus. How big was it? In three months in 2020 we increased the deficit more than the past 5 recessions combined (1973, 1975, 1982, the early 90s’, the dot com bust and the GFC). The Fed in 6 weeks bought more treasuries than in 10yrs under Bernanke/Yellen. Corporate borrowing, which almost always goes down in a recession, which had already increased from $6trln to $10trln going into the crisis due to the Fed’s free-money policies, went up $400bln. Putting that in perspective, it went down by $500bn during the GFC.”

    “So we had this massive increase in liquidity and stimulus which is the background and all of this stimulus has flown into financial markets, into commodities, into financial interests so it’s a bizarre background.” 

    “The juxtaposition of the various policy responses is somewhat breathtaking. Since 2018, M2 in the US has grown 25% more than nominal GDP; a 25% increase in liquidity. In China M2 to nominal GDP is where it was 3 years ago. So China hasn’t borrowed anything from their future and we’ve had a massive liquidity input and frankly very little investment. It’s primarily been transfer payments and Fed Stimulus. We’ve done a horrific job with the virus. The Chinese and Asia in general they’ve pretty much defeat the virus.”

    “So the background could not be more different, but could not be more exciting if you are a macro investor, because on top of all this there is the other big force in the equation which is vaccines. And it’s possible in fact probable that all this stimulus will be in place just when we unleash the biggest increase in pent up demand globally since the 1920s which could make the world extremely different than it looks today.”

    In response to a question from Pasquariello what is Druck’s favorite asset with the best opportunity, Druckenmiller refuses to answer, saying “that’s not how I play the game” and instead he says that the “overriding theme is inflation relative to what policymakers think. But because of the policymaker response which could be very varied based on the vaccine, I’ve found it’s better to have a matrix. So basically to play reflation I have a short treasury position primarily at the long end.”

    Take home #1: Druckenmiller is short long-end Treasuries.

    He also has a large position in commodities: “the longer the Fed tries to keep rates suppressed the more I win on commodities; the quicker they respond the quicker I might have a bigger problem with commodities.”

    Take home #2: He is very long commodities.

    And then there was currencies: “because of the juxtaposition of the US policy response versus Asia, I have a very, very short dollar position.”

    Take home #3: He is also “very very” short the dollar.

    Pasquariello then asks Druckenmiller about his view on stocks, and specifically the tech space (both mega cap, cloud and smaller cap names). Here, Druckenmiller is more reserved and says that “if we get 4-5% inflation in the US a few years out and bond yields rise precipitously that’s very negative historically for growth stocks relative to other stocks. On the other hand the comparisons with 2000 are ridiculous. The reason they are ridiculous is we had a double whammy back then of not only the raging mania of overvaluation but also earnings were about to end, because those companies that were growing rapidly then were all about building the Internet itself”, and that was done so there was no way to generate earnings.

    Looking to today, Druckenmiller says that “the combination of valuation and challenged bond markets could certainly make growth stocks in a very, very challenged environment the next 5 years relative to what they’ve been.”

    “Having said that, on the cloud we are in the 3rd-4th inning. COVID-19 had us jump from the 1st to 3rd-4th inning but we’re not in the 9th inning and if anything every company that I talk to is speeding up their transition because they are going to competitively die if they stay behind within digital transformation.”

    “Within tech itself AMZN and MSFT have been big underperformers in the last 2-3 months. It’s like that market has rotated into 40x sales tech companies or into radioactive reopening stocks. And if you look at Amazons, Microsofts and Googles of the world,  they are not overvalued, they are GARP names that are currently out of favor. And if the Fed continues to push the envelope in terms of friendliness I’m not worried about those stocks in fact they could keep going.”

    The interview then shifts to geographical preference and the Asian region in particular, to which Druckenmiller says that he owns China, Japan and Korea, “They’ve had a very good start to the year” and considering how much the US borrowed from the future, he thinks “Asia is the big, big winner coming out of COVID-19.”

    The same is true within tech itself, where Intel has thrown in the towel “so Asia owns foundry, memory, they are ahead in robotics.I think the next 5 years Asia looks a lot better than the US because at some point we have to pay back in terms of productivity, in terms of higher wages, in terms of lower dollar for all these transfer payments we’ve made the last nine months and we will continue to make.”

    “So I’m quite constructive on a number of names in Taiwan, in Korea, in China, in Singapore. Long-term Asia is going to be an outperformer vs the US, and especially the currency market. Net investment into China just passed the US ever this year, and it’s the beginning rather than the end of a trend.”

    * * *

    The conversation then turns to the topic of money and risk management to which Druck, who has never recorded a down year since 1981, said it was “a lot of it is luck. I’ve been deep in the hole 3-4 years and in every case something came along and it was just a coincidence of the calendar that at Dec 31 I was up.  If you looked at May 31-May 31 there would have been some down years.”

    Druck then says that “the fact that he can trade 5-6 asset classes does a few things.

    • Number one, it can point you in the right direction and if you believe something you can make big, big gains.
    • Number two, as a macro investor currencies and  bonds trade 24 hours a day and are very liquid and you can change your mind, which I’ve had to do a lot in my career cause I’ve been wrong a lot.
    • Number three, it also gives you discipline not to playing around in an area that is dangerous. Equity only investors need to be in equities. But if you’re a macro investor you don’t need to be in equities at any given point in time.

    As an example of the last point, Druck said he has never lost money big in credit because the only time he bets in credit is every 8 years after there’s a big debacle in credit and that’s when he buys a bunch of credit. But if he was a purely credit investor he would’ve had 3 or 4 down 30% years.

    Druckenmiller also said the he is “very much of philosophy to put all your eggs in one basket and watch it very carefully.” He has found that every investor has 3-4 big winners per year and usually you know what they are. But when you get in trouble is with something you’re not focused on. But if you put 50-70% of your assets in one asset class, “trust me you’re focused and you’re more risk averse” then with something you might have 5% or 6%.

    The investor also admitted that he has never used VaR: “I’m very unsophisticated I watch my PnL everyday and  if it starts acting in a strange manner relative to what I’d expect in a matrix, my antenna would go up.”

    The reason why Drucknemiller simply uses his PnL for risk management is that “I’ve found all risk models are great until complete chaos happens and then all the correlations break down and they can suck you in into a false security. If you watch your PnL, it’s a much better warning system than some of these mathematical models out there. They’re useful, just not useful when you actually need them.

    * * *

    Naturally, no conversation could take place without a discussion of bitcoin, and when asked if bitcoin may be the “mother of all asset bubbles or something genuine” Druckenmiller said “maybe both.” And while he admits he does not know the future, he knows how we got here, and his take is one we completely agree with (and one which Neel Kashkari should read very closely): Bitcoin “wouldn’t do what it’s doing without Central Bank behavior.”

    While Druck was skeptical of XBT 3-4 years ago when the crypto first broke out out – “why would anybody buy this thing” – he now admits that bulls have done an unbelievable marketing job. Bitcoin has been around 13 years and younger millennials look at bitcoin the way he looks at Gold. That said, Druck has doubts whether Bitcoin will ever be anything other than a store of value, as Bitcoin has problems as a currency because it uses a lot of energy, it’s volatile and it’s got other problems. But that doesn’t matter because right now it’s an asset class, “my view of it has been way overblown in the press; I do own some of it, it’s gone up a lot since I bought it.” In the end he doesn’t believe in it. He doesn’t not believe in it. He simply admits honestly that he “doesn’t know.”

    The conversation then shifts to more philosophical topics, and in response to a question how he would characterize “the state of American capitalism”, Druck says that he’s worried because “we have not engaged in capitalism for some time.”

    “The Central Bank has bastardized the most important price in the world which is the cost of money. We have crony capitalism as you know.”

    “But even in the best days of capitalism there’s always been a stain in the US, which is I grew up believing that we are a meritocracy by and large but there is a subsector of out society where we are in a caste system. We have a lot of neighborhoods in our country where millions of kids just don’t have opportunity to pull up their bootstraps and work hard.”

    “That’s always been there and is something we need to address. Which is why I am not sure events of last summer were a bad thing. It’s my own view that they were a good thing because people need to be woken up to fact that American Dream is a great thing but there are a significant amount of kids without access to the American dream the way I had.”

    Watch the full interview below.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 18:29

  • That Mystical Monetary Theory
    That Mystical Monetary Theory

    Authored by Joakim Book via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    MMT, or Modern Monetary Theory, is on everyone’s lips – and it seems that everyone is keen on this long-obscure idea of how our public finances really work. 

    In an article in the latest issue of Economic Affairs, I try to condense the argument into four propositions that form the core of MMTers’ understanding of the world. I do this by reviewing Stephanie Kelton’s book from June of last year, Kelton being the most vocal and well-known persona in the field. I show that there is great tension between these propositions and that most MMT arguments include accurate statements in the service of inaccurate conclusions. What is right about MMT is mostly old – and fairly trivial – and what is new about MMT is not quite right.

    1. A currency issuer (a “monetary sovereign”) cannot run out of money 

    With this proposition, MMTers stumble upon an old and long-accepted idea in monetary economics. The more others wish to hold your liabilities, the more you benefit. Everyone from private banks on a gold standard to Amazon and Starbucks’ gift cards, and more recently Elon Musk’s Tesla have realized that free lunches abound if consumers want to hold financial claims on you.  

    Just like central banks issuing money, these companies can never run out of the paper promises they issue. Had they wished to, private banks could have issued as many notes as they wanted, just as Bezos’ Amazon can flood gift cards everywhere or Musk’s Tesla can print up as many Tesla-shares as its shareholders want. Nobody would want to, of course: Amazon would quickly make losses if the goods on their platform were mainly purchased by gift cards freely issued by a Bezos-spree; and not even Musk would know what to do with that much cash on Tesla’s balance sheet – not to mention the effect on the share price from flooding the market with new supply. 

    Isn’t the money issued by central banks entirely different? Not really. True, the dollar or euro notes in my pocket cannot be redeemed for some outside commodity or Starbucks coffee but I can dispose of them by buying goods and services – just like I can with Starbucks and Amazon gift cards. If the hypothetical me instead is a whole population of people who no longer want to hold these paper slips, everyone tries to get rid of them at the same time – which we do in a monetary economy by buying things. Since money can’t escape its closed system, excess money holdings bounce around, hot potato-style, until prices have adjusted enough that the real value of your money holders are no longer excessive – in other words: large and rapid inflation. 

    Yes, the Fed or the Bank of England can never “run out of” the paper money they issue (trivially true), but they can run into the consequences of issuing too many. Kevin Dowd writes that Kelton’s main mistake is “to presume that what is correct at the margin (i.e., that the government can avoid default by issuing a few extra dollar bills) is also correct under any circumstances, that is, at any scale.” 

    2. Taxes don’t pay for government expenditures but generate demand for money

    While the first proposition is trivially true but doesn’t mean quite what you think it means, this one is closer to “demonstrably false.” The first part is an accounting claim or at best a hypothetical proposition that central banks would honor payments by governments even if there were no funds in their Treasury accounts. 

    According to MMTers, taxes don’t fund expenditures, as monetary sovereigns just create money to settle any transaction whenever it is spent. Taxes, in contrast, merely destroy money and keep a lid on aggregate expenditures. Compared to the public finance most students learn, this is completely upside-down – but more importantly, unprovable. Despite Kelton’s desire to describe the world as it really is, this is emphatically not how governments of the world operate. Yes yes, Kelton handwaves, and says that this is because they’re in thrall to mistaken economics and that if they wanted tothey could. OK, great. 

    The second part is less ethereal, but more demonstrably wrong. When you tax something, you do not create demand for that good. When government taxes your income and requires that you pay that tax in some specific unit, that unit doesn’t become money for others; if the government would happen to pick a useful enough item – determined as such and valued by the consumers who use them – public receivability can benefit one monetary commodity over another such that this becomes a society’s general money

    If mandating taxes is what generates demand for money and exorbitant privilege for their issuing country, it makes no sense that countries would ever give up that right. When Ecuador in January 2000 stopped resisting its people’s monetary choices by dollarizing and no longer issued its Sucre, this must have been a mistake. In the MMT story, it is unclear why they, or Venezuela and Zimbabwe or Lebanon in the 2010s, couldn’t just have taxed away the inflation that happened when money demand plunged. But with this argument we can go one step further: if money issuers get this grand benefit that the U.S. government has – that Kelton doesn’t think it’s (ab)using enough and that’s unfair towards countries of the world that can’t enjoy this power – why don’t we extend the logic? 

    If it’s so bad that countries that don’t have monetary sovereignty can’t issue their own money, we can have the fifty states print their own dollars (why constrain states from spending on what they “desperately need?”). We can have a New York dollar, an Oklahoma dollar, a Georgia dollar and even an Austin dollar, and all of these jurisdictions can spend to their heart’s desire as they are now money issuers. I can issue Joa-coins right away (Dogecoin, anyone?) and command much more purchasing power for all the things I need! 

    The missing piece for the argument to work is that I benefit only if all of you kindly accept the Joa-coins in exchange for goods and services, even when I’m issuing more and more of them. When you don’t, the purchasing power of any outstanding Joa-coins quickly goes to zero (i.e. infinite inflation) as you all try to get rid of them at any price. We’re back at money demand: the policy proposals of modern monetary theorists only work if there is a desire to hold more of the issuer’s money. Joa-coins can only save the (my?) world if you desperately want to hold them.  

    3. Inflation is the only constraint that a monetary sovereign faces.

    4. Capitalist economies have lots of idle resources (unemployment, spare capacity, fiscal space).

    The fine-print of the MMT system arrives in the two final propositions, which MMTers freely advance Motte-and-Bailey style, against any criticism to their theory. What isn’t immediately obvious in an average conversation about MMT is that these fine prints severely restrict how far (1) and (2) can go in achieving the political ends that MMTers seek. 

    Even if (2) would be factually correct, and taxes levied don’t pay for government expenditures, once (3) starts binding – which Kelton and others explicitly accept they would at some point – taxes and borrowing must be levied to control it. In a roundabout way, real government spending would then be financed by taxes and borrowing. 

    When, in the MMT framework, do we get inflation? When there are no longer “idle resources” in the economy. This is an old idea in the Post-Keynesian tradition that when assets are not used (i.e. factories not operating, capital equipment not producing, houses not occupied) and labor is unemployed or out of the labor force, government spending becomes a free lunch. Spending, which in the MMT world means issuing more money, can bring these resources online without increasing prices because they are assumed not to have alternate uses. 

    Of course, in real life they have; asset owners may have different plans than the central MMT planner, and labor markets can be unsynchronized for other reasons – geography, welfare payments, structural and frictional unemployment – than insufficient demand (if there even is such a thing). Adjusting Ludwig von Mises’ fable of the master builder only a little: if you find yourself in a minefield, the solution is not – as Kelton and others who worry about slack and spare capacity would have you do – to run as fast as you possibly could. It’s to stand still, survey the terrain, and carefully retrace your steps until you’re once again on safe ground. Only from there can you try to go around the minefield.

    Even so, if and when idle resources and unemployed labor do not abound, government spending crowds out private spending and the alleged macroeconomic benefits come to a close (or public wants must trade off private wants). 

    Aren’t Governments and Central Banks doing MMT Right Now?

    Against James K. Galbraith’s argument that the MMT was vindicated by central bank actions of 2020, my AIER colleague Nicolás Cachanosky notes that

    “The government spent a lot of money in a short period of time and inflation expectations remained below two percent. But that doesn’t tell us much about how such a policy would work in normal times. And the supposed evidence offered in support of MMT is also consistent with the standard view. To the extent that the fear of pandemic and government lockdown orders slowed spending, good old-fashioned monetary theory explains the observed low inflation rate in 2020.”

    The real test for MMT is not the fervor with which policymakers around the world have taken MMT-like actions in the midst of a stop-all pandemic economy, but in a “normal” economy. If we make lots of resources idle (4), which governments did when they engineered a recession last year, MMT collapses into standard counter-cyclical Keynesianism with at best some cosmetic differences in form.

    It’s not under today’s conditions that MMT’s policies must deliver, but in pre-pandemic years where unemployment had virtually disappeared, wages were rising across the income distribution, median incomes were rising, and labor force participation reversed its decades-long decline. Spending government funds like it’s World War II and doubling the monetary base during those conditions (without hitting capacity constraints!) is what would vindicate MMT. 

    The MMT mistake lies in believing that any alleged shortfall in money or supply of U.S. Treasuries is big enough to finance their entire policy wish list for the foreseeable future. It also assumes that any potential labor or capital goods not currently used can be effortlessly moved to whatever production line politicians desire, without causing prices or wages to increase.

    While MMT seems to offer grand justifications for spendthrift governments, the more (3) and (4) hold, the less revolutionary (1) and (2) seem. The monetary theory that calls itself modern remains mystically inadequate. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 17:50

  • Renaissance Hit With $5 Billion In Redemptions After "Terrible" Returns
    Renaissance Hit With $5 Billion In Redemptions After “Terrible” Returns

    At the end of January, when the Reddit revolt was wrecking havoc among hedge funds and forcing even market neutral quants to degross and delever, we pointed out something unexpected: according to the latest HSBC Hedge Fund performance tracker, Renaissance’s public funds – RIEF and RIDA – had a dismal 2020, losing 20% and 32% respectively, while the Renaissance Institutional Diversified Global Equities Fund (RIDGE) lost 31% as Rentec’s famous quant algos were thrown out of whack by swings the computers had never seen or experienced before (which is not to say that RenTec’s private, internal “friends and family-only” Medallion fund suffered a similar fate, quite the opposite).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This prompted us to ask “what the hell is going on in Setauket” (where RenTec’s HQ is located), a question which gained even more urgency once we found out that the dismal streak of the world’s largest quant fund (RenTec manages around $60BN) had continued into 2021, when its funds were the top and 5th worst performers overall in January (while Senvest was by far the best on the back of its $700 million gain from going long GME stock).

    It turns out we were not the only ones closely watching the dismal recent returns at the world’s most profitable hedge fund, because as Bloomberg writes this morning, the investing giant that just posted its worst-ever returns across its public funds, has been hit with at least $5 billion in redemptions”, a staggering reversal in fortune for a fund which always had a line of people around the corner just waiting to get be admitted.

    According to the report, after clients pulled $1.85 billion across the three hedge funds in December (RIEF, RIDA, RIDGE), they also hit the Jim Simons’ money machine with another $1.9 billion in January, and are poised to yank another $1.65 billion this month. While those figures could be offset if there are any inflows in February or if investors decided to walk back any of their redemption requests, that does not seem very likely after the staggering underperformance of the quant hedge fund.

    Of course, for RenTec founder and former codebreaker Jim Simons none of this matters, because while the public facing funds are a convenient hedge, in the grand scheme of things they are tiny; the real money at Rentec is made at Medallion – the iconic fund reserved for employees and insiders – and in 2020 it soared 76% last year, according to Institutional Investor.

    This kind of discrepancy between internally managed funds and capital run for outside investors is truly unprecedented, and should prompt at least one regulator to ask what is going on. The last time they did, they found that another iconic fund – Michael Platt ‘s BlueCrest – had secretly transferred its best traders from managing outside capital to just running the firm’s own money, while assigning crappy algos to “manage” outside money by piggybacking on internal trades after they were already put on (Platt received a $170MM slap on the wrist and all was forgotten).

    In other words, as we explained in December, “when managing its own money, the macro fund would dedicate its best traders to come up with the top trades, and not only that but it would effectively frontrun its clients! Then, when the time came to manage client money, BlueCrest basically used a simply copycat algo to piggyback on its top trades but only after the management team was already in the positions, thus giving it substantial firepower to generate alpha simply by having billions in fund flows rush into the same trades it had already put on, creating a feedback loop. We wonder if BlueCrest also unloaded its own positions by selling them to its own clients.”

    Surely RenTec would never abuse its fiduciary duty so blatantly as to allow Medallion to frontrun the public fund trades… Surely.

    Back in September, Renaissance told clients that its losses were due to being under-hedged during March’s collapse and then over-hedged in the rebound from April through June. That happened because its trading models “overcompensated” for the original trouble (translation: RenTec’s models had no idea what they were doing).

    Renaissance then again addressed its dismal returns in a December letter, which Bloomberg got access to:

    “Although recent performance has been terrible and worse than prior performance would have suggested was likely for 2020,” the firm said, its model “anticipates that in track records as long as ours, some risk-return ratios every bit as bad as the ones we are now seeing are not shocking.”

    The broader lesson is that “one should expect even good investments to perform horribly from time to time.”

    Well, the returns may have been “terrible” for anyone who foolishly assumed that Simons & Co. would put the same care in managing outside money as they allocate to their own funds. Because while most outside investors have lost over a third of their investment in the past year, RenTec’s internal Medallion fund is up nearly 80% in the same period. How much longer will this divergence continue, we wonder, before someone asks the obvious question: why?

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 17:45

  • "The Post-U.S. Era Has Started": Iran's Ayatollah Blasts Biden For Refusing To Lift Sanctions
    “The Post-U.S. Era Has Started”: Iran’s Ayatollah Blasts Biden For Refusing To Lift Sanctions

    Despite Joe Biden’s prior promises on the campaign trail to immediately restore US participation in the 2015 Iran nuclear deal (JCPOA) brokered under Obama, it’s now looking to be effectively in tatters merely less than a month into his administration. 

    Iran’s Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei issued a ‘final ultimatum’ on Sunday, demanding the US remove all sanctions that were enacted by Trump prior to the Islamic Republic returning to compliance. 

    “Iran has fulfilled all its obligations under the deal, not the United States and the three European countries,” Khamenei said, according as cited in Reuters. “If they want Iran to return to its commitments, the United States must in practice… lift all sanctions.”

    Via Reuters

    Iranian state media is widely describing it as the country’s “final word” on the deal. Given that previously Biden’s top foreign policy advisers as well as press secretary definitively stated that Iran must return to compliance first, most especially when it comes to uranium enrichment caps, the developing stalemate looks to increasingly point toward Washington staying on the sidelines, while keeping sanctions to the max – a continuation of Trump’s ‘maximum pressure’.

    Khamenei affirmed the prior position of top Iranian leaders, including President Rouhani and Foreign Minister Zarif, that it is for the US to move first since it was the one which backed out. He said further in his statement speaking of the US administration, “The side with the right to set conditions to JCPOA is Iran since it abided by all its commitments, not US or 3 European countries who breached theirs.”

    It comes on the heels of Biden saying in a CBS interview that the US won’t budge until Iran returns to compliance first:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As WSJ recaps of the latest interview which will air in full just ahead of the Super Bowl on Sunday evening:

    Asked by CBS News whether the U.S. will lift sanctions to convince Iran to participate in negotiations, Mr. Biden said, “No.” When CBS asked whether Iran must stop enriching uranium first, Mr. Biden nodded.

    Also on Sunday the Supreme Leader took to twitter to opine about the ‘decline’ of the American empire…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “If they want Iran to go back to its JCPOA commitments, the U.S. must practically end all sanctions. We will verify if it has been done properly. If yes, we will go back to our JCPOA commitments,” Iran’s Supreme Leader said further.

    Khamenei then issued the following ominous prediction:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    While during his last weeks in office Trump had ramped up the pressure campaign on the Islamic Republic, Iranian authorities defiantly announced they had taken uranium enrichment to 20%, installed more advanced centrifuges, and advanced its capability to produce uranium metal crucial for nuclear warhead development (though Tehran has long maintained all of this is toward peaceful domestic energy purposes).

    Meanwhile with Washington and Tehran are now telling each other, “you first” in terms of who acts to reverse measures, the nuclear looks to effectively remain dead with the sanctions status quo remaining in effect for the foreseeable future. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 02/07/2021 – 17:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 7th February 2021

  • When (Or If) Comes The Pushback?
    When (Or If) Comes The Pushback?

    Authored by Victor Davis Hanson via AMGreatness.com,

    The corruption of the Renaissance Church prompted the Reformation, which in turn sparked a Counter Reformation of reformist and more zealous Catholics.  

    The cultural excesses and economic recklessness of the Roaring 20s were followed by the bleak, dour, and impoverished years of the Great Depression. 

    The 1960s counterculture led to Richard Nixon’s landslide victory in 1972, as “carefree hippies” turned into careerist “yuppies.” 

    So social, cultural, economic, and political extremism prompt reactions – and sometimes counterreactions.   

    The Bush-Clinton-Obama continuum of 24 years (from 1993 through 2015) cemented the bipartisan fusion administrative state. Trump and his “Make America Great Again” agenda were its pushback.  

    The counter-reaction to the populism of the Trump reset—or Trump himself—is as of yet unsure.  

    Joe Biden’s tenure may mark a return to business as usual of the Bush-Clinton years. Or more likely, it will accelerate the current hard-left trajectory. 

    Either way, it seems that Biden is intent on provoking just such a pushback by his record number of early and often radical executive orders—a tactic candidate Biden condemned. 

    On almost every issue—open borders, blanket amnesties, canceling the Keystone XL pipeline, promoting the Green New Deal, and hard-left appointees—Biden is touting positions that likely do not earn 50 percent public support. 

    When Biden made a Faustian bargain with his party’s hard-left wing of Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), Kamala Harris, Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.), and Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (D-N.Y.) to win the election, he took on the commitment to absorb some of their agenda and to appoint their ideologues. 

    But he also soon became either unwilling or unable to stand up to them.

    Now they – and the country – are in a revolutionary frenzy.

    • The San Francisco school district has canceled over 40 schools honoring the nation’s best – Washington, Jefferson, and Lincoln – largely on racist grounds that they are dead, mostly white males. 

    • Statues continue to fall. Names change. 

    • The iconic dates, origins, and nature of America itself continue to be attacked to meet leftist demands.

    • And still, it is not enough for the new McCarthyites.

    • Social media are banning tens of thousands.

    • Silicon Valley and Wall Street monopolies go after smaller upstart opponents.  

    • A wrong word destroys a lifelong career.

    • Formerly sane pundits now call for curtailing the First Amendment.

    • Thousands of federal troops blanket a now-militarized Washington, D.C.

    If Trump’s pushback tried to return to traditions ignored during the Obama years, Biden’s reset promises to become far more radical than Obama’s entire eight years. 

    Trump likely lost his second pushback term for two reasons – neither of which had anything to do with his reset agenda.

    First, the sudden 2020 pandemic, quarantine, recession, summer-long demonstrations and riots, and radical changes in voting laws all ensured that 100 million ballots were not cast on Election Day, derailed a booming economy, and finally wore the people out.  

    Second, Trump underestimated the multitrillion-dollar power and furor of Silicon Valley, Wall Street, the media, Hollywood, and the progressive rich. Those forces all coalesced against him and swamped his outspent and outmanned campaign. 

    With 24/7 blanket ads, news coverage, endorsements, and social media messaging, Trump sometimes was easily caricatured as a twittering disrupter. The inert and mute Biden in his basement was reinvented as the sober and judicious Washington “wise man” antidote to Trump’s unpredictability.

    Had Biden continued his moderate campaign veneer, the current left-wing radicalism might not have prompted a counterreaction. 

    Instead, Biden is now unapologetically leading the most radical left-wing movement in the nation’s history. 

    Pundits thought Biden’s prior hints of a single four-year term would make him a weak lame duck.  Instead, the idea of just one term has liberated the 78-year-old Biden. We forget that septuagenarians can be as reckless as 20-year olds. Some old guys can feel their careers only have a few remaining years and might as well go out with a bang—and a legacy. 

    For now, Biden enjoys a congressional majority for the next 24 months. He has no plans to run for reelection. He sees both realities as a liberating blank check to accomplish what the much more heralded rockstar Barack Obama never could. 

    Experts assured voters that Joe Biden would work on a bipartisan consensus and bring back “normality.”

    He would “unite” the country.  

    That will not happen. How ironic that Biden will not just be pushed and pressured by the radicals whom he brought to power, but he may be leading them forward to cement an even harder Left legacy.

    Will there be a reaction to this extremism?  

    The Left is assured that radical changes in voting laws and demography, the fears of COVID-19, the Antifa-Black Lives Matter uprising, and anger at Trump over the January 6 Capitol riot have all permanently changed the electorate – and pushed it far leftward. 

    If they are wrong, they have instead alienated and insulted the American people, and will reap the whirlwind in 2022 of the wind they are now sowing.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 23:30

  • Google Reverses Course In Australia – Opens Paid Platform For (Some) Australian News
    Google Reverses Course In Australia – Opens Paid Platform For (Some) Australian News

    The Australian government has possibly obtained a rare, partial victory in its standoff with Google. The US-based tech giant has appeared to reverse course as Australia holds hearings aimed at enacting legislation that would effectively force Google to pay local sources for news it links to and features in its search engine

    Google last month threatened to pull its search engine off the continent altogether, with Canberra counter-threatening that they won’t budge. But on Thursday Google made the following official announcement: “To meet growing reader and publisher needs, last year we increased our investment in news partnerships and launched Google News Showcase.”

    The ‘Showcase’ app is the result of the company negotiating to pay some Australian news producers who sign up for the program. It’s an attempt to undercut legislation being proposed to require the company to pay for all such content. It’s not likely to stop the new legislation, however, but Google is offering it as an ‘alternative’. The move shows that the tech giant is arguably feeling the pressure and is looking to compromise.

    Image via Search Engine Roundtable 

    The Google announcement continued, “Today we are happy to announce we are rolling out an initial version of the product to benefit users and publishers in Australia, with a keen focus on leading regional and independent publishers given the importance of local information and the role it plays in people’s everyday lives.”

    “News Showcase is designed to bring value to both publishers and readers by providing a licensing program that pays publishers to curate content for story panels across Google services, and gives readers more insights into the stories that matter,” it said. 

    While the details have yet to be revealed, for example just which publishers will eventually be enabled to join the platform, it’s being reported as a significant compromise which is likely to first reward major national Australian outlets, as Reuters details:

    With the legislation now before a parliamentary inquiry, Friday’s launch of News Showcase in Australia will see it pay seven domestic outlets, including the Canberra Times, to use their content.

    Financial details of the content deals weren’t disclosed, and Canberra Times publisher Australian Community Media didn’t immediately respond to a request for comment.

    The months in the making Australian initiative seeks to ensure companies and content providers are compensated fairly for the value their content generates for Google and parent company Alphabet Inc. at a moment the domestic industry is in crisis, with traditional newspapers and content producers under threat of having to shut down altogether.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Last month Australia Prime Minister Scott Morrison hit back in the wake of the threatened Google shutdown in the country, saying, “We don’t respond to threats.” He added at the time: “Let me be clear. Australia makes our rules for things you can do in Australia.”

    It’s commonly estimated that Alphabet Inc. oversees at least 94% of all search traffic in Australia, similar to many other countries globally, at a time it’s coming under increased accusations of using its monopoly power to bully content providers and smaller competitors. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 23:00

  • Twitter Permanently Bans Gateway Pundit For Violating "Civic Integrity Policy"
    Twitter Permanently Bans Gateway Pundit For Violating “Civic Integrity Policy”

    Twitter has permanently suspended the account of Jim Hoft, founder of the popular conservative website The Gateway Pundit, for reportedly violating the social media giant’s “civic integrity policy.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hoft’s account @gatewaypundit, which had over 375,000 followers, served as the outlet’s primary presence on Twitter. The ban comes one day after TGP posted election night surveillance video of Detroit’s TCF Center of what the outlet reports is a van dropping off “tens of thousands of illegal ballots,” after which “Joe Biden took the lead in Michigan.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to a spokesperson for Twitter, “The account was permanently suspended for repeated violations of our civic integrity policy,” according to Citizen Free Press.

    Following the ban, The Gateway Pundit said of the surveillance footage that they have “much much more on this incident to report on in the coming days,” as they have yet to release all of it. Hoft posted the following tweet hours before his suspension:

    And while liberal Twitter celebrates Hoft’s banishment – and the founder of pro-censorship organization Sleeping Giants is now calling for their complete demonetization, The Gateway Pundit can still be found on the following platforms:

    Telegram
    Gab
    SafeChat
    MeWe
    Clouthub
    Minds
    Politichatter

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 22:27

  • Miami Mayor Speaks With Musk About Boring Tunnel Under Brickell Avenue
    Miami Mayor Speaks With Musk About Boring Tunnel Under Brickell Avenue

    Miami Mayor Francis Suarez had a phone call with Elon Musk on Friday about digging a tunnel underneath Brickell Avenue and Biscayne Boulevard to alleviate traffic. 

    Following the phone call, the Miami Herald spoke with Suarez about the Musk-owned Boring Co. building a $30 million tunnel under the Brickell Avenue Bridge. He said the tech billionaire told him the tunnel could be built in six months. 

    “For him, it’s not about the money, it’s about creating a solution, creating something that creates happiness and prosperity to the people,” Suarez said.

    Suarez said the tunnel would only be accessible to electric vehicles because a major cost-savings of the tunnel is the lack of ventilation systems. He said the call lasted about 30 minutes. 

    “I think we have a unique opportunity to create a signature project, not just for Miami, but for the world,” Suarez said in a video statement on his Twitter account. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Musk has also spoken with Gov. Ron DeSantis and Miami-Dade County Mayor Daniella Levine Cava about the project. 

    Suarez said the next step for him is to speak with DeSantis about the idea considering Miami-Dade County transit officials have already considered building a more expensive tunnel under the city. 

    Already, Boring has found success in completing a third of a mile transport tunnel beneath the Las Vegas Convention Center at the cost of $52.5 million. 

    Last week, San Bernardino County Transportation Authority in Southern California approved plans to connect a train station in Rancho Cucamonga, California, to Ontario International Airport with a Boring tunnel.

    … and good luck to Miami officials, who believe Musk can deliver them a tunnel under budget and in six months. Musk has been notorious for overstating promises. 

    We’re still waiting for the million robotaxis Musk promised on the road by 2020. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 22:00

  • How To Protect Your Local Economy From The Great Reset
    How To Protect Your Local Economy From The Great Reset

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Birch Gold Group,

    Over the years, I have written extensively about the concept of economic “decentralization” and localization, but I think these ideas are difficult for some people to visualize without proper motivation. By that I mean, it’s not enough that the current centralized model is destructive and corrupt; it has to start breaking down or show its true totalitarian colors before anyone will do anything to protect themselves.

    Sadly, the majority of people tend to take action only when they have hit rock bottom.

    In recent months the pandemic lockdown situation has provided a sufficient wake up call to many conservatives and moderates. We have seen the financial effects of pandemic restrictions in blue states, with hundreds of thousands of small businesses closing, tax revenues imploding and millions of people relocating to red states just to escape the oppressive environment.

    Luckily, conservative regions have been smart enough to prevent self destruction by staying mostly open. In fact, red states have been vastly outperforming blue states in terms of economic recovery exactly because they refuse to submit to medical tyranny.

    I outlined this dynamic in detail recently in my article Blue State Economies Will Soon Crumble – But Will They Take Red States With Them?

    The data is undeniable: the states and cities that enforce lockdown mandates are dying, the states that ignore mandates are surviving. However, with a Biden presidency there is a high probability that the federal government will now seek to force compliance from all states. In other words, lockdowns will become a national issue rather than a state issue.

    For now, Biden is pretending as if reopening is right around the corner, but as I have noted in the past, the Reset agenda will never allow this. A reopening, if it happens at all, will be short and lockdowns will return. We are already seeing a new narrative being introduced to the public involving “COVID mutations”, which are supposedly “more deadly” than the original COVID-19 outbreak. So, there is a brand new and useful threat and the establishment will exploit it as a rationale for more lockdowns and restrictions.

    Beyond the pandemic mandates, there are also numerous Reset agenda policies that will be implemented under the Biden administration, including insane Green New Deal related executive orders and legislation claiming to reduce carbon emissions. What they will really do is annihilate resource production. Millions of jobs will be lost and entire industries will be erased unless conservatives act to stop Biden in his tracks.

    This means doing far more than stalling through political maneuvers. We are going to have to use concrete strategies to retake control of resource management within the states. Pointless globalist carbon policies composed by entities like the UN have no place in American economic planning. A message needs to be sent that they will never be accepted here.

    Time is running out to prepare. Lockdowns will return within a few months and this time they will be federally enforced. Conservatives must be ready to defy these orders if they have any hope of saving their local economies. This is going to take individual efforts to stock necessities and secure their finances, but ultimately wider organization is going to be needed to weather the storm.

    Conservatives must establish coalitions of counties and states, and certain economic measures will have to be applied to insulate from damage. The federal government and Biden will attempt to punish red states for refusing to submit, and we need to be ready for that eventuality.

    Here are some ways that conservative communities can stop the Reset agenda…

    Localization

    On a smaller scale, conservatives can accomplish a lot by simply changing their buying habits. If you do 80% of your retail spending with big box stores and online outlets like Amazon and only 20% at local small businesses, then try to switch that ratio. Spend 80% at local businesses and 20% at corporate outlets. Yes, small businesses tend to cost a little extra, but who do you really want your money going to? Do you want your money filling the pockets of international corporate moguls that are working to destroy your freedoms and undermine your economy? Or, do you want your cash to circulate locally?

    Individuals can also start their own business from home focusing on production of necessities or necessary skill sets. They can establish a small business co-op and encourage the community to buy locally. Often, people just don’t know how many services are available from small businesses in their area, so they automatically go to big box providers. Small businesses must work together to change the dynamic.

    This strategy also extends to local farms. Consumers and grocery stores need to buy more of their produce from farms in the area and less from chains which ship in produce from other countries. There are millions of acres of farmland in the U.S. that do not grow food at all because these farms are paid by the federal government not to. Encouraging local food production is paramount to remaining free from centralized control.

    Organized Refusal To Comply

    The problem with conservatives is that we tend to be so independent that we avoid organization. This is a problem because it leads to self-isolation. During the pandemic lockdowns in blue states, some conservative-owned businesses refused to comply, but they were left mostly to fend for themselves with no aid from the wider community. If more businesses were to ally with each other and protested in tandem, dozens or hundreds of defiant businesses working together would be a lot harder to shut down than just a few.

    By extension, it’s not enough for conservatives to merely argue against the lockdowns and demand businesses stay open, we need to also defend those businesses that take action. We need to support them with our dollars and stand in the way of anyone trying to close them down. They are taking a big risk for us, so we need to be willing to take risks for them.

    Imagine if Biden tried to assert a national lockdown order and more than half the businesses in the country ignored him? What if patrons refused to allow federal agencies to intimidate those businesses? The lockdowns would be nullified, and Biden would have little recourse.

    Establish Barter Networks

    In the event that the U.S. economy breaks down completely, we must create contingencies to prevent total trade disruption. Without trade, populations become desperate because no one has the ability to provide every necessity all the time. People have to be able to barter goods and services in an open market.

    Barter networks are a base fundamental, the universal go-to solution during economic collapse. Every society in modern history has used barter markets to stay afloat during financial crisis and to bypass government economic controls. We must be willing to do the same.

    Conservatives must start organizing barter networks within their communities now. It does not matter if you are trading with a couple of people or hundreds; the process needs to start somewhere.

    Why is this so important? Because there is a very good chance that the federal government will try to fiscally punish any state or county that opposes lockdown measures and Reset policies. This means that the government will first seek to cut off federal funding to red states. In the midst of economic crisis, many regions have become reliant on federal stimulus as a crutch, and this dependency makes them vulnerable to control.

    To truly rebel against the Reset, local economies need to be free from federal oversight or consequences. With barter networks in place along with possible local scrip and alternative currencies, the public will be less fearful of economic retaliation.

    Take Back Management Of Local Resources

    We have already seen attempts by Biden to disrupt production of carbon based energy resources like oil and coal. Frankly, the time is long past due for states and counties to take back control of federal lands. The government has been stifling American production for decades and this has hurt rural communities in particular.

    In my area, the EPA has essentially destroyed the timber harvesting industry through unfair regulations. This has led to federal mismanagement of forests to the point that fire hazard has become a major issue. All the young men in the county used work as lumberjacks to support their families; now they have to leave, or work as wildland firefighters. It’s completely backwards. And this is happening while U.S. lumber prices are skyrocketing.

    Conservative counties and states need to take back land and resource management and allow reasonable production to return. Biden should have no say in whether or not oil wells in North Dakota stay operational, or coal mines in West Virginia stay open, or trees Montana are selectively harvested. As long as the bulk of wealth from the resource production stays within the state where the resources were harvested, I see no downside to this kind of response.

    If the federal government tries to retaliate by cutting off federal funds, it won’t matter because the states will be producing jobs and wealth for themselves independently.

    Immunity From Cancel Culture

    In our current political environment, it is becoming a fact of life that the hard left can and will try to harm people that oppose their ideology. Big tech companies and government are helping them to do this. Now more than ever, conservatives that wish to remain free to voice their views and share facts that are contrary to the leftist narrative must seek protection from cancellation. But how do we do this?

    For one, we can work for ourselves. Being self employed means never having to worry about being fired because of your political opinions. Or, conservatives need to work for conservatives. This means conservative companies need to focus on hiring conservative employees, and if the leftist mob tries to attack an individual, those companies can easily ignore them. Of course, this also means that conservative consumers need to start making a list of conservative companies that have proven themselves to be immune to leftist pressure. We need to support these companies.

    Conservatives should also look into the possibility of campaigns to build more platform alternatives to Big Tech and social media. We need more web service providers that are owned by people who respect free speech rights. We may even need our own internet.

    All of these things are possible, but it takes organization and effort. Conservative communities can become safe havens for civil liberties, but this means we cannot be isolated from each other anymore. We have to be connected by more than our principles, we must also be connected through actions.

    *  *  *

    With global tensions spiking, thousands of Americans are moving their IRA or 401(k) into an IRA backed by physical gold. Now, thanks to a little-known IRS Tax Law, you can too. Learn how with a free info kit on gold from Birch Gold Group. It reveals how physical precious metals can protect your savings, and how to open a Gold IRA. Click here to get your free Info Kit on Gold.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 21:30

  • Super Bowl LV Ticket Prices Halved Amid Virus Fears 
    Super Bowl LV Ticket Prices Halved Amid Virus Fears 

    Super Bowl LV ticket prices have plunged in the last couple of weeks in the wake of the COVID-19 pandemic.

    As of Friday, TicketIQ’s pricing data shows the average price for a Super Bowl ticket is $5,290, down 55% since the peak on Jan. 24. 

    Compared with the last ten Super Bowls, the average $5,290 per ticket is still superior to any other, besides Super Bowl LIV. 

    • Super Bowl LIV: Kansas City Chiefs vs. San Francisco 49ers (Miami) – $6,621

    • Super Bowl LIII: New England Patriots vs. Los Angeles Rams (Atlanta) – $4,331

    • Super Bowl LII: Philadelphia Eagles vs. New England Patriots (Minneapolis) – $4,788

    • Super Bowl LI: New England Patriots vs. Atlanta Falcons (Houston) – $3,967

    • Super Bowl 50: Carolina Panthers vs. Denver Broncos (Santa Clara) – $4,252

    • Super Bowl XLIV: Seattle Seahawks vs. New England Patriots (Glendale) – $4,222

    • Super Bowl XLVIII: Seattle Seahawks vs. Denver Broncos (New Jersey) – $2,516

    • Super Bowl XLVII: Baltimore Ravens vs. San Francisco 49ers (New Orleans) – $2,524

    • Super Bowl XLVI: New York Giants vs. New England Patriots (Indianapolis) – $3,040

    • Super Bowl XLV: Green Bay Packers vs. Pittsburgh Steelers (Arlington) – $3,074

    StubHub spokesperson Mike Silveira told CBS Sports, “as the event draws closer, we often see prices level off as the market more appropriately sets itself based on demand and inventory.” 

    Some local health experts believe Super Bowl LV could be a super spreader event despite strict virus measures, such as health screenings, temperature checks, mask requirements, and social distancing on stadium grounds. 

    While experts fret over the stadium being a super spreader event, a more significant concern is the parties and gatherings not tied to stadium events at bars, restaurants, and house parties around the country. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 21:00

  • Biden To Reverse Trump's Terror Designation Of Yemen's Houthis
    Biden To Reverse Trump’s Terror Designation Of Yemen’s Houthis

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    The Biden administration notified Congress that it will remove Yemen’s Houthis from the US government’s list of foreign terrorist organizations, a designation made in the last days of the Trump administration.

    “We have formally notified Congress of the Secretary’s intent to revoke these designations,” a State Department official said in a statement. “Our action is due entirely to the humanitarian consequences of this last-minute designation from the prior administration, which the United Nations and humanitarian organizations have since made clear would accelerate the world’s worst humanitarian crisis.”

    Via AFP

    Due to the US-backed Saudi-led war in Yemen that has been raging since 2015, about 80 percent of Yemenis are reliant on aid, and mass starvation has been ongoing in the country for years. The terror designation means anyone who does business with the Houthis could be targeted by US sanctions.

    It essentially criminalizes the delivery of aid and other goods to Houthi-controlled areas, where most of the population lives.

    After the Trump administration announced the designation, the UN predicted that it would cause a massive famine, the likes of which the world hasn’t seen in “40 years.” The Biden administration initially granted a temporary waiver for people to do business with the Houthis, but the UN said that was not enough and still called for the full reversal of the designation.

    The reversal comes after President Biden announced that he will end US support for Saudi Arabia’s “offensive” operations in Yemen. While it was framed to leave wiggle room for the US to support the Saudis militarily in other ways, the administration seems serious about ending the conflict.

    Biden also announced that he appointed Timothy Lenderking as the US special envoy to Yemen. Lenderking is a veteran diplomat who will work to end the fighting between the Saudis and the Houthis.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 20:30

  • Commodities Are Soaring 25%: That's Consistent With Headline Inflation Of Almost 4%
    Commodities Are Soaring 25%: That’s Consistent With Headline Inflation Of Almost 4%

    Crescat’s Tavi Costa points out something remarkable which many may have missed amid the short squeeze and “growth” stock frenzy: oil, that “value” age relic, has had its best YTD performance in 30 years. As Costa puts it “commodities are leading the way and the inflationary thesis keeps building up” (incidentally none of this is lost on those long XOM which is not only the most levered – for better or worse – way to bet on rising oil prices but pays a generous 7%+ dividend while waiting for Warren Buffett to announce that he has amassed a 10% stake).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In any case, those following the reflation theme better pay attention, because with crude oil prices joining their commodity cousins in repairing the pandemic damage, inflation rumblings are getting a little louder which means that the day central banks may be forced to tighten financial conditions (perish the thought) is nearing once again.

    Of course, with every major developed economy still printing headline and core inflation below 2%, this is not today’s problem, but there is a reason for that: metrics such as CPI and PCE are politically convenient measures that strip away virtually all basket components whose prices are surging to give central banks leeway to pursue politically acceptable policies of reflating all assets (until the bubble bursts, but by then that will be some other politician’s problem).

    Still, as BMO’s Doug Porter shows, the year-over-year rise in a basket of commodity prices (and they mostly all show a similar pattern) is now a bit above 25%. This is a problem because in the past 20 years, that’s been consistent with headline inflation of just under 4%or rather, it would be a problem if government headline inflation data actually reflected the reality of prices.

    That said, Porter notes some caveats and cautions that some of the biggest misses (where commodities popped and inflation didn’t) were immediately after recessions. That’s because there is still so much slack in the economy that cost increases don’t get fully passed along. (Note especially 2010/11.)

    Still, as the BMO strategist concludes, “barring a fast fall in resource prices, it looks like the days of sub-1% inflation are rapidly drawing to a close.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 20:00

  • "This Is For You, Dad": Interview With An Anonymous GameStop Investor
    “This Is For You, Dad”: Interview With An Anonymous GameStop Investor

    Authored by Matt Taibbi via TK News,

    Thursday, January 21st was a critical day in the story of the video game chain GameStop (ticker name: GME). Retail investors, including many subscribers to a Reddit forum called wallstreetbets, pushed the company’s stock from $6 to $43.03, but experts said playtime was over. It was time for the big shots to clean up.

    According to Citron Research, one of many funds that had bet on the brick-and-mortar store to fail, those investing in GME were “the suckers at this poker game,” and would soon be sorry when the stock went “back to $20 fast.”

    They were wrong. Instead of amateurs being shoved aside by hedge funds, it was the pros who had their backs broken, as GME soared to $65.05, beginning a steep ascent that would become an international news phenomenon.

    It was the “We’re gonna need a bigger boat” moment for Wall Street. The pros had been sloppy. By late 2020, shares in GameStop were well over 100% short. A sudden rise in value would force shorts to pay exorbitant prices just to get out of the trade. By the afternoon of the 21st, all the “suckers” on Reddit had to do to beat them was nothing, and they did just that, behind the rallying cry “diamond hands,” signifying a determination to hold at all costs.

    Why hold? One of the millions of subscribers to wallstreetbets posted a note, explaining what the trade meant to him:

    This is for you, Dad

    I remember when the housing collapse sent a torpedo through my family. My father’s concrete company collapsed almost overnight. My father lost his home. My uncle lost his home. I remember my brother helping my father count pocket change on our kitchen table. That was all the money he had left in the world. While this was happening in my home, I saw hedge funders literally drinking champagne as they looked down on the Occupy Wall Street protesters. I will never forget that.

    My father never recovered from that blow. He fell deeper and deeper into alcoholism and exists now as a shell of his former self, waiting for death.

    This is all the money I have and I’d rather lose it all than give them what they need to destroy me. Taking money from me won’t hurt me, because I don’t value it at all. I’ll burn it down just to spite them.

    This is for you, Dad.

    The post went viral, scoring over 70,000 upvotes the first day and ending up on the front page of Reddit. The author, who had gone to lengths to keep his identity private, saw his Reddit handle “Space-peanut” inundated with press requests, from podcasts all the way up to the New York Times. Stuart Varney of Fox Business News read his post out loud on live television.

    Meanwhile, on wallstreetbets, Redditor after Redditor responded with similar tales.

    “My mother lost her house that spent 20 years saving for in 2008 while raising me and my sister,” wrote one. “I remember sitting on the curb, trying to keep it together myself at 16 while watching her break down uncontrollably…”

    “My dad is a carpenter and thirty years of work, retirement, and savings was nearly wiped out,” wrote another, adding: “This is for you, Dad.”

    A third letter described a man who, having lost his dairy business after the crash, attempted suicide by shooting himself in the face in the woods. He survived, leaving his son to “carry his blown-apart body to the house,” only to finish the job by throwing himself in front of a train soon after.

    “Space-peanut” watched in awe as stories piled up. The thread soon read like the untold history of America after the 2008 financial crisis:

    The original poster, whom I’ll call SP, was unaccustomed to attention. A one-time military man and father of two, he had no other social media presence and joined Reddit exclusively to comment about stock on wallstreetbets. He was overwhelmed by what he calls “just an endless Rolodex of sad stories,” nearly all referencing the same period after the crash.

    “I think that’s why my post, however terse, hit such a nerve,” he says. “So many people were saying, ‘I have deep pain from this point in time, too.’”

    An acquaintance of a long-ago source of mine, the man reached out this week. Across several conversations, he explained what GameStop meant to him, and why. For a variety of reasons, mainly having to do with his professional situation, he asked to remain anonymous.

    SP is cautious, articulate, and well-read. In our first call, one of the first things he told me was that even growing up, he’d “always wanted to work on a trading desk.” I asked why. The answer was a three-decade story that ran all the way to GameStop. It’s reproduced below, in Q&A form.

    Since 2008, the tendency among mainstream commentators has been to shrug off reverberations from the crash that force their way into news, usually on the grounds that the millions who lost homes, careers, marriages, lifetimes of savings, health, and in thousands of cases, their lives, are not truly poor or “working class,” or are only “relatively low-wealth,” as New York magazine recently put it. In the case of GameStop, there’s been a parade of stories describing investors as dupes, dummies, financial Trumpists, irresponsible gamblers, even crooks, their trade pegged as almost everything but what on some level it surely was and is, an echo of a suppressed national disaster.

    Was GameStop “recreational” investing gone haywire, or a climax to a story building for a generation? Here’s one person’s answer:


    SP: I grew up watching my parents struggle with money. Money was discussed all the time. They fought all the time. The older I got, the more I felt I had to do anything to keep my own kids from going through the same thing.

    My parents worried in different ways. With my mother, I regularly knew how much money was in her checking account because she would stress-yell the amount whenever I asked for anything. It was really difficult for her.

    My dad was the opposite. He wanted you to think he had money, but you were looking around and thinking, “I’m pretty sure we don’t.” Because I don’t have a bed, and my brother is sleeping on a couch. So if you’ve got it, maybe we should use it, I don’t know. So they were different in that regard.

    From the time I was eight and nine, I was spending summers working. When I was with my father he thought it was important for us to do the hardest manual labor possible.

    TK: Was that supposed to be about character-building?

    SP: So my dad thought it was a good idea, but at the same time, I think he needed to go to work. And that was the best place for us to be, because I don’t think he could leave us alone all day. So he was like, “I know what we’ll do. I’ll bring you to work. You can work and then we’ll be together.” (Laughs) That was character-building, yes. I built a lot of character out there. I’d say that much. I had way too much character.

    To this day I know I can outwork people in physical labor simply because my threshold for what is considered difficult is much higher, because I spent summers as a child doing that. I’m not sure where that squares with labor laws, but it happened.

    TK: What kind of work?

    SP: At that time, we were doing field work out where we were from. So you’re doing a lot of leaching, which just is basically watching a big field fill up with water to prepare it for planting. One summer, we were doing that. And then we tore down houses. We were working with other guys who were grown men and didn’t speak English.

    Those guys would do anything to get here and take that job, especially the day laborers. They wake up super early, go to a spot where they know a contractor is going to drive by, and try to pick some of them up for the day. I mean, not an easy existence. So it’s difficult to hear people lambast a specific group of migrant workers. I feel like saying, “Hey, I know I’ve done work with migrant workers and I’ll tell you what, that would be difficult to say, ‘This is what I’m going to do my whole life.’ I’ll tell you that right now.

    TK: What did your mother do?

    SP: After the divorce was over, she moved to a new state, and she spent years starting up a new business, a dining guide in a big city. Put her own money in it. There was a lot of driving, over an hour every morning to get to the city, then appointments all day. She was a single mom at the time, so she had to get back, get the kids, take care of us. But she was doing well. She had advertising contracts lined up and after years of work, was just about ready to launch, when the dot-com bubble burst and she lost it all.

    Almost overnight, the only thing really left of the business was a fax machine in our apartment. Before, companies would be faxing her signed agreements, letters of intent, and so on. All the marketing calls would come back to that number hanging on the fax machine. So basically, anything connected with her company was coming back there.

    For a long time, she would just lay on the couch, locked in depression. The fax would go off from time to time and she wouldn’t react, she would lie there in a daze. Looking back on it, it must have been painful every time that fricking thing rang, a reminder of the thing you failed at. Just imagine, you’re so close to making it, and then an exogenous shock prevents you from achieving the dream you’d set out for yourself.

    She could’ve just let that beat her down forever. But she eventually got her shit together and was like, “Hey, I need to retool myself.” She went back to school, got a master’s degree, started teaching. My dad, on the other hand, didn’t do that. He never got over what happened.

    TK: This was the concrete company?

    SP: Right. In the 2000s, he was a superintendent at a concrete company that was very successful for a time, employed hundreds of people. I worked there, too, when I was 19. Again, there were a lot of migrant laborers doing this work too, guys who were supporting families back in Mexico. And 2008 hit, another financial collapse.

    There was such explosive growth, and all of the sudden, it was gone. My father lost his job, his house, and he just got worse and worse and worse. He’s got heart problems now, he’s on a bunch of medication. I just expect to get the call any day that he’s going to be dead. He’s just circling the drain. He’s been in and out of the hospital. He doesn’t take care of himself.

    One of the people who answered my post on Reddit talked about how he felt the crash basically robbed his father from him. That’s how it was. We used to talk five times a day, man. Talking to my dad was the most reliable thing that I could do. I talked to him and my brother four or five times a day for fifteen, twenty years. And then over the past probably four or five years, it was less and less. I think I went a full year without talking to him. He didn’t know I got married. He hasn’t seen my second daughter.

    I’ll tell you, when you look in the eyes of a grown man who has no options to support his kids, that’s devastating. I decided when I first saw that in him, I would sweat blood to make sure that never happened to my family.

    I put myself through school, going for the cheapest state tuition, and did the same for the MBA program. I was able to take out a loan and I was able to start the program a semester early, while I was still finishing undergrad, so I could economize the cost. And then I went straight through both summers and got it done really quickly, overloading my class schedule because I didn’t want to take out more loans. So I got it done for $25,000, and I was working full-time too, while I was there. Later, I was able to save up enough to get it completely discharged, though in order to do that, I had to have five roommates for four years.

    TK: Why business school, why finance?

    SP: By the time I was getting ready to go to college, my brother had already been in the Marine Corps for a few years and had already done two tours in Iraq, and it was the worst time to be there. He saw a lot of carnage. And he was saying, “You know, if you still want to be in the military, it’s a much better route if you go to college first, from what I’ve seen.” And every single person I’d ever done manual labor jobs with had said, if they could do one thing differently, they would have gone to college. They’d be on the job and put a hand on my shoulder and say, “You don’t want to have to do this when you’re 50.” Like I’m 50, I’m hanging drywall. It’s my company, but it would be nice to not have to do it.

    Anyway, I got into being a Wall Street trader when I was an undergrad. I liked the high energy. I also knew a bunch of people from my home city that grew up to be traders. (Laughs). Some of them were really dumb and some of them didn’t even finish high school, but they knew a guy who was on the floor like (mimics a Chicago accent) “And my boy Tony, he hooked me up with a jawb on the exchange…”

    But they made a lot of money. I thought, “This is ridiculous. I’m more intelligent than that guy.” He could barely do math, but he’s trading options. Still, I liked hanging out with those people. Some of them were not real class acts, but… I liked the idea that it was challenging. I just wanted to study everything I could. I knew I was going to be competing with people that had way better educational pedigrees than I did, and I needed every single edge that I could get just to get myself in the door.

    I got really interested in the question, “what were the things you look for when a company starts going into financial dire straits?” That led me down the path of finding good books that had been written in the past about major bankruptcies and collapses, books like When Genius Failed, Predator’s Ball, and A Colossal Failure of Common Sense. I was studying companies like Long Term Capital Management, which got bailed out in the late nineties.

    At the time, it was just interesting to see how, when people did their homework and took a big risk on some distressed debt, they could make a gigantic payday in one day. And I was like, man, that would be exhilarating. I even saw the original movie Wall Street and I was like, “That’s badass. Even though these guys are criminals, just the idea of being on a trading floor seems really cool.”

    Now I look back at that and think, if I’d become that person, I’d be sitting in the place of some of these hedge funds who do this all day. They go out and find companies that are going to be struggling at a specific date and time, and that’s when they start buying massive put spreads, shorting the piss out of the stock, putting it in the dirt, ensuring it will fail. I look back on it now, and it’s like, “Goddamn, that would have really sucked.” They’re two very different paths I was going down. I’m glad I chose this one.

    TK: What was the other path?

    SP: Look, I originally did all that reading because I was looking for insights on how to make money. But studying firms like Drexel Burnham Lambert, Long Term Capital Management, Lehman Brothers, I learned two other things.

    One is that these guys get bailed out. The second is that they never go to jail, even when they’re dead to rights. I think the two people that got prosecuted first after the financial crisis were the two Bear Stearns hedge fund managers. The implosion of those two hedge funds was the canary in the coal mine, because that was the death knell for the coming crash.

    These two guys had emails back and forth, talking about how fraudulent their products were. Talking about how they’re totally screwing over clients, in writing! And not one of them went to jail. And who did they go after at that time? Bernie Madoff. He was the one person who went to jail. Why did he get prosecuted? Because he stole from the rich!

    TK: They even made a movie about it, starring Robert DeNiro

    SP: Exactly! How come they didn’t make any movies about these other horrible people that profited off of the destruction of the economy? The people who ran Countrywide, or the people who were working at the ratings agencies, who knew the things they were rating were fraudulent? Even just down at the mortgage origination level. They made tons of money, and not one of those people went to jail.

    Anyway, I didn’t go that route. After I got my MBA, I joined the military.

    TK: Why?

    SP: My brother at the time had already been out of the Marines for a while. He was working for a hedge fund out in California. And his boss was very, very old, in his nineties. I thought, “Man, you can literally die at your desk at 100 years old in finance, but there’s only a short window that you can serve the nation, and once that, once that door closes, it never opens again.” So I joined, went to Officer Candidate School, got in, went to other countries, saw a lot of very, very poor places, which gave me some perspective. Long story short, I ended up working as a software engineer.

    TK: How did you get into online investing? 

    SP: I was still keeping up with all my financial periodicals, because I knew one day I was going to step back into that world. I was able to start making stock picks for myself. The first real investment I made was in Netflix when it was still double digits. I made a brokerage account with my bank and threw some money in there and started going at it.

    The industry was really changing. Robinhood’s slogan is “Democratizing Finance,” but really it’s the computer science industry democratizing finance, because all those tools that used to be proprietary are free now, included in your trading app.

    If you make a TD Ameritrade account, you can run, think or swim. It’s like a mini Bloomberg terminal. You’re not going to get the same richness of data, but you’re going to get a significant amount that you normally wouldn’t ten years ago. And in places like wallstreetbets, I was meeting people who clearly used to or still did work on Wall Street, who would teach you, for free, how to do things like recognize distressed companies, research their debt covenants, look up public data about who was invested in what, and so on.

    There’s one guy, he goes by the name fuzzy blankeet — it’s surreal on wallstreetbets, you discuss such serious topics with such ridiculously named people — who was teaching us how to be distressed debt buyers. These are really intelligent people, just giving away knowledge.

    A lot of the tools we have now, it used to be only people working at the top hedge funds on Wall Street had access to that information. So a lot of the barriers had collapsed. But the system is still skewed, which I started to see more clearly when the pandemic hit.

    TK: How so?

    I remember last March, just as the pandemic was taking hold, I was watching CNBC, and Bill Ackman, the big hedge fund guy, basically saying it’s the end of the American economy. He’s saying, “Shutdown is inevitable,” and calling for everything to be closed except essential services:

    At the time, I was wrapped up in the doom, on the side of, “I don’t think we’re prepared for what’s coming.” Because I was watching the videos coming out of China and thinking, “There are people just passing out. That’s not normal. I think that’s bad.” I saw a video of somebody being welded into his apartment, and I again, I thought, that seems bad. Seeing Ackman on TV, I was like, “I think he’s right.”

    As time went on, though, that moment bothered me. I thought, “That fuck, he’s causing the panic.”

    I guarantee a lot of people were like, “Bill Ackman’s a smart dude. He’s a lot more successful investor than I am, and he says shit’s about to hit the fan. I better start buying some protection. I don’t know, short really volatile, high flying stocks, and maybe buy a lot of put spreads.” But then we all know what happened after that.

    TK: That broadcast was March 18th, so the $2 trillion bailout was announced a week after. The market had been plummeting straight down, but it bounced right back up and kept going.

    SP: It’s the COVID-19 sell-off and pump. It’s what these guys do. It really does feel as though CNBC is a participant in market manipulation for the rich. These hedge fund guys go on air and it’s like they’re trying to spook the herd in the direction of their trades. They tell everyone to get out when they’re short, and once all the meat is all off the bone, they go long, just in time for the recovery. They get to call the top and the bottom of the market. It’s totally fucked.

    The bailout and the pandemic just exposed how there are different sets of rules, not just for different types of investors, but different types of businesses. Your favorite sandwich shop? Closed. If you’ve got 200 of those sandwich shops? Open.

    If you had sufficient capital to lobby whatever your government is, you could get an exemption, but if you were a small-time business owner, you were out of luck, and that just made no sense to me. I was like, “We’re just making this up on the fly.”

    TK: When did you first pay attention to GameStop?

    SP: I remember people posting about the GameStop potential short squeeze last summer. I definitely didn’t catch any of the attention earlier than that, but I didn’t get the trade. I’ll be honest with you. I saw the potential there. I really did, but I was like, there’s just so much going against you on that. And at the same time, the business needs to make money and they’re in debt and they’re not making money.

    But at some point, once this all started, I started to think about it. We’re in a pandemic, and there are all these people who couldn’t work all year. Or they’re small businesses that don’t have the political impact. They’re going to take the loss. And in the middle of all this misery, you have a group of the most cancerous rent-seekers on earth, aligning to destroy this company GameStop, because they decided it shouldn’t exist anymore.

    And it was GameStop! It’s such a visceral symbol for people in my generation. Even for me, in all those bad times growing up, it was always a nice memory just to go to a strip mall, go in the store, check out a game or two. I like GameStop. Everyone remembers going to GameStop. It’s part of what made it such an obvious rallying cry.

    That was it for me. I found myself thinking, I didn’t care if I lost every last dollar doing it, I was going to put it on GameStop, just to see them panic for once. Even if for just one moment they have to think about how they’re going to make their payments for their Manhattan apartments, that’s worth it. They’re playing these games while there are people out there who can’t afford Christmas presents for their kids, can’t afford food. What are these families supposed to do?

    Meanwhile those guys at the hedge funds, they’re not sharing that fear. Why should they? They’re going to get bailed out anyway.

    TK: One criticism of the GME traders is that while there are billion-dollar shorts losing on the other side, there are also big money managers on the long side, essentially using what some call “recreational” day-traders as camouflage. What do you say to that?

    There are definitely some high net worth individuals in wallstreetbets, and they were probably making good money early on, incidentally getting some good research done for free and getting in on some trades early. But there are a lot of small-time investors in there, too. The forum is so big, there’s probably a healthy bell curve of every demographic in there now. To say that the forum is made up of people who are just sitting in the basement, and don’t really have anything to lose, that’s not right. A lot of people may not care about the money not because they have too much, but too little. It may be their stimulus check, and they’re saying, “Well, I don’t have anything anyway. This was my only way to maybe make something, but I’d rather send a message with it.”

    TK: What’s Robinhood’s role?

    SP: Imagine that Wall Street is a big building, Robinhood is basically letting you into the lobby. The barrier to entry to buying and trading and stocks and options with apps like Robinhood really is very low. What we’ve discovered in the last ten days, though, is that the pen they built for us does not scale well. Big shocker!

    It’s ironic, for a brokerage that’s primarily run by software engineers, that they seem never to have thought about the edge case of millions of people transferring in thousands of dollars in one day, and all buying the same security. I don’t think that they really thought about, “Hey, what if this happens?”

    TK: GameStop crested last Thursday, January 28th, when Robinhood and other platforms began restricting trades in GME and other stocks. Robinhood obviously makes its money selling its “order flow” to a major high-frequency trader, Citadel, which was likely also the firm that made capital calls on Robinhood during the GME frenzy.

    A lot of Reddit investors believe Citadel and its billionaire CEO Ken Griffin used those collateral calls to pressure Robinhood into restricting trading in GME. Some press analysts think that explanation is conspiratorial. What’s your take?

    SP: Whether or not they were pressured to kill the rally doesn’t matter. The effect was the same. Robinhood’s restriction killed the rally, a hundred percent. That was the only thing that gave all the firms that had short interests a chance to try to recover. Now, the thing that is really insidious is some retail brokerages that locked out their retail traders, if you had an account with a certain minimum amount of money in it, you could call the customer service line that was reserved for your level of account and they would turn trading back on.

    So two people using the same trading app could have different market access. It’s just like we were talking about before. When the GameStop thing started, the shorts were like, “Hey, let’s just kill this business because it’s a pandemic, they’re going to close anyway, let’s just destroy it.” And then, once we started kicking it in the balls, they changed the game and killed the trade. It was like, “Okay, of course, of course.”

    As for the conspiracy charge, it makes me laugh. JP Morgan Chase last fall settled for $920 million or whatever in a case involving spoofing in the metals markets. Before that, they would have said, there’s no such thing as spoofing! Same with manipulation of LIBOR. Once upon a time, if you accused the banks of manipulating LIBOR, they’d say, “That’s a conspiracy theory.” Then there were settlements and now everyone knows it happened. With these people, it’s always a conspiracy until it isn’t. Once they’re found out, it’s like, “Oh, you caught us. You’re right. It wasn’t a conspiracy. But this other thing, that’s a conspiracy. That’s not happening.”

    TK: What was your reaction to the press coverage of GameStop?

    SP: The majority of the media that I’ve seen on WallStreetBets is just incorrect. The stuff that came out really early was trying to label it as a far right-ish type movement, and they got smacked down really hard on that because that’s the opposite of what happens in there. The forum is not political at all. If you post any political bullshit, that is the fastest way to get banned. There’s literally a rule, “No political bullshit.” Nobody wants to hear it. It’s strictly to talk about trades.

    TK: What’s the future of wallstreetbets?

    SP: I’m fearful of what could happen. The forum is big now. It’s never going to be ignored again. There are two opposing forces. You have big businesses that are going to try to channel this movement to benefit themselves. But at the same time, you’ve got a lot of long-time people who’ve been on there who can sniff out a fraud pretty quickly.

    It’s going to be a cat and mouse game. We already see it happening. The biggest one was in silver. Silver is often used as a way for large owners of silver, like in the SLVETF, to cover losses elsewhere. Last week I saw zero advertisements to buy Gamestop stock. Over the weekend, I saw countless news articles and advertisements all over to buy physical bullion. They’re saying, “Silver is going to get pumped. The Reddit crowd is turning to silver.”

    TK: Yahoo! had “Silver Squeeze: How to join the Reddit Bandwagon.” CNBC had, “Is Silver the Next GameStop?” It was like wallstreetbets went Hollywood.

    SP: I’m like, “I’ve got to call bullshit on this.” Now, if a large institutional owner of an asset was to, I don’t know, take out a bunch of ads and hire some people to post on wallstreetbets and maybe hire some botnets through a cut-out, would that be legal? Sounds like a pump and dump to me, but it also sounds difficult to prove. I’m not saying it’s happened. I’m saying it’s odd, and it’s very possible.

    There’s going to be a constant battle to direct the Sauron-like gaze of this board now. It’s going to be very difficult to get ahead of that, just like it’s difficult to know what the number one meme is for next month.

    TK: Was a message sent in the GameStop story, and if so, what was it?

    You had a leaderless group rise up and use whatever market power they had, whether it was buying a hundred thousand shares, or one. Some very established traders who trade for themselves frequent those boards. And then you had people who saw the message, they saw the Batman symbol and they rallied to that. You know how many messages I saw in the thread, of people just lining up? It meant something to them. They got to buy a fractional share of the hero’s journey.

    But the trade was destroyed. Whether or not that was intentional is not for me to say. All I can say is what happened. Retail brokerages all of a sudden stopped allowing their clients to trade, unless they were of a certain net worth. Banks could do it. Hedge funds could keep doing it. They could still be in the trade. But you and I could not. We could only sell. We could only do the one thing that they would need us to do, to get themselves out of the quagmire. And it wasn’t about price at that point. It was about control of physical shares that would allow you to cover.

    So yeah, a message got sent. But one was also received. They basically said, “We understand the message you’re sending. And here’s the message we’re sending back.”

    But it was worth it.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 19:46

  • Raskin: Trump's Decision Not To Testify May Be Cited As Evidence Of His Guilt
    Raskin: Trump’s Decision Not To Testify May Be Cited As Evidence Of His Guilt

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    Over the last four years, we have seen an alarming trend of law professors and legal experts discarding constitutional and due process commitments to support theories for the prosecution or impeachment of Donald Trump or his family.  Legal experts who long defended criminal defense rights have suddenly become advocates of the most sweeping interpretations of criminal or constitutional provisions while discarding basic due process  and fairness concerns.   Even theories that have been clearly rejected by the Supreme Court have been claimed to be valid in columns. No principle seems inviolate when it stands in the way of a Trump prosecution.

    Yet, the statement of House manager Rep. Jamie Raskin, D-Md., this week was breathtaking.

    A former law professor, Raskin declared that the decision of Trump not to testify in the Senate could be cited or used by House managers as an inference of his guilt — a statement that contradicts not just our constitutional principles but centuries of legal writing.

    Presidents have historically not testified at impeachment trials.  One reason is that, until now, only sitting presidents have been impeached and presidents balked at the prospect of being examined as head of the Executive Branch by the Legislative Branch. Moreover, it was likely viewed as undignified and frankly too risky.  Indeed, most defense attorneys routinely discourage their clients from testifying in actual criminal cases because the risks outweigh any benefits. Finally, Trump is arguing that this trial is unconstitutional and thus he would be even less likely to depart from tradition and appear as a witness.

    Despite the historical precedent for presidents not testifying, Raskin made an extraordinary and chilling declaration on behalf of the House of Representatives.  He wrote in a letter to Trump that:

    “If you decline this invitation, we reserve any and all rights, including the right to establish at trial that your refusal to testify supports a strong adverse inference regarding your actions (and inaction) on January 6, 2021.”

    Raskin justified his position by noting that Trump “denied many factual allegations set forth in the article of impeachment.” Thus, he insisted Trump needed to testify or his silence is evidence of guilt. Under this theory, any response other than conceding the allegations would trigger this response and allow the House to use the silence of the accused as an inference of guilt.

    The statement conflicts with one of the most precious and revered principles in American law that a refusal to testify should not be used against an accused party.

    The statement also highlighted the fact that the House has done nothing to lock in testimony of those who could shed light on Trump’s intent.  After using a “snap impeachment,” the House let weeks pass without any effort to call any of the roughly dozen witnesses who could testify on Trump’s statements and conduct in the White House. Many of those witnesses have already given public interviews.

    Of course, the relative passivity of the House simply shows a lack of effort to actually win this case.  The Raskin statement is far more disturbing. The Fifth Amendment embodies this touchstone of American law in declaring that “[n]o person . . . shall be compelled in any criminal case to be a witness against himself.”  It was a rejection of the type of abuses associated with the infamous Star Chamber in Great Britain. As the Supreme Court declared in 1964, it is the embodiment of “many of our fundamental values and most noble aspirations.”  Murphy v. Waterfront Commission, 378 U.S. 52, 55 (1964).

    Central to this right is the added protection that the silence of an accused cannot be used against him in the way suggested by Raskin. There was a time when members of Congress not only respected this rule but fought to amplify it. For example, in 1878, Congress was enacting a law that addressed testimonial rights but expressly stated that the failure of an accused to request to testify “shall not create any presumption against him.”

    The Supreme Court has been adamant that the type of inference sought by Raskin is abhorrent and abusive in courts of law. In Griffin v. California, 380 U.S. 609 (1964), the Court reviewed a California rule of evidence which permitted adverse comment on a defendant’s failure to testify.  The California rule sounded strikingly like Raskin’s position and mandated that a defendant’s “failure to explain or to deny by his testimony any evidence or facts in the case against him may be commented upon by the court and by counsel, and may be considered by the court or the jury.”  The Court rejected such references or reliance by prosecutors as unconstitutional.

    Later in Carter v. Kentucky, the Supreme Court held that “the privilege to remain silent is of a very different order of importance . ..from the ‘mere etiquette of trials and …the formalities and minutiae of procedure.’” It goes to the most fundamental principles of justice in our legal system.

    In the past, when such concerns have been raised, members and pundits have reached for the “anything goes” theory of impeachment. Such principles are dismissed as relevant in the purely “political” process of impeachment. I have long rejected this view. This is not a political exercise. It is a constitutional exercise. These senators do not take the take to act as politicians but to act as constitutional actors in compliance with the standards and procedures laid out for impeachments. It would make this process a mockery if, in claiming to uphold constitutional values, members like Raskin destroy the very foundations of constitutional rights.

    Yet, Harvard Professor Laurence Tribe (who has routinely favored any interpretation that disfavors Trump) declared Raskin correct promising to use a decision not to testify as evidence of guilt: “If Mr. Trump declines the chance to clear his name by showing up and explaining under oath why his conduct on January 6 didn’t make him responsible for the lethal insurrection that day, it’ll be on him. He can’t have it both ways.” No, it is on us. The House cannot have it both ways in declaring that it is upholding constitutional values while gutting them.

    It is true that this is not a criminal trial. It is a constitutional trial. As such, the Senate should try an accused according to our highest traditions and values.  That includes respecting the right to remain silent and not to have “inferences” drawn from the fact that (like prior presidents) Trump will not be present at the trial or give testimony.

    This is not the first time that reason has been left a stranger in our age of rage. There appears no price too great to pay to impeach or prosecute Trump. Now, the House is arguing against one of the very touchstones of our constitutional system and legal experts are silent.  If everything is now politics, this trial is little more than a raw partisanship cloaked in constitutional pretense.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 19:30

  • 115 Inmates Spark Fires In Downtown St. Louis Jail Over COVID Concerns 
    115 Inmates Spark Fires In Downtown St. Louis Jail Over COVID Concerns 

    More than 100 hundred inmates overpowered correction officers at the City Justice Center in downtown St. Louis early Saturday morning. They gained control of one section of the jail for hours. 

    About 115 detainees commandeered the fourth floor of the jail around 0230 ET, sparking fires, smashing windows, clogging toilets, and flooding floors, according to the St. Louis Post-Dispatch. It was the third disturbance at the prison in recent months.

    Law enforcement officers regained control of the jail around 1030 ET, Jacob Long, spokesman for Mayor Lyda Krewson, told the St. Louis Post-Dispatch, adding that all inmates are back in custody. 

    Jimmie Edwards, the city’s Department of Public Safety director, told reporters that one corrections office was injured and taken to a local hospital after a melee with inmates. 

    Edwards said there’s been an ongoing issue with the prison’s locks. Though he didn’t mention if the faulty locks were the trigger of today’s chaos. 

    Long said 115 detainees on the fourth-floor set fires, smashed windows, flooded floors, and clogged toilets. Around 0630 ET, inmates shattered windows to the building’s exterior – many of them could be seen with orange and yellow jumpsuits holding signs. 

    More scenes of the chaos. 

    Doyle Murphy, an editor of local newspaper Riverfront Times, captured video of the prisoners throwing items out broken windows in front of the jail. He said, “Inmates at St. Louis Justice Center have taken over at least part of the jail. There have been protests over COVID-19 dangers inside. Not sure if this is part of that.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Long said the situation was a “very dangerous disturbance” but has since been resolved. At the time of the riot, there were 633 people in custody at the jail. 

    The Marshall Project examines COVID-19 infections in state and federal prisons in a separate report. Between Nov. 10 and Dec. 22, there was a noticeable rise in infections at jails. 

    This is the third riot at the facility in a matter of months as inmates “had expressed concern about unsafe conditions amid the coronavirus pandemic,” said St. Louis Post-Dispatch.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 19:00

  • Goldman: Does Valuation Still Matter?
    Goldman: Does Valuation Still Matter?

    One week ago, when traders were still enthralled by the ongoing marketwide short squeeze, which started off as an isolated reddit attempt to (successfully) punish GME shorts such as Melvin Capital, and which cascaded into a widespread liquidation of most popular names as a wave of VaR shocks hit countless hedge funds which had no choice but to rapidly degross and puke their most popular, liquid and profitable positions as their shorts spiked unleashing industrywide margin calls and leading to the biggest alpha drawdown in history…

    … we summarized recent events in a simple and succinct fashion: “What it all boils down to: the market has been broken since 2009, but broken in moderation and everyone is happy, the rich get richer, etc. But if someone (WSB, whoever) take this breakage to its absurd extreme (where stock prices no longer reflect anything), everything breaks”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And for a few seconds… everything did break, and only the rapid intervention of regulators/DTCC forcing Robinhood to effectively shutdown trading is what gave the system on full tilt the critical time it needed to take a breath force a reset and reverse the momentum.

    Now, in a post-mortem to recent events, Goldman – which last week warned that if the squeeze isn’t halted, the consequences for market could be dire – wrote a somewhat lengthier take on what happened but its conclusion is similar: the price formation mechanism – and the fundamental investing process itself – broke when millions of retail investors (and a handful of very wily hedge fund investors) plowed into a the most shorted stocks, leading to an unprecedented disconnect between price and value.

    It certainly explains why Goldman’s David Kostin starts off with what may well be the best quote to describe recent events:

    More than a century ago and written in a completely different context, Oscar Wilde, the Irish playwright, penned a perfect description of the social psychology underpinning a short squeeze. In Lady Windermere’s Fan, one character asks, “What is a cynic?” The friend responds, “A man who knows the price of everything, and the value of nothing.” The dialogue continues, and the original inquirer states, “And a sentimentalist is a man who sees an absurd value in everything, and doesn’t know the market price of a single thing.”

    Needless to say, a lot of cynics and sentimentalists were unleashed in the past two weeks.

    As Kostin recaps recent events, “every financial market participant knows the recent sequence of events. An extraordinarily high short interest position in a few small cap stocks, most prominently GameStop (GME), was stampeded by a group of social media inspired retail investors. A flurry of odd-lot cash orders and out-of-the-money call options supercharged the stock price and forced short-covering at higher and higher share prices. The situation was compounded because the retail buy orders were placed with broker-dealers which suspended processing trade orders in order to meet the minimum capital requirements of the Depository Trust & Clearing Corp (DTCC). This sequence of events happened within just a few days and caused an epic short squeeze. Billions of dollars were made and lost as share prices rocketed higher and then collapsed within the span of a week.”

    But so what: it’s not like this was the first time something like this happened: after all back in Sept 2008 when the world was crashing, a similar short squeeze made Volkswagen the world’s most valuable company… if only for a few hours.

    Well, it appears this time was different because unlike back then, the current squeeze happened in a context where virtually everyone was forced to reassess the core principle and tenets of capital markets, or as Kostin poetically puts it:

    The market implications of the stock price swings are both very significant and completely inconsequential.

    Expounding on this claim, the Goldman chief market strategist says that “those two assessments are not in conflict.” Laying out the case first for why the marketwide short squeeze was a tempest in a teapot, to use the parlance of Jamie Dimon, Kostin says that while what happened was although certainly dramatic, “the wild price action of a few small-cap stocks was dwarfed by the rest of the companies in the market both in terms of scale of business activity and equity capitalization. Corporate fundamentals have been much stronger than expected. During the past month, upward estimate revisions for full-year 2021 EPS have occurred across all 11 sectors. Last week, S&P 500 fell by 3.6% from a then-record high. This week, it rebounded to establish a new high and is up 3% YTD.”

    Ok fine, but good luck telling Melvin Capital (or Ken Griffin, or Steve Cohen for that matter) that what happened was “completely inconsequential.” They are more likely to focus on the “yes but” part of Kostin’s assessment, namely that… 

    The disorderly sequence of events has implications for market structure and oversight. The House Financial Services Committee has scheduled hearings on February 18th to explore recent market volatility in a session titled: “Game Stopped? Who Wins and Loses When Short Sellers, Social Media, and Retail Investors Collide.” Topics likely to be addressed include payment for order flow, capitalization of broker-dealers, rejection of customer trade orders, trade settlement, mechanics of price-vs. liquidity-driven short-covering, and the gamification of retail investing.

    Going back to the actual squeeze, Goldman writes that several aspects of the trading in GME shares are worth noting.

    First, from a positioning perspective, for more than a year the short interest in GME exceeded 100% of the float of the company, and it reached 140% in January, a “situation which is highly unusual” because during the last 10 years, Goldman has found only 15 instances when the short interest outstanding exceeded 100% of a company’s float, and as the bank explains, perhaps for the cheap seats, “extremely elevated short interest is a pre-condition if a major short squeeze is going to occur” (we wonder if Goldman, or WSB for that matter, has ever looked at the short interest in the XRT ETF)

    Second, and going back to the quote above, Kostin notes that “the acerbic lines from Wilde’s 1892 play perfectly capture the situation: The entire episode was all about price, and nothing about valuation” as “social media commentary typically referenced price action with lofty targets sometimes illustrated with rocket ship emojis. We almost never read a comment about valuation because the rally implied an astronomical P/E multiple.” Great point David – now maybe you can extrapolate a little beyond what you just said, and tell your clients some more about how the trillions in liquidity sloshing around market have made price and valuations so disonnected even you are forced to only showing the hilariously wrong Fed model as the only justification to keep buying stonks so they can hit your year-end price target of 4,300. Yeah, didn’t think so…

    Still, that didn’t stop the Goldman strategist from decomposing Oscar Wilde’s quote into its components as they applied to GME:

    • The price of everything. GME shares traded at an average price of $13.50 during 2018. The stock then fell sharply and between mid-2019 and mid-2020 (a period stretching from well before through the bottom of the Covidcrisis) the stock traded sideways at $5 per share. A 4Q rally pushed the shares to $19 at year-end. The explosion in stock price since the start of 2021 has been breathtaking. On Jan 13th the stock hit $30, rose to $40 the next day, and had jumped to $65 by Jan 22. The progression during the five days from Jan 25 to Jan 29 was epic: $77, $148, $348, $193, and the stock ended the month at $325, up 1,600% since the start of the year. However, this week the shares have plunged by 80% to $64.

    • The value of nothing. Long before the pandemic, revenues for GME fell by 22% from 2018 to 2019 followed by an additional 20% drop last year. The plunge in earnings has been even more dramatic. In 2019 –pre-pandemic –EPS fell by 92%. In 2020, GME posted a loss (-$2.18) and analysts expect a loss in 2021 (-$0.17). Consensus projects GME will return to profitability in 2022. However, the forecast EPS in 2022 (+$1.35) is only half the realized EPS in 2018 (+$2.70) back when the shares traded at an average price of $13.50 (low of $11; high of $17) (see Exhibit 3).

    Next, the Goldman chief strategist stubbornly keeps trying to make the point that what happened was an aberration of efficient markets and a “completely inconsequential” impossibility from a fundamental standpoint, as if anyone would even dream of arguing that GME would ever trade above $500 on its own merits…

    The absurdity of the January spike in GME share price becomes readily apparent when viewed through the lens of implied valuation. The implied P/E on projected 2022 EPS two years into the future soared from 14x at year-end 2020 to more than 250x at the peak on Jan 27, before retreating to the current P/E of 42x. For context, the shares of Tesla (TSLA), a stock that has both skeptics and cheerleaders around its valuation, but is widely viewed to have strong growth prospects –consensus forecasts a doubling in sales and a quadrupling of EPS between 2020 and 2022 –trades at 140x expected 2022 EPS following its stunning 780% rise last year (just half the percentage gain in GME shares in January 2021). The more mundane S&P 500 index trades at 20x our 2022E EPS of $196.

    … without even for a second stopping to consider that it was the Federal Reserve that made this peak absurdity possible. Why? Because in a market where virtually all valuations are in their 100% percentile…

    … and where the thread between price and value is barely present across most “serious” companies which are trading at 100x or even 1000x of future earnings and revenues, all the GME daytrading public did was to sever any pretense of linkages between fundamentals and prices and as a result, quickly took prices to their absurd extreme which in the case of GME meant $513.12 per share early in the morning of Thursday, January 28…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 18:30

  • Democratic Bill To Target Social Media Giants Over Failure To Police Threats
    Democratic Bill To Target Social Media Giants Over Failure To Police Threats

    Democratic Sen. Mark Warner (VA) is set to introduce a bill which would make it easier for social media users to sue tech giants for failing to police posts, photos and videos which threaten abuse, discrimination, harassment, the loss of life or other irreparable harm, according to the Washington Post.

    Warner’s bill is the latest attack on Section 230, a decades-old federal rule which shields social media companies from liability over what their users post as long as they don’t act as publishers – an angle Republican lawmakers have used to claim no longer applies due to editorial discrimination and censorship of conservatives.

    Democrats, meanwhile, say Section 230 allows tech companies to skirt responsibility for policing hate speech, election disinformation and other ‘dangerous content’ according to the report.

    Yet, while Republicans seek to strip tech giants of their Section 230 protections, Warner’s bill maintains its core provisions – and would instead open an “easier legal pathway” for users to sue over failures to police content that they claim caused personal harm.

    How can we continue to give this get-out-of-jail card to these platforms that constantly do nothing to address the foreseeable, obvious and repeated misuse of their products and services to cause harm? That was kind of our operating premise,” said Warner.

    Ultimately, it would be up to a judge to decide the merits of these claims; the bill mostly opens the door for Web users to argue their cases without running as much risk of having them dismissed early. Facebook, Google, Twitter and other social media sites stand to lose these highly coveted federal protections under Warner’s bill only in the case of abusive paid content, such as online advertisements, that seek to defraud or scam customers.

    You shouldn’t get immunity from this advertising content that’s providing you revenue,” said Warner, who is introducing the measure along with Democratic Sens. Amy Klobuchar (Minn.) and Mazie Hirono (Hawaii). –Washington Post

    Warner’s bill comes after a mob of mostly Trump-supporters ‘stormed’ the US Capitol on Jan. 6 to protest the counting of the Electoral College votes for Joe Biden – many of whom coordinated over social media. And as WaPo frames it, the ordeal raises questions “about the extent to which Facebook, Google and Twitter, and a vast web of lesser-known forums, are properly policing their sites and services.”

    “I’m going to be very interested to see how the industry reacts to this,” said Warner in an interview this week previewing his bill. “It’s going to be where the rubber hits the road. Are they going to pay lip service to reform?”

    The incident has injected fresh urgency into familiar calls to rethink Section 230, which intensified last year amid a flood of proposals from Democrats and Republicans seeking to overhaul or repeal the law. In response, the country’s largest technology companies have sought to tread carefully: Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg and his fellow executives have signaled an openness to changing Section 230, but the companies have not endorsed the most sweeping proposals that would hold them accountable for their missteps.

    In seeking to sketch out his proposal, Warner said its passage could have wide-ranging effects: It could allow the survivors in the Rohingya genocide in Myanmar to sue Facebook, for example, because the social network had been slow to take down content that stoked ethnic tensions. –Washington Post

    “If there are going to be victims of platform-enabled human rights violations,” said Warner, adding “that should not be thrown out of court.”

    According to David Brody, a senior fellow for privacy and technology at the Lawyers’ Committee for Civil Rights Under Law, “This bill would make irresponsible big tech companies accountable for the digital pollution they knowingly and willfully produce, while continuing to protect free speech online.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 18:00

  • Mike Rowe: Americans Are Realizing "The Price Of Safety Is Devastating"
    Mike Rowe: Americans Are Realizing “The Price Of Safety Is Devastating”

    More than a year after the coronavirus arrived in the United States, American are “starting to understand the importance of balance again,” Mike Rowe told “The Story” Friday.

    Fox News’ Michael Quinlan reports on the ‘Dirty Jobs’ host’s reality check for all Americans:

    “Several months ago, New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo said no measure, no matter how draconian, could be deemed unwise if it saves but a single life,” the “Six Degrees with Mike Rowe” host told Martha MacCallum.

    “I got a lot of flak when he said that, because I said, ‘That is a safety-first way of thinking’, and deep down we’re not a safety-first society.”

    “Now we’re starting to see the price of safety is devastating,” Rowe added. 

    “What is happening right now in the energy industry is really the thing that I think we ought to be focused on, because there feels to me, and feels to a lot of people I talk to on a day-to-day basis, like a concerted effort to wage a kind of war against energy. It’s not a war we can win, especially with regard to fossil fuels and all of the jobs that are wrapped up in that industry. I don’t mean to sound like an apologist, but I know of no greater investor in alternative energy than the fossil fuel industry.” 

    MacCallum brought the discussion back to the issue of safety, saying, “We’re a country that was built on risk-taking. We want to take wise risks, we don’t want to be reckless, but that element of being strong and fighting through is something that I think is such an American value.

    “Risk is the only four-letter word that matters,” Rowe agreed.

     “It impacts and informs every decision we make, from driving a car to walking around without a mask or wearing one mask or two masks.”

    “We’re starting to see,” Rowe concluded, “if you elevate the business of staying alive to the very, very top of all things, then the only thing you’ll ever do is stay alive. You won’t go anywhere. You won’t try anything or build anything.”

    Watch the entire interview below:

    https://video.foxnews.com/v/embed.js?id=6229577751001&w=466&h=263Watch the latest video at foxnews.com

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 17:30

  • Russia's "Sputnik V" COVID Vaccine A Surprise Global Hit
    Russia’s “Sputnik V” COVID Vaccine A Surprise Global Hit

    Bloomberg, one of the most implicitly pro-western media outlets in existence, has finally admitted, after months of promoting skepticism, that Russian COVID-19 vaccine trail data published by The Lancet shows that the Kremlin might have a surprise international success. Just days after NYT columnist Thomas Friedman accused President Putin of trusting “what comes out of the ground more than the stuff that might come out of his people’s heads,” Bloomberg reports that 20 countries, including key markets like India and Brazil, are already lining up to buy the vaccine.

    Source: Bloomberg

    With an efficacy rate above 90%, Russia’s vaccine, developed by the country’s Gamelaya Institute with support from Russia’s sovereign wealth fund, has been found to be more effective than China’s, which is why several countries – including EU member Hungary, are lining up to buy it.

    At least 20 countries have approved the inoculation for use, including European Union member-state Hungary, while key markets such as Brazil and India are close to authorizing it. Now Russia is setting its sights on the prized EU market as the bloc struggles with its vaccination program amid supply shortages.

    In the global battle to defeat a pandemic that’s claimed 2.3MM lives in little more than a year, the race to obtain vaccines has assumed geopolitical significance as governments seek to emerge from the huge social and economic damage caused by lockdowns imposed to limit the spread of the virus. That’s giving Russia an edge as one of a handful of countries where scientists have produced an effective defense.

    The story quoted the head of the Russian sovereign wealth fund which financed the vaccine project.

    “This is a watershed moment for us,” Kirill Dmitriev, chief executive officer of the state-run Russian Direct Investment Fund, which backed Sputnik V’s development and is in charge of its international roll-out, said in an interview.

    Regardless of the success of the vaccine, Bloomberg adds it won’t do much to change Putin’s reputation in the West.

    Sputnik’s success won’t change hostility toward Putin among Western governments, though it could strengthen Russia’s geopolitical clout in regions such as Latin America, according to Oksana Antonenko, a director at Control Risks consultancy.

    “With this vaccine, it’s proven itself capable of producing something new that’s in demand around the world,” she said.

    Production constraints are the biggest challenge facing all manufacturers as global demand far outpaces supply. Russia, pledging free shots for its 146 million population, began output last year and the vaccine is currently being manufactured in countries including India, South Korea and Brazil.

    Yet, despite Russia’s supervillain status with the US and Europe, frustration with Putin’s tactics has never stopped the EU from buying Russian energy products.

    Why should it stop them from buying the vaccine?

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 17:00

  • Trump Jr.: "Here's What Comes Next for Our Amazing Movement"
    Trump Jr.: “Here’s What Comes Next for Our Amazing Movement”

    Authored by Mimi Nguyen Ly via The Epoch Times,

    Donald Trump Jr.., the son of former President Donald Trump, said that efforts from the former president and his team to advance the interests of the United States are continuing. He characterized such efforts as “a movement of the people … against the elite.”

    In a video on Trump Jr.’s social media accounts, headlined “here’s what comes next for our amazing movement,” he told supporters, “Just want to make sure everyone knows, guys, we are not done yet.”

    https://telegram.org/js/telegram-widget.js?14

    Trump Jr. then shared a recent video clip that showed his father walking off the golf course while saying, “We haven’t finished yet.”

    “He’s actually accurate,” Trump Jr. said of his father’s remarks.

    “The reality is this movement isn’t over. All of the blood, sweat, and tears that you guys have all put into this thing is very much still alive and well. You see that. I mean, this is really a movement of the people, a movement against the establishment, a movement against the elite.”

    He continued:

    “A lot of those things have been brewing for quite some time. And that’s why for me I’m still standing engaged and we’re going to get in there and fight to elect people who really represent the people—people like you who have gone through so much.”

    Trump Jr. said that the former president is still “going to be in that fight.”

    “I know he’s still going to keep going. I know we’re up against a lot, we always have been,” Trump Jr. said, later adding that is father is “going to be in there making sure that we have people who truly represent what America is all about.”

    The former president’s son moved on to speak about how fact checkers on social media appear to be biased against conservatives while lenient toward “the other side.” Drawing from his personal experience, he said that his content is fact checked “even if there’s even a little bit” of irregularity.

    “When I look at things that I put up on my social media that are totally objective or that are satire, one or the other, that [social media content] gets fact checked so that they can use that to knock my platform, to prevent me from getting any kind of reach,” he said. “I see that stuff on a daily basis, I don’t see that on the other side. I don’t see Joe Biden getting fact checked when he said he’s not going to ban fracking, when he bans fracking.”

    He added, “If there’s even a little bit of ambiguity they get the benefit of the doubt, whereas if there’s even a little bit, a modicum, something like I said, subjective, who’s to know what the fact checker’s thinking, but certainly I know what I’m thinking and I can come up with a parameter that makes everything correct but the fact checkers can say that it falls outside of those lines.

    “Joe Biden, not one tweet—as many incorrect ones that they’ve put out—has been fact checked. It’s truly sick,” Trump Jr. expressed.

    He alleged that the Biden administration appeared to have a “China first, America last policy,” accusing the new administration of “crushing jobs” amid the CCP (Chinese Communist Party) virus pandemic.

    “The nonsense never seems to end, but neither will our fight, neither will our resolve, neither will our will to go on. We’re going to keep pushing for the American people and make sure our kids grow up in a country that we all recognize and love,” he said.

    Trump recently opened an “Office of the Former President” that seeks to advance the interests of the United States and carry on the agenda of his administration.

    President Donald Trump boards Air Force One at Valley International Airport after visiting the U.S.-Mexico border wall, in Harlingen, Texas, on Jan. 12, 2021. (Reuters/Carlos Barria)

    Jason Miller, a campaign adviser, said in January that Trump would be involved in the 2022 midterms with the immediate focus being to help Republicans win back both chambers of Congress.

    When Trump left Washington for Florida on Jan. 20, he told supporters that he and his team would “be back in some form.”

    “We love you. We will be back in some form,” he said at the time. “I will always fight for you. I will always be watching. I will be listening.”

    Trump on Friday appeared to have made his first social media post since leaving the White House. The post showed a letter from Trump’s lawyers to Rep. Jamie Raskin (D-Md.), the House of Representatives’ lead impeachment manager, saying that they reject attempts to have Trump testify in his upcoming impeachment trial.

    House Democrats impeached Trump on a single charge that alleges that he incited a mob that breached the Capitol on Jan. 6. The Democrats were joined by 10 Republicans.

    This is the first time in U.S. history that a president has been impeached twice. It is also the first time a former president faces an impeachment trial after leaving office. In a trial memorandum, Trump attorneys denied the allegations and challenged the constitutionality of trying Trump after he had left office.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 16:30

  • Americans Ditch Citizenship In Record Numbers Amid Pandemic 
    Americans Ditch Citizenship In Record Numbers Amid Pandemic 

    Americans urgently rushed to their embassies to renounce their citizenship last year amid the virus pandemic, social unrest, economic crash, and political firestorms.

    Americans Overseas said a record 6,705 Americans gave up their citizenship in 2020, a 260% increase from 2019 when 2,577 renounced their citizenship. 

    Even with consulates closed in the early part of the year because of the virus pandemic, renunciations still managed to nearly triple over the prior year. Before 2020, the highest year on record was 5,411 cases in 2016, ahead of former President Trump winning the 2016 presidential elections. 

    Americans Overseas estimates some 9 million Americans are living abroad. Every three months, the IRS publishes a log of who gave up their citizenship. 

    “This number possibly would have been higher if U.S. Embassies worldwide had not been closed for large parts of the year due to COVID-19 regulations. If this trend continues, 2021 renunciation numbers will be record-breaking,” said Americans Overseas.

    Americans Overseas said, “stimulus checks of $1,200 + $600 are also being used towards the cost of renouncing” citizenship. 

    There has been a growing trend of U.S. citizens expatriating since the pandemic began. We first outlined this disturbing trend in August of last year. 

    The International Tax Blog posted annual expatriations from 1998 to 2020, showing the dramatic rise over the last decade.

    From 2010 to 2020, the quarterly expatriations show a more in-depth view of when the virus pandemic began that triggered an increase in expatriations.

    Once U.S. embassies open full-time, Americans Overseas expects the number of people renouncing their citizenship will continue to hit records. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 16:00

  • Fed Efforts To Stem Rises In Yields Are Back On The Table
    Fed Efforts To Stem Rises In Yields Are Back On The Table

    By Variant Perception

    At the end of last year we discussed the likelihood of the US debt-limit exemption not being extended past the 31st of July as a force that would drive bond yields lower towards the Spring. The Treasury’s account at the Fed, now a considerable $1.6 trillion, would have to be drawn down, and the resulting fall in average maturity of Treasury debt held by the public would put pressure on longer-term bond yields and the yield curve, potentially fuelled by short covering of positions.

    However, we stated the caveat was if the Democrats were able to also win the Senate, something they unexpectedly managed to do. The higher volume of fiscal stimulus now anticipated has helped drive yields higher, and the yield curve steeper in 2021.

    The risk for this year is for yields to continue rising and the curve to continue steepening, which raises the likelihood that in the coming months the Fed begins to discuss the possibility of increasing the weighted-average maturity (WAM) of QE purchases, or resurrect the possibility of yield curve control (YCC).

    Treasuries are not as overbought as they were last year, but they are still above “fair value”, and an overshoot to being oversold is conceivable.

    The rise in yields since October has been driven by term premium (the residual of nominal yields and long-term Fed rate expectations), given rate expectations are pinned for several years due to Fed forward guidance.

    Term premium has been driven ever lower and into negative territory in the years after the GFC. Yet now with rising inflation risks – both cyclical and structural – term premium has been rising to compensate bond holders for this extra risk, with term premium now close to being positive again for the first time since 2018.

    There has been a regime shift in market behavior, starting in September. Until then, ever easier global monetary policy – as captured by the rise in negative-yielding debt outstanding – coincided with falling term premium.

    Since September, however, term premium has kept rising despite the amount of negative yielding debt outstanding remaining stable. Bond holders are sensing rising inflation risks, with term premium increasing to compensate them.

    The rise in yields driven by term premium has attendant risks for equity markets that have become dependent on ever falling term premium and yields.

    The equity risk premium (ERP) is about 3% but, adjusted for term premium, it is closer to 2.25%.

    Furthermore, in the post-GFC world, equities have become vulnerable to progressively lower levels of yields and the curve.

    The chart below shows that most local peaks in the yield curve have happened just before or around local tops in the S&P. The 2s10s yield curve only had to hit 135bps in late 2017 to precipitate the 11% correction in early 2018.

    If yields keep rising and the yield curve keeps steepening, then the Fed will likely emphasize the possibility of an extension to WAM or, if that fails to have a sufficient impact, resurrect talk of yield curve control.

    Last year the Fed discussed the possibility of yield curve control at several FOMC meetings. In June it was discussed, with Jay Powell commenting after the meeting, “whether [yield curve control] would usefully complement our main tools remains an open question.”

    But the Fed has few options to hand if it wants to stem a rise in longer-term yields driven by rising inflation risks, which may unseat the equity market and feed negatively into the real economy. Rates are at zero, and forward guidance is already very strong.

    Direct action on longer-term yields is more likely if yields keep rising. An increase to WAM is likely to be what the Fed tries first. If this is ineffective then yield curve control is firmly back on the agenda.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 15:30

  • "Mind-Boggling Liquidity": Nobody Is Paying Attention To The $1.1 Trillion Flood About To Hit Markets
    “Mind-Boggling Liquidity”: Nobody Is Paying Attention To The $1.1 Trillion Flood About To Hit Markets

    Amid the ongoing Reddit short squeeze drama which had traders glued to their trading terminals for much of the past two weeks, quite a few may have missed the biggest news of the past week which was the publication of the Treasury’s latest Borrowing forecast, according to which the US expects to borrow just $275BN in the current quarter, down a whopping 75%, or $853 billion, from its November 2020 projection of $1.127 trillion.

    The reason for this plunge in funding needs is because the Treasury now expects that it simply won’t need to borrow as much debt as the end-of-March cash balance held in the Treasury General Account (TGA, which is simply the Treasury’s cash balance held at the Fed) would plunge to just $800 billion, down a record $929BN from $1.729 trillion at Dec 31, 2020 (as an aside, the reason why the cash was so high as year end is because the Treasury never got around to actually disbursing the latest stimulus package in December, and it’s also why as the Treasury said “the decrease in privately-held net marketable borrowing is primarily driven by a higher beginning-of-January cash balance as a result of lower-than-assumed expenditures.”)

    In other words, had Trump used up roughly $1 trillion in cash the Treasury had previously budgeted for spending on fiscal stimulus, there would be no surprises today, and instead of the cash balance dropping to $800BN in this quarter, it would have done so last quarter (we discussed this last November in “The 2021 Liquidity Supernova: Step Aside Fed – US Treasury Will Unleash $1.3 Trillion In Liquidity“). Instead, the Treasury now expects the decline in the cash balance this quarter – which is being spent to fund last December’s fiscal stimulus – to be the main driver of funding needs.

    It doesn’t end there, because one quarter later, the Treasury expects to borrow just $95BN  – the lowest in two years quarters – and finish the June quarter with a cash balance of only $500BN, a reduction of $300BN for the quarter, the lowest in six quarters and less than 30% of the average cash balance at the end of the latest three quarters ($1.74BN).

    Looking beyond that, we have to go back to an analysis we put together back in November, which cited calculations from Morgan Stanley, according to which unless the debt ceiling deadline – which this year falls on Aug 1, 2021 – is extended well in advance, starting on this date, the US Treasury will not be able to issue any additional debt above and beyond what it needs to cover existing debt obligations. However, what few may be aware of, is that there is a clause written into the law that prohibits the TGA from rising above levels prior to the debt ceiling deadline, which was in 2019.

    This means that based on the 2019 debt ceiling, the Treasury cash will need to fall even more, down to just $200 billion by August 1, and as the chart from MS below shows, depending on the upcoming political fight over the debt ceiling, it could end up being quite a mess.

    Said otherwise, the market is about to see a flood of $800BN in extra liquidity over the next 6 weeks, and a total of $1.1 trillion in the next 10 weeks, and then potentially another $300 billion in the subsequent two months. With the TGA cash currently at just under $1.6 trillion, it means that the US Treasury may unlock as much as $1.4 trillion in liquidity over the next 6 months, nearly double the liquidity coming from the Fed over the same time period which will be $720 billion ($120BN x 6 months)!

    This, not too put it lightly, is a huge deal with major market implications (and is why three months ago we said to buy everything ahead of an unprecedented dollar devaluation orgy” simply based on this analysis).

    First, recall that one of the early (and completely false) reasons cited for the Sept 2019 repo crash, was the modest spike in Treasury cash balances around that time, which also resulted in substantial reserve drain among banks (mostly JPMorgan) which were desperate for more QE. As a result, we almost immediately got “NOT QE” (which, of course, was absolutely QE) and hundreds of billions of reserves were injected into the system by the Fed but not before markets had to tumble to spur the Federal Reserve into acting.

    Well, what is happening now is just the opposite and many, many times bigger, as almost one trillion reserves are about to be injected into the system as cash is drained from the Treasury’s account at the Fed. As we said on Monday, “as Treasury cash balances plunge, banks will see their reserve levels soar by roughly $900 billion this quarter, a move that will lead to significant risk asset upside if previous instances of reserves growth are any indication.”

    Second, there are major implications for the rates market where the recent flood of bill issuance is set to hit a brick wall: as we said on MOnday, the plunge in short-term debt (Bill) issuance – since there will no longer be an urgent need to keep cash balances in the $1+ trillion range – will compress short-term spreads (effective FF through 3M) to zero – or even negative – as there is suddenly a flood of liquidity which could prompt the Fed to engage the fixed-rate borrowing facility or even nudging the IOER higher. Indeed, on Friday we saw just this move as the 2Y TSY dropped to the lowest yield on record.

    Those looking for more details can read our November preview of this event (“The 2021 Liquidity Supernova: Step Aside Fed – US Treasury Will Unleash $1.3 Trillion In Liquidity“), or read the below explanation from Larry McDonald, author of The Bear Traps Report, who last week put together an exhaustive summary of the implications of the TGA plunge.

    Again What is the TGA? The US Treasury’s General Account

    The TGA is the mechanism through which Treasury makes payments. It’s the checking account through which the government makes all its payments. This checking account is located at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. It’s where tax payments are deposited and where funds from Treasury debt auctions are collected. So when the TGA changes, that affects deposits at the Federal Reserve. Ultimately, monetary policy, and Quantitative Easing, is conducted through the TGA. It’s important. Of course, last year the TGA grew. It moved up from its usual range of $300 million/$500 million to, since May, well over $1 trillion. The thought had been that $1 trillion would be released into the economy to stimulate it prior to the November election. Didn’t happen. Congress stalled.

    Go Big or Go Home?

    Enter “Go Big or Go Home” Yellen. What’s she gonna do now? There will be another Covid relief bill of some kind. She’ll be the one cutting the checks through the TGA. This will release money out of the TGA and that means there will be a lot more money in the system. Yellen has $1 trillion burning a hole through her pocket. Additionally, QE is pumping money in at $120 billion clips a month. The combo of a near $1 trillion check and $120 billion monthly QE is the monetary equivalent of eating a banana split after downing an Italian hero sandwich. The market will be stuffed with reserves.

    The money will in part be put into the short end of the curve (already anticipated as we can see in super low LIBOR recently, and low T-Bill yields etc.). Some of the tidal wave of money will find its way into stocks and commodities. Some will find its way to higher prices for goods and services. This is the mirror opposite of 2018/2019 when traders fretted that treasury issuance would overwhelm their desks. This led to higher rates and a higher dollar… The 2019 events drama reached its September 2019 climax when the Fed was forced to introduce QE light. What an embarrassment, after pounding the table for 2 years on the wonders of committed balance sheet REDUCTION, up to $50B a month in Q1 2019, they reversed 2x. First in January 2019 by stopping the expansion, THEN again in September 2019 by restarting QE. Reflation assets (EM, global cyclicals ripped higher from Sept to the start of Covid risk in Feb 2020). Both times the beast inside the market reversed the academics at the Fed. Traders > educators in this case.

    So now there will be mind-boggling liquidity, no vig in the front end, and a weaker dollar to boot. Nothing is guaranteed when it comes to fiat currencies, but fiat currencies are in a race to the bottom. Given the upcoming drawdown of the $1 trillion in the TGA , it’s a race the US is likely to win.

    Recap with more Complexity, Digging Deeper

    One of the questions hanging over asset markets going into 2021 was what would happen to the TGA account. The TGA is the Treasury’s General Account which is how the Treasury makes payments. As we saw last year, the TGA was built up to levels much higher than they traditionally get to. In the past, the level of the TGA has traditionally been between $300-500 billion. Currently, and pretty much since May of last year, the TGA has been over $1 trillion, which is well above its historical norm.

    Going back to Q3 of 2020 there was a lot of speculation that the previous administration would use the massive levels of TGA to get more stimulus into the economy before the elections in November. However, that never really transpired and more covid relief was not passed by congress until after the election.

    This setup the question for Secretary Yellen in terms of how she would manage the TGA, especially into the likelihood of another covid relief bill. The market has gotten its answer as Yellen and the Treasury plan to draw down the TGA balance back to more historical levels. The consequences of this are simple, a lot more reserves in the system. The combination of Fed QE running at $120 billion a month and around a trillion-dollar drawdown in the TGA level means that the levels of reserves in the system will be massive.

    The combination of less short term issuance and massive QE will continue to put pressure on front end yields. This has been seen in very low LIBOR settings, low T-bill yields, and a lower setting in the effective fed funds rate. This pressure on the front end will continue to come especially in light of less front end issuance as the Treasury draws down their TGA balance.

    The market in the first quarter of this year is basically setting up for the inverse of 2018/2019, where funding markets have begun to get stretched. The story in 2018/19 was that Treasury issuance would overwhelm the market and lead to this crowding out of assets as dealers had to move funding to take down treasuries. Now, the problem is flipped. There are so many reserves in the system already from the Fed’s QE, and now it is going to get another increase via the TGA. So if 2018/19 was the story of issuance crowding out the market and putting pressure on funding markets which led to a higher dollar, this rendition could lead to the opposite.

    With that said, we think the correlation between net issuance and asset prices is a bit overstated. Yes, there will be a ton of liquidity on the back of these moves from Treasury, but in terms of marginal drivers, it will matter most in funding markets and the front end of the treasury curve. The other part of this is, this UST funding announcement doesn’t include the impact of whatever $1.9tln will come from the White House and congress.

    Overall: the story is that reserves are everywhere and more are coming. In theory, over the near term, we are setting up for an inverse of 2018/19, which means front-end yields, funding markets etc. will be flushed and liquidity in the system will be at very high levels.

    So while the bullish case is clearly there – after all a $1.1 trillion reserve injection all but assures higher risk prices, the only question is by how much, some – such as JPM’s Nick Panigirtzoglou – have taken on a more hedged position, even though even the JPM admits that a $800BN spike in reserves in just two months would be a major market event…

    • The US Treasury signaled this week a strong intention to reduce its Treasury General Account (TGA) balance at the Fed, from its current level of close to $1.6tr to $500bn by mid-2021.
    • Such a sharp decline would mechanically bolster the liquidity in the US banking system, i.e. the amount of reserves, by $1.1tr by mid year

    … noting that “a halving in the TGA in just under two months would be a significant decline, in particular given the slow conversion of PPP loans to grants thus far with just over $100bn converted between October and mid-January.”

    Yet within this broader tidal wave in reserves, Panigirtzoglou believes that the immediate impact will be relatively modest, and explains why below, first focusing on his view of narrow vs broad liquidity “plumbing” dynamics in the market (which differ substantially from those of repo god Zoltan Pozsar so take them with a giant grain of salt)…

    What are the implications for liquidity from a prospective large reduction in the TGA balance over the coming months? We argued before that liquidity should be split into two different components: 1) narrow or banking sector liquidity, which is created by the injection of excess reserves into the banking system; and 2) broader liquidity or money supply, which is the amount of cash or deposits held by the non-bank sectors of the economy such as households, non-financial corporations and financial intermediaries such as asset managers, pension funds and insurance companies. This broad liquidity is in turn primarily a function of QE related purchases by central banks and bank lending to the real economy by commercial banks. In general, these two components of liquidity are interrelated but are not necessarily mechanically linked and are thus distinct. For example, QE bond purchases, by injecting reserves into the banking system, increase narrow liquidity, but they do not necessarily increase broad money supply. Bond purchases can result in an increase in money supply either directly, e.g. if the central bank buys bonds from a non-bank entity such as a pension fund, this automatically expands the assets (reserves) and liabilities (deposits) of the banking system; or indirectly, when central banks’ quantitative measures induce higher bank lending in the economy.

    … and then expands this analytics framework to how $1.1 trillion in reserves will impact assets:

    A sharp decline in the TGA balance and the resulted $1.1tr increase in the stock of reserves in the US banking system would bolster banking sector liquidity i.e. narrow liquidity but will have no direct implications for broad liquidity, i.e. the cash balances of non-bank investors as captured by money supply. This is because a decline in the TGA balance would have no overall impact on the size of commercial bank’s balance sheet as it would effectively replace government debt with reserves in commercial bank’s asset side and TGA balances with reserves in the Fed’s liability side. These reserves or narrow liquidity reflect the amount of reserves commercial banks have with central banks in excess of what they would need to meet usual liquidity needs. Given that the banking system cannot get rid of reserves in aggregate, these zero yielding reserves become the “hot potato” that banks try to pass to other each until the relative pricing across money market instruments is adjusted enough to remove the incentive for banks to get rid of these reserves. In other words, narrow liquidity tends to reverberate within the money market space and suppress yields at the front end of the yield curve with little implication for the longer end of the yield curve or other asset classes such as equities.

    Needless to say, we completely disagree here and merely bring up the historical record: the Sept 2019 repo crash first spiked a violent market correction and only then did the Fed conceded to inject more liquidity. It stands to reason that the equity response now will be the opposite as we are now facing a mirror image of the liquidity picture in 2019. In any case, going back to the JPM quant:

    But even with the money market space, given the US banking system is already flooded with $3.2tr of reserves, well above a neutral level which we envisage at below $2tr, an additional $1.1tr of reserves would not make much difference in the current conjuncture. Indeed, after the sharp increase in reserves during 1H20, volatility in Fed funds – IOER spreads and SOFR – IOER spreads have already significantly reduced (Figure 2). The additional injection is likely to put some downward pressure on these rates to grind toward the zero lower bound of the Feds funds target range, supporting somewhat demand for shorter-dated Treasuries as banks seek some yield and duration. However, our projections for the global bond supply-demand balance in 2021 already incorporated only a relatively modest deterioration in G4 commercial bank demand from last year’s record levels.

    Summarizing JPM’s view, we find it surprisingly restrained in its optimistic assessment…

    In all, we see little impact from a prospective TGA balance reduction on broad liquidity and thus on other asset classes outside money markets or the front end of the UST yield curve. And the actual path of the TGA decline may differ from the Treasury’s forecasts not least as they do not potential additional fiscal stimulus into the projection.

    … then again it comes from the same JPM analyst who has been desperately trying to talk down bitcoin for the past 4 months, most recently just two weeks ago. Well, with bitcoin hitting $41,000 this morning and all other cryptos at all time highs, not only have those who listened to Panigirtzoglou worse off, but maybe Nick has become the “big JPM fade”. In any case, we are confident that it is only a matter of time before his Croatian colleague, the permabullish Marko Kolanovic takes the other side of the euphoria trade from Panigirtzoglou… as would we by the way.

    In any case, with $1.1 trillion about to hit the market, perhaps now is not the time for nuance and instead a more shotgun approach is appropriate, which is why we like Larry McDonald’s take as it cuts to the chase, and more importantly, is correct:

    The combo of a near $1 trillion check and $120 billion monthly QE is the monetary equivalent of eating a banana split after downing an Italian hero sandwich. The market will be stuffed with reserves.

    Of this we are certain. What does remain an open question is at what S&P level – 4,000? 4,500? moar? – will the Fed finally realize what it and the Treasury have done, and intervene by warning markets that it is about to pull its pedal off the gas, especially with a chorus of dovish, establishment progressive economists such as Larry Summers and Olivier Blanchard now warning that a $1.9 trillion stimulus could overheat the economy (yes, democrats warning of such a thing as too much stimulus – now we’ve seen it all). In fact, the next big risk is increasingly shaping up as a hawkish reversal by the Fed some time around July/August, when the Treasury cash balance tumbles to $200BN or so and when the S&P is in the the low to mid-4000s…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 15:04

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 6th February 2021

  • Netflix Is Hiking Prices 13% In Japan
    Netflix Is Hiking Prices 13% In Japan

    As new, low cost streaming competitors are emerging left and right, Netflix appears ready to move in for the kill. 

    That’s because, after spreading its platform globally, all Netflix has to do is flip “the pricing switch” in order to make a positive impact to the company’s free cash. And in Japan, that appears to be exactly what the platform is doing.

    Starting today, Netflix’s basic and standard tier prices will rise about 13% in Japan, while premium service pricing remains unchanged, according to Bloomberg. The company’s basic plan will rise to 990 yen ($9.39) from 880 yen. Its standard tier rises from 1,320 yen to 1,490 yen. 

    Asia is the company’s second fastest growing region, the report notes. Netflix has invested heavily in anime for the market, which is popular in Japan. 

    The company said in a statement: “We’re updating our prices so that we can continue to offer more variety of TV shows and films — in addition to local shows such as ‘Alice in Borderland,’ and our ever-growing anime lineup. As always, we offer a range of plans so that people can pick a price that works best for their budget.”

    The market liked the move, with Netflix stock finishing Thursday’s session up 2.3%. Shares had been little changed since January. 

    Recall, Netflix just posted an earnings report in January that saw its stock soar. The company posted a big subscriber beat and noted that it would be free cash flow positive in all quarters going fowrward. 

    At the same time, as we noted, the world’s largest paid streaming service is also facing more intense and cutthroat (or rather cut-price) competition than ever. Comcast’s Peacock platform has been rolling out for a few months, along with the short-form video service Quibi. And AT&T’s big bet on streaming, HBO Max is also up and running now while Disney+ has been a massive hit.

    Bloomberg notes that in the all-important Netflix subscriber guessing game, the web traffic research site SimilarWeb suggests the service averaged about 1.5 million new subscribers globally per month in Q4. That’s below the 6 million target the company has given and down from Q4 2019. On the plus side, SimilarWeb notes, subscribers have been rising each month in the quarter and are up sharply from the disappointing Q3.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 02/06/2021 – 00:00

  • Clarity In Trump's Wake
    Clarity In Trump’s Wake

    Authored by Angelo Codevilla via AMGreatness.com,

    The United States of America is now a classic oligarchy. The clarity that it has brought to our situation by recognizing this fact is its only virtue…

    “Either the Constitution matters and must be followed . . . or it is simply a piece of parchment on display at the National Archives.”

    Texas v. Pennsylvania et al.

    Texas v. Pennsylvania et al. did not deny setting rules for the 2020 election contrary to the Constitution. On December 10, 2020, the Supreme Court discounted that. By refusing to interfere as America’s ruling oligarchy serves itself, the court archived what remained of the American republic’s system of equal justice. That much is clear.

    In 2021, the laws, customs, and habits of the heart that had defined the American republic since the 18th century are things of the past. Americans’ movements and interactions are under strictures for which no one ever voted. Government disarticulated society by penalizing ordinary social intercourse and precluding the rise of spontaneous opinion therefrom. Together with corporate America, it smothers minds through the mass and social media with relentless, pervasive, identical, and ever-evolving directives. In that way, these oligarchs have proclaimed themselves the arbiters of truth, entitled and obliged to censor whoever disagrees with them as systemically racist, adepts of conspiracy theories. 

    Corporations, and the government itself, require employees to attend meetings personally to acknowledge their guilt. They solicit mutual accusations. While violent felons are released from prison, anyone may be fired or otherwise have his life wrecked for questioning government/corporate sentiment. Today’s rulers don’t try to convince. They demand obedience, and they punish.

    Russians and East Germans under Communists Leonid Brezhnev and Erich Honecker in the 1970s lived under less ruling class pressure than do today’s Americans. And their rulers were smart enough not to insult them, their country, or their race.

    In 2015, Americans could still believe they lived in a republic, in which life’s rules flow from the people through their representatives.

    In 2021, a class of rulers draws their right to rule from self-declared experts’ claims of infallibility that dwarf baroque kings’ pretensions.  In that self-referential sense, the United States of America is now a classic oligarchy.

    The following explains how this change happened. The clarity that it has brought to our predicament is its only virtue.

    Oligarchy had long been growing within America’s republican forms. The 2016 election posed the choice of whether its rise should consolidate, or not. Consolidation was very much “in the cards.” But how that election and its aftermath led to the fast, thorough, revolution of American life depended on how Donald Trump acted as the catalyst who clarified, energized, and empowered our burgeoning oligarchy’s peculiarities. These, along with the manner in which the oligarchy seized power between November 2016 and November 2020, ensure that its reign will be ruinous and likely short. The prospect that the republic’s way of life may thrive among those who wish it to depends on the manner in which they manage the civil conflict that is now inevitable.

    From Ruling Class to Oligarchy

    By the 21st century’s first decade, little but formality was left of the American republic. In 1942, Joseph Schumpeter’s Capitalism, Socialism, and Democracy described the logic by which government and big business tend to coalesce into socialism in theory, oligarchy in practice. But by then, that logic had already imposed itself on the Western world. Italy’s 1926 Law of Corporations—fascism’s charter—inaugurated not so much the regulation of business by government as the coalescence of the twain. Over the ensuing decade, it was more or less copied throughout the West. 

    In America, the 1890 Sherman Antitrust Act’s authors had erected barriers against private oligopolies and monopolies. By maintaining competition between big business, they hoped to preserve private freedoms and limit government’s role. But the Great Depression’s pressures and temptations led to the New Deal’s rules that differed little from Italy’s. No matter that, as the Supreme Court pointed out in Schechter Poultry v. U.S., public-private amalgamation does not fit in the Constitution. It grew nevertheless alongside the notion that good government proceeds from the experts’ judgment rather than from the voters’ choices. The miracles of production that America brought forth in World War II seemed to validate the point.

    President Dwight D. Eisenhower, who had come to understand large organizations that feed on government power and dispense vast private benefits, was not shy in warning about the danger they pose to the republic. His warning about the “military-industrial complex” that he knew so well is often misunderstood as a mere caution against militarism. But Ike was making a broader point: Amalgams of public and private power tend to prioritize their corporate interests over the country’s. 

    That is why Eisenhower cautioned against the power of government-funded expertise. “The prospect of domination of the nation’s scholars by federal employment, project allocations, and the power of money is ever-present and is gravely to be regarded,” he said, because “public policy could itself become the captive of a scientific-technological elite.” Government money can accredit a self-regarding elite. Because “a government contract becomes virtually a substitute for intellectual curiosity,” government experts can end up substituting their power for truth.

    The expansion of government power throughout the 1960s and ’70s in pursuit of improving education, eradicating poverty, and uplifting blacks created complexes of public-private power throughout America that surpassed the military-industrial complex in size, and above all in influence. 

    Consider education. Post-secondary education increased fourfold, from 9 percent of Americans holding four-year degrees in 1965 to 36 percent in 2015. College towns became islands of wealth and political power. From them came endless “studies” that purported to be arbiters of truth and wisdom, as well as a growing class of graduates increasingly less educated but ever so much more socio-politically uniform.

    In the lower grades, per-pupil expenditure (in constant dollars) went from $3,200 in 1960 to $13,400 in 2015. That money fueled an even more vast and powerful complex—one that includes book publishers, administrators, and labor unions and that has monopolized the minds of at least two generations. As it grew, the education establishment also detached itself from the voters’ control: In the 1950s, there were some 83,000 public school districts in America. By 2015, only around 13,000 remained for a population twice as large. Today’s parents have many times less influence over their children’s education than did their grandparents.

    Analogous things happened in every field of life. Medicine came to be dominated by the government’s relationship with drug companies and hospital associations. When Americans went to buy cars, or even light bulbs and shower nozzles, they found their choices limited by deals between government, industry, and insurance companies. These entities regarded each other as “stakeholders” in an oligarchic system. But they had ever less need to take account of mere citizens in what was becoming a republic in name only. As the 20eth century was drawing to a close, wherever citizens looked, they saw a government and government-empowered entities over which they had ever less say, which ruled ever more unaccountably, and whose attitude toward them was ever less friendly.

    The formalities were the last to go. Ever since the signing of the Magna Carta in 1215 A.D., the rulers’ dependence on popular assent to expenditures has been the essence of limited government. Article I, section 9 of the U.S. Constitution enshrines that principle. Congressional practice embodied it. Details of bills and expenditures were subject to public hearings and votes in subcommittees, committees, and the floors of both Houses. But beginning in the early 1980s and culminating in 2007, the U.S government abandoned the appropriations process.

    Until 1981, Congress had used “continuing resolutions” to continue funding government operations unchanged until regular appropriations could be made. Thereafter, as congressional leaders learned how easy it is to use this vehicle to avoid exposing what they are doing to public scrutiny, they legislated and appropriated ever less in public, and increasingly put Congress’ output into continuing resolutions or omnibus bills, amounting to trillions of dollars and thousands of pages, impossible for representatives and senators to read, and presented to them as the only alternative to “shutting down the government.” This—now the U.S government standard operating procedure—enables the oligarchy’s “stakeholders” to negotiate their internal arrangements free from responsibility to citizens. It is the practical abolition of Article I section 9—and of the Magna Carta itself.

    In the 21st century, the American people’s trust in government plummeted as they—on the political Left as well as on the Right—realized that those in power care little for them. As they watched corporate and non-profit officials trade places with public officials and politicians while getting much richer, they felt impoverished and disempowered. Since the ruling class embraced Republicans and Democrats, elections seemed irrelevant. The presidential elections of 2008 and 2012 underlined that whoever won, the same people would be in charge and that the parceling out of wealth and power among stakeholders would continue.

    Americans on the Right were especially aggrieved because the oligarchy had become culturally united in disdain for Western civilization in general and for themselves in particular. The cultural warfare it waged on the rest of America inflamed opposition. But it also diluted its own focus on solidifying profitable arrangements.

    By 2016, America was already well into the classic cycles of revolution. The atrophy of institutions, the waning of republican habits, and the increasing, reciprocal disrespect between classes that have less in common culturally, dislike each other more, and embody ways of life more different from one another, than did the 19th century’s Northerners and Southerners precluded returning to traditional republican life. The election would determine whether the oligarchy could consolidate itself. More important, it would affect the speed by which the revolutionary vortex would carry the country, and the amount of violence this would involve.

    The Trump Catalyst

    By 2015, the right side of America’s challenge to the budding oligarchy was inevitable. Trump was not inevitable. Senator Ted Cruz (R-Texas) had begun posing a thorough challenge to the “stakeholders” most Americans disrespected. Candidate Trump was the more gripping showman. His popularity came from his willingness to disrespect them, loudly. Because the other 16 Republican candidates ran on different bases, none ever had a chance. Inevitably, victory in a field so crowded depended on when which minor candidate did or did not withdraw. There never was a head-to-head choice between Trump and Cruz.

    Trump’s candidacy drew the ferocious opposition it did primarily because the entire ruling class recognized that, unlike McCain in 2008 and Romney in 2012, he really was mobilizing millions of Americans against the arrangements by which the ruling class live, move, and have their being. Since Cruz’s candidacy represented the same threat, it almost certainly would have drawn no less intense self-righteous anger. Nasty narratives could have been made up about him out of whole cloth as easily as about Trump. 

    But Trump’s actual peculiarities made it possible for the oligarchy to give the impression that its campaign was about his person, his public flouting of conventional norms, rather than about the preservation of their own power and wealth. The principal consequence of the ruling class’ opposition to candidate Trump was to convince itself, and then its followers, that defeating him was so important that it legitimized, indeed dictated, setting aside all laws, and truth itself.

    Particular individuals had never been the oligarchy’s worry. In 2008, as Barack Obama was running against Hillary Clinton and John McCain—far cries from Trump—he pointed to those Americans who “cling to God and guns” as the problem’s root. Clinton’s 2016 remark that Trump’s supporters were “a basket of deplorables,”—racists, sexists, homophobes, etc.—merely voiced what had long been the oligarchy’s consensus judgment of most Americans. For them, pushing these Americans as far away as possible from the levers of power, treating them as less than citizens, had already come to define justice and right. 

    Donald Trump—his bombastic, hyperbolic style, his tendency to play fast and loose with truth, even to lie as he insulted his targets—fit perfectly the oligarchy’s image of his supporters, and lent a color of legitimacy to the utterly illegitimate collusion between the oligarchy’s members in government and those in the Democratic Party running against Trump.

    Thus did the FBI and CIA, in league with the major media and the Democratic Party, spy on candidate Trump, concocting and spreading all manner of synthetic dirt about him. Nevertheless, to universal surprise, he won, or rather the oligarchy lost, the 2016 election.

    The oligarchy’s disparate members had already set aside laws, truth, etc. in opposition to Trump. The realization that the presidency’s awesome powers now rested in his hands fostered a full-court-press #Resistance. Trump’s peculiarities helped make it far more successful than anyone could have imagined.

    “Dogs That Bark Do Not Bite”

    Applying this observation to candidate Trump’s hyperbole suggested that President Trump might suffer from what Theodore Roosevelt called the most self-destructive of habits, combining “the unbridled tongue with the unready hand.” And, in fact, President Trump neither fired and referred for prosecution James Comey or the other intelligence officials who had run the surveillance of his campaign. He praised them, and let himself be persuaded to fire General Michael Flynn, his national security advisor, who stood in the way of the intelligence agencies’ plans against him. Nor did he declassify and make public all the documents associated with their illegalities. 

    Four years later, he left office with those documents still under seal. He criticized officials over whom he had absolute power, notably CIA’s Gina Haspel who likely committed a crime spying on his candidacy, but left them in office. Days after his own inauguration, he suffered the CIA’s removal of clearances from one of his appointees because he was a critic of the Agency. Any president worthy of his office would have fired the entire chain of officials who had made that decision. Instead, he appointed to these agencies people loyal to them and hostile to himself.

    He acted similarly with other agencies. His first secretary of state, secretary of defense, and national security advisor mocked him publicly. At their behest, in August 2017, he gave a nationally televised speech in which he effectively thanked them for showing him that he had been wrong in opposing ongoing war in the Middle East. He railed against Wall Street but left untouched the tax code’s “carried interest” provision that is the source of much unearned wealth. He railed against the legal loophole that lets Google, Facebook, and Twitter censor content without retribution, but did nothing to close it. Already by the end of January 2017, it was clear that no one in Washington needed to fear Trump. By the time he left office, Washington was laughing at him.

    Nor did Trump protect his supporters. For example, he shared their resentment of being ordered to attend workplace sessions about their “racism.” But not until his last months in office did he ban the practice within the federal government. Never did he ban contracts with companies that require such sessions.

    Thus, as the oligarchy set about negating the 2016 electorate’s attempt to stop its consolidation of power, Trump had assured them that they would neither be impeded as they did so nor pay a price. Donald Trump is not responsible for the oligarchy’s power. But he was indispensable to it.

    #TheResistance rallied every part of the ruling class to mutually supporting efforts. Nothing encourages, amplifies, or seemingly justifies extreme sentiments as does being part of a unanimous chorus, a crowd, a mob—especially when all can be sure they are acting safely, gratuitously. Success supercharges them. #TheResistance fostered the sense in the ruling class’ members that they are more right, more superior, and more entitled than they had ever imagined. It made millions of people feel bigger and better about themselves than they ever had.

    Logic and Dysfunction

    Disdain for the “deplorables” united and energized parts of American society that, apart from their profitable material connections to government, have nothing in common and often have diverging interests. That hate, that determination to feel superior to the “deplorables” by treading upon them, is the “intersectionality,” the glue that binds, say, Wall Street coupon-clippers, folks in the media, officials of public service unions, gender studies professors, all manner of administrators, radical feminists, race and ethnic activists, and so on. #TheResistance grew by awakening these groups to the powers and privileges to which they imagine their superior worth entitles them, to their hate for anyone who does not submit preemptively.

    Ruling-class judges sustained every bureaucratic act of opposition to the Trump Administration. Thousands of identical voices in major media echoed every charge, every insinuation, non-stop and unquestioned. #TheResistance made it ruling-class policy that Trump’s and his voters’ racism and a host of other wrongdoing made them, personally, illegitimate. In any confrontation, the ruling class deemed these presumed white supremacists in the wrong, systemically. By 2018, the ruling class had effectively placed the “deplorables” outside the protection of the laws. By 2020, they could be fired for a trifle, set upon in the streets, prosecuted on suspicion of bad attitudes, and even for defending themselves.

    Because each and every part of the ruling coalition’s sense of what may assuage its grievances evolves without natural limit, this logic is as insatiable as it is powerful. It is also inherently destructive of oligarchy.

    Enjoyment of power’s material perquisites is classic oligarchy’s defining purpose. Having conquered power over the people, successful oligarchies foster environments in which they can live in peace, productively. Oligarchy, like all regimes, cannot survive if it works at cross-purposes. But the oligarchy that seized power in America between 2016 and 2020 is engaged in a never-ending seizure of ever more power and the infliction of ever more punishment—in a war against the people without imaginable end. Clearly, that is contrary to what the Wall Street magnates or the corps of bureaucrats or the university administrators or senior professors want. But that is what the people want who wield the “intersectional” passions that put the oligarchy in power.

    As the oligarchy’s every part, every organ, raged against everything Trump, it made itself less attractive to the public even as Trump’s various encouragements of economic activity were contributing to palpable increases in prosperity.

    Hence, by 2019’s end, Trump was likely to win reelection. Then came COVID-19.

    The COVID Fortuna

    The COVID-19 virus is no plague. Though quite contagious, its infection/fatality rate (IFR), about 0.01 percent, is that of the average flu, and its effects are generally so mild that most whom it infects never know it. 

    Like all infections, it is deadly to those weakened severely by other causes. It did not transform American life by killing people, but by the fears about it that our oligarchy packaged and purveyed. Fortuna, as Machiavelli reminds us, is inherently submissive to whoever bends her to his wishes. The fears and the strictures they enabled were not about health—if only because those who purveyed and imposed them did not apply them to themselves. They were about power over others.

    COVID’s politicization began in February 2020 with the adoption by the World Health Organization—which is headed by an Ethiopian bureaucrat beholden to China—and upon recommendation of non-scientist Bill Gates, of a non-peer-reviewed test for the infection. The test’s chief characteristic is that its rate of positives to negatives depends on the number of cycles through which the sample is run. More cycles, more positives. Hence, every test result is a “soft” number. Second, the WHO and associated national organizations like the U.S. Centers for Disease Control reported COVID’s spread by another “soft” number: “confirmed cases.” That is, sick persons who tested positive for the virus. 

    When this number is related to that of such persons who then die, the ratio—somewhat north of 5 percent—suggests that COVID kills one out of 20 people it touches. But that is an even softer number since these deaths include those who die with COVID rather than of it, as well as those who may have had COVID. Pyramiding such soft numbers, mathematical modelers projected millions of deaths. Scary for the unwary, but pure fantasy.

    For example, the U.S. Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation (IHME), which modeled the authoritative predictions on which the U.S. lockdowns were based, also predicted COVID-19 deaths for Sweden, which did not lock down. On May 3, the IHME predicted that Sweden would suffer 2,800 COVID deaths a day within the next two weeks. The actual number was 38. Reporting on COVID has never ceased to consist of numbers as scary as they are soft.

    Literate persons know that, once an infectious disease enters a population, nothing can prevent it from infecting all of it, until a majority has developed antibodies after contracting it—so-called community immunity or herd immunity. But fear leads people to empower those who promise safety, regardless of how empty the promises. The media pressed governments to do something. The Wall Street Journal’s Peggy Noonan screamed: “don’t panic is terrible advice.” The pharmaceutical industry and its Wall Street backers salivated at the prospect of billions of government money for new drugs and vaccines. Never mind the little sense it makes for millions of people to accept a vaccine’s non-trivial risk to protect against a virus with trivial consequences for themselves. All manner of officials yearned to wield unaccountable power.

    Because the power to crush the general population’s resistance to itself is the oligarchy’s single-minded focus, it was able to bend fears of COVID to that purpose. Thus, it gathered more power with more consequences than the oligarchs could have imagined.

    But only President Trump’s complaisance made this possible. His message to the American people had been not to panic, be mindful of the scientific facts—you can’t stop it, and it’s not that bad—while mitigating its effects on vulnerable populations. But on March 15, Trump bent, and agreed to counsel people to suspend normal life for two weeks to “slow the spread,” so that hospitals would not be overwhelmed. Two weeks later, the New York Times crowed that Trump, having been told “hundreds of thousands of Americans could face death if the country reopened too soon,” had been stampeded into “abandoning his goal of reopening the country by Easter.” He agreed to support the “experts’” definition of what “soon” might mean. By accrediting the complex of government, industry, and media’s good faith and expertise, Trump validated their plans to use COVID as a vehicle for enhancing their power.

    Having seized powers, the oligarchs used them as weapons to disrupt and disaggregate the parts of American society they could not control.

    The economic effects of lockdowns and social distancing caused obvious pain. Tens of millions of small businesses were forced to close or radically to reduce activity. More than 40 million Americans filed claims for unemployment assistance. Uncountable millions of farmers and professionals had their products and activities devalued. Millions of careers, dreams that had been realized by lifetimes of work, were wrecked. Big business and government took over their functions. Within nine months, COVID-19 had produced 28 new billionaires.

    Surplus and scarcity of food resulted simultaneously because the lockdowns closed most restaurants and hotels. As demand shifted in ways that made it impossible for distribution networks and processing plants to adjust seamlessly, millions of gallons of milk were poured down drains, millions of chickens, billions of eggs, and tens of thousands of hogs and cattle were destroyed, acres of vegetables and tons of fruit were plowed under. Prices in the markets rose. Persons deprived of work with less money with which to pay higher prices struggled to feed their families. This reduced countless self-supporting citizens to supplicants. By intentionally reducing the supply of food available to the population, the U.S. government joined the rare ranks of such as Stalin’s Soviet Union and Castro’s Cuba.

    But none of these had ever shut down a whole nation’s entire medical care except for one disease. Hospitals stood nearly empty, having cleared the decks for the (ignorantly) expected COVID flood. Emergency rooms were closed to the poor people who get routine care there. Forget about dentistry. Most Americans were left essentially without medical care for most of a year. Human bodies’ troubles not having taken a corresponding holiday, it is impossible to estimate how much suffering and death this lack of medical care has caused and will cause yet.

    The oligarchy’s division of all activity into “essential”—meaning permitted—and “nonessential”—to be throttled at will—had less obvious but more destructive effects. Private clubs, as well as any and all gatherings of more than five or 10 people, were banned. Churches were forbidden to have worship services or to continue social activities. The “social distancing” and mask mandates enforced in public buildings and stores, and often on the streets, made it well-nigh impossible for people to communicate casually. Thus, was that part of American society that the oligarchy did not control directly disarticulated, and its members left alone to face unaccountable powers on which they had to depend.

    Meanwhile, the media became the oligarchy’s public relations department. Very much including ordinary commercial advertising, it hammered home the oligarchy’s line that COVID restrictions are good, even cool. These restrictions reduced the ideas available to the American people to what the mass media purveyed and the social media allowed. Already by April 2020, these used what had become near-monopoly power over interpersonal communications to censor such communications as they disapproved. Political enforcers took it upon themselves even to cancel statements by eminent physicians about COVID that they judged to be “misleading.” Of course, this betrayed the tech giants’ initial promise of universal access. It is also unconstitutional. (In Marsh v. Alabama, decided in 1946, the Supreme Court barred private parties from acting as de facto governments). Since these companies did it in unison, they also violated the 1890 Sherman Antitrust Act. But the ruling class that had become an oligarchy applauded their disabling whatever might be conducive to conservatives’ interests and inconvenient to their own candidates.

    Private entities wielding public powers in coordination with each other without having to observe any of government’s constitutional constraints is as good a definition of oligarchy as there is. Oligarchy had increasingly taken power in the buildup to the 2020 election. In its aftermath, it would try to suffocate America.

    Sovereignty of the Vote Counters

    The oligarchy’s proximate objective, preventing the 2020 presidential election from validating the previous one’s results, overrode all others. The powers it had seized under COVID’s cover, added to the plethora that it had exercised since the 2016 campaign’s beginning, had surely cowered some opposition. But as November 2020 loomed, no one could be sure how much it also had energized. 

    Few people were happy to be locked down. It was a safe bet that not a few were unhappy at being called systemically racist. The oligarchy, its powers notwithstanding, could not be sure how people would vote. That is why it acted to take the presidential election’s outcome out of the hands of those who would cast the votes and to place it as much as possible in the hands of its members who would count the votes.

    Intentionally, traditional procedures for voting leave no discretion to those who count the votes. Individuals obtain and cast ballots into a physical or electronic box only after showing identification that matches their registration. Ballot boxes are opened and their contents counted by persons representing the election’s opposing parties. Persons registered to vote might qualify to vote-by-mail by requesting a ballot, the issuance and receipt of which is checked against their registration. Their ballots are counted in the same bipartisan manner.

    The Democratic Party had long pressed to substitute universal voting by mail—meaning that ballots would be sent to all registered voters, in some states to anyone with a driver’s license whether they asked for them or not and regardless of whether these persons still lived at the address on the rolls or were even alive. The ballots eventually would arrive at the counting centers, either through the mail, from drop boxes, or through “harvesters” who would pick them up from the voters who fill them out, and who may even help them to fill them out. Security, if any, would consist of machine-matching signatures on the ballot and on the envelope in which it had come. The machine’s software can be dialed to greater or lesser sensitivity.

    But doing away with scrutiny of ballots counted by representatives of the election’s contenders removes the last possibility of ensuring the ballot had come from a real person whose will it is supposed to represent. Once the link between the ballot and the qualified person is broken, nothing prevents those in charge of the electoral process from excluding and including masses of ballots as they choose. The counters become the arbiters.

    Attorney General William Barr pointed out the obvious: Anyone, in America or abroad, can print up any number of ballots, mark them, and deliver them for counting to whoever is willing to accept them and run them through their machines. Since the counters usually dispose of the envelopes in which ballots arrive—thus obviating any possibility of tracing the ballot’s connection to a voter—they may even dispense of the fiction that there had ever been any signed envelopes. That is especially true of late-found ballots. Who knows where they came from? Who cares to find out?

    Only in a few one-party Democratic states was universal vote-by-mail established by law. Elsewhere, especially in the states sure to be battlegrounds in the presidential election, mail-in voting was introduced by various kinds of executive or judicial actions. Questions of right and wrong aside, the Constitution’s Article II section 1’s words—“Each State shall appoint, in such Manner as the Legislature thereof may direct”—makes such actions unconstitutional on their face. Moreover, in these states—Georgia, Pennsylvania, Michigan, and Wisconsin—the counting of votes in the most populous counties is firmly in the hands of Democratic Party bosses with a well-documented history of fraud.

    To no one’s surprise, the 2020 presidential election was decided by super-majorities for the Democratic candidate precisely from these counties in these states. Yes, Trump’s percentage of the vote fell in certain suburbs. But Trump received some 11 million more votes in 2020 than four years earlier, and nearly doubled the share of votes he received from blacks. The Democrats’ gain of some 15 million votes came exclusively from mail-in ballots, and their victory in the Electoral College came exclusively from the supermajorities piled up in these corrupt counties—the only places where Trump’s share of the black vote was cut by three-quarters. Did people there really think so differently?

    This is not the place to recount the list of affidavits sworn under penalty of perjury by persons who observed ballot stuffing, nor the statistical anomaly of successive batches of votes that favored Biden over Trump by precisely the same amounts, of un-creased (i.e., never mailed) ballots fed into counting machines, nor the Georgia video of suitcases of ballots being taken from under tables and inserted into counting machines after Republican observers had been ousted. Suffice it to note that references to these events have been scrubbed from the Internet. It is more important to keep in mind that, in America prior to 2020, sworn affidavits that crimes have been committed had invariably been probable cause for judicial, prosecutorial, or legislative investigations. But for the first time in America, the ruling class dismissed them with: “You have no proof!” A judge (the sister of Georgia’s Stacey Abrams) ruled that even when someone tells the U.S. Postal Service they have moved, their old address is still a lawful basis for them to cast a ballot. Certainly, proof of crime is impossible with such judges and without testimony under oath, or powers of subpoena.

    Just as important, Republicans in general and the Trump White House in particular bear heavy responsibility for failing to challenge the patent illegality of the executive actions and consent decrees that enabled inherently insecure mail-in procedures in real-time, as they were being perpetrated in key states. No facts were at issue. Only law. The constitutional violations were undeniable.

    Pennsylvania et. al. answered Texas’s late lawsuit by arguing it demanded the invalidation of votes that had been cast in good faith. True. But Texas argued that letting stand the results of an election carried out contrary to the Constitution devalued the votes cast in states such as Texas that had held the election in a constitutional manner. Also true. Without comment, the Supreme Court chose to privilege the set of voters on the oligarchy’s side over those of their opponents. Had the lawsuit come well before the election, no such choice would have existed. Typically, the Trump Administration substituted bluster for action.

    The Oligarchy Rides its Tigers

    Winning the 2020 election had been the objective behind which the oligarchy had coalesced during the previous five years. In 2021, waging socio-political war on the rest of America is what the oligarchy is all about. 

    The logic of hate and disdain of ordinary Americans is not only what binds the oligarchy together. It is the only substitute it has for any moral-ethical-intellectual point of reference. Donald Trump’s impotent, inglorious reaction to his defeat offered irresistible temptations to the oligarchy’s several sectors to celebrate victory by vying to hurt whoever had supported the president. But permanent war against some 74 million fellow citizens is a foredoomed approach to governing.

    The Democratic Party had promised a return to some kind of “normalcy.” Instead, its victory enabled the oligarchy’s several parts to redefine the people who do not show them due deference as “white supremacists,” “insurrectionists,” and Nazis—in short, as some kind of criminals—to exclude them from common platforms of communication, from the banking system, and perhaps even from air travel; and to set law enforcement to surveil them in order to find bases for prosecuting them. Neither Congress nor any state’s legislature legislated any of this. Rather, the several parts of America’s economic, cultural, and political establishment are waging this war, uncoordinated but well-nigh unanimously.

    Perhaps most important, they do so without thought of how a war against at least some 74 million fellow citizens might end. The people in the oligarchy’s corporate components seem to want only to adorn unchallenged power with a reputation for “wokeness.” For them, causing pain to their opponents is a pleasure incidental to enjoying power’s perquisites. The Biden family’s self-enrichment by renting access to influence is this oligarchy’s standard.

    But the people who dispense that reputation—not just the professional revolutionaries of Antifa and Black Lives Matter, but “mainstream” racial and gender activists and self-appointed virtue-crats, have appetites as variable as they are insatiable. For them, rubbing conservative America’s faces in excrement is what it’s all about. A Twitter video viewed by 2.6 million people urges them to form “an army of citizen detectives” to ferret out conservatives from among teachers, doctors, police officers, and “report them to the authorities.” No doubt, encouraged by President Biden’s characterization of opponents as “domestic terrorists,” any number of “authorities” as well as private persons will find opportunities to lord it over persons not to their taste. This guarantees endless clashes, and spiraling violence.

    Joseph Biden, Kamala Harris, and the people they appoint to positions of official responsibility are apparatchiks, habituated to currying favor and pulling rank. They have neither the inclination nor the capacity to persuade the oligarchy’s several parts to agree to a common good or at least to a modus vivendi among themselves, never mind with conservative America. This guarantees that they will ride tigers that they won’t even try to dismount.

    At this moment, the oligarchy wields an awesome complex of official and unofficial powers to exclude whomever it chooses from society’s mainstream. Necessarily, however, exclusions cut both ways. Invariably, to banish another is to banish one’s self as well. Google, Facebook, and Twitter let it be known that they would exclude anything with which they disagree from what had become the near-universal means of communication. They bolstered that by colluding to destroy their competitor, Parler. Did they imagine that 74 million Americans could find no means of communicating otherwise? Simon and Schuster canceled a book by Senator Josh Hawley (R-Mo.) critical of communications monopolies. Did its officials imagine that they would thereby do other than increase the book’s eventual sales, and transfer some of their customers to Hawley’s new publisher? The media effectively suppressed inconvenient news. Did they imagine that this would prevent photos of Black Lives Matter professionals in the forefront of the January 6 assault on the U.S. Capitol from reaching the public?

    In sum, intending to relegate conservative America to society’s servile sidelines, the oligarchy’s members drew a clear, sharp line between themselves and that America. By telling conservative Americans “these institutions and corporations, are ours, not yours,” they freed conservative America of moral obligations toward them and themselves. By abandoning conservative America, they oblige conservative America to abandon them and seek its own way.

    Clarity, Leadership, and Separation

    To think of conservative America’s predicament as an opportunity is as hyperbolic as it was for Machiavelli to begin the conclusion of The Prince by observing that “in order to know Moses’ virtue it was necessary that the people of Israel be slaves in Egypt, and to know the greatness of Cyrus’s spirit that the Persians be oppressed by the Medes, and to know the excellence of Theseus, that the Athenian people be dispersed, so at the present, in order to know the virtue of an Italian spirit it was necessary that Italy reduce herself to the conditions in which she is at present . . .” 

    Machiavelli’s lesson is that the clarity of situations such as he mentions, and such as is conservative America’s following the 2020 election, is itself valuable. Clarity makes illusions of compromise untenable and points to self-reliant action as the only reasonable path. The people might or might not be, as he wrote, “all ready and disposed to follow the flag if only someone were to pick it up.” But surely, someone picking up the flag is the only alternative to servitude.

    What, in conservative America’s current predicament, might it mean to “pick up the flag?” Electoral politics remains open to talented, courageous, ambitious leadership. In Florida and South Dakota, Governors Ron DeSantis and Kristi Noem have used their powers to make room for ways of life different from and more attractive than that in places wholly dominated by the oligarchy. Texas and Idaho as well attract refugees from such as California and New York by virtue of such differences with life there as their elected officials have been able to maintain. Governmental and corporate pressures on such states to conform to the oligarchy’s standards, sure to increase, are opportunities for their officials to lead their people’s refusal to conform by explaining why doing this is good, and by personally standing in the way. They may be sure that President Kamala Harris would not order federal troops to shoot at state officials for closing abortion clinics or for excluding men from women’s bathrooms.

    For more than a generation, a majority of Americans have expressed growing distrust of, and alienation from, the establishment. The establishment, not Donald Trump, made this happen. That disparate majority, in many ways at cross purposes with itself, demands leadership. Pollster Patrick Caddell’s in-depth study of the American electorate, which he titled “We Need Smith,” showed how the themes that made it possible for the hero of the 1939 movie “Mr. Smith Goes to Washington” to prevail against the establishment then are even more gripping now and appeal to a bigger majority. Trump was a bad copy of Mr. Smith.

    More than ever, an audience beyond the 74 million Americans who voted for Trump hungers for leadership. The oligarchy came together by ever more vigorously denigrating and suppressing these deplorables. Already before the 20th century’s turn, the FBI and some elements in the Army and the Justice Department had concluded that they are somehow criminal, and that preparations should be made to treat them as such. The official position of the administration taking power after the 2020 election is that domestic terrorism from legions of “white supremacists” is the primary threat facing America. No wonder those so designated for outlawry demand protection.

    The path to electoral leadership is straightforward. Whoever would lead the deplorables-plus must explain their cause to friend and foe, make it his own, and grow it by leading successful acts of resistance. 

    Increasingly, conservative Americans live as if under occupation by a hostile power. Whoever would lead them should emulate Charles de Gaulle’s 1941 basic rule for la résistance: refrain from individual or spontaneous acts or expressions that produce only martyrs. But join with thousands in what amount to battles to defeat the enemy’s initiatives, weaken his grip on power, and prepare his defeat. Thus, an aspirant to the presidency in 2024, in the course of debunking the narrative by which the oligarchy seized so much power over America, might lead millions to violate restrictions placed on those who refuse to wear masks. Or, as he pursues legislative and judicial measures to abolish the compulsory racial and gender sensitivity training sessions to which public and private employees are subjected, he might organize employees in a given sector unanimously to stay away from them in protest. They can’t all be fired or held back.

    Such a persuasive prospective president, or president, could finish the process that, beginning circa 2010, initiated the process of reshaping the Republican Party into something like Caddell’s Mr. Smith would have personified.

    Electoral politics, however, is the easy part. Major corporations, private and semi-private institutions such as schools, publishing houses, and media, are the oligarchy’s deepest foundations. These having become hostile, conservative Americans have no choice but to populate their own. This is far from impossible. 

    Sorting ourselves out into congenial groups has been part of America’s DNA since 1630, when Roger Williams led his followers out of Massachusetts to found Providence Plantations. In the 19th century, the Mormons left unfriendly environments to establish their own settlements. Since 1973, Americans who believe in unborn children’s humanity have largely ceased to intermarry with those who do not. Nobody decided this should happen. It is in the logic of diverging cultures. 

    As American primary and secondary education’s dysfunction became painfully apparent, parents of all races have fled the public schools as fast as they could. Businesses have been fleeing the Rust Belt for the Sun Belt for generations. When Democratic governors and mayors used COVID to make life difficult in their jurisdictions, people moved out of them. When Twitter’s censorship of conservatives became undeniable, Parler added customers by the hundreds of thousands each day. Facebook and Twitter’s stock lost $50 billion in a week. Much more separation follows from the American people’s diverging cultures.

    As conservative America sorts itself out from oligarchy’s social bases, it may be able to restore something like what had existed under the republic. Effectively, two regimes would have to learn to coexist within our present boundaries. But that may be the best, freest, arrangement possible now for the United States.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 23:40

  • 10 Pounds Of High Powered C-4 Explosives Disappear From California Military Base
    10 Pounds Of High Powered C-4 Explosives Disappear From California Military Base

    Military officials are scrambling to recover 10 pounds of Composition C-4, after the high-powered explosives vanished from Twentynine Palms Marine Corps Base in Southern California, according to ABC 10News, citing ‘sources with close military ties.’

    The explosives disappeared during a long training exercise two weeks ago, and are believed to have been stolen.

    The unit’s commanding officer is considering extending the training exercise until the explosives are found, sources said. They also confirm the commanding officer messaged subordinate commands about a monetary reward for any information leading to the discovery of the C-4.

    The base would not confirm any details with ABC 10News. Capt. Zachary Colvin, with the Marine Air Ground Task Force Training Command, told this station that “the ongoing investigation into this incident is being handled by NCIS and the affected units.” –ABC 10News

    A NCIS Public Affairs spokesperson told ABC 10News “Out of respect for the investigative process, NCIS does not comment on or confirm details relating to ongoing investigations.

    Retired Captain Kelly Mayer – a former firefighter and bomb-technician with 23-years of eperience, told the outlet that one pound alone could blow up a vehicle when detonated, adding that C-4 is one of the most powerful explosives to be manufactured.

    For reference, here’s 10 lbs of C-4 exploding.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 23:20

  • During Pandemic, China Sent Millions Of Counterfeit Masks, Test Kits To US: Customs Data
    During Pandemic, China Sent Millions Of Counterfeit Masks, Test Kits To US: Customs Data

    Authored by Frank Fang via The Epoch Times,

    China accounted for about 51 percent of counterfeit or substandard COVID-19-related products seized by U.S. customs officials from October 2019 to Sept. 30 last year, according to a newly-released report from the U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP).

    Among the products seized by U.S. customs officials were over 12.7 million counterfeit masks, 177,356 COVID-19 test kits prohibited by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA), and 38,098 FDA-prohibited chloroquine tablets.

    The effectiveness of the anti-malarial drug hydroxychloroquine and its closely-related chloroquine in treating symptoms of COVID-19, which is caused by the CCP virus (commonly known as the novel coronavirus), is of much debate.

    The FDA initially issued an emergency use authorization for the two drugs, but later revoked the authorization in June last year, saying that they were “unlikely to be effective in treating COVID-19.”

    However, there have been studies showing their effectiveness: one study showed hydroxychloroquine lowered the death rate of COVID-19 patients, while another study demonstrated a drug cocktail containing hydroxychloroquine could lower the hospitalization and death rate of patients infected by the virus.

    The FDA currently has a database listing fraudulent COVID-19 products, including test kits. The list contains company names and the names of their products.

    In December last year, customs officials in Cincinnati seized 10,080 counterfeit surgical masks, which were labeled “3M Mask Model 1860,” in a shipment originating from China, according to a press release. The boxes containing the masks were fraudulently labeled as “Made in the USA.”

    If genuine, these fake 3M masks would have an estimated manufacturer’s suggested retail price of $65,520.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Counterfeit masks were also arriving in the United States from Hong Kong. Customs officials in Cincinnati seized 6,080 fake 3M masks in freight from Hong Kong on Dec. 6, 2020.

    Another seizure took place in Chicago in September last year, when local customs officials stopped a shipment containing 500,000 counterfeit N95 masks. These masks were determined to have an estimated retail price of $474,905, if genuine. The shipment originated from the southern Chinese city of Shenzhen and was destined for a company in Manalapan, New Jersey.

    Forced Labor Products

    The CBP report also mentioned that customs officials issued a record number of 13 new withhold release orders, banning the imports of products made with forced labor, in the 12-month period that ended on Sept. 30, 2020.

    Most of these targeted products—including disposable gloves, seafood, and cotton—originated from China. Together, these products were valued at nearly $50 million, according to the report.

    On Jan. 13, the CBP issued a new withhold release order banning all imports of cotton, apparel, textiles, and tomato products from far-western China’s Xinjiang region.

    Beijing has detained more than one million ethnic Muslims, including Uyghurs, Kazakh, and Kyrgyz people, in internment camps in Xinjiang. Detainees are subject to forced labor, torture, and political indoctrination sessions. Beijing claims these camps are “vocational training centers.”

    In August last year, a U.S. company was fined $575,000 for importing stevia powder and derivatives there were made by prison labor in China. Several months later, in October, CBP asked all U.S. ports to seize stevia products made by an Inner Mongolia-based company, after evidence showed the company used convict, forced, or indentured labor to manufacture the products.

    “Currently, CBP is enforcing 44 active withhold release orders and seven active findings,” according to the report.

    General Products

    Finally, the report concluded that CBP officials seized a total of 26,503 shipments with products found to have violated U.S. intellectual property rights, with China being the “top source” of such seizures. These products would have a total estimated manufacturer’s suggested retail price of over $1.3 billion.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In December last year, customs officials in Los Angeles seized three cargo shipments from China containing counterfeit products that could be worth over $32 million. Among the seized fake products were one million knockoff Viagra pills, footwear, belts, purses, and headphones.

    Counterfeit toys from China that could be worth about $1.3 million were also seized at the Port of New York/Newark, the CBP announced on Dec. 21 last year.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 23:00

  • Rapper Lil Uzi Got $24 Million Diamond Pierced In His Forehead 
    Rapper Lil Uzi Got $24 Million Diamond Pierced In His Forehead 

    While Friday’s job numbers showed the labor market continues to deteriorate, with millions of people unemployed, experiencing housing and food insecurities, one rapper, in these unprecedented economic times, decided to show off his wealth by piercing a jaw-dropping stone to his forehead. 

    Rapper Lil Uzi Vert (real name: Symere Bysil Woods) showed off his new $24 million diamond pierced to his forehead on Wednesday. 

    “Beauty is pain,” the 26-year-old rapper posted to his Instagram account, followed by a video of the jaw-dropping diamond. 

    It was initially assumed by many that Uzi had the stone embedded into his forehead. But, according to Luis Garcia, the vice president of the Association of Professional Piercers, it’s just a piercing. 

    “It looks like he has what we would call a vertical bridge piercing, as in the bridge of the nose. That would be an actual piercing with a staple shape barbell that enters at one point, exits at another, and then the big diamond attaches to that bar on the front,” Garcia told Yahoo. “It’s a piercing, while obviously not super common in typical circles, it’s fairly common in piercing circles. …Definitely not with a giant $24 million diamond on it. But it’s something that gets done.”

    In today’s economy, facing a double-dip recession, walking around with an 11-carat diamond plastered to the rapper’s forehead makes him a walking target. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 22:40

  • Is A Space Mining War Inevitable?
    Is A Space Mining War Inevitable?

    Authored by Cecilia Jamasmie via Mining.com,

    A brewing war to set a mining base in space is likely to see China and Russia joining forces to keep the US increasing attempts to dominate extra-terrestrial commerce at bay, experts warn

    The Trump Administration took an active interest in space, announcing that America would return astronauts to the moon by 2024 and creating the Space Force as the newest branch of the US military.

    It also proposed global legal framework for mining on the moon, called the Artemis Accords, encouraging citizens to mine the Earth’s natural satellite and other celestial bodies with commercial purposes.

    The directive classified outer space as a “legally and physically unique domain of human activity” instead of a “global commons,” paving the way for mining the moon without any sort of international treaty.

    Spearheaded by the US National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA), the Artemis Accords were signed in October by Australia, Canada, England, Japan, Luxembourg, Italy and the United Emirates.

    “Unfortunately, the Trump Administration exacerbated a national security threat and risked the economic opportunity it hoped to secure in outer space by failing to engage Russia or China as potential partners,” says Elya Taichman, former legislative director for then-Republican Michelle Lujan Grisham.

    NASA is working on lunar bases that can travel on wheels, or even legs, increasing landing zone safety, provide equipment redundancy and improve the odds of making key discoveries. (Image courtesy of NASA.)

    “Instead, the Artemis Accords have driven China and Russia toward increased cooperation in space out of fear and necessity,” he writes.

    Russia’s space agency Roscosmos was the first to speak up, likening the policy to colonialism.

    “There have already been examples in history when one country decided to start seizing territories in its interest — everyone remembers what came of it,” Roscosmos’ deputy general director for international cooperation, Sergey Saveliev, said at the time.

    China, which made history in 2019 by becoming the first country to land a probe on the far side of the Moon, chose a different approach. Since the Artemis Accords were first announced, Beijing has approached Russia to jointly build a lunar research base.

    President Xi Jinping has also he made sure China planted its flag on the Moon, which happened in December 2020, more than 50 years after the US reached the lunar surface.

    The Next Wild West?

    China has historically been excluded from the US-led international order in space. It is not a partner in the International Space Station (ISS) program, and a US legislative provision has limited NASA’s ability to cooperate with it in space since 2011.

    “America and China should cooperate in space,” say policy experts Anne-Marie Slaughter and Emily Lawrence.

    “If the US managed to coordinate with the Soviet Union on space policy during the Cold War, it can find a way to cooperate with China now,” they note.

    Slaughter, a former director of policy planning in the US State Department from 2009 to 2011, believes that President Joe Biden’s team should distance from Trump’s accords and instead pursue a new course within the UN Committee on the Peaceful Uses of Outer Space.

    “Biden can restore some of America’s global legitimacy by working to establish a multilateral framework, negotiated with all relevant parties that protects areas of common interest while granting internationally accepted commercial opportunities,” Slaughter and Lawrence wrote.

    It will not be an easy task, they say, but a necessary one. “Without an international framework that includes all major spacefaring countries, the moon could become the next Wild West.”

    The race is on. It has been for a while. So much so that NASA has laid out a $28 billion plan to launch an unmanned mission around the moon in 2021, followed by a crewed moon flyby in 2023, then a lunar landing in 2024. 

    NASA plans to build a permanent moon-orbiting base called the Gateway, similar to the ISS. From there, the agency hopes to build a base on the lunar surface, where it can mine the resources required to fly the first astronauts to Mars.

    Russia has been pursuing plans in recent years to return to the moon, potentially travelling further into outer space.

    Roscosmos revealed in 2018 plans to establish a long-term base on the moon over the next two decades, while President Vladimir Putin has vowed to launch a mission to Mars “very soon.”

    NASA outlined in 2019 its long-term approach to lunar exploration, which includes setting up a “base camp” on the moon’s south pole. (Artist’s rendition courtesy of NASA.)

    The US, Russia and China are not the first nor the only nations to jump on board the lunar mining train.

    Luxembourg, one of the first countries to set its eyes on the possibility of mining celestial bodies, created in 2018 a Space Agency (LSA) to boost exploration and commercial utilization of resources from Near Earth Objects.

    Unlike NASA, LSA does not carry out research or launches. Its purpose is to accelerate collaborations between economic project leaders of the space sector, investors and other partners.

    The tiny European nation announced in November plans to create a European Space Resources Innovation Centre (ESRIC), in charge of laying the foundations for exploiting extra-terrestrial resources.

    Luxembourg is also supporting a program to begin extracting resources from the Moon by 2025.

    The mission, in charge of the European Space Agency in partnership with ArianeGroup, plans to extract waste-free nuclear energy thought to be worth trillions of dollars.

    Trillion-dollar market

    Both China and India have also floated ideas about extracting Helium-3 from the Earth’s natural satellite. Beijing has already landed on the moon twice in the 21st century, with more missions to follow.

    In Canada, most initiatives have come from the private sector. One of the most touted was Northern Ontario-based Deltion Innovations partnership with Moon Express, the first American private space exploration firm to have been granted government permission to travel beyond Earth’s orbit.

    Space ventures in the works include plans to mine asteroids, track space debris, build the first human settlement on Mars, and billionaire Elon Musk’s own plan for an unmanned mission to the red planet.

    Geologists, as well as emerging companies, such as US-based Planetary Resources, a firm pioneering the space mining industry, believe asteroids are packed with iron ore, nickel and precious metals at much higher concentrations than those found on Earth, making up a market valued in the trillions.

    On December 5, 2020, a metallic asteroid 140 miles wide and worth an estimated $10,000 quadrillion made its closest approach to our planet.

    In this concept image, a resource prospector carrying a payload roves on the lunar surface. (Image courtesy of NASA.)

    “With NASA and other companies investing in and developing nuclear power for use in space travel and colonization, the reality of mining asteroids is closer than ever before,” says Bob Goldstein, CEO of US Nuclear Corp.

    With proven successful fusion energy experiments under their belt, US Nuclear and Magneto-Inertial Fusion Technologies (MIFTI) believe they are only a few years away from building the world’s first fusion power generator.

    Fusion power releases up to four times as much energy as fission, and uses fuel that is lightweight, low-cost, safe, and sustainable.

    A spacecraft with fusion-powered propulsion systems could reach the asteroid belt in as little as seven months. According to Goldstein, it could be powerful enough to transport the asteroid to an earth orbit where it would be much more efficient to mine and transport these valuable resources to earth.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 22:20

  • Nevada Gov Pushes Plan To Let Companies Raise Taxes, Create Local Governments
    Nevada Gov Pushes Plan To Let Companies Raise Taxes, Create Local Governments

    Imagine a place where private companies get to effectively separate from the surrounding area and create their own towns, raise their own taxes, and create their own laws – all while still using American dollars.

    Such a place would bring a whole new meaning to the phrase “company town”.

    Just imagine an Apple-ville, Google-town, or PornHubtopia, but instead of rising out of Silicon Valley, the companies may need to trek out to the Nevada desert.

    Because Nevada is trying to make all this – and more – a reality with its latest economic development plan, which involves a decidedly innovative approach that differs starkly with the traditional tax abatements and incentives offered by states like New York (to megacorps like Amazon), and by other states, to other (also often already very large) companies. But Nevada isn’t just trying to lure in the big fish. It’s trying to convince people to come there and build.

    According to a draft of the plan obtained by the Las Vegas Review-Journal (but not yet shared with the legislature), the law would effectively make Nevada an ideal place of business for the next generation of crypto-libertarian innovators. These corporation-run governments “would carry the same authority as a county, including the ability to impose taxes, form school districts and justice courts and provide government services, to name a few duties,” the Review-Journal added.

    While the details of the plan were just leaked this week, when Democratic Gov. Steve Sisolak first introduced the plan during his State of the State address on Jan. 19. At that time, he named Blockchain LLC as one company that had committed to traveling to Nevada and building there.

    The leak to the Review-Journal is starting to pick up traction, as the story about Nevada’s plan for “Innovation Zones” attracts the interest of the national press. It has all the makings of a good political story – after all, it features a Democrat trying to create an independent, decidedly capitalist, libertarian society.

    The whole point of the plan is to bring in more businesses, people and competition by bringing “groundbreaking technologies” to the state, which is already benefiting from the exodus from nearby California, as stretched residents of the Bay Area (and other parts of the Golden State) have been making homes in Las Vegas, Reno, Carson City and other parts of the Silver State, and more will likely continue to do so as California moves to chase away the wealthy, especially in the tech space. 

    The governor’s office of economic development will manage applications for the plan. And even though it’s hardly a sure thing to pass the legislature, it has already got some developers and local officials, excited.

    Storey County Commissioner Lance Gilman, one of the industrial center’s developers, said that the Blockchains Innovation Zone is “going to have an impact on Storey County, and the jury is still out on whether that will be positive or negative.” Gilman said that the county is staying open-minded about the idea, but there needs to be some sort of incentive to compensate for ceding the land to the zone itself.

    Perhaps the most refreshing thing about the plan is that it represents a rare example of state-led economic development that doesn’t feature the use of tax abatements or other publicly funded incentive packages. Kowtowing to corporate interests helped bring Tesla’s Gigafactory to Nevada, apparently.

    But we suspect the notoriously open-minded Tesla CEO Elon Musk might be willing to trade Texas and California for Nevada if this plan were to pass.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 22:00

  • House Impeachment Brief Against Trump Threatens Freedom Of Speech Of All Americans: Dershowitz
    House Impeachment Brief Against Trump Threatens Freedom Of Speech Of All Americans: Dershowitz

    Authored by Tom Ozimek via The Epoch Times,

    Harvard Law School professor emeritus Alan Dershowitz said Thursday that the House impeachment brief against former President Donald Trump, which seeks to undermine Trump’s First Amendment-based argument in his defense, amounts to a dangerous broadside against the freedom of speech of all Americans.

    Writing in an op-ed for The Hill, Dershowitz made a case against a key argument contained in the brief (pdf), namely that “the First Amendment does not apply at all to impeachment proceedings,” signals Congressional willingness to take aim at freedom of speech more broadly.

    “The brief filed by the House managers advocating the conviction and disqualification of citizen Donald Trump contains a frontal attack on freedom of speech for all Americans,” Dershowitz wrote.

    “It states categorically that ‘the First Amendment does not apply at all to impeachment proceedings,’ despite the express language of that amendment prohibiting Congress from making any law, or presumably taking any other action, that abridges ‘the freedom of speech.’”

    Attorney Alan Dershowitz, then member of President Donald Trump’s legal team, speaks to the press in the Senate Reception Room during the Senate impeachment trial at the Capitol in Washington on Jan. 29, 2020. (Mario Tama/Getty Images)

    The legal scholar then challenged another statement in the brief, namely that “the First Amendment exists to promote our democratic system.”

    “This categorical statement surely would have surprised the Framers of the First Amendment, who believed in freedom of speech but not so much in democracy,” Dershowitz wrote. “The Framers of our constitutional system thought they were building a ‘republic,’ with limited suffrage and many checks on ‘democracy,’” he added, arguing that freedom of speech is “essential to keeping it a republic, but not necessarily a democracy.”

    “So, no, the First Amendment does not exist only to ‘protect our democratic system.’ It exists to protect our liberty, regardless of what system we choose,” he wrote.

    Dershowitz said that the argument made by the authors of the House brief that the First Amendment “doesn’t apply to presidents or others who ‘attack our democracy,’ is the same as that made by Sen. Joseph McCarthy and his acolytes decades ago “when they sought to deny First Amendment protection to communists and others who were seen as enemies of democracy and who, if they had come to power, would have denied the rest of us our freedoms, including that of free speech.”

    Freedom of speech must include those who would replace democracy with other systems of governance. It must even include those who advocate severe restrictions on freedom of speech, as many young left wing radicals do today. They, too, must be allowed to express their dangerous views,” he argued.

    The House brief argues that the First Amendment protects private citizens from the government but “it does not protect government officials from accountability for their own abuses in office.”

    Holding Trump “accountable through conviction on the article of impeachment would vindicate First Amendment freedoms—which certainly offer no excuse or defense for President Trump’s destructive conduct,” the brief’s authors argue.

    “Even if the First Amendment were applicable here, private citizens and government officials stand on very different footing when it comes to being held responsible for their statements,” they wrote.

    Citing U.S. Supreme Court rulings in cases Branti v. Finkel and Elrod v. Burns, they argued that, “as the leader of the Nation, the President occupies a position of unique power. And the Supreme Court has made clear that the First Amendment does not shield public officials who occupy sensitive policymaking positions from adverse actions when their speech undermines important government interests.”

    The House brief alleges that Trump incited a mob that breached the U.S. Capitol on Jan. 6 by sowing doubt about the integrity of the 2020 presidential election.

    Protesters clash with police at the U.S. Capitol in Washington on Jan. 6, 2021. (Julio Cortez/AP Photo)

    Trump’s legal team denies the allegation and argues in a memo (pdf) that the trial is unconstitutional because Trump is no longer president. The team also argues that Trump exercised his First Amendment rights in calling into question the results of the election.

    “After the November election, the 45th President exercised his First Amendment right under the Constitution to express his belief that the election results were suspect, since with very few exceptions, under the convenient guise of COVID-19 pandemic ‘safeguards’ states election laws and procedures were changed by local politicians or judges without the necessary approvals from state legislatures,” the legal team wrote.

    “Like all Americans, the 45th President is protected by the First Amendment,” they wrote. “Indeed, he believes, and therefore avers, that the United States is unique on Earth in that its governing documents, the Constitution and Bill of Rights, specifically and intentionally protect unpopular speech from government retaliation.”

    “If the First Amendment protected only speech the government deemed popular in current American culture, it would be no protection at all,” they added.

    Dershowitz’ sentiment that the reasoning featured in the impeachment brief is a threat to freedom of speech more broadly was echoed in a statement by Trump adviser Jason Miller, who said: “not only will President Trump be on trial next week. The First Amendment will be on trial next week because the Democrats aren’t going to stop with attacking President Trump, they want to go after the free speech and the rights of all Americans.”

    Democrats face an uphill battle in the Senate in their pursuit of an impeachment conviction against Trump. Forty-five Republican senators voted in favor of a resolution calling the trial unconstitutional, since Trump is now a private citizen. With the Senate split 50–50, the impeachment managers would have to convince 17 Republicans that the trial is constitutional and that Trump is guilty of inciting an insurrection.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 21:40

  • "No Room For Debate": Beijing Imposes Sweeping Pro-China Curriculum On Hong Kong Schools
    “No Room For Debate”: Beijing Imposes Sweeping Pro-China Curriculum On Hong Kong Schools

    In yet more significant fallout and far-reaching impact from the so-called Hong Kong national security law imposed by Beijing in June of last year, HK authorities in concert with China have unveiled sweeping new ‘national security rules’ for schools.

    Schools have been ordered to adopt the curriculum which instills “an affection for the Chinese people” and while at the same time weeding out potentially disloyal teachers. “As far as national security is concerned, there is no room for debate or compromise,” the new security directive for schools reads ominously

    The measures were announced late Thursday and as Bloomberg details, “will require primary and secondary school students to memorize the law’s offenses, which include subversion, secession, subversion, terrorism and collusion with foreign powers.”

    Image via China Daily

    And further, “Authorities are also looking to incorporate national security education into all subjects, from geography to biology, the government said in a statement.”

    While it remains unclear (and highly dystopian) just how it is that “national security education” will be incorporated into something like science and biology, Beijing has long suspected Hong Kong’s youth of being the main problem behind recent unrest. The mainland further blamed a “foreign hand” to the rolling protests and unrest of recent years.

    China’s Education Bureau was cited as saying the following:

    The fundamentals of national security education are to develop in students a sense of belonging to the country, an affection for the Chinese people, a sense of national identity, as well as an awareness of and a sense of responsibility for safeguarding national security.

    As far as prevention and education are concerned, schools have a significant role to play.

    The rolling and increasingly aggressive protests which saw entire districts of Hong Kong grind to a halt in 2019 into the early part of 2020 were largely driven by young people, in particular college and no doubt high school students as well. There were a number of instances of students ditching school en masse in order to join the anti-mainland protest movement.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Also alarming is that it appears to set up a ‘loyalty litmus test’ of sorts for teachers and staff, which will also no doubt induce ‘informants’ to turn-in fellow faculty. Thursday’s Education Bureau statement further urged school staff to “step up the prevention and suppression” of teaching that’s considered in breach of the security law while helping students to “gain a correct understanding” of the legislation.

    Thus HK schools have now effectively and seemingly overnight been transformed into ‘reeducation’ programs of pro-mainland propaganda. This is precisely what many students feared as in recent years China sought to emphasize “patriotic education” in Hong Kong schools, which met with fierce resistance. 

    The question remains whether this will serve to trigger new waves of unrest, or if China has already effectively gained enough control to stifle even the beginnings of a fresh street uprising. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 21:20

  • Biggest Gun Control Bill In History Targets The Poor, Will Make Millions Of Felons Overnight
    Biggest Gun Control Bill In History Targets The Poor, Will Make Millions Of Felons Overnight

    Authored by Matt Agorist via TheFreeThoughtProject.com,

    HR127, known as the Sabika Sheikh Firearm Licensing and Registration Act introduced by Rep. Jackson Lee, Sheila [D-TX-18], is, without a doubt, the most tyrannical gun control bill ever proposed.

    Like all gun control measures, this bill would hit the poor and minority communities the hardest. Its massive scope would also turn tens of millions of legal, law abiding gun owners into felons overnight.

    As TFTP reported in December, before Joe Biden took office, his administration has major plans for eviscerating the Second Amendment. Biden has been an outspoken gun grabber and on his campaign website, he’s stated that he will use executive action to enforce gun control.

    On the site, Biden states that he will use executive action to “get weapons of war off our streets.” Calling an AR-style weapon a “weapon of war” is laughable given the fact that Biden, under president Obama, aided in the wholesale slaughter of countless innocent civilians in Afghanistan, Iraq, Yemen, Libya, and Somalia — using actual “weapons of war” like drone strikes, hellfire missiles, and sanctions.

    Nevertheless, the new boss — who is the same as the old boss, contrary to what many believe — is presiding over a Congress that will consider the most tyrannical gun control measures in the history of America, HR127.

    Former vice presidential candidate for the Libertarian Party, Spike Cohen points out that “HR127 would be most heavily enforced against those with the least ability to defend themselves in court: the poor, and minorities. It will also make things much worse in marginalized communities, where only police and criminals will have guns.”

    In a post to Facebook, Cohen narrowed down some of the bill’s most ominous points that would target every single gun owner in the country.

    1. Firearms License required for any new gun purchases or ownership transfers.

    • Licensee Must be 21, complete a 24 hour gun safety training course, and must undergo a psych evaluation.

    • Multi-tier license. Individual license for ownership and display of “antique” firearm, standard firearm license, and “military style” license.

    • Military license requires additional 24 hour safety course.

    • Licensing is revoked immediately for anyone indicted of a crime in which the sentence lasts longer than 1 year.

    This heavily discriminates against anyone who has ever seen a therapist or had to get mental health treatment, such as victims of abuse and people with depression, and veterans seeking care for PTSD. Depression and addiction are mentioned specifically as reasons for licensing denial.

    Also, gun licensing is expensive, which makes ownership less accessible for those who need their own protection most.

    2. Requires an $800 annual government insurance fee for all current and future gun owners, to be paid to the Attorney General EVERY YEAR.

    There is no grandfather clause, meaning this applies to anyone that owns a gun at all, not just those who purchase a new firearm after this passes.

    This fee will certainly go up each year. It’s yet another barrier for those in poverty to be able to defend themselves.

    3. Mandatory Nationwide Firearms Registration & Database

    • ALL firearms owned shall be registered under penalty of up to $150,000 and 15 years in prison.

    • Serial, make, model, date, identity of owner, and the location of where the firearm will be stored to be collected and maintained in a database by the US Attorney General.

    • Names and information of all those who may have access to the firearms shall be collected as well.

    • This information to be accessible by state, local, and federal police, military, as well as state and local governments.

    4. Ammunition and Magazine Bans

    • Bans .50cal and larger ammunition outright.

    • Bans all mags that hold more than 10 rounds

    This ammo is mostly used for hunting and is rarely used against people. The most common handguns and rifles use magazines that exceed this arbitrary limit, which makes TENS OF MILLIONS of law-abiding gun owners felons overnight.

    Illegal ownership of even a single round of banned ammo will result in up to $100,000 in fines AND 20 years in prison.

    This bill was originally presented last year and reinvented this year with a whole new level of tyranny added to it both in the government and out of it. For example, the registration data will be made public. Given the cancel culture mass hysteria-inciting media frenzy as of late, this list could be used by big tech and woke cults to target their political rivals. They could seek out this data and use it to implement blacklists, social media bans, and any other number of ways the cancel culture attacks those with whom they disagree.

    As we reported in December, many of these gun control measures are already on the president’s agenda, which go even further.

    One of Biden’s most ominous moves in regard to controlling guns is his push for “smart gun technology” that will require biometrics to fire in an ostensible move to “prevent unauthorized use.” In reality, however, this paves the way for bad actors, including the state and hackers, to be able to control, hack, or essentially turn off your gun, making it a paperweight.

    Biden also plans to pick up where Trump left off in regard to extreme risk laws, also called “red flag” laws. Under Biden’s plan, which is similar to the many plans implemented under Trump, family members or law enforcement officials will be able to make claims — many which involve no evidence — allowing a person’s guns to be temporarily taken until that person is declared fit enough to get them back.

    This attacks on the Second Amendment must be resisted. Please consider calling your representative and peacefully telling them to oppose this bill.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 21:00

  • Tokyo Olympics Gripped By New Scandal After Head Organizer Makes "Sexist Remarks"
    Tokyo Olympics Gripped By New Scandal After Head Organizer Makes “Sexist Remarks”

    Multiple “controversies” – not the least of which are looming pandemic risk and health concerns – are threatening to once again derail the Tokyo Olympics. The summer Olympics were already postponed from last year, a first in history, moved to July of this upcoming summer. But now a fresh scandal has again put the pressure and spotlight on the games and its organizers as one of the eldest members of the Olympic Committee is accused of making sexist comments. Reuters reports:

    Japan’s Olympic Games faced a “major issue” after the head of the local organizing committee made sexist remarks, Tokyo’s governor said on Friday, sending a clear signal the deepening controversy risked tarnishing the global event.

    The president of the Tokyo Olympic Games organizing committee, Yoshiro Mori. AFP/Getty Images

    83-year old Yoshiro Mori unleashed a “social media storm” this week which has since been picked up in a torrent of international reports by simply saying that women talk too much.

    Somewhat absurdly (given the multiple major other pressing issues and immense hurdles the Olympic Games are now facing amid a global pandemic), these are the reports now headlining across the world, as The Washington Post recaps:

    Yoshiro Mori, president of the Tokyo Olympic organizing committee, on Wednesday said women have an “annoying” tendency to make meetings run unnecessarily long in comments that he sought to retract Thursday.

    Speaking to members of the Japanese Olympic Committee with reporters present, Mori said “board of directors meetings with many women take a lot of time.”

    “When you increase the number of female executive members, if their speaking time isn’t restricted to a certain extent, they have difficulty finishing, which is annoying,” he said, as told by an Agence France-Presse translation of an Asahi Shimbun story.

    “Women are competitive,” Mori added. “When one person raises a hand, others think they need to speak up as well. That’s why everyone speaks.”

    “Some members of the committee reportedly laughed at Mori’s remarks…” WaPo noted further.

    Mori is currently under pressure to resign his post. Making matters worse the whole commentary which apparently may have been an attempt at humor was in response to a question centered on the Japan Olympic Committee’s (JOC) gender make up. Critics have said there’s not enough female representation.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The controversy has now escalated to be categorized as a matter of “safety” and “security”. The comments from the out of touch octogenarian caused Reuters to write this over-the-top line: “The incident has cast another dark shadow over the Games, postponed for a year due to the coronavirus pandemic, with just months left before the opening ceremony.”

    Tokyo’s female governor, Yuriko Koike, added fuel to the controversy by saying, “The mission of the metropolis and the organizing committee is to prepare for a safe and secure Games, and we are facing a major issue.”

    Meanwhile, in real news not subject to as much hyperventilating and over-dramatization, the International Olympic Committee is now mulling canceling the upcoming games altogether as it could be “too dangerous to proceed” amid the continuing coronavirus pandemic.

    “The IOC has the power to cancel,” IOC Canadian member Dick Pound said in a new interview this week, according to Bloomberg. “I’m sure that would be a decision to be made together with the Japanese government and the Japanese organizers on the basis of advice from the World Health Organization and other scientific data,” he added, explaining further it’s no longer a matter of merely postponing further: “We don’t have three choices anymore, we have only two – we go or we cancel.”

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 20:40

  • SPAC Craze Goes To Wine Country
    SPAC Craze Goes To Wine Country

    Submitted by Market Crumbs,

    It’s almost every day that we write about a new SPAC deal. January saw the amount of money raised by SPACs jump 20-fold from last January to $24.26 billion, already accounting for 30% of last year’s $79 billion raised by SPACs.

    While SPAC deals have commonly targeted companies in the electric vehicle space, the list of companies that have gone public through this route is quickly growing.

    This week saw an interesting SPAC deal as Vintage Wine Estates has entered into a merger with Bespoke Capital Acquisition Corp. to become a publicly traded company.

    Vintage Wine Estates, which was founded 20 years ago, is one of the fastest growing U.S. wine producers with sales of nearly 2 million nine-liter equivalent cases annually. Vintage Wine Estates carries more than 50 brands that range in price from $10 to $150 per bottle.

    The winemaker touts profitability every year since inception, with 20% average annual revenue and EBITDA growth since 2010. The combination will see Vintage Wine Estates continue to be run by founder and CEO Pat Roney while the management team will remain in place.

    “Our advantaged scale within a highly fragmented wine industry, industry-leading DTC platform that positions us well in a post-COVID consumer world and premium brand portfolio provide a strong foundation to build upon and sustain robust long-term growth,” Roney said. “This transaction will not only enable us to invest behind our brands to drive market share where necessary, but it will also fuel the next phase of our rapid growth in the U.S. wine industry.”

    Vintage Wine Estates will use the combination to expand in the U.S. wine industry, which has seen sustained growth over the past 25 years and has room for more growth, according to the company.

    The combination will also bring the experience of former Diageo CEO Paul Walsh, who is the Executive Chairman of Bespoke Capital Acquisition Corp. and will serve as the non-executive Chairman of the combined company.

    “After evaluating over 100 companies, we are delighted to have identified VWE as the ideal merger partner,” Walsh said.The Company represents a unique and compelling investment opportunity in the consumer staples space. VWE’s well-diversified portfolio of high-quality brands spanning all price points and differentiated omni-channel marketing approach bring great balance.”

    As SPACs continue to dominate, this is just one of the interesting examples of a company that has been given a fresh boost as it heads to the public markets.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 20:20

  • "The Open Kimono": NRA Bankruptcy Will Lead To Unprecedented Disclosure Of Org's Financial Habits
    “The Open Kimono”: NRA Bankruptcy Will Lead To Unprecedented Disclosure Of Org’s Financial Habits

    A forthcoming NRA bankruptcy may mark the first time critics of the association get a deep look into the inner-workings of the organization.

    As part of its coming bankruptcy, the NRA “will be forced to release a detailed list of cash payments it has made to insiders in the last year and any unusual property transfers it has made to anyone within two years,” Bloomberg notes. It will also have to disclose whether or not it had a 5% stake in any other businesses.

    The disclosure are relatively common for a bankruptcy proceeding, but the fact that the NRA has often played their cards close to their chest with how they run their business means that the volunteering of the information will be a break from the norm. 

    The U.S. Trustee will set up an official committee of unsecured creditors that will have the power to look into the NRA’s spending, the report notes. Howard Seife, head of the bankruptcy practice at the Norton Rose Fulbright law firm, said: “We have a technical term for it in the trade. It’s called the open kimono.”

    Dallas bankruptcy attorney John Penn said: “Each bit of information in that filing can open the door for more inquiries and discovery.”

    “Any time you are considering filing for Chapter 11 and taking advantage of the protections of the bankruptcy code, you need to be prepared for tremendous scrutiny of your operations and financial conditions,” Seife added. In addition, top members of the NRA may have to testify under oath. 

    The NRA has filed for bankruptcy as part of a strategy to resolve lawsuits it is facing, claiming it is “the subject of a political attack” from regulators in New York. The organization is hoping to reincorporate in Texas for a fresh start. New York Attorney General Letitia James is suing to dissolve the organization and is specifically targeting its executive Vice President, Wayne Lapierre. 

    James alleges that Lapierre spent over $1 million of NRA money on unauthorized flights and received inappropriate gifts. 

    The NRA’s lawyer, William Brewer, said: “The NRA will provide the information required by the bankruptcy schedules without hesitation. The truth is, most of its senior staff members, including CEO Wayne LaPierre, have no guarantees of future employment and have voluntarily taken pay reductions to help the NRA address the pandemic.”

    “The NRA will utilize all tools at its disposal to highlight the motivations of the NYAG. Clearly, the NRA believes this was a politically motivated attack – fueled by the NYAG’s opposition to the NRA’s political point of view,” he concluded.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 20:00

  • Calling For An American Ministry Of Truth – The US Media's Dystopian 2021
    Calling For An American Ministry Of Truth – The US Media’s Dystopian 2021

    Authored by Stephen Lendman via Global Research,

    The New York Times never misses an opportunity to miss an opportunity for truth-telling as it should be.

    It’s a notion long ago abandoned in deference to providing press agent services for powerful interests.

    At the same time, the Times finds new ways to disgrace itself.

     

    Calling for a US Ministry of Truth headed by a “reality czar” sounds ominously like what Orwell described in his dystopian 1984 novel that’s no longer fiction, saying:

    The Ministry of Peace concerns itself with war, the Ministry of Truth with lies, the Ministry of Love with torture and the Ministry of Plenty with starvation.

    These contradictions are not accidental, nor do they result from from ordinary hypocrisy.

    They are deliberate exercises in doublethink.

    Along with Big Brother mass surveillance and newspeak, Orwell’s Ministry of Truth was all about controlling the message, eliminating whatever conflicts with it, memory holes used for this purpose.

    The Times and other US major media operate this way now — a collective ministry of truth as described above.

    Featuring the official narrative exclusively, alternative views are filtered out and suppressed, free and open expression banned in their reports.

    In 1984, unnwanted material went down memory holes to “be whirled away (in) enormous furnaces…devoured by the flames,” said Orwell, adding:

    “(T)here were the directing brains who co-ordinated the whole effort and laid down the lines of policy which made it necessary that this fragment of the past should be preserved, that one falsified, and the other rubbed out of existence.”

    In the US and West, no Orwell-style memory hole is needed, no furnaces, no ceremonial book-burnings.

    Big Media in cahoots with diabolical government officials censor and eliminate truth-telling on what’s vital for everyone to know.

    What Times fake news called a US “reality crisis” amounts to urging greater state-sponsored censorship than already.

    What it called “the scourge of hoaxes, lies and delusions” are hard truths about US imperial wars, hazardous covid vaccines to be shunned, stolen Election 2020, unelected/cognitively impaired Biden unable to serve in any public capacity, the anti-Trump Jan. 6 Capitol Hill false flag, and other cutting-edge issues.

    What the self-styled newspaper of record calls “misguided beliefs” are indisputable facts important for everyone to know.

    A real “national reality crisis” exists because of Big Government in cahoots with Big Media – like the Times — serving privileged interests exclusively at the expense of most others.

    It’s because of US police state totalitarian rule on a fast track toward full-blown tyranny.

    It’s because the US no longer is open, free, and fair.

    It’s because hardline government is the mortal enemy of ordinary people — their health, well-being, safety, and fundamental freedoms being eliminated in real time.

    It’s because of US war OF terrorism, not on it, rages against ordinary people, wanting them exploited to serve privileged interests.

    It’s because America is no longer safe and fit to live in for most of its people.

    It’s because of the largely ignored greatest ever US Main Street Great Depression while wealth, power, and privileged interests never had things better.

    It’s because media like the Times suppress what’s crucial for everyone to know.

    What the Times called “violent extremism” is state-sponsored.

    What it calls a “truth commission” reflects shades of 1984.

    What it calls “domestic terrorists” are FBI, CIA, DHS, local police, and other elements of oppression to cow ordinary people into submission to a diabolical higher power in Washington.

    Truth-telling as it should be is polar opposite how the Times and other establishment media operate.

    As a collective lying machine, truth-telling is their moral enemy, what they’re hellbent for eliminating in whatever form it shows up.

    In today’s America, Big Brother mass surveillance, police state control, and ministry of truth Big Lies are part of the national fabric.

    That’s the ugly reality suppressed by the Times and other Big Media.

    The nation I grew up in long ago no longer exists.

    Growing tyranny heading toward becoming full-blown replaced it.

    That’s the ugly reality establishment media like the Times suppress – to their disgrace.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 19:40

  • The Curious Case Of The Hedge Fund That Made $700 Million On GameStop
    The Curious Case Of The Hedge Fund That Made $700 Million On GameStop

    While retail was “sticking it to the suits” – the actual suits at hedge fund Senvest Management were about to net a cool $700 million on GameStop’s run higher. Why? Because GME was the largest Senvest holding as of Oct 7, an oddity considering many within the hedge fund world at the time viewed it as a potential bankruptcy candidate – hardly a prudent move from a fiduciary standpoint, unless Senvest had a plan… and boy did it have a plan.

    But let’s back up.

    Senvest principles, Richard Mashaal and Brian Gonick, started buying GSE stock equity in September, the Wall Street Journal report reveals, just weeks before they had accumulated a massive 3.6 million shares making Gamestop the fund’s largest holding. Mashaal told the Journal: “When it started its march, we thought, something’s percolating here. But we had no idea how crazy this thing was going to get.”

    In retrospect, he just might have had an idea.

    GameStop turned into the firm’s most profitable ever investment by dollars earned and IRR. Senvest’s fund has ballooned from $1.6 billion to $2.4 billion as a result of GameStop’s move and, for the month of January, the fund was up 38.4%. Gamestop is also the reason why Senvest is currently the top performing fund tracked by HSBC’s popular Hedge Weekly report.

    Thomas Peterffy, chairman of Interactive Brokers, noted what many had suspected: “It is not just little people on the long side here. There are huge players playing both sides of GameStop.”

    Richard Mashaal, left, and Brian Gonick made $700 million in GameStop in just three months.

    He was right. Senvest says their interest in the name was “piqued by a presentation from the new GameStop chief executive at a consumer investment conference in January 2020.” The Journal writes:

    But as they spoke with management, sussed out competitors and noted the involvement of activists in the stock, including Chewy Inc. co-founder Ryan Cohen, they eventually started buying. By the end of October, Senvest owned more than 5% of the company, paying under $10 a share for the bulk of the stock.

    They thought that if GameStop could hold on until the next generation of videogame consoles came out and stoked demand for games and accessories, the company would get a boost. And they reasoned that if Mr. Cohen could help transform GameStop from a largely bricks-and-mortar operation into an online gaming destination, the company could be worth far more.

    Sure there are fundamentals, but we doubt that was the reason for the accelerated accumulation of GME stock by Senvest. Something tells us there were other factors that prompted the urgent buying spree, especially since the original “short burn of the century” article on Reddit which sparked the retail interest in the name, appeared in early September right around the time Senvest started acquiring shares, according to the Journal. One almost wonder if the two aren’t linked.

    The post reads: “Sup gamblers. Feel bad about missing the gain train on TSLA? Fear not – something much greater and stupider is here. You know Citadel? The MM that took all our money today? Well now we finally won’t be at the mercy of the MMs. Instead, we’re going to temporarily join forces with the Galactic Empire and hijack the death star.”

    The post then launches into a relatively sophisticated explanation of the hows and whys of orchestrating a short squeeze:

    The this turn around is going to make TSLA’s short burn look like warm afternoon tea.

    Why? Well, most short squeezes are mostly math. This one is special because we have math AND great underlying news.

    To be clear, this will happen whether or not we participate. I prefer us idiots to be a part of history. Here’s what’s up:

    Short interest:

    GME currently has between 85% – 99.8% short interest, depending on what site you use. For context, 20% is already considered high as the moon. TSLA and NFLX were around 30-40% at their peak. But GME’S ACTUAL SHORT INTEREST IS OVER 110%. 

    Here is a simple way of framing the timeline:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Just a few months later, in December the GameStop long thesis got a major boost among both the retail (outside of WSB) as well as C-grade institutional community, when Hedgeye, which sells research to clients, pitched the name.

    On Dec. 17, when GME stock closed at $14.83, Hedgeye told its clients that GameStop was one of their “Best Ideas” and held a presentation as to why the equity, then trading at $14.83 could eventually be worth $100. What Hedgeye’s clients did not know – according to the WSJ – is that Senvest had pitched the idea to them. 

    Of course, for Hedgeye it would be a knockout blow if it emerged that the firm wasn’t an “independent provider of research” but middle-man and facilitator for hedge funds who had put on trades and then used Hedgeye’s client network as an amplification system… similar to what many accuse hedge funds of doing to r/wallstreetbets right now. Which is why the advisory denied that the upgrade was promptly solely by Senvest’s whispers (we can only assume that Senvest is also a client): “I respect Senvest a lot. We vetted it independently and we came up with a similar conclusion,” said Hedgeye analyst Brian McGough said. 

    In any case, by late December – between wallstreetbets and Hedgeye clients, the thesis was already widely spreading among the retail community, a process that would eventually culminate with the explosion of the stock price in late January. Why? Because the prevailing narrative was one where one or more hedge funds would never be able to cover their shorts because there was not enough short available in the float to cover, a process the world first encountered with Volkswagen, leading to a huge squeeze.

    A squeeze, incidentally, which Senvest was all too familiar with. The WSJ writes:

    Messrs. Mashaal and Gonick had been on the wrong end of short squeezes before at Senvest. One case was with opioid maker Insys Therapeutics Inc., though they ultimately made money on their short position. GameStop’s stock could soar if it got caught up in a situation in which its rising price forced bearish investors to start buying back shares to curb their losses, they thought.

    They thought… and they were right. All they needed was the critical mass of buyers to ramp an initial buying cascade which would then trigger the squeeze and the rest is history. That’s precisely what happened in mid to late January, when the stock price exploded from $20 to over $500.

    Unable to believe their eyes (or perhaps knowing precisely how such a massive short squeeze would play out) Senvest was just waiting for the catalyst to dump it all. They got it on on January 26, when Tesla CEO Elon Musk joined the stock-pumping fray and Tweeted out: “GameStonk!!”. 

    “Given what was going on, it was hard to imagine it getting crazier,” Senvest’s Mashaal concluded.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    So just a series of very lucky coincidences leading up to a record, $700 million payday, or a masterfully executed plan that was laid out and executed far better than most Hollywood scripts?

    We hope to have the answer once Congress holds its Gamestop hearings, although considering that Maxine Waters is in charge we won’t be holding our breath.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 19:22

  • Trump Says Lou Dobbs "Is & Was Great" After Fox News Cancels '#1 Business News' Show
    Trump Says Lou Dobbs “Is & Was Great” After Fox News Cancels ‘#1 Business News’ Show

    Update (2215ET): Former President Trump has issued a statement on Lou Dobbs show being cancelled:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    It’s probably just a coincidence, but…

    A day after voting software company SmartMatic filed a $2.7 billion defamation suit against Fox News and three of its hosts – Dobbs, Maria Bartiromo and Jeanine Pirro – over voting-machine-fraud claims, The LA Times reports that, according to a Fox News representative who confirmed the cancellation, Fox News has canceled “Lou Dobbs Tonight”.

    The show, which is described by the network as “the #1 news program on business television”, came under fire during the 2020 election after pushing claims of election fraud. 

    Additionally, Dobbs was forced to issue a fact-checking clip on his show in December 2020 after Smartmatic, a voting machine company, issued a legal letter regarding what it says was “false and defamatory statements and reports,” The Daily Beast previously reported.

    “As we said in October, Fox News Media regularly considers programming changes and plans have been in place to launch new formats as appropriate post-election, including on Fox Business,” a Fox News spokesperson said according to the LA Times.

    “This is part of those planned changes. A new 5 p.m. program will be announced in the near future.”

    Finally, The LA Times cited “people familiar with discussions” who suggested that Dobbs’ cancellation had been in the works prior to legal issues regarding the voting machine companies.

    “Lou Dobbs Tonight” is being renamed as “Fox Business Tonight” beginning next week. The show will see rotating guest hosts, according to the LA Times.

    Dobbs, 75, remains under contract at Fox News but he will in all likelihood not appear on the company’s networks again.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 19:20

  • TSA To Slap Mask-Mandate-Violators With $1,500 Fines
    TSA To Slap Mask-Mandate-Violators With $1,500 Fines

    Mask up on planes, or the Transportation Security Administration (TSA) will slap travelers with hundreds of dollars in fines. Repeated offenders could see penalties north of $1,500, according to a TSA press release. 

    “Based on substantial aggravating or mitigating factors, TSA may seek a sanction amount that falls outside these ranges. TSA has provided transportation system operators specific guidance on how to report violations so that TSA may issue penalties to those who refuse to wear a face mask,” the agency also said.

    Darby LaJoye, Senior Official Performing the TSA Administrator’s Duties, said TSA would “fully comply with the President’s Executive Orders, CDC guidance and the DHS National Emergency determination to ensure healthy and secure travel across all transportation sectors. This will help prevent further spread of COVID-19 and encourage a unified government response.” 

    Two weeks ago, President Biden signed an executive order requiring passengers to wear face coverings on planes. That means people who don’t wear masks could be slapped with fines, or worse, banned from traveling. 

    “As we continue to experience impacts from this pandemic, we are committed to this measure as the right thing to do for the TSA workforce, for our industry stakeholders and for passengers,” LaJoye said.

    The crackdown on mask-wearing has resulted in more than 2,500 passengers banned from planes for violating onboard mask policies. 

    The airline industry has been turning to mask enforcement as a way to regain confidence in air travel. Another confidence booster has been the introduction of “immunity passports” in Europe, which could be coming to the US later this year. 

    While there’s been an abundance of research to show masks don’t work against COVID-19, rules are rules, and if you want to fly and avoid being slapped with a fine, wear a mask. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 19:20

  • Did You Make Janet Yellen Rich?
    Did You Make Janet Yellen Rich?

    Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

    Up until the WallStreetBets crowd short squeezed Melvin Capital for a $7 billion loss, Robinhood had it made.  But losing billions is stressful.  And when your product blows up your customer the clucking that follows comes hot and heavy.

    One of the sweetest displays in the world, we’ve been told, is the bursts of digital confetti that shower down Robinhood’s investment app to celebrate the purchase of stocks, options, and cryptocurrencies.  These digital confetti bursts – in addition to spinning prices and scratch off rewards – are great entertainment.  So, too, is watching the price of bitcoin quoted in neon pink.  It just screams buy!

    Trading on Robinhood is designed to be both fun and exciting.  There are even freebie alerts.  It’s like playing Candy Crush.  Only the score is kept in dollars and cents.  And with a little practice you can strike it rich.

    The clucking for Robinhood CEO, Vlad Tenev, began on Thursday, January 28, at 3:30 am Pacific Time.  That’s when the National Securities Clearing Corporation (NSCC) informed his company that it had to put up $3 billion.  According to Tenev, that’s “an order of magnitude more than what it typically is.”

    But Tenev and the fellows at the NSCC handled the situation like professionals.  After several early morning phone calls they came to a nifty agreement…

    Robinhood would provide $700 million.  In lieu of the remaining funds, the company would restrict buying – and digital confetti bursts – of the WallStreetBets-fueled rocket launch of GameStop, AMC, and several other heavily shorted stocks.  That’s when the clucking really began.

    The Ultimate Catch

    The promise of something for free will always be an enticing marketing ploy.  Years ago, for example, when opening a new bank account at your local thrift, they’d kick in a free toaster.  Robinhood took this marketing strategy and adapted it to the digital age.

    When opening a Robinhood trading account, for instance, you have a 100 percent chance of getting a free stock.  When you link your bank account, and fulfill certain conditions, you get free stock.  When you invite friends…you get free stock.

    The free stocks are selected at random.  If you’re lucky, you’ll score a share of Apple or Visa.

    These free promotions are fun…and generally harmless.  Moreover, there are worse ways to acquire new customers.  If Robinhood wants to sprinkle free stock around, like digital confetti bursts, good for them.

    Yet everyone knows Robinhood’s ultimate freebie is its commission free trades.  Certainly, this goes counter to how brokerages have traditionally conducted business.  Hence, this ultimate freebie comes with the ultimate catch.

    On January 28, after Tenev’s early morning fireside chat with the NSCC, and after WallStreetBets had delivered a three day beat down to Melvin Capital, this ultimate catch was revealed with exacting clarity.  By restricting buying at this critical moment, Robinhood appeared to be making an explicit choice: Hedge funds over customers.

    And therein lies the kicker: The hedge funds are Robinhood’s customers; its users are the product.

    Before noon, Congressional members from Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez to Ted Cruz were cluck, cluck, clucking…

    Rigged Markets

    During the late stages of an epic bubble, fraud, folderol, grift, and graft, drip like honey from a mistresses lips.

    Behind Melvin Capital stands Citadel and Point72 Asset Management.  As Melvin Capital was getting short squeezed, Citadel and Point72 came to its rescue with $2.75 billion.

    Was this an act of fraternal benevolence?  Maybe.

    But a day or two later Robinhood restricted its users from buying the very stock – GameStop – that wrecked Melvin Capital.  Is it merely a coincidence that Citadel is also Robinhood’s biggest customer?

    You see, Robinhood, which offers commission free trades, makes its money by selling users’ trades to other large firms – like Citadel Securities – before they’re actually executed.  Those firms make money by effectively seeing what the retail investors on Robinhood are going to do before they actually do it, and acting accordingly.  The Financial Times explains:

    “Citadel Securities pays tens of millions of dollars for this order flow but makes money by automatically taking the other side of the order, then returning to the market to flip the trade.  It pockets the difference between the price to buy and sell, known as the spread.”

    If this skimming activity sounds like a rigged market it’s because it is.  What’s more, it’s making certain insiders ridiculously rich.

    Did You Make Janet Yellen Rich?

    Incoming Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen, who was Chair of the Federal Reserve from 2014 to 2018, is an insider’s insider.  During her brief hiatus from public life Yellen went on a spectacular speaking tour of the big Wall Street banks and corporations.

    In total, she raked in $7.2 million in speaking fees from places like Citi, Goldman Sachs, Google, City National Bank, UBS, Barclays, Credit Suisse, Salesforce, and more.  Not bad work, if you can get it.

    But what could she have possibly said that was so valuable?  Did she prove the existence of perpetual motion?  Did she, in fact, square the circle?

    For an insider’s insider, speeches are delivered with unspoken symbiosis.  The words uttered have little relevance.  The fees, however, lubricate the mechanism of future access.  It wasn’t much of a gamble to bet that Yellen would be Treasury Secretary under a Biden presidency.

    Another one of the firms Yellen spoke at happened to be Citadel – Robinhood’s biggest customer.  She got $810,000 for two speeches and a series of webinars.

    Now where did Citadel get the money to pay Yellen?

    Obviously, the company funded it via business profits.  But, remember, some of those profits came from skimming retail investor order flow purchased from Robinhood.  From what we gather, Schwab, TD Ameritrade, and other online brokers also sell order flow to Citadel.

    Thus, if you’ve made a trade over the last three years using an online brokerage, guess what?

    You’ve unknowingly contributed to making Janet Yellen rich.

    The cluckers in Congress have vowed to get to the bottom of the hullaballoo.  Somehow this will all be WallStreetBets’ fault…and the insiders – once again – will get off scot free.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 19:00

  • Head Of The Fed's Plunge Protection Team Resigns To Join Biden Administration
    Head Of The Fed’s Plunge Protection Team Resigns To Join Biden Administration

    Back in the summer of 2019, a series of unprecedented personnel shake ups rocked the New York Fed, also known as the most critical Fed due to its direct involvement with capital markets, which a year earlier had appointed former San Fran Fed president and career academic John Williams, a Ph.D economist and Fed lifer, as its new figurehead president to replace Bill Dudley. In a move that shocked Fed watchers, the two most important people at the NY Fed, Simon Potter and Richard Dzina, announced with just a few days’ notice that they would be quitting in what we subsequently learned was their termination by the inferiority complexed Williams.

    In late May, Mr. Williams announced the departure of Simon Potter, head of the markets desk since 2012, and Richard Dzina, head of financial services. They had joined the New York Fed in 1998 and 1991, respectively. People familiar with the matter said the exits had less to do with particular policy disputes than with tension over day-to-day management issues.

    The way Mr. Williams executed the abrupt departures rattled upper management and sank staff morale, current and former staffers said. Mr. Potter learned of the decision from Mr. Williams shortly before he was to deliver a keynote address in Hong Kong that had already been announced.

    At a going-away party at the New York Fed’s headquarters, Messrs. Potter and Dzina received an extended ovation that kept Mr. Williams waiting offstage to address attendees. “It was maybe three minutes,” said one attendee. “It is hard to describe how awkward the air felt.”

    Not surprisingly, just a few months later, the hapless Williams – now without Potter by his side – faced the biggest financial crisis in recent years (until the Covid pandemic of course), when the repo crisis struck and for a few critical hours NY Fed president Williams had no clue what to do or how to restore market confidence:

    Mr. Williams’s team was making its moves without key leadership after he ousted two veterans.

    * * *

    “Market confidence in the New York Fed markets desk is critical, and a series of events here have, let’s say, dinged confidence in the operations,” said Ward McCarthy, chief financial economist at financial-services company Jefferies LLC. “It’s important that the confidence issue be addressed before it becomes a more significant problem.”

    Mr. Williams in the interview defended the bank’s response, saying, “We diagnosed it right, and Lorie and her team worked with others to get that done and get it done quickly.”

    Some analysts said that the Fed ultimately made the right calls but that the incident showed officials had miscalculated the quantity of reserves needed in the system and how tight funding markets would get as a result.

    “The lack of response on Monday was unnerving,” said Mark Cabana, head of short-term interest-rate strategy research at Bank of America Merrill Lynch. “They came in on Tuesday, but they came in too late.”

    In any event, why was the unexpected departure significant?

    Because Simon Potter was the brains behind the actual execution of QE and the Fed’s various indirect trades (using a hedge fund and market maker that has made quite a few headlines in recent days) as the head of the NY Fed’s Markets Group, he was the head trader for the infamous plunge protection team (PPT). Potter’s intimate knowledge of how the Fed “interfaces” with the market also made him an extremely valuable commodity and is why one year later, Potter ended up joining one of the world’s best hedge funds, Izzy Englander’s Millennium Management.

    Eventually, more than half a year later, in February 2020 just as the covid pandemic was set to crush the stock market,  Williams finally found a replacement for Potter when he hired Daleep Singh, an economist who previously served at the Treasury Department, who was tasked with the massive challenge of running the NY Fed’ markets group; effectively a bureaucrat was in charge of micromanaging the most important capital markets in the world.

    But not for long, because fast forwarding to today, just a little over a year after he was hired, Singh announced his resignation from the NY Fed to join the Biden Administration as Deputy National Security Advisor and Deputy National Economic Council Director.

    Here is the full press release:

    The Federal Reserve Bank of New York today announced that Daleep Singh has stepped down from his role as Head of the Markets Group and will be leaving the Bank in mid-February to join the Biden Administration as Deputy National Security Advisor and Deputy National Economic Council Director. Anne Baum, Head of Central Bank and International Account Services, will serve as interim Head of the Markets Group and the New York Fed will launch a search for his successor in the coming weeks.

    “Daleep brought his dedication to public service and leadership skills to the New York Fed and had a meaningful impact during his tenure,” said John C. Williams, president and chief executive officer of the New York Fed. “Over the past year, Daleep has played a critical leadership role in the emergency facilities the Fed launched in response to COVID-19. I’m thrilled that he will continue to leverage his knowledge and expertise in support of economic policy at this important time.”

    Mr. Singh joined the New York Fed in February 2020. As Head of the Markets Group, he focused on bringing together policy, strategy, analysis and operational effectiveness. He also served as a member of the Executive Committee.

    Previously, Mr. Singh was Senior Partner and Chief U.S. Economist at SPX Capital, a global investment firm. He also worked at the U.S. Department of the Treasury from 2011 to 2017, serving as Acting Assistant Secretary for Financial Markets and Deputy Assistant Secretary for International Affairs.

    The problem is that while Singh had no prior capital markets experience and was merely a figurehead, his temporary replacement, Anne Baum is even more clueless.

    Which means that for the next several months, the world’s most important trading desk will be without a head trader. And while that shouldn’t be a problem if the markets keep going up, for the sake of the Biden administration – and crony capitalism in general – let’s hope that the NY Fed does not encounter another market crisis that needs more than a token academic figurehead at the helm to know what to do to restore market calm.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 18:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 5th February 2021

  • UK Vaccine Minister: All Over Age 50 Must Be Vaccinated Before Lockdown Lift Begins
    UK Vaccine Minister: All Over Age 50 Must Be Vaccinated Before Lockdown Lift Begins

    Submitted by PFW News,

    UK Vaccine Minister Nadhim Zahawi says that lockdown restrictions will not be lifted until all over the age 50 receive the COVID-19 vaccine, a decision he claims could push the return to normalcy into the summer.

    UK Vaccine Minister Nadhim Zahawi (L) seated next to Editorial Director of BBC News Kamal Ahmed (R)

    Zahawi, the top bureaucrat over the country’s vaccine roll out, clarified when speaking to The Sun on Tuesday that the government ideally wants to see the top 9 age categories vaccinated in the first phase of dose administration, which includes everyone over 50.

    “Is your message to the country and to your own back benches, forget mid-February, forget the 8th of March … not until we’ve done everybody over the age of 50 can we can we really talk about getting back to life, anything like normal?” a radio host with The Sun asked Zahawi, to which the Minister responded …

    “We’ll do that as quickly as possible … the prime minster has made it very clear that on the 22nd of February there will be a road map for how we intend to reopen the economy, beginning with schools on the 8th of March and then gradually the rest of the economy.”

    Zahawi would insist that the UK is on pace to have jabbed nearly everyone in the most Covid vulnerable group – those over 70 – within the next 11 days.

    Despite this group accounting for the vast majority of Covid deaths, the Minister claims this is still not enough to lift freedom crushing restrictions.

     “We want to reopen schools, reopen our economy, get our lives back, but never have to go back into another severe lockdown like the one we’re all experiencing and suffering from at the moment,” he said.

    The Vaccine Minister would espouse a slow moving method to lifting lockdown measures that relies heavily on data.

    “You’ve got to make sure that your vaccination program has protected the top nine categories in phase one – that is 99% of mortality.”

    Prime Minister Boris Johnson announced during a Tuesday Downing Street press conference that there would indeed be a road map for exiting lockdown presented on February 22.

    The people of England are currently strapped under harsh lockdown rules that restrict them from being social with anyone outside their home or “support bubble” without a government approved “reasonable excuse.”

    People breaking these rules can face fines, including an £800 penalty for those attending house parties of more than 15 people and a £10,000 fine for the organizers, reports BBC News.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 02:00

  • Mapping Global Income Support During COVID-19
    Mapping Global Income Support During COVID-19

    Income loss has impacted many during the COVID-19 pandemic. As Visual Capitalist’s Avery Koop details below, unemployment, reduced hours, office closures, and business shutdowns have prompted the need for mass income support.

    Globally, income from work fell $3.5 trillion in the first nine months of 2020, a change of -10.7% compared to the same period in 2019.

    In the map below, Our World in Data reveals the different levels of income support provided by governments across the globe.

    Income support, in this case, is defined as governments broadly covering lost salaries, or providing universal basic income or direct payments to people who have lost their jobs or cannot work. Levels of income support are changing over time.

    Small Government

    Many world governments have provided no support when it comes to a universally applicable scheme to cover lost income in their countries.

    Examples: (as of January 25th, 2021)

    •  Venezuela

    •  Syria

    •  Belarus

    •  Bangladesh

    •  Cambodia

    The majority of the governments providing no support are in low to lower-middle income countries. Based on a recent report from the International Labour Organization (ILO), lower-middle income countries have also seen the highest income losses, reaching 15.1% since 2019.

    Developing countries tend to experience a significant fiscal stimulus gap, in which they do not have the capacity to cushion lost income or lost jobs. In fact, it’s estimated by the ILO that low and lower-middle income countries would need to inject an additional $982 billion into their economies to reach the same level of fiscal stimulus as high income countries.

    A Helping Hand

    There are other governments that are giving out some help on a wide-scale basis, providing citizens less than 50% of their lost salaries:

    Examples: (as of January 25th, 2021)

    •  South Africa

    •  China

    •  Russia

    •  Thailand

    •  Australia

    South Africa’s unemployment rate was the highest in the world at 37.0% in 2020, an increase from 28.7% in 2019. Despite having one of the strictest lockdowns, the country has not been able to slow rising case counts or job losses. Now, South Africa is facing another threat, as a new strain of the novel coronavirus has taken hold in the nation.

    The Most Supportive Governments

    Finally, many world governments have offered higher amounts of income support, providing citizens with more than 50% of lost income:

    Examples: (as of January 25th, 2021)

    •  Canada

    •  United States

    •  United Kingdom

    •  Spain

    •  Saudi Arabia

    Regionally, it’s the Americas that have been hit the hardest, according to the ILO. The region experienced a 12.1% drop in labor income in 2020 compared to 2019, revealing the need for broad-based income support.

    U.S. unemployment went from 3.7% to 8.9% between 2019 and 2020. While the American government initially provided support in the form of the CARES Act, the policy response was recently extended through the more recent $900 billion relief deal.

    Income Support Post COVID-19

    While some countries have not been in extreme need of income support, others have been and haven’t received it. When looking at demographics, the hardest hit workers have been temporary workers, migrant workers, care workers, and self-employed vendors who have no labor contracts or employment insurance.

    As a result, some critics have used this as an opportunity to call for universal basic income (UBI). A three-year study is already being implemented in Germany, for example, to test out how effective this kind of income support would be in the post-pandemic period.

    Today, however, income is not a guarantee, and while in 2021 things may be returning to ‘normal,’ that does not mean that income levels will go back to normal.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 01:00

  • The Old Mantra Of "Too Big To Fail" Is Exposed As A Lie…
    The Old Mantra Of “Too Big To Fail” Is Exposed As A Lie…

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.us,

    It is a general rule that corrupt economies tend to operate on faith and not on fundamentals. And to be clear, it’s not so much about naive faith that the system is stable or functional. No, it’s more about the masses having faith that the corruption and instability will never be derailed. Most people are not as stupid as the establishment and central bankers think they are – Almost everyone knows the system is broken, they just refuse to consider the possibility that the fraud will be disrupted, or that it will be allowed to fail.

    The old mantra “too big to fail” is a lie. NOTHING is too big to fail, and that includes the US economy, the dollar and the elaborate Kabuki theater that keeps them both afloat. All it takes is a single moment, an epiphany that the Ponzi scheme is unsustainable rather than unstoppable.

    I’m reminded specifically of the inflationary crisis of Argentina in 2001 – 2002.

    Argentina’s economy was highly dependent on foreign capital inflows, and its currency peg to the US dollar, not to mention they were precariously reliant on support from the IMF. The IMF openly validated the government of Argentina and their currency peg model, but foreign capital began to decline and the peg became unsustainable. Without tangible growth in manufacturing and a strong middle class, an economy cannot survive for long. A top down system based on illusory “financial products” and creative accounting is doomed to crash eventually.

    All it took was for the IMF to criticize the policies they initially endorsed and announced that they were removing financial aid, and all hell broke loose in Argentina.

    Almost overnight the Argentina peso plunged in value, interest rates spiked and inflation struck hard. People poured into the streets and civil unrest erupted. The IMF would later admit it made “errors” in its handling of the Argentina situation, but this was simply spin control designed to protect them from further scrutiny. The IMF avoided most of the blame and has been growing into a monstrous global centralization machine ever since.

    I think we are witnessing the beginning of a similar end of mass faith in fraud in the US. The recent Robinhood short squeeze event as well as the current decoupling of physical silver prices from the paper ETF market have accelerated the timetable. Not surprisingly, these moves have forced the establishment to intervene to some extent to essentially stop renegade traders from freely investing. Accusations are flying and deplatforming has ensued. The idea that the system is a functional fraud is gone; The world now knows it is a dysfunctional fraud, and collapse cannot be very far behind.

    Furthermore the collusion between banks, hedge funds and Big Tech is blatantly revealed. These relationships are supposed to remain hidden in the ether. They are obvious to anyone with any financial knowledge and sense, but they aren’t supposed to be wielded in the open. Conspirators aren’t supposed to admit to the conspiracy? Right?

    Some people might say the establishment has been forced to unmask by activists. Maybe. But, as I have been warning for many years, when criminals start openly admitting to their crimes it is probably because they think that it’s too late for anyone to do anything about it.

    The point is, bankers and globalists have ways of avoiding responsibility for the disasters they engineer. When the con-game breaks, they always have patsies to take the fall.

    This sets up a bizarre dynamic in which the money elites that constructed the economy like a time-bomb are treated like victims (or heroes) and the people telling the truth about the fraud are treated like villains and criminals. Are activist stock market traders and silver market guerrillas to blame for any crisis that erupts in the near future? No, of course not, but they will be blamed anyway.

    That said, propaganda narratives and scapegoats may not be enough to save the bankers this time. They will never allow a major fiscal crash to develop in a vacuum. They need more cover, and they need to have the means to lock down the public to prevent civil unrest or rebellion from spilling over into their backyards. I have long suspected that the covid pandemic is a useful tool in this regard. As I noted in my article ‘How Viral Pandemic Benefits The Globalist Agenda’, published in January of 2020:

    Even if a pandemic does not kill a large number of people, it still disrupts international travel, it disrupts exports and imports, it disrupts consumer behavior and retail sales, and it disrupts domestic trade. If it does kill a large number of people, and if the Chinese government’s response is any indication, it could result in global martial law. With many economies including the US economy already in a precarious balancing act of historic debt vs. crashing demand and useless central bank repo market intervention, there is little chance that the system can withstand such a tsunami…”

    As we all know, medical martial law in the name of “public health” is being established in most countries regardless of the actual death rate. The insane globalist rantings of the World Economic Forum and Klaus Schwab have been very revealing; Schwab and other elites have even called the pandemic a “perfect opportunity” to execute there agenda for the “Great Reset”.

    However, the globalists are highly fallible, and mistakes in judgment have been made. During the Event 201 pandemic wargame on a coronavirus outbreak (conveniently held two months before the real thing happened), the elites forecast at least 65 million initial deaths globally from such a virus. We are a year into the pandemic and nowhere near that kind of death rate. In fact, the death rate is so minuscule (0.26%), that the public is beginning to realize the lockdown mandates are pointless.

    In the US, conservative states are moving on and keeping their economies wide open. Half the population is refusing to take the vaccines, and many members of law enforcement are refusing to implement lockdown policies. I don’t think this is what the globalists expected at all. They needed mass fear and they are getting mass defiance.

    They’re going to need a bigger threat, or a bigger virus.

    This is why I have been repeatedly warning that the talk of reopenings by Biden and other democrats is going to be very short lived. I have predicted that Biden will attempt a federal lockdown similar to the Level 4 lockdowns used in Europe and Australia after a couple of months of relative calm. I based this prediction on the covid “mutation” narrative being spread right now by the mainstream media and establishment cronies like Anthony Fauci. It is not hard to see where this is headed.

    The globalists must have the “legal” option of restricting public movement as well as large gatherings, and they must have the option of surveillance on individuals 24/7 through contact tracing. This is the only way to prevent rebellion against the Reset and rising anger due to economic turmoil. The veil has been lifted, the conspiracy is being widely broadcast. Martial law alone would only inspire more dissent, medical tyranny in the name of “saving lives” is the ONLY play the globalists have. They have to have help from a large portion of the citizenry, so they must maintain the appearance that they are operating from the moral high ground.

    The covid mutation story is clearly the next play, and Bank of America economists appear to agree with me. They recently stated that they see little optimism in terms of a reopening of the economy, and that hard lockdowns will return, possibly in March or April.

    Another factor to consider is that the economic crash will have to reach a peak soon because Joe Biden now resides in the White House. If the crash happens in the near term, activist investors can be blamed, Trump can be blamed, and conservatives and liberty activists can be blamed. If the crash happens a year or two from now, only Biden and the globalists will get the blame.

    Without lockdowns and scapegoats the scenario will end very badly for the globalists. It might end badly for them anyway. Be ready for more chaos by Spring; I suspect the elites are getting desperate, and if they allow America to go back to normal and for the pandemic to end with a whimper they will never get another chance at their precious Reset.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 02/05/2021 – 00:00

  • Meet The Robot Designed To Replace Forklifts 
    Meet The Robot Designed To Replace Forklifts 

    San Jose-based robotics company Fetch unveiled the latest robot to replace human forklift drivers in warehouses, called PalletTransport1500, according to a company press release

    The PalletTransport1500 is a square-like robot capable of lifting pallets weighing up to 2,500 pounds. The robot is powered by Honeywell Intelligrated’s Momentum software suite designed to automate warehouses. 

    Fetch claims that forklifts are the most significant safety risks in warehouses, resulting in 100,000 injuries every year. Here’s a tweet from the company showing how the robot works. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Fetch Chief Product Officer Stefan Nusser said, “even the most well-managed distribution centers are struggling to keep up with the ongoing growth of e-commerce, which is putting tremendous stress on facilities and warehouse associates to move goods in and out of facilities at record speed.” 

    “By combining Fetch’s new PalletTransport1500 with Honeywell Intelligrated’s Momentum, distribution and fulfillment centers will now be able to orchestrate every aspect of automated warehouse execution for maximum facility efficiency and safety,” Nusser said. 

    While Amazon has been hiring hundreds of thousands of warehouse employees, we’ve been documenting the proliferation of warehouse robots, slated to take human jobs in the coming years (see: here & here). 

    To sum up, the robot is designed to remove humans from warehouses. We’ve warned readers over the years that a wave of automation and artificial intelligence will displace millions of jobs. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 23:40

  • The Great Reset, Part IV: "Stakeholder Capitalism" Vs. "Neoliberalism"
    The Great Reset, Part IV: “Stakeholder Capitalism” Vs. “Neoliberalism”

    Authored by Michael Rectenwald via The Mises Institute,

    Read Part I: Reduced Expectations And Bio-Techno-Feudalism here…

    Read Part II: Corporate Socialism here…

    Read Part III: Capitalism With Chinese Characteristics here…

    Any discussion of “stakeholder capitalism” must begin by noting a paradox: like “neoliberalism,” its nemesis, “stakeholder capitalism” does not exist as such. There is no such economic system as “stakeholder capitalism,” just as there is no such economic system as “neoliberalism.” The two antipathetic twins are imaginary ghosts forever pitted against each other in a seemingly endless and frenzied tussle.

    Instead of stakeholder capitalism and neoliberalism, there are authors who write about stakeholder capitalism and neoliberalism and companies that more or less subscribe to the view that companies have obligations to stakeholders in addition to shareholders. But if Klaus Schwab and the World Economic Forum (WEF) have their way, there will be governments that induce, by regulations and the threat of burdensome taxation, companies to subscribe to stakeholder redistribution.

    Stakeholders consist of “customers, suppliers, employees, and local communities” in addition to shareholders. But for Klaus Schwab and the WEF, the framework of stakeholder capitalism must be globalized. A stakeholder is anyone or any group that stands to benefit or lose from any corporate behavior—other than competitors, we may presume. Since the primary pretext for the Great Reset is global climate change, anyone in the world can be considered a stakeholder in the corporate governance of any major corporation. And federal partnerships with corporations that do not “serve” their stakeholders, like the Keystone Pipeline project, for example, must be abandoned. Racial “equity,” the promotion of transgender agendas, and other such identity policies and politics, will also be injected into corporate sharing schemes.

    If anything, stakeholder capitalism represents a consumptive worm set to burrow into and hollow out corporations from within, to the degree that the ideology and practice find hosts in corporate bodies. It represents a means of socialist wealth liquidation from within capitalist organizations themselves, using any number of criteria for redistribution of benefits and “externalities.”

    But don’t take my word for it. Take one David Campbell, a British socialist (although non-Marxist) and author of The Failure of Marxism (1996). After declaring that Marxism had failed, Campbell began advocating stakeholder capitalism as a means to the same ends. His argument with the British orthodox Marxist Paddy Ireland represents an internecine squabble over the best means of achieving socialism, while also providing a looking glass into the minds of socialists determined to try other, presumably nonviolent tacks.

    Campbell castigated Ireland for his rejection of stakeholder capitalism. Ireland held—wrongly, Campbell asserted—that stakeholder capitalism is ultimately impossible. Nothing can interfere, for very long, with the inexorable market demand for profit. Market forces will inevitably overwhelm any such ethical considerations as stakeholders’ interests.

    Ireland’s more-radical-than-thou Marxism left Campbell flummoxed. Didn’t Ireland realize that his market determinism was exactly what the defenders of “neoliberalism” asserted as the inevitable and only sure means for the distribution of social welfare? “Marxism,” Campbell rightly noted, “can be identified with the deriding of ‘social reform’ as not representing, or even as obstructing, ‘the revolution.’” Like so many antireformist Marxists, Ireland failed to recognize that “the social reforms that [he] derided are the revolution.” Socialism is nothing if not a movement whereby “the purported natural necessity represented by ‘economic’ imperatives is replaced by conscious political decisions about the allocation of resources” (emphasis mine). This political socialism, as against Marx’s orthodox epigones, is what Marx really meant by socialism, Campbell suggests. Stakeholder capitalism is just that: socialism.

    Ireland and Campbell agreed that the very idea of stakeholder capitalism derived from companies having become relatively autonomous from their shareholders. The idea of managerial independence and thus company or corporate autonomy was first treated by Adolf A. Berle and Gardiner C. Means in The Modern Corporation and Private Property (1932) and after them in James Burnham’s The Managerial Revolution (1962). In “Corporate Governance, Stakeholding, and the Company: Towards a Less Degenerate Capitalism?,” Ireland writes of this putative autonomy: “[T]he idea of the stakeholding company is rooted in the autonomy of ‘the company’ from its shareholders; its claim being that this autonomy…can be exploited to ensure that companies do not operate exclusively with the interests of their shareholders in mind.”

    This apparent autonomy of the company, Ireland argues, came about not with incorporation or legal changes to the structure of the corporation, but with the growth of large-scale industrial capitalism. The growth in the sheer number of shares and with it the advent of the stock market made for the ready salability of the of the share. Shares became “money capital,” readily exchangeable titles to a percentage of profit, and not claims on the company’s assets. It was at this point that shares gained apparent autonomy from the company and the company from its shareholders.

    Moreover, with the emergence of this market, shares developed an autonomous value of their own quite independent of, and often different from, the value of the company’s assets. Emerging as what Marx called fictitious capital, they were redefined in law as an autonomous form of property independent of the assets of the company. They were no longer conceptualized as equitable interests in the property of the company but as rights to profit with a value of their own, rights which could be freely and easily bought and sold in the marketplace….

    On gaining their independence from the assets of companies, shares emerged as legal objects in their own right, seemingly doubling the capital of joint stock companies. The assets were now owned by the company and by the company alone, either through a corporation or, in the case of unincorporated companies, through trustees. The intangible share capital of the company, on the other hand, had become the sole property of the shareholder. They were now two quite separate forms of property. Moreover, with the legal constitution of the share as an entirely autonomous form of property, the externalization of the shareholder from the company had been completed in a way not previously possible.
     

    Thus, according to Ireland, a difference in interests emerged between the holders of the industrial capital and the holders of the money capital, or between the company and the shareholder.

    Nevertheless, Ireland maintains, the autonomy of the company is limited by the necessity for industrial capital to produce profit. The value of shares is ultimately determined by the profitability of the company’s assets in use. “The company is, and will always be, the personification of industrial capital and, as such, subject to the imperatives of profitability and accumulation. These are not imposed from the outside on an otherwise neutral and directionless entity, but are, rather, intrinsic to it, lying at the very heart of its existence.” This necessity, Paddy argues, defines the limits of stakeholder capitalism and its inability to sustain itself. “The nature of the company is such, therefore, as to suggest that [there] are strict limits to the extent to which its autonomy from shareholders can be exploited for the benefit of workers or, indeed, other stakeholders.”

    Here is a point on which the “neoliberal” Milton Friedman and the Marxist Paddy Ireland would have agreed, despite Ireland’s insistence that the extraction of “surplus value” at the point of production is the cause. And this agreement between Friedman and Ireland is exactly why Campbell rejected Ireland’s argument. Such market determinism is only necessary under capitalism, Campbell asserted. Predictions about how companies will behave in the context of markets are only valid under current market conditions. Changing company rules such that profitability is endangered, albeit, or even especially, from the inside out, is the very definition of socialism. Changing the way companies behave in the direction of stakeholder capitalism is revolutionary en se.

    Despite this insurmountable “neoliberal”/Marxist impasse, the notion of stakeholder capitalism is at least fifty years old. Debates about the efficacy of stakeholder capitalism date to the 1980s. They were stirred up by Friedman’s rejection of the “soulful corporation,” which reached its peak with Carl Kaysen’s “The Social Significance of the Modern Corporation” in 1957. Kaysen viewed the corporation as a social institution that must weigh profitability against a broad and growing array of social responsibilities: “there is no display of greed or graspingness; there is no attempt to push off onto the workers or the community at large part of the social costs of the enterprise. The modern corporation is a soulful corporation.” Thus, in Kaysen, we see hints of the later notion of stakeholder capitalism.

    Likely, stakeholder capitalism can be traced, although not in an unbroken line of succession, to the “commercial idealism” of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, when Edward Bellamy and King Camp Gillette, among others, envisioned corporate socialist utopias via incorporation. For such corporate socialists, the main means for establishing socialism was through the continuous incorporation of all the factors of production. With incorporation, a series of mergers and acquisitions would occur until the formation of a singular global monopoly, in which all “the People” had equal shares, was complete. In his “World Corporation, Gillette declared that “the trained mind of business and finance sees no stopping-place to corporate absorption and growth, except final absorption of all the World’s material assets into one corporate body, under the directing control of one corporate mind.” Such a singular world monopoly would become socialist upon the equal distribution of shares among the population. Stakeholder capitalism falls short of this equal distribution of shares but gets around it by distributing value on the basis of social and political pressure.

    Interestingly, Campbell ends his argument, rather undogmatically, by stating unequivocally that if Friedman was right and “if these comparisons [between shareholder and stakeholder capitalism] tend to show exclusive maximization of shareholder value to be the optimal way of maximizing welfare,” then “one should give up being a socialist.” If, after all, the maximization of human welfare is really the object, and “shareholder capitalism” (or “neoliberalism”) proves to be the best way to achieve it, then socialism itself, including stakeholder capitalism, must necessarily be abandoned.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 23:20

  • San Bernardino Cops Bust Man Who 3D Printed Guns From Garage 
    San Bernardino Cops Bust Man Who 3D Printed Guns From Garage 

    San Bernardino County Sheriff’s Department tweeted a short video Wednesday of deputies serving a “warrant” related to a previous traffic stop. Deputies uncovered a 3D-printer used to make illegal firearms, otherwise known as “ghost guns.” 

    “Deputy Ryan Rappisi and our patrol team served a search warrant today related to a previous traffic stop. The usual dope and illegal firearms were recovered, along with a 3D printer capable of producing plastic gun frames for ghost guns. Awesome job!!” tweeted Captain Matt Griffith. 

    The video shows what appears to be an inexpensive 3D printer, likely the Ender-3 V2 3D Printer. Deputies removed the printer, and multiple printed lowers for pistols from the suspect’s garage. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Griffith provided no further information on the 3D-printed gun operation. There was no word on if the guns were used by the suspect or supplied to criminal gangs. Without a serial number, police and federal agencies have no way of tracing ownership. 

    Not too long ago, a 29-year-old Australian man was charged with supplying 3D-printed pistols to criminal gangs across Sydney. 

    The rise of 3D printing guns is nothing new. As early as 2014, we told readers about Cody Wilson’s libertarian non-profit Defense Distribute using a $1,200 computer-controlled milling machine designed to let anyone make the aluminum lower body of an AR-15 rifle at home. 

    … and there’s some bad news for the “ghost gun” community, expect the Biden administration to crack down on these untraceable weapons by passing legislation requiring that purchasers of 80% lowers or 3D printing codes to pass federal background checks. 

    Facing gun and ammo shortages during the pandemic, internet searches among Americans for 3D printed pistols surged. 

    It’s only a matter of time before the crackdown of ghost guns begin. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 23:00

  • Is China Preparing To Blitz The Moon?
    Is China Preparing To Blitz The Moon?

    Authored by Rick Fisher via The Epoch Times,

    When the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) commences its manned Moon program it may do so in a big way, as its goal is to control the Earth-Moon system to enforce its hegemony on Earth and then to regulate access to the future “Space Economy.”

    This means the United States must exploit what may be temporary advantages in technology to create an early dominant lunar presence for the democracies.

    For most of the last decade, the Chinese regime has been peddling the idea that its manned Moon program may not start until around 2030. This appeared to be confirmed by Chinese revelations that its main Moon mission space launch vehicle (SLV), the China Aerospace Science and Technology Corporation (CASC) Long March-9would not be in service until about 2030.

    But now it is possible to assess that China may get there well before 2030. China began to reveal a possible acceleration of its Moon plans in November 2018, when it revealed a new 5-meter diameter manned SLV with a three parallel booster configuration, like the 63-ton to Low Earth Orbit (LEO) SpaceX Falcon HeavyFew details were revealed at the time, not even its name, so Chinese space enthusiasts dubbed it the “921 Rocket” after China’s manned “921 Program” from 1992.

    Then, in September 2020, an official subordinate to the Armaments Department of the Central Military Commission of the People’s Liberation Army, which controls China’s space program, officially confirmed for the fist time that China had an active manned Moon program, and was developing a new manned Moon Lander, and the new manned SLV. This is the 921 Rocket designed to loft about 70 tons to LEO, and about 25 tons to the Moon.

    It is possible that future versions of this SLV will feature reusable first stages like Falcon Heavy, helping China to significantly reduce the cost of sending people and supporting payloads to the Moon.

    The interest and attention paid to this new rocket caused some Chinese observers to speculate that the Long March-9 program has possibly been abandoned. But this was put to rest by a Nov. 26, 2020 report in China Daily that stated, “China Aerospace Science and Technology Corp [CASC] has estimated that about 10 Long March 9s will be needed each year from 2030 to 2035 in China to serve the nation’s robust demand for heavy-lift rockets.”

    This means that the Chinese regime may be planning to build 60 of its Long March-9 super heavy space launch vehicles (SLVs) over a period of six years. This has huge implications for China’s ambitions to build a dominant presence on the Moon and to begin colonizing Mars.

    While it is not yet clear that the CCP leadership has approved such plans, CASC would likely not be disclosing such SLV requirement numbers without some level of approval or encouragement from Party leaders.

    China Daily also stated, “The super-heavy rocket will be 93 meters tall, have a liftoff weight of 4,140 metric tons, and a thrust power of 5,760 tons. Its core stage will be about 10 meters in diameter … will be able to transport spacecraft with a combined weight of 140 tons to a low-Earth orbit … will also be able to place spaceships weighing up to 50 tons in an Earth-Moon transfer trajectory for lunar expeditions.”

    Other Chinese sources indicate that other possible versions of the Long March-9 could loft 65 ton payloads to the Moon.

    The Jiuquan space center in the Gobi Desert in Jiuquan, northwest China’s Gansu Province, on June 11, 2013. (AFP/AFP/Getty Images)

    Such limited data, however, does offer some idea for how rapidly China might populate the Moon. One might start by estimating that China devotes 40 of the potential 60 Long March-9’s to Moon missions, with the remaining to be used to support a second-generation Low Earth Orbit space station, and to begin sending people to Mars.

    The 50 square meter interior and 22.5-ton Tianhmodule that could be launched by April for China’s new space station can support a crew of three. Perhaps a Moon base of four similar size modules might support a crew of six people. Assuming a Long March-9 could transport two Tianhe size Moon base habitat modules to the Moon, then 20 Long March-9 missions might begin the building of 10 separate Chinese Moon bases.

    The other 20 Long March-9 missions could transport the Moon rovers, power systems, communication systems, mining equipment, and Moon production systems that would enable full exploitation of the Moon’s resources. This, in turn, could accelerate the Chinese regime’s ambition to build very large space-based solar power satellites to achieve energy independence on Earth.

    Such potential Chinese Moon “blitz” ambitions are of concern because it is also possible that water-ice, the most important early lunar resource objective, may be available only in a small number of locations at the Moon’s South Pole. Remember, the CCP is capable of “imperialism” as in the South China Sea.

    In March 2019, the Trump Administration set a goal of getting to the Moon by 2024, which does not appear realistic given Congressional reluctance to provide additional funding. The U.S. National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) is developing its non-reusable Space Launch System (SLS) superheavy SLV that could send 27 to 46 tons of cargo to the Moon. It is a classic risk-adverse NASA program but its projected payload cost to the Moon is about $20,000 a kilogram.

    Starship could be ready for Moon missions by 2022 to 2023 and has been selected by NASA as a possible Moon lander for its Artemis Program to return to the Moon. But it offers a potential amazing strategic advantage, if projections are correct, of transporting payloads to the Moon for about $2,000 a kilogram.

    Perhaps China’s potential plans to build such a large number of Long March-9 super heavy SLVs may be their response to the Starshipalong with an accelerating investment in their own reusable SLVs.

    This only redoubles the need for Starship to succeed so that the United States, its allies, and partners can use it to build a sufficient Moon presence before China does, to have a better chance of deterring the CCP from lunar imperialism and aggression. The advantages offered by Starshipif quickly exploited by resolute U.S. leadership, could help thwart the Chinese regime’s hegemonic ambitions.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 22:40

  • US Navy Tests 3D Printers In Move To Shore Up Supply Chain 
    US Navy Tests 3D Printers In Move To Shore Up Supply Chain 

    The race is on, and the US military is preparing to shore up its complex supply chains with 3D printers. The military wants to transform how supplies are deployed in a conflict. 

    The US Naval Postgraduate School (NPS) partnered with Xerox to pilot test the Xerox ElemX Liquid Metal 3D printer on its university campus, according to 3D Printing Industry

    Naresh Shanker, Xerox Chief Technology Officer, said the US military supply chain is very complex, and NPS understands future manufacturing challenges as supply chains between the US and China are fracturing as trade tensions increase.

    “This collaboration will aid NPS in pushing adoption of 3D printing throughout the US Navy, and will provide Xerox valuable information to help deliver supply chain flexibility and resiliency to future customers,” Shanker said. 

    The Collaborative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) between Xerox and NPS will one day allow the Navy to print 3D parts and equipment on demand, and on the modern battlefield. 

    NPS students will experiment with the Xerox ElemX Liquid Metal 3D printer. They will learn how to design and create prototype parts on the device. 

    “From the age of sail to the nuclear era, sailors have been fixing things at sea so they can complete the mission,” said NPS President, Ann Rondeau. “This partnership is about the strategic ability of the navy to have sailors on ships with the capability through creativity and technology to advance their operations at sea.” 

    Rondeau said, “through collaboration, NPS and Xerox are helping build a Navy for the 21st century.” 

    Xerox’s 3D printer could soon allow the Navy to fabricate military parts without worrying about vulnerabilities in its supply chains. 

    “The NPS Alumni Association and Foundation-supported bringing the ElemX liquid metal printer to NPS because it will enable soldiers, sailors, airmen, and marines to solve their problems where they are, when problems occur,” said retired US Marine Corps Colonel and Vice President of the NPS Alumni Association and Foundation, Todd Lyons. 

    The CRADA between Xerox and NPS will transform the supply chain and how the Department of Defense operationally plans for war. 

    The US military has already integrated 3D printers into operations by printing missile parts and helicopter parts.

    In a separate report, BofA’s Francisco Blanch told clients, in a note, that for many years, America levered its economic and military might to secure global supply chains. Still, as the world becomes a more fractured place, the military has turned to new technologies to stay ahead of China.

    Blanch shows the US military tremendously outspends the Chinese but that gap could be closing by the end of the decade.

    Readers may recall, the Centre for Economics and Business Research warns China could overtake the US to become the world’s largest economy in 2028, five years earlier than previously anticipated, after weathering the virus pandemic much better than the US. 

    To sum up, the US must rapidly modernize its force or it will lose the great power competition. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 22:20

  • Head Of Strategic Command Warns Nuclear War With Russia, China "A Real Possibility"
    Head Of Strategic Command Warns Nuclear War With Russia, China “A Real Possibility”

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    The head of US Strategic Command (STRATCOM) warned that a nuclear war with Russia or China is a “real possibility” and is calling for a change in US policy that reflects this threat.

    “There is a real possibility that a regional crisis with Russia or China could escalate quickly to a conflict involving nuclear weapons, if they perceived a conventional loss would threaten the regime or state,”  Vice Adm. Charles Richard wrote in the February edition of the US Naval Institute’s monthly magazine.

    Charles A. Richard, the 11th commander of US Strategic Command

    Richard said the US military must “shift its principal assumption from ‘nuclear employment is not possible’ to ‘nuclear employment is a very real possibility,’ and act to meet and deter that reality.”

    The STRATCOM chief said Russia and China “have begun to aggressively challenge international norms and global peace using instruments of power and threats of force in ways not seen since the height of the Cold War.”

    Richard hyped up Russia and China’s nuclear modernization, calling for the US to compete with the two nations. When it comes to China’s nuclear weapons, the US and Russia have vastly larger arsenals. Current estimates put Beijing’s nuclear arsenal at about 320 warheads, while Washington and Moscow have about 6,000 warheads each.

    Even if Beijing doubles its arsenal over the next decade, as the China hawks are predicting, it will still be small compared to Washington’s. The US would have to eliminate a good amount of its arsenal to convince Beijing to participate in arms control agreements.

    Since STRATCOM is the command post that oversees Washington’s nuclear arsenal, its commanders are always overplaying the risk of nuclear war and asking for more money to modernize the stockpile. But with the US prioritizing so-called “great power competition” with China and Russia and an increased US military presence in places like the South China Seathe Arctic, and the Black Sea, the threat of nuclear war is rising.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 22:00

  • January Payrolls Preview: Beware A Big Beat
    January Payrolls Preview: Beware A Big Beat

    After last month’s dismal payrolls report, according to which the US labor market contract by a whopping 140K workers in December (primary as a result of 372K restaurant workers losing their jobs amid the latest round of covid shutdowns), renewed optimism has emerged that the worst is over for the US market and that tomorrow when the BLS reports the January payrolls, the surprise will be solidly to the upside.

    Or maybe not all that solidly: as Newsquawk reports, the expectation is for headline nonfarm payrolls to rebound in January from the negative reading in December, but analysts do not seem convinced that January’s data will fully pare back the December downside, despite increasingly constructive labor market signals. While initial jobless claims data had worsened (until today when it unexpectedly smashed expectations), continuing claims data has improved; the ADP’s gauge of payrolls surprised to the upside in January, raising hopes that similar can be seen in the BLS report; within the ISM business surveys, the employment subcomponents improved in both the services and manufacturing sectors, the former rising back into growth territory.

    Further propping up the optimistic view, earlier today Goldman raised its nonfarm payrolls estimate from 125K to 200k, above the consensus of +100k, due to “stabilization in dining activity and in the severity of business restrictions” which suggests a smaller or minimal drag from the coronavirus relative to December. While Big Data employment signals were mixed in the month, the generally showed stabilization or improvement. Goldman also expects fewer seasonal layoffs of retail, leisure, and temp help workers, due to already-depressed employment levels in those industries (the BLS seasonal factors embed a decline of roughly 1.2mn workers).

    On the other hand, consumer surveys have not signaled that Americans are more optimistic about labor market conditions in January. Incidentally, a far worse print would be precisely what the market wants: from a trader’s perspective, the reaction to the data – particularly in the event of a big upside beat or a big downside miss – will solidify the stimulus debate as the argument that good data could be bad for stimulus prospects gains traction amid the improvement seen in some economic metrics, COVID trends, and vaccination rollouts recently. Alternatively, a huge miss would accelerate the passage of the Biden stimulus plan.

    With that in mind, this is what consensus expects tomorrow:

    • Nonfarm payrolls:. +100k (range -250k to +450k) prev. -140k
      • Private payrolls:. +50k, (range -120k to +350k) prev. -95k
      • Manufacturing payrolls: +30k (range 0 to +77k) prev. 38k;
    • Unemployment rate: 6.7% (range 6.5% to 7.0%) prev. 6.7%
    • Average earnings m/m: +0.3% (range -0.4% to +0.8%) prev. 0.8%
    • Average earnings y/y: +5.1% y/y (range 4.5% to 6.7%) prev 5.1%

    A look at some of the factors behind the growing consensus view that the job market is on the mend, courtesy of Newsquawk:

    JOBLESS CLAIMS: The read from the weekly initial jobless claims data is mixed: in the week that corresponds to the BLS survey period, claims printed 914k vs 892k going into the December jobs report; continuing claims, however, have eased to 4.99mln from 5.53mln going into the December report. In the January survey window, Pandemic Unemployment Assistance claims decreased in the week by 20k, taking it to 427k – while an encouraging development, it is still higher than the 398k in the December survey window. Through a broader lens, the four-week moving average for initial jobless claims ticked up to 851.75k going into the January jobs report (vs 814.25k going into the December report), although the continuing claims trend improved, with its four-week moving  verage falling to 4.998mln heading into the January report (vs 5.534mln going into the December report).

    ADP: Payrolls company ADP’s gauge of January labor market conditions surprised to the upside, printing 174k vs an expected 49.0k, while the previous was revised up from -123.0k initially reported to -78k. After the data, Pantheon Macroeconomics said that given the noise in the data and the unreliability of the seasonals over the turn of the year, the recent trend in payrolls has been flat, adding that the ADP data has been close to the official payroll numbers in recent months, so a modest increase in Friday’s BLS number looks a decent bet. The consultancy looks for an aboveconsensus 200k reading, and ahead, is optimistic that the lifting of lockdown restrictions in February may see larger monthly prints from March onwards, if the vaccination rollouts continue and newer variants of the virus do not force further restrictions.

    SURVEYS: Within both the manufacturing ISM and services ISM data, the employment sub-index ticked up in January. The manufacturing sector saw the employment sub-index rise from 51.7 to 52.6, remaining in growth territory for a second month; the services employment sub-index moved back into expansion, rising from 48.7 in December to 55.2 in January. ISM noted that comments from respondents in the services sector included “new hires required to perform awarded work in 2021” and “trying to replace and build staff in critical areas,” and after the manufacturing data, ISM said for the fifth straight month, survey panelist comments indicated that significantly more companies are hiring or attempting to hire than those reducing labor forces. In Markit’s composite PMI for the US, the data compiler said a softer rise in employment at service providers offset a quicker increase in job creation at manufacturers, as pressure on service sector capacity waned. Nevertheless, the business surveys contrast with consumers’ assessment of current business conditions, which weakened in January according to the Conference Board, and consumers’ assessment of the labor market was also less favorable the report said, with consumers saying jobs were ‘plentiful’ declining from 21.0 to 20.6, while those claiming jobs were ‘hard to get’ rose from 22.9 to 23.8.

    JOB CUTS: Data from Challenger showed that planned job cuts for US based companies ticked slightly higher in January, rising to 79,552 from 77,030. But encouragingly, Challenger said that COVID was no longer the leading cause of cuts; in fact, it was a demand downturn that was the leading reason cited for job cut announcements, followed by restructuring; COVID was only responsible for 4,620 of the January job cuts figure. The report added that we are beginning to see a levelling-off in announcements, which is a positive sign for the months ahead. The report also said that firms might be reassessing staffing levels, and waiting on the impact of the government relief bill, before making any additional workforce decisions. The Challenger data might offer us an early insight into how consumers will enter the normalization phase of the pandemic; are they likely to throw caution to the wind and resume consuming at prepandemic levels, or will they remain cautious in the face of uncertainties; the contrast between business surveys and consumer surveys may, at this point, lean towards the latter.

    * * *

    Cribbing from Goldman’s latest upgrade of the labor situation published earlier today, here are the bank’s arguments for a better-than-expected report:

    • The third wave of Covid. The coronavirus resurgence weighed on the December report, with a 498k drop in leisure and hospitality payrolls more than offsetting the 358k gains across the rest of the economy. While the public health situation remained dire in January, the severity of business restrictions was roughly unchanged on net, based on the Oxford policy stringency index and Goldman’s EffectiveLockdown Index (ELI). And as shown in Exhibit 1, restaurant seatings on Open tableactually rebounded modestly nationwide. While we doubt virus-sensitive industries rehired workers aggressively in January, sequential stabilization would be consistent with an above-consensus nonfarm payrolls reading as long as job growth in the rest of the economy proceeded anywhere near its December pace.

    • Seasonality: Goldman expects a rise in temp help, retail, and potentially leisure payrollsn, reflecting fewer-than-usual seasonal layoffs. As shown in Exhibit 2, given the depressed employment levels in those industries, the end-of-year layoffs may have been smaller than usual. Reflecting this, these categories are expected to decline by less than the BLS seasonal factors anticipate, resulting in higher seasonally adjusted payrolls. Illustratively, a flat unadjusted reading across these three groupings would result in a +1.2mn contribution to January payrolls on a seasonally adjusted basis (mom sa)

    • ADP. Private sector employment in the ADP report increased by 174k in January, above consensus expectations and consistent with a firm or solid rise in the official measure. On a seasonally adjusted basis, ADP reported strength in the leisure and hospitality industry and health care industry.
    • Employer surveys. Business activity surveys increased on net in January. The employment component of the services survey tracker edged down (-0.3pt to 49.3),but one of the most comprehensive measures from the ISM increased to its highest level since December 2019 (55.7). And the employment component of Goldman’s manufacturing survey tracker increased to the highest level since March 2019

    NEUTRAL/MIXED FACTORS:

    • Big Data. High-frequency data on the labor market was mixed in January, but generally showed stabilization or improvement relative to December. While seasonal adjustment is particularly difficult in the month of January due to varying sensitives to end-of-year layoffs, Goldman estimates that the Google mobility index is consistent with an approximately +0.9mn rise in January payrolls and the Homebase measure with +0.8mn. In contrast, the Understand America Survey by USC is consistent with a modest decline in payrolls.
    • Jobless claims. Initial jobless claims rose during the January payroll month but at a slower pace, averaging 835k per week vs. 814k in December and 744k in November. Some of these filings likely reflected filing incentives in the Phase 4 fiscal package (newly available $300 top-up payments), as well as some administratively required refiles at the start of the new year. Continuing claims fell 537k between the payroll survey weeks, but this decline partly reflects expiring regular-state-programs (as opposed to reemployment). Across all employee programs including emergency benefits, continuing claims fell by 480k.
    • Job cuts. Announced layoffs reported by Challenger, Gray & Christmas fell by 18% in January after increasing by 32% in December. They remain 23% above their January 2020 levels.Arguing for a weaker-than-expected report:

    ARGUING FOR A WEAKER THAN EXPECTED REPORT:

    • Job availability. The Conference Board labor differential—the difference between the percent of respondents saying jobs are plentiful and those saying jobs are hard to get — fell further into contractionary territory (to -3.2 in January from -1.9 inDecember and +6.9 in November).

    Finally, a look at how the market could react:

    The market reaction will be informative for traders, particularly in the event of a big beat or a big miss. An argument is gaining traction that improving economic data and COVID trends in the US after some stark concerns at the end of last year/start of this year,  combined with a quicker than expected vaccine rollout, may stoke the hawkish argument that less monetary and fiscal stimulus might be warranted in the US, which could be detrimental to risk assets (the key catalysts for stocks are continued official support, improving corporate earnings, and continued improvement in COVID trends – if one of these is shaken, it may lead traders to reassess the bull case). After this week’ s solid ISM services data and ADP data on Wednesday, some downside was seen in the equities complex; this downside was only subsequently parred after a blog post from White House economic advisors, who warned about the long-term scarring potential on the economy (and of course implying that in spite of some of the better trends seen recently, a large degree of stimulus was still appropriate). But while policymakers adopt a cautious approach on scarring, some market participants remain unconvinced: as Goldman Sachs recently noted, signs of long-term damage to the economy remain surprisingly limited so far, calculating that around two-thirds of the jobs lost in the pandemic have now returned, while total company bankruptcies remained beneath pre-pandemic levels in December.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 21:47

  • Former CIA Counterterror Chief Suggests Going To War Against "Domestic Insurgents"
    Former CIA Counterterror Chief Suggests Going To War Against “Domestic Insurgents”

    Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News,

    The former head of the CIA Counterterrorism Center has suggested that counterinsurgency tactics used by the military in Iraq and Afghanistan should be applied to ‘domestic extremists’ inside the US.

    NPR reports that Robert Grenier, who directed the CIA’s Counterterrorism program from 2004 to 2006, declared “We may be witnessing the dawn of a sustained wave of violent insurgency within our own country, perpetrated by our own countrymen.”

    In an op-ed for The New York Times last week, Grenier suggested that “extremists who seek a social apocalypse … are capable of producing endemic political violence of a sort not seen in this country since Reconstruction.”

    Grenier, also a former CIA station chief in Pakistan and Afghanistan, grouped together “the Proud Boys, the Three Percenters, the Oath Keepers, ‘Christian’ national chauvinists, white supremacists and QAnon fantasists” and claimed they are all “committed to violent extremism.”

    Grenier labeled dissenters an “insurgency” and called for them to be “defeated” like an enemy army.

    In further comments to NPR, Grenier stated that “as in any insurgency situation, you have committed insurgents who are typically a relatively small proportion of the affected population. But what enables them to carry forward their program is a large number of people from whom they can draw tacit support.”

    Grenier also stated that insurgents may emerge from groups who “believe that the election was stolen,” or those “who don’t trust NPR or The New York Times.”

    “The most violent elements that we are concerned about right now see former President Trump as a broadly popular and charismatic symbol,” the CIA spook added, before comparing Trump to Saddam Hussein.

    “You know, just as I saw in the Middle East that the air went out of violent demonstrations when [Iraqi leader] Saddam Hussein was defeated and seen to be defeated, I think the same situation applies here,” he proclaimed.

    Grenier suggested that Trump should be convicted at the upcoming impeachment trial as a ‘national security imperative’ because “So long as he is there and leading the resistance, if you will, which he shows every sign of intending to do, he is going to be an inspiration to very violent people.”

    Grenier then compared Americans to Al Qaeda and the Taliban, noting that in Afghanistan “the thrust of our campaign there was, yes, to hunt down al-Qaida, but primarily to remove the supportive environment in which they were able to live and to flourish. And that meant fighting the Taliban.”

    “I think that is the heart of what we need to deal with here,” he added.

    Listen:

    Linking to Grenier’s comments, journalist Glenn Greenwald quipped that wedding guests throughout America should watch out for drone missiles:

    The call to treat Americans as terrorist insurgents comes on the heels of a Department of Homeland Security warning that those dissatisfied with the election result may rise up and commit acts of terrorism in the coming weeks.

    “Information suggests that some ideologically-motivated violent extremists with objections to the exercise of governmental authority and the presidential transition, as well as other perceived grievances fueled by false narratives, could continue to mobilize to incite or commit violence,” stated the bulletin issued last week through the DHS National Terrorist Advisory System — or NTAS.

    The bulletin added that ‘extremists’ may be “motivated by a range of issues, including anger over COVID-19 restrictions, the 2020 election results, and police use of force.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 21:20

  • Jeff Ubben Considers "Meaningful Stake" In Exxon, May Seek Board Spot
    Jeff Ubben Considers “Meaningful Stake” In Exxon, May Seek Board Spot

    Exxon Mobil is considering adding Inclusive Capital’s legendary activist Jeff Ubben to its board of directors in what could be a step toward helping beaten down Exxon stock unlock significant value, Bloomberg reported on Thursday evening. In addition, Inclusive is considering taking a “meaningful stake” in the company if he is appointed to the board.

    Ubben is having “ongoing” and “constructive” talks with the board, according to the report. Other shareholders, including D.E. Shaw which have agitated in the recent past for Exxon – which over the weekend was reported to have considered a merger with Cheveron – to do something to push its stock price higher, are supportive of Ubben’s inclusion to the board (for obvious reasons). A decision on Ubben’s inclusion to the board could be made “in coming weeks”, the report says. 

    Ubben left ValueAct last year to start his own firm that is focused on investments in social and environmental issues. Ubben may be eyeing Exxon not only due to the company’s ripe yield, but also as an opportunity to help guide Exxon out of the fossil fuel era, and to transition it for inclusion into the ESG frenzy.

    Other activists have been busy in the name, too. “D.E. Shaw has written the company urging it to cut costs in order to preserve its dividend and called on the company to take steps to improve its environmental reputation” and Engine No. 1 investments has nominated 4 directors to the company’s board. 

    Recall, just days ago, Exxon reported its first loss in 40 years but vowed to preserve its dividend, which currently sits at 7.3% as of Thursday’s close. 

    For the fourth quarter, Exxon posted a previously disclosed $19.3 billion writedown of U.S. natural gas and other assets, capping the first annual loss for the Western world’s largest oil company in at least four decades. However, excluding the historic impairment, Exxon returned to profit in the fourth quarter, earning 3 cents per share, above the 0.02 consensus estimate, and ending a run of three consecutive quarterly losses.

    As Bloomberg notes, Exxon is gradually emerging from the wreckage of 2020 facing the worst crisis in its modern history, its stock a far cry from where it traded just a year ago. In addition to growing criticism of its environmental record, financial performance has eroded to the point where its fabled dividend, the third-largest in the S&P 500 Index, is under pressure. Exxon extended the $3.7 billion payout for another quarter last week but hasn’t increased it since early 2019 and is relying on borrowed cash to sustain it.

    That said, the company did go all-in on its defense of its massive dividend, with Bloomberg noting that “gone is any wiggle room on its statement: the company is pledging investors that even if oil prices average $50 a barrel (Brent basis) in 2021 and refining margins are horrendous, it would make enough money to cover both shareholders payouts and spending in projects.”

    Perhaps sensing that Exxon was ripe for activist involvement, in late 2020 most major bank upgraded the stock to a buy after holding it at neutral or sell since the covid crisis.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 21:00

  • 'Domestic Terror' Is A Government Without Constraints
    ‘Domestic Terror’ Is A Government Without Constraints

    Authored by Mark Jeftovic via BombThrower.com,

    Ruh Roh: That Unhinged Canadian Conspiracy Theory is 5-for-5 so far…

    A friend I’ve referenced in my writings before as “an unemployed tech CEO” (he’s been unemployed since one of his exits about 10 years ago) sent me that link that was making the rounds back in October…

    It was purportedly from an anonymous Liberal Party “Strategic Committee” leaker that laid out a plan where the Canadian federal government, in collusion with world governments everywhere, were going to use the Coronavirus pandemic to impose a New World Order, distinctly communist in nature, replacing private property with Universal Basic Income and immunity passports.

    wrote it up at the time pointing out the various holes in the narrative, not the least of which was that it was completely unsourced. You had to decide to believe something like that.

    My response to him was:

    I saw this months ago and kinda ripped the guy who sent it to me because it sounded very Qanon-ish and just batshit. No sources, no attributions, it could literally be anything. I hate this kind of stuff.

    Next thing I know my phone is ringing, and as I plug in my earbuds I hear his thick middle-eastern accent:

    “Ok junior” (he had picked up my knickname from my punk rock days nearly 30 years ago, although he was never in that scene), “bring it up and let’s just walk down the list”:

    • Phase in secondary lock down restrictions on a rolling basis, starting with major metropolitan areas first and expanding outward. Expected by November 2020

    Well, here we are under lockdown in Toronto, again – and most other Canadian cities as well.

    • Rush the acquisition of (or construction of) isolation facilities across every province and territory. Expected by December 2020.

    The recently announced travel restrictions we’re all aware of. All flights to Caribbean and Mexico canceled, returning citizens sent to government approved hotels, which, at least as per the media reports coming in, seem to feel more like internment camps than hotels. Joe Warmington’s article describing the plight of a returning citizen who has been locked in a hotel room and fed prison-like rations despite having had a negative COVID-19 test prior to his embarking on the returning flight…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • Daily new cases of COVID-19 will surge beyond capacity of testing, including increases in COVID related deaths following the same growth curves. Expected by end of November 2020.

    Right, well the “casedemic” has been infuriating for anybody who actually looks at the data, who understands what a medical “case” is supposed to be or what a PCR test isn’t supposed to be. Especially when using high Cycle Thresholds.

    As Chris Martenson (PhD in pathology from Duke University) outlines in the 2020 Year in Review with Dave Collum (PhD Columbia, Chemistry, teaches at Cornell): a medical “case” is one in which a patient is presenting symptoms and requires medical attention. That’s a case. PCR tests were never meant to discern whether somebody is an “infected case” or not, and as Collum elaborated in that same interview, “with a Cycle Threshold over 35, you can get a positive PCR test out of a dog’s ass”.

    • Daily new cases of COVID-21 hospitalizations and COVID-19 and COVID-21 related deaths will exceed medical care facilities capacity. Expected Q1 – Q2 2021.

    According to the media, this is true. According to reality, it isn’t. In CNN-style “fact checking” parlance, it would thus score as “partially true”.

    “Covid Related Deaths” is a well worn catch-all. What is known to anybody keeping track: the vast majority of COVID fatalities are with COVID, not from it. We all know this,  for some reason it doesn’t seem to matter. The overall survival rate for this thing is somewhere around 97% or higher. Most people don’t know anybody in their immediate circle of friends and family that have actually died from it.

    It can be terrible virus to catch and become sick with, and it’s tragic to die from. But the majority of people either exhibit flu like symptoms and shrug it off or remain completely asymptomatic. Overall it causes fewer fatalities to society than either alcohol (3 million deaths per year, globally) or driving (1.5 million) or for that matter air pollution at 4.2 million.

    • Enhanced lock down restrictions (referred to as Third Lock Down) will be implemented. Full travel restrictions will be imposed (including inter-province and inter-city). Expected Q2 2021.

    Travel restrictions, as we noted, are here, or at least starting to show up. My unemployed CEO friend is expecting localized roadblocks, i.e “Where are you going? Why are you going there? Can I see your immunity passport and contact tracker please?” type roadblocks. Unless you’re a politician or someone Transport Canada deems to be exempted in “the national interest”, you’re probably stuck where you are for the foreseeable future.

    Excerpt from the Transport Canada making the rounds on who is exempted from forced quarantine at the approved Internment Hotels

    • Projected COVID-19 mutation and/or co-infection with secondary virus (referred to as COVID-21) leading to a third wave with much higher mortality rate and higher rate of infection. Expected by February 2021.

    Well they aren’t calling it COVID-21, but there is a lot in the media about the UK and South African mutations. Overlooked is that COVID-19 has been mutating from very early on, all viruses do. Everything does.

    From: Is the coronavirus mutating? Yes. But here’s why you don’t need to panic, Science News, May 2020

    Anyway, by the time we got this far down the list I felt the mild caffeine euphoria of my morning cup-o-joe wearing off and despondency setting in… I know where this list goes from here:

    • The imposition of UBI and debt jubilee where “the individual would forfeit ownership of any and all property and assets forever”.

    I take some comfort in that the original article has been written so poorly that it makes 4chan a more likely origin vector and not some high powered political insider.

    But the entire conversation made me feel uneasy, here’s why:

    As I stated the first time,  when something is completely unsourced and disconnected from supporting material or citations, believing it is a choice. It’s an act of faith. You can choose to believe that we’re in The End Times,  or that The Singularity is Near, Alien Disclosure is imminent, or we’re entering the final victory of World Communism or a final Malthusian or climate driven collapse. These narratives are at their core eschatological in nature and all the same . We won’t be able to say with any certainty until one of these scenarios would actually come to pass. Even then we’d probably be incapable of forming a consensus around something that had already occurred.

    One of things that I’ve really had a hard time grappling with since all this began came out of my introductory study of General Semantics. Facing the reality that none of us really knows anything and that we only think we know is so much harder than just stumbling through life dead certain about your assumptions and oblivious to your own ignorance and biases. At least that way you just bounce around between successes, failures and misadventure but at least you think you’ve got things under control or at least understand what is happening.

    None of that is true, and when you realize that, it can be terrifying.

    All the more so because when I think about a crazy, unhinged conspiracy theory like this one, the reasons why I would normally dismiss it: that it was just somehow untenable for governments anywhere to just rescind everybody’s civil liberties and basic human rights at the stroke of a pen with zero due process, no constitutional basis, no public consultation, no legal review or any right to appeal. When I think about how things have played out over the past year,  I realize that these assumptions weren’t actually anchored to anything.

    These days I’m reading Marco Papic’s Geopolitical Alpha, and in it, his core premise, is this:

    “Preferences are optional and subject to constraints, whereas constraints are neither optional nor subject to preferences.”

    By this he means: many investors factor their assumptions around how governments will impact their plans on what turn out to be policy preferences. But what actually happens, and what actually does impact their activities will be shaped by constraints, not preferences.

    Said differently, a lot of capital gets allocated on what people think governments want to do, but what actually matters is what is preventing or constraining the government from doing what they want to do.

    The five big constraints on governments are: politicaleconomicfinancialgeo-political and legal/constitutional.

    Seen in this light, even if true, that governments wanted to impose a totalitarian communist regime globally, surely they are constrained from doing so. Right? RIGHT? They can’t just fscking do it. 

    But… all kinds of things I thought governments couldn’t just come out and do over the last year…. well they just came right out and did it. And just to really mess with my head, Papic added two wildcard constraints to his list: terrorism and pandemics.

    The problem is, those wildcards, they aren’t wildcard constraints – they’re wildcard enablers. Those two wildcards seem to have the ability to trump all normal constraints. Every one of those constraints went out the window because of the wildcards.

    Where does that leave us?

    Speaking for myself, I’m losing my moorings as I no longer have any clear idea what, if any, policy constraints exist anymore.

    So I have no grounding in the arena of what’s possible, how arbitrarily policy makers can act, what’s to stop them from simply confiscating my wealth (except for my crypto), or nationalizing the business I’ve built up over 22 years, and doing the same to everybody else. This is Canada. We’re generally meek as fuck here.

    Second passport and expat strategies won’t work if, as per the “World Debt Reset Program” outlined in the conspiracy theory, this happens simultaneously everywhere. Granted that seems farfetched, but the boundaries of the word “farfetched” have shifted dramatically since all this began.

    The question I keep coming back to is “What’s to stop them from trying it?

    One of my first articles that I wrote on my old blog said that:

    “The ultimate goal of the State is to cultivate absolute dependency on it by its subjects. This is because until this happens there is a real danger that those governed will one day wake up and realize that the State is not only entirely unnecessary but actually malignant; a malevolent force actively impoverishing society to the benefit of it’s elites”

    I think nation states do know this, and that the continuous iteration of failed policies painted all of them into a corner vis-à-vis the global economy and the financial system as we know it. As Daniel Dimartino Booth observed in a recent George Gammon podcast, (paraphrasing) “The central banks were screwed. They needed something like COVID because the financial system was coming unglued”.

    Understanding that there is a real incentive for nation states to move in a drastic direction, combined with a conspicuous absence of restraints, is taking a huge psychological toll on the populace. As hypernormalization runs wild, a type of mass psychosis sets in which has been manifesting in rabid polarization, hysterical cancel culture, Reddit-driven stonk manias and myriad tribes of neo-Flagellants.

    Something’s gotta give, but at the same time, I’m really worried that something’s about to give.

    *  *  *

    Join the Bombthrower mailing list as we brace ourselves for whatever comes next.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 20:40

  • "Peaking" China Credit Impulse Suggests Copper Prices May Have Topped 
    “Peaking” China Credit Impulse Suggests Copper Prices May Have Topped 

    As we detailed earlier in the year for our Premium subs, if this turning point in the Chinese credit impulse is confirmed by the upcoming data, expect a dispersion between inflation-sensitive assets in 2021.

    At the time, we pointed out a critical estimated timeline of the peak Y/Y performance for each of the assets analyzed after China’s credit impulse turned down. 

    Fast forward til today, and that timeline appears to be starting to come true as alarm bells continue to ring with multiple banks pointing out what we said more than a month earlier. A peaking credit impulse may result in slower global growth and slumping industrial base metal prices. 

    Regular readers should know by now that under the current Chinese regime of debt-fueled growth – one of the most precise indicators of future economic growth is the credit impulse

    JPMorgan’s Mislav Matejka explains this week in a note to clients that China’s credit impulse is in the process of “peaking.” The change in the growth rate of aggregate credit as a percentage of gross domestic product in the country has a tremendous impact on the global economy’s future. Saxo Bank once said the credit impulse leads the global economy by 9 to 12 months.

    A peaking credit impulse in China could soon dictate a regime shift in macro themes to weaker inflation, slower growth, slumping industrial metal prices, and falling Treasury yields. 

    More importantly, Matejka focuses on industrial metals, indicating “speculative positions on copper are very elevated, and are showing signs of peaking.” 

    Since China leads the global economy, it’s important to note that country’s credit creation heavily influences commodities’ prices. 

    Focusing on copper, which is a critical contributor to the global economy, and prices rise and fall with China’s demand. The chart below shows that China’s peaking credit impulse tends to drag down copper bullish speculative positioning in the base metal, eventually leading to price declines.

    A further move higher in copper prices could depend on China continuing to expand credit or if Washington passes a massive stimulus bill. Though upside in copper could be fairly limited considering the credit situation in China. 

    If copper prices turn south, other base metals may follow with the threat of persistent oversupplied conditions as the global economy slows. Already, the Bloomberg Industrial Metals index weekly appears to be reversing after a sustained up-move since global central banks injected trillions of dollars into capital markets when the pandemic began in early 2020. 

    If you need any more confirmation that China could be headed into a slowdown, the always-well-managed services sector activity on Tuesday night printed at its slowest pace in nine months in January. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Again, as we’ve told our readers in the past, all that matters is the Chinese credit impulse.

    For more on credit impulses, checkout Zerohedge Premium

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 20:20

  • McMaken: Incitement Is Not A Real Crime
    McMaken: Incitement Is Not A Real Crime

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    Former president Donald Trump has been impeached for “incitement to insurrection.” The House Democrats’ claim is that Trump made an inflammatory speech which – a week later – led to the Capitol riot of January 6.

    The Senate is now considering whether or not to convict Trump of this “crime.”

    I put “crime” in scare quotes for a couple of reasons.

    The first reason is that the impeachment proceedings aren’t a criminal trial, so even conviction wouldn’t establish guilt the way an actual criminal court might. Contrary to what the public thinks—with its third grade–level understanding of American politics—and what the media is happy to imply, impeachment is strictly a political process that does nothing more than remove a person from office. The Democrats’ new interpretation that impeachment can be used to bar someone from holding office in the future is a rather novel approach.

    Moreover, it’s already clear that if Trump were being tried in an actual criminal court, it is extremely unlikely a prosecutor could get a conviction. Trump’s alleged incitement doesn’t meet the legal requirements for such a charge as set out by the US Supreme Court back in 1969. An incitement conviction would require prosecutors to show there was an imminent threat of violence from the inflammatory remarks. Clearly, the Capitol riot, occurring a week later, was not “imminent,” and in a criminal case, it would be nearly impossible to prove this was directly connected to a political speech made days earlier.

    The second reason “crime” needs to be in scare quotes is because incitement isn’t a real crime at all. It assumes that the person committing the “incitement” is simply passing down orders to blank-slate automatons who then turn around and do whatever their “leader” says.

    In fact, the only people guilty of rioting are the rioters.

    Rothbard spelled this out several times.

    For instance, in an essay written for a small newspaper in the late 1960s, Rothbard explains the problem with claiming incitement is a real crime:

    Suppose that Mr. A tells Mr. B: “Go out and shoot the mayor.” Suppose, then, that Mr. B, pondering this suggestion, decides it’s a darn good idea and goes out and shoots the mayor. Now obviously B is responsible for the shooting. But in what sense can A be held responsible? A did not do the shooting, and didn’t take part, we will assume, in any of the planning or executing of the act itself. The very fact that he made that suggestion cannot really mean that A should be held responsible. For does not B have free will? Is he not a free agent? And if he is, then B and B alone is responsible for the shooting.

    If we attribute any responsibility at all to A, we have fallen into the trap of determinism. We are then assuming that B has no will of his own, that he is then only a tool in some way manipulated by A.

    Now, if Person A participated in the planning of a riot or a murder, then Person A is guilty of conspiracy, not incitement. But Person A is not guilty of anything for have merely suggested to Person B that he shoot the mayor. Person B, after all, is responsible for his own actions.

    Rothbard continues:

    if the will is free, then no man is determined by another; then just because somebody shouts “burn, baby, burn,” no one hearing this advice is thereby compelled or determined to go and carry the suggestion out. Anybody who does carry out the advice is responsible for his own actions, and solely responsible. Therefore, the “inciter” cannot be held in any way responsible. In the nature of man and morality, there is no such crime as “incitement to riot,” and therefore the very concept of such a “crime” should be stricken from the statute books.

    Finally, Rothbard notes that incitement laws are also damaging because they are a direct attack on the natural right to free speech:

    Cracking down on “incitement to riot,” then, is simply and purely cracking down on one’s natural and crucial right to freedom of speech. Speech is not a crime. And hence the injustice, not only of the crime of incitement, but also of such other “crimes” as “criminal sedition” (sharp criticism of the government), or “conspiracy to advocate overthrow of the government”—in other words, planning someday to exercise one’s basic and natural right to freedom of speech and advocacy.

    A decade later, Rothbard emphasized the importance of rejecting the notion of incitement as a crime in his book For a New Liberty. Under the section titled “Freedom of Speech,” he writes:

    What, for example, of “incitement to riot,” in which the speaker is held guilty of a crime for whipping up a mob, which then riots and commits various actions and crimes against person and property? In our view, “incitement” can only be considered a crime if we deny every man’s freedom of will and of choice, and assume that if tells and C: “You and him go ahead and riot!” that somehow and are then helplessly determined to proceed and commit the wrongful act. But the libertarian, who believes in freedom of the will, must insist that while it might be immoral or unfortunate for to advocate a riot, that this is strictly in the realm of advocacy and should not be subject to legal penalty.

    Later, in his book The Ethics of Liberty, Rothbard again makes very similar remarks:

    Suppose that Green exhorts a crowd: “Go! Burn! Loot! Kill!” and the mob proceeds to do just that, with Green having nothing further to do with these criminal activities. Since every man is free to adopt or not adopt any course of action he wishes, we cannot say that in some way Green determined the members of the mob to their criminal activities; we cannot make him, because of his exhortation, at all responsible for their crimes. “Inciting to riot,” therefore, is a pure exercise of a man’s right to speak without being thereby implicated in crime. On the other hand, it is obvious that if Green happened to be involved in a plan or conspiracy with others to commit various crimes, and that then Green told them to proceed, he would then be just as implicated in the crimes as are the others—more so, if he were the mastermind who headed the criminal gang. This is a seemingly subtle distinction which in practice is clearcut—there is a world of difference between the head of a criminal gang and a soap-box orator during a riot; the former is not, properly, to be charged simply with “incitement.”

    This problem is related to a similar problem: making noncrimes like slander (i.e., defamation) into prosecutable offenses. A “slanderer” can say all sorts of things. And, indeed, a respect for freedom of speech dictates that we allow him to do so. After all, the people who hear what he has to say remain completely free to come to their own conclusions about what to do with that information. Just because some person says “your sister is a whore,” doesn’t mean we are required to believe him or act on those words in any particular way.

    In practice, laws against incitement and defamation are very dangerous to basic human rights, and both place nonviolent people in legal jeopardy merely for the “crime” of expressing opinions. These laws are direct attacks on the right to free speech. In the case of Trump and “incitement,” he expressed an opinion about the election and encouraged people to “fight like hell” in a vague, nonspecific way. If this sort of thing is “criminal” then anyone who expresses an opinion that people should “resist” or “fight” against the regime—or even suggest that the regime is illegitimate or worthy of contempt—is likely to find himself on trial any time one of his social media “friends” decides to deface a government building or throw a rock at a cop. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 20:00

  • Panasonic Is Quitting The Solar Panel Business
    Panasonic Is Quitting The Solar Panel Business

    Panasonic is quitting the solar panel business.

    The company was formerly a leader in the market but has now succumb to cheap competition out of China, according to Nikkei Asia

    The company plans on halting manufacturing as soon as March 2022 at its factories in Malaysia and Japan. It’ll be a “complete exit from the solar manufacturing business”, the report says. Panasonic will stay in the power industry by procuring panels from other manufacturers.

    New solar generation this year is expected to rise 10% from the previous year, to 117 million kilowatts. Prices of panels have fallen to about 33% of what they were 10 years ago thanks to increased Chinese production. This increase has put pressure on legacy players, like Panasonic.

    Most of Panasonic’s sales have been based on domestic demand, but that demand is not expected to grow due to government subsidies in Japan being rolled back.

    Panasonic had previously acquired Sanyo Electric and was building on its solar cell business after making it a subsidiary. Panasonic “had its sights set on becoming a top-three manufacturer, but is now out of the top five due to price wars with Chinese companies,” Nikkei wrote. 

    Despite leaving solar, Panasonic will stay in renewable energy, focusing on projects like power management for smart cities. 

    With its exit from the industry, Kyocera and Sharp remain the two key solar panel manufacturers in Japan. 

    Recall, Panasonic also shares Tesla’s solar panel factory in Buffalo, NY but ended its partnership with the auto company last year. There have been no details on how any shutdown can, and will, further affect Tesla, but we will continue to monitor the situation closely. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 19:40

  • Biden's Energy Plan May Be Costly For Consumers
    Biden’s Energy Plan May Be Costly For Consumers

    Authored by Daniel Lacalle,

    Joe Biden has presented a $2 trillion clean energy plan that may be very expensive for consumers if the United States follows the mistakes of the European example.

    Watch:

    There are some important facts that should concern us when thinking about the US and Europe’s energy policy, supporting industry and creating jobs:

    • In the European Union, SMEs pay 20% more for electricity than in China and 65% more than in India. Between 2005 and 2012 electricity prices in Europe rose 38%, while in the United States they fell 4%. If we go to natural gas, in Europe prices rose 35%, while in the US they fell 66%. But the worst thing is that this trend has become more pronounced in recent years.

    • The “green” policy in Germany has doubled bills for households while the price of wholesale generation fell, and in 2017 it still had over 52% of its electricity mix and 88% of primary energy consumption from fossil fuels. The German “energiewende” has already cost more than 243 billion euro between taxes and “renewable subsidies” since 2000, and greenhouse gas emissions are almost flat since 2009. Even worse, the impact of net job creation in the energy sector has been negative. Between the job losses in traditional companies and the bankruptcies of local solar names, job creation has turned negative. Germany once had a goal of 500,000 green energy jobs by 2020. After peaking at just below 380,000 a few years ago, the number is now approaching 350,000 and this means that the net effect in the industry will be a 20,000 loss.

    • Up to 33% of the total costs of industrial companies come from energy expenses, which have exploded in recent years due to the impact of subsidies, fixed costs, and taxes.

    It is very simple, either we look for competitiveness or the negative impact on employment and delocalization of industries will increase.

    The energy sector is key in the decarbonization process, but will not achieve it through perverse incentives and accumulated costs that penalize the efficient in favor of the inefficient, subsidize the expensive, and tax the competitive ones.

    The best technological tool to improve the environment is a combination of natural gas, nuclear, hydro, and renewable energy. But renewables are intermittent, while consumption is continuous. We cannot forget the billions required in grid connections and support to maintain an intermitent and volatile mix.

    The energy policy of the United States must comply with the principles of safety, diversification and competitiveness. All these can only happen with higher liberalization and competition, not less.

    Technology replacement and energy transition should be achieved through competition, lower costs and efficiency, the same way as crude oil ended with whale oil, not because it was decided by a committee, but because the cost was lower and the benefits for consumers evident.

    Security of supply must be achieved, also, from a flexible and diversified energy mix which must be cheap and efficient, not via subsidies and higher fixed costs, but through the tax incentives that prevent “fake demand signals” and prevent overcapacity.

    Energy is the cornerstone of the future of any nation. Destroying competitiveness would likely worsen the current crisis. The U.S. has the tools, using all technologies, to ensure an abundant and cheap energy supply. Anything else would bring it to repeat the mistakes that Europe made a few years ago.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 19:20

  • House Democrats And 11 Republicans Boot Greene From Committees Over QAnon
    House Democrats And 11 Republicans Boot Greene From Committees Over QAnon

    House Democrats on Thursday voted to strip Rep. Marjorie Taylor Greene (R-GA) of her committee assignments after arguing that her past support of QAnon disqualified her from holding them.

    Lawmakers voted 230-199 to remove Greene from the House education and budget committees, with 11 Republicans joining the Democrats, after the GOP declined to take action themselves, according to The Hill.

    The vote came after members of both parties gave impassioned speeches for or against removing Greene – with much of the GOP stepping up to her defense, while at the same time condemning her past comments.

    Some Republicans warned Democrats that they were setting a dangerous precedent.

    “I think you are, frankly, overlooking the unprecedented nature of the acts that you’ve decided upon, and where that may lead us when the majority changes,” said Rep. Tom Cole (R-OK), the senior Republican member of the Rules Committee.

    On Wednesday night, Greene received a standing ovation during a closed-door GOP conference meeting, where she apologized for embracing QAnon. Then on Thursday, Greene said in a House floor speech that she had recently ‘realized the dangers’ of such narratives.

    Greene described how she’d “stumbled across” QAnon in late 2017 and began posting about it on Facebook while she was “upset about things and didn’t trust the government.” 

    Later in 2018, Greene said, “when I started finding misinformation, lies, things that were not true in these QAnon posts, I stopped believing it.”

    Greene also disavowed her previous support for several conspiracy theories, declaring a belief that school shootings are “absolutely real” and that 9/11 “absolutely happened.” 

    But as Greene concluded her speech, she adopted a more defiant tone, blasting unnamed Democrats for what she suggested was their encouragement of the violence that, at times, accompanied last year’s national protests against police brutality. –The Hill

    If this Congress is to tolerate members that condone riots that have hurt American people, attack police officers, occupy federal property, burn businesses and cities, but yet wants to condemn me and crucify me in the public square for words that I said, and I regret, a few years ago, then I think we’re in a real big problem,” she said, before criticizing the MSM.

    “Will we allow the media, that is just as guilty as QAnon of presenting truth and lies, to divide us?” Greene asked, drawing sharp rebuke from House Rules Committee Chairman Jim McGovern (D-MA) who called the comparison “beyond the pale.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Yet, at the end of the day, Greene’s defense wasn’t enough to overcome the Democrats and 11 Republicans who decided to punched right over a colleague’s past.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 19:07

  • US Border Agents Nab Group Of Iranians 
    US Border Agents Nab Group Of Iranians 

    U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP) agents arrested a group of Iranians who illegally crossed into the US Monday evening.

    CBP said five women and six men were nabbed near San Luis, Arizona, on a bridge near County 21st Street and the Salinity Canal. Agents detained the group shortly after illegally crossing the Mexico–U.S. border. 

    There was no mention in the CBP press release if any group member belonged to terrorist organizations. The group is in processing with CBP while their fate is yet to be determined. 

    The illegal crossing comes shortly after the Biden administration reversed significant border protections by former President Trump.

    Former Acting CBP Commissioner Mark Morgan was heard on Newsmax this week calling out the new administration for their borderless security, ultimately making America less safe. 

    The U.S. and many countries in the West have repeatedly declared that Iran is the principal state sponsor of terrorism. So when a bunch of Iranians are apprehended on the border, it’s a big deal because of their potential connections to radical groups. 

    The Immigration Reform Law Institute has outlined 10,000 illegal immigrants from countries designated as state sponsors of terrorism are living within the U.S. 

    Biden reversing the travel ban on predominantly Muslim countries, halting border wall construction, and suspending deportations may result in a more dangerous country. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 19:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 4th February 2021

  • World Economic Forum Again Delays Annual Meeting Due To Pandemic Travel Restrictions
    World Economic Forum Again Delays Annual Meeting Due To Pandemic Travel Restrictions

    Fresh off the annual Davos Agenda held in greatly modified form the last week of January (that is… not really at all), which simply involved some world leaders giving speeches virtually, the global pandemic has continued to disrupt plans to hold World Economic Forum meetings in person. 

    The WEF announced Wednesday that it will reschedule the Special Annual Meeting in Singapore originally planned for May. Citing the difficulty of various international travel restrictions and quarantine requirements, the organization announced it will be pushed back to August to allow for more time for necessary arrangements. 

    Singapore, via Bloomberg

    We should note, however, it’s the one meeting in the world in which most participants travel there by private jet anyway, or other transport means typically exclusive to the 1%, not to mention standard travel for heads of state typically precludes having to go through busy hubs and terminals. 

    The originally scheduled May meeting had already been delayed for 12 days in a prior change, but now the Geneva-based WEF has indicated the new dates of Aug. 17-20.

    “Although the World Economic Forum and Government of Singapore remain confident of the measures in place to ensure a safe and effective meeting, and local transmission of COVID-19 in Singapore remains at negligible levels, the change to the meeting’s timing reflects the international challenges in containing the pandemic,” it said in a statement announcing the change.

    The 2021 annual meeting in Singapore will aim to address “challenges in containing the pandemic” and the continuing theme of global economic reset in the wake of global lockdowns and unprecedented hurdles. 

    Recent years saw record upticks in private jets flown to WEF summits…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Singapore was initially chosen as it “has a relatively low rate of Covid-19 cases, and has recently started experimenting with modified versions of large-scale conference,” according to prior reporting.

    This also as Switzerland has struggled with a surge of infections in recent months. It’s still expected that Singapore will offer a virtual component alongside in-person meetings in order to further maximize participation. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 02/04/2021 – 01:00

  • Xi, Putin Make The Case For Win-Win, Not Zero-Sum
    Xi, Putin Make The Case For Win-Win, Not Zero-Sum

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    So the Davos Agenda has come and gone.

    That was the virtual Great Reset preview, hosted by Kissinger acolyte cum World Economic Forum (WEF) oracle Herr Klaus Schwab.

     

    Still, corporate/political so-called “leaders” will continue to wax lyrical about the Fourth Industrial Revolution – or its mild spin-offs such as Build Back Better, the favorite slogan of the new White House tenants.

    The WEF co-sponsors – from the UN and the IMF to BlackRock, Blackstone and the Carlyle Group – will continue to expand their synchronicity with Lynn Forester de Rothschild and her corporate-heavy Council for Inclusive Capitalism with the Vatican – pop Pope Francis at the helm.

    And yes, they accept Visa.

    Predictably, the two really crucial events at Davos received minimal or non-existent coverage across the wobbly West: the speeches by President Xi and President Putin.

    We have already highlighted Xi’s essentials. Aside from arguing a powerful case for multilateralism as the only possible road map to deal with global challenges, Xi stressed nothing substantial may be achieved if the inequality gap between North and South is not reduced.

    The best in-depth analysis of Putin’s extraordinary speech , hands down, was provided by Rostislav Ishchenko, whom I had the pleasure to meet in Moscow in 2018.

    Ishchenko stresses how, “in terms of scale and impact on historical processes, this is steeper than the Battles of Stalingrad and Kursk combined.” The speech, he adds, was totally unexpected, as much as Putin’s stunning intervention at the Munich Security Conference in 2007, “the crushing defeat” imposed on Georgia in 2008, and the return of Crimea in 2014.

    Ishchenko also reveals something that will never be acknowledged in the West: “80 people from among the most influential on the planet did not laugh in Putin’s face, as it was in 2007 in Munich, and without noise immediately after his open speech signed up for a closed conference with him.”

    Putin’s very important reference to the ominous 1930s – “the inability and unwillingness to find substantive solutions to problems like this in the 20th century led to World War 2 catastrophe” – was juxtaposed with a common sense warning: the necessity of preventing the takeover of global policy by Big Tech , which “are de facto competing with states”.

    Xi and Putin’s speeches were de facto complementary – emphasizing sustainable, win-win economic development for all actors, especially across the Global South, coupled with the necessity of a new socio-political contract in international relations.

    This drive should be based on two pillars: sovereignty – that is, the good old Westphalian model (and not Great Reset, hyper-concentrated, one world “governance”) and sustainable development propelled by techno-scientific progress (and not techno-feudalism).

    So what Putin-Xi proposed, in fact, was a concerted effort to expand the basic foundations of the Russia-China strategic partnership to the whole Global South: the crucial choice ahead is between win-win and the Exceptionalist zero-sum game.

    Regime-change that commie!

    The Xi-Putin road map is already being examined in excruciating detail by Michael Hudson, for instance in this essay based on the first chapter of his upcoming book Cold War 2.0: The Geopolitical Economics of Finance Capitalism vs. Industrial Capitalism. Many of these themes have been elaborated in a recent conversation/interview between Michael and myself.

    The whole Global South is figuring out how the contrast could not be starker between the American model – neoliberalism redux, in the form of turbo-financialization – and East Asia’s productive investment in industrial capitalism.

    Alastair Crooke has outlined the dubious “appeal” of the American model, including “asset markets…severed from any connection to economic returns”; markets that “are not free, but Treasury managed”; and “enterprise capitalism…morphed into monopolistic oligarchism”.

    The glaring counterpoint to Xi-Putin at Davos has been a so-called “strategy paper” released by NATO think tank The Atlantic Council, pompously titled The Longer Telegram, as if this was as relevant as George Kennan’s 1946 Long Telegram that designed the containment of the USSR.

    Well, the least one can say to the anonymous “former senior government official with deep expertise” on China is, “Mr. Anonymous, You’re No George Kennan”. At best, we’re dealing with a sub-Mike Pompeo with a massive hangover.

    Amidst a tsunami of platitudes, we learn that China is a “revisionist power” that “presents a serious problem for the whole of the democratic world”; and that the Chinese leadership better get its act together and operate “within the US-led liberal international order rather than building a rival order”.

    The usual toxic mix of arrogance and condescension totally gives away the game, which boils down to “deterring and preventing China from crossing US red lines”, and applying good, old Kissingerian Divide and Rule between Russia and China.

    Oh, and don’t forget regime change: if the “strategy” works, “Xi will in time be replaced by the more traditional form of Communist Party leadership.”

    If this is what passes for intellectual firepower in Atlanticist circles, Beijing and Moscow don’t even need enemies.

    The Asian center of gravity

    Martin Jacques, now a visiting professor at Tsinghua University and a senior fellow at the China Institute of Fudan University, is one of the very few Westerners who actually has real “expertise” on China.

    He’s now focusing on the main battlefield in the evolving US-China clash: Europe. Jacques notes that, “the trend toward a growing distance between Europe and the US will be slow, tortuous, conflict-riddled, and painful.” We are now “in new territory. American decline means that it has increasingly less to offer Europe.”

    As an example, let’s jump cut to a distinct feature of the BRI/New Silk Roads and one of its key hubs, the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC): the Digital Silk Road .

    In partnership with Huawei, fiber optic cable is being laid out all across Pakistan – as I saw for myself when I traveled the Karakoram Highway, the northern part of CPEC. This fiber optic cable all the way from the Karakoram to Balochistan will link with the Pakistan-East Africa Connecting Europe (PEACE) submarine cable in the Arabian Sea.

    The end result will be high-end connectivity between a host of BRI-participating nations and Europe – as the Mediterranean section is already being laid, running from Egypt to France. Before the end of 2021, the whole 15,000 km-long fiber optic cable will be online.

    This shows that BRI is not as much about building roads, dams and high-speed rail networks but especially the Digital Silk Road, intimately connected with state of the art Chinese cyber-tech.

    It’s no wonder Jacques fully understands how “the gravitational pull of China, and Asia more generally, is drawing Europe eastward. Nothing illustrates this phenomenon better than the China-proposed Belt and Road Initiative.”

    In ReOrient: Global Economy in the Asian Age, an extraordinary book published way back in 1998, the late, great Andre Gunder Frank exhaustively smashed Eurocentrism, demonstrating how the rise of the West was a mere historical blip, and a consequence of the decline of the East around 1800.

    Now, only two centuries later, the planet’s center of gravity is back in Asia, as it’s been for most of recorded history. The fate of those blind to the evidence and unable to adapt is to telegram themselves to utter irrelevance.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 23:50

  • Surreal Video Shows Myanmar Coup Unfolding 'Live' Behind Oblivious Aerobics Instructor
    Surreal Video Shows Myanmar Coup Unfolding ‘Live’ Behind Oblivious Aerobics Instructor

    In footage that almost has to be seen to be believed, an exercise instructor who regularly leads live-streamed workout routines from public venues inadvertently filmed Monday’s military coup as it was underway behind her

    The exercise instructor was in the middle of her workout routine just as literally a few hundred meters behind her military trucks sped to take over the nation’s capitol complex in Naypyitaw. The video has since gone viral. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The woman has since been identified as Khing Hnin Wai, a physical education teacher with the Ministry of Education who initially posted the video on her Facebook page where it went viral.

    In later media interviews she said she had no idea of the historic events then unfolding immediately behind her.

    Before I heard the news… in the morning, the video I made for the aerobic dance competition has become an unforgettable memory,” she wrote on Facebook.

    In those very moments Myanmar’s military (the United States still calls the country Burma), had seized and sealed off all central government buildings after raiding the homes and making arrests of the national civilian leadership, most notably Aung San Suu Kyi, leader of Myanmar’s governing National League for Democracy (NLD) party, as well as President Win Myint and senior party figures.

    The BBC and other outlets have “confirmed the video is real” after some initially questioned its authenticity. 

    The State Department is now warning of the potential for “civil and political unrest in Burma” following the dramatic military takeover of the country after the army called prior November elections “fraudulent”. This as all international travel has been halted, and various communications including internet were cut to the capital. 

    The Biden administration has now formally declared it as a coup d’état, which means Washington is required by law to cut off all foreign assistance to the southeast Asian country. It further announced that targeted action will be taken “against those responsible” for the arrests and continued detention of the elected civilian leadership, likely in the form of sanctions

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 23:30

  • The People Vs Navalny: Russia Draws Red Lines To Foreign Meddling In Its Sovereign Affairs
    The People Vs Navalny: Russia Draws Red Lines To Foreign Meddling In Its Sovereign Affairs

    Submitted By SouthFront.org,

    The flag-bearer of Western influence and globalists in Russia, Alexey Navalny, has been sentenced to 2 years and 8 months in prison for grossly disregarding the terms of his suspended sentence.

    The initial sentence was for 3.5 years, but he has already served a part of that term under house arrest. The absurdity of the situation is that his initial sentence was related to corruption – something he allegedly fights against.

    Despite claims by MSM and Western diplomats that Navalny is subject to political persecution, his proven and known ties to Western Intelligence were not part of the case.

    Just recently, on February 1st, videos were released online showing the joyful cooperation between Navalny’s team and foreign intelligence services. To put it plainly – Navalny’s team requested information from British Intelligence. It planned to employ that “dirt” to hinder Russia’s interests, both internal and external. His Anti-Corruption Foundation, furthermore, promised to work against Russian business, and to promote British companies. For that, these would be paid hefty sums when he, ultimately, somehow managed to come to power. To achieve that, Navalny’s people vowed to stage mass protests, spread propaganda and strike behind the scenes deals with the elites. It can’t be corruption, if it’s for a “good cause”, right?

    As further evidence of this foreign support and pressure, at least 20 diplomats from various countries, including the US, made an appearance when Navalny’s case came up in the Moscow Court hoping to pressure the court in his favour thereby meddling in Russian internal affairs. The massive media propaganda campaign was also plain to see.

    For proven in court criminal offenses involving embezzlement of funds on a massive scale, dozens of violations of the terms of his suspended sentence, contempt of court, his active and public work in the interests of foreign states against the Russian nation Navalny faced slightly more than 2.5 years in jail. For any neutral observer, this was an expected outcome and the only concern would be the soft punishment that he received. This can be partly explained by Russia once again showing itself to be a stronghold of tolerance and democracy and also by the fact that the decision of the court is related to the violations of the suspended sentence only and it did not review other ‘achievements’ of the anti-Russian clique operating under the Navalny brand.

    Following the court decision, Western leaders and diplomats further publicly meddled in internal Russian affairs by calling for violence to demand the release of the self-proclaimed anti-corruption activist. This will also likely be used as a pretext for increasing pressure on Russia, including new sanctions. The remaining Western-funded network inside the country already tried to stage violent protests in Moscow and other big cities. Nonetheless, their attempts failed largely due to a low turnout and to the successful actions of the authorities. There are no doubts that foreign efforts in this field will continue as opponents of Russia need violence on the streets and casualties to push forward their destabilization campaign. At the same time, recent events demonstrated that the hardcore pro-Western opposition has close to no real support among the general Russian population. Therefore, help from Western special services will likely focus on creating pinpoint provocations to escalate the violence and to create some sacred sacrifice. If the government acts successfully to contain these provocations and avoid the escalation of violence, anti-Russian forces will likely focus on keeping up the pressure and some level of instability in the larger cities for the next month. A new round of major provocations can be expected in the runup to the Russian general election in September 2021.

    Actions of the global establishment show that hopes for a ‘reconciliation with the West’ demonstrated by the ‘liberal part’ of the Russian elites are largely baseless. Therefore, Russia should be ready for the further confrontation with the so-called ‘Democratic world’, which has for a long time forgotten what the words ‘democracy’ and the ‘rule of law’ really mean.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 23:10

  • A Series Of Fortunate Events For The ECB
    A Series Of Fortunate Events For The ECB

    By Chiara Zangarelli of Nomura

    Over the past two weeks some key euro area economic data releases have printed to the upside, with the surprise indices (such as that computed by Bloomberg) having remained highly elevated. Strong inflation (however temporary that may prove to be, given it is the result of one-off and base effects), for example, and modestly better-than-expected GDP data in the euro area present risks to the consensus view that further monetary policy easing will be needed later this year and may instead lead the ECB down a wait-and-see path in 2021.

    Inflation

    Euro area HICP inflation rose strongly in January, with all of the big four surprising to the upside. The most notable rise came from Germany, where inflation rose to 1.6% y-o-y from -0.7%, but there were significant rises too in France (to 0.8% from zero), Italy (to 0.5% from -0.3%) and Spain (to 0.6% from -0.6%). Overall, euro area inflation in January rose to 0.9% from -0.3%, an upside surprise of 0.3pp, while core inflation rose to 1.4% from 0.2% in the previous month, an upside surprise of 0.5pp.

    The particularly sharp rise in German inflation was due to some policy-specific factors such as the reversal of the VAT cut that had been in place since the middle of last year, and the implementation of the climate package. In addition, it appears that inflation was also boosted by a change in weights within the HICP basket. As required by Eurostat (see here), most statistical institutes in Europe changed their HICP weights in January 2021 in response to changes in consumption patterns linked to the pandemic. As explained by ECB Executive Board member Schnabel in her recent interview with Deutschlandfunk, the significant shift in individual goods’ weights within the basket makes it “very difficult to compare the [inflation] figures over time”.

    Modest effect of the second virus wave on Q4 GDP

    Euro area GDP was also published this week and showed that the second COVID-19 wave had – in Q4 at least – only a modest effect on output, falling by 0.7% vs. Q3. Activity in two of the euro area big four economies surprised consensus on the upside: French GDP fell by only 1.3% q-o-q, which was far less than either consensus or we had been expecting, while in Spain output rose by 0.4% q-o-q rather than the 1.4% fall expected. In Germany and Italy the GDP figures were broadly in line with consensus.

    While it may be tempting to conclude that GDP has not fallen as much as might have been the case, economists’ forecasts published in the middle of 2020 for the major euro area economies were actually fairly accurate (Figure 4). That said, forecasts made in the middle of 2020 did not generally take into consideration the scale of the second wave of the virus – thus in some sense GDP has surprised to the upside at the end of 2020 because output has grown as expected, but with far worse virus conditions than foreseen.

    There may be a number of reasons why this second wave of the virus did not have such a large impact on the economy as might have been expected. First, lockdowns have not been as tight: either restrictions have been less onerous than last spring or they have been in operation for a shorter period of time. Also, this time around firms and households seem to have adapted to the new restrictions better, following their experiences last spring. For any given decline in mobility it seems reasonable to think that economic agents are getting better at adapting to sequential lockdowns. Last but not least, compared with last spring, the manufacturing sector in Europe is now performing far better.

    Monetary policy implications

    The well-above-expectations rise in euro area January inflation and the limited decline in Q4 GDP potentially pose substantial risks to our view that the ECB will further expand its PEPP envelope in H2 2021.

    ECB Executive Board member Schnabel said in an interview published on Sunday (with Deutschlandfunk) that the central bank is “expecting the inflation rate to pick up in the course of this year. We must be careful, however, not to mistake these short-term developments for a sustained increase in inflation. We are faced with very weak demand. And it does not look like this is going to fundamentally change. This is why we continue to be more worried about inflation being too low rather than too high”.

    At the same time, sanctioning further monetary stimulus when inflation is trending higher (in Germany inflation could rise to as much as 3% y-o-y in H2 2021) and output is rebounding (which it should if the virus retreats as we expect) could prove difficult, for the hawks in particular but even among some of the doves on the Governing Council. However much the rise in inflation is seen to be  temporary and related to one-off factors (policy and weight changes), the move higher adds further uncertainty to the inflation outlook. In an environment of rising inflation and increased uncertainty, the possibility of the ECB adopting a ‘wait-and-see’ approach throughout 2021 is very real.

    ECB chief economist Lane, in an interview with Süddeutsche Zeitung published on Monday said: “We expect economic growth and inflation in the euro area to return to their pre-pandemic levels before the end of this year. Prior to the pandemic, inflation was hovering around 1 per cent, but with a dynamic where inflation would, over time, rise closer towards 2 per cent, it was not a crisis situation. If economic developments are reasonably stable and moderate, monetary policy should be similarly stable and moderate”.

    While an increase in the PEPP envelope later this year remains our base case for now, further upside surprises in inflation and/or output could raise the risk of the ECB ultimately refraining from adding further stimulus this year – whether that be through additional asset purchases, lower interest rates or adjustments to the central bank’s other non-standard policy measures.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 22:50

  • Longest-Serving Woman In Congress Says She Feels Increasingly Alienated In Democratic Party
    Longest-Serving Woman In Congress Says She Feels Increasingly Alienated In Democratic Party

    Authored by Tom Ozimek via The Epoch Times,

    The longest-serving woman in Congress, Rep. Marcy Kaptur (D-Ohio), told The Hill in a recent interview that she struggles with a growing sense of alienation within the Democratic party as she fights for the interests of her largely working-class Midwest constituents while the Democrat party is increasingly dominated by representatives from wealthy, often coastal districts.

    “They just can’t understand,” Kaptur told the outlet, referring to the difficulty some of her Democrat colleagues have in relating to the concerns of blue-collar constituents like hers.

    “They can’t understand a family that sticks together because that’s what they have. Their loved ones are what they have, their little town, their home, as humble as it is—that’s what they have,” she added.

    Kaptur told the outlet that she worries that the voices of congressional Democrats who represent wealthy districts are increasingly drowning out those who represent heartland districts.

    “It’s been very hard for regions like mine, which have had great economic attrition, to get fair standing, in my opinion,” Kaptur said, adding that, as a Democrat who represents a working-class district, she feels like a minority within her party.

    In the interview, Kaptur touched on congressional district data, which showed that 19 out 20 of the nation’s wealthiest districts are represented by Democrats.

    “Several of my colleagues who are in the top ranks have said to me, ‘You know, we don’t understand your part of the country.’ And they’re very genuine,” Kaptur said.

    “You can’t understand what you haven’t been a part of.”

    The idea that Democrats are losing touch with their blue-collar roots and are increasingly turning into the party of the elites while Republicans are on track to becoming a multiethnic working-class coalition was an oft-repeated theme in the wake of the 2020 election.

    In his first remarks following the November election, in which the GOP defied expectations and made gains in the House, Rep. Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.), the House Minority Leader, declared, “This election cycle has made one thing clear: The Republican Party is now the party of the American worker.”

    The 2020 election results, in general, reinforced the view that the Republican party is poised to become a multiethnic coalition of working-class voters. In the presidential race, for instance, former President Donald Trump won the largest share of non-white voters, a traditionally Democrat demographic, of any Republican since 1960.

    Sen. Marco Rubio (R-Fla.) commented on the fact that Trump won Zapata County, in Texas, by a margin of 52–47 percent in 2020, while he lost that same county to Hilary Clinton in 2016 by a margin of 65–32 percent.

    “#Florida & the Rio Grande Valley showed the future of the GOP: A party built on a multi-ethnic multi-racial coalition of working AMERICANS,” Rubio wrote in a tweet.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 22:30

  • Droves Of People Fall For 'Blue Check Homes' Hoax
    Droves Of People Fall For ‘Blue Check Homes’ Hoax

    A San Francisco artist who mocked Twitter ‘blue check’ elitism was forced to put a disclaimer on a satirical website, which encouraged ‘thought leaders, athletes and famous actors’ to apply for a blue “Verified Badge Crest” on the exterior of their homes – letting everyone know how important one is.

    In a Friday tweet that immediately went viral, Danielle Baskin announced the new service – and in a matter of hours, had over 40 million impressions and thousands of retweets and likes, according to SFGate

    Upon landing on the homepage for bluecheckhomes.com, visitors are prompted to enter their name and all social media accounts that represent you. Then, after qualifying, applicants need only pay a $3,000 fee to let everyone know how special they are.

    Those who can apply must be “Homeowners who are prominent executives, thought leaders, influencers, authors, and journalists who represent prominent organizations, including companies, brands, non-profit organizations, and media organizations,” along with “Homeowners who are government officials, “Homeowners who are actors with at least 5 production credits on their IMDB profile,” and “Homeowners who own entertainment companies, such as film studios, TV networks, and music entities as well as homeowners with public facing roles associated with their productions.”

    The deadpan satire continues with: ” Homeowners who are athletes or on professional esports leagues, and coaches listed on the official team website or who have 3 or more featured references within the 6 months prior to applying in news outlets such as Kotaku, Polygon, or IGN.”

    Applicants must be willing to provide proof of home ownership.

    Apparently so many people fell for the hoax – and didn’t catch on to the increasingly absurd qualifications – that Baskin had to add a disclaimer to her website.

    “…Baskin, the SF-based artist behind the prank, had no idea the website she crafted to back up the fake service would receive 495 applicants, all hoping for a crest of their own.” -SFGate

    I will say a percentage of them are not from a real person. People added, like, Kim Kardashian, and that was clearly a joke,” she said, adding “But everyone else thought the website was real. I did what I thought was a mediocre Photoshop job … I thought, ‘This is all very clickbait-y.’ All of the copy, I thought, was so obviously satire.”

    Now, the website reads:

    WTF IS THIS REAL?

    For context, I’m an artist who makes random internet jokes that sometimes pokes fun of “let’s turn this into a service” culture, internet vanity culture, and terrible capitalist ideas. Historically, decorative crests found on Victorian homes were a mark to signal wealth and importance and I thought it would be dumb if that concept also existed today. But if it existed today, would you need to be verified by a third party to signal status? Here’s the origin of the joke.

    Yes, I ALSO THINK THE IDEA OF VERIFIED BLUE HOUSE BADGES IS DUMB. I also love to fabricate funny shitposts on a Friday night, but my medium is writing satirical copy for landing pages and creating product launches. I’m also actually a sculptor and would totally make one for someone (IDK about pricing).

    If I do make one, it’s unlikely anyone walking around outside would react to a blue check mark on someone’s house. They will probably never find it.

    So is this real? It’s somewhere in between real and fake. Anyone can craft something out of plaster. Anyone can apply to be verified. Anyone can make a landing page. Is there an entity involved and is this being rolled out across Bay Area neighborhoods? No.

    If you thought this was a full-fledged service, please investigate the things you read on the internet! And if you’re an artist making jokes on the internet, we should consider adding disclaimers like this, because not everyone understands your commentary and will share your jokes as fact. 😢

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 22:10

  • Americans Are Buying Guns At "Blistering Pace", FBI Data Shows
    Americans Are Buying Guns At “Blistering Pace”, FBI Data Shows

    Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times,

    Newly released background check data from January shows Americans are buying guns at a “blistering pace,” a firearms expert said.

    “That’s undoubtedly connected to President Joe Biden’s plans to attack the firearm industry by undoing and rewriting regulations and executive actions to target the firearm industry,” Mark Olivia, director of public affairs at the National Shooting Sports Foundation, said in a statement.

    Olivia pointed to the Biden administration freezing the publication of the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency’s “Fair Access” banking rule, and promises to try and repeal the Protection of Lawful Commerce in Arms Act to tighten restrictions on gun licenses, and to ban AR-15 style rifles.

    The White House didn’t respond to a request for comment.

    According to the FBI’s National Instant Criminal Background Check (NCIS) data, 4.3 million firearm background checks were initiated in January. That’s the highest number on record, and up over 300,000 in comparison to December 2020. Three of the top 10 highest weeks are now from January 2021.

    The National Shooting Sports Foundation’s adjusted background check figure of 2 million, reached by subtracting out background code permit checks and permit rechecks and checks on active concealed carry permits, was a jump from its adjusted figure of 1.1 million in January 2020.

    “These are jaw-dropping figures to start the New Year. Americans are claiming their Second Amendment rights to provide for their own safety in record numbers,” Olivia said.

    Jurgen Brauer, the chief economist for Small Arms Analytics, said in a statement that the new year “certainly started off with a sales ‘bang’ due to the turmoil surrounding the confirmation and inauguration of Mr. Biden as the new U.S. president.”

    “The 79 percent year-over-year increase, however, was NOT unprecedented—an even higher increase, of just over 100 percent, was experienced in January 2013, the month Mr. Obama’s second presidential term began,” he added.

    Everytown for Gun Safety said the continued increase in background checks highlights the need for Congress and Biden to implement gun restrictions.

    “As the country reels from multiple crises, the gun industry has cashed in with record sales that have made Americans less safe,” Nick Suplina, managing director of law and policy for the group, said in a statement.

    “Without swift changes in policy, our already devastating gun violence epidemic could get even deadlier. The good news, though, is that we finally have leaders in the White House and in both chambers of Congress who recognize that this crisis demands action.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 21:50

  • White House Press Secretary Under Fire For Mocking Military's Space Force
    White House Press Secretary Under Fire For Mocking Military’s Space Force

    White House Press Secretary Jen Psaki on Wednesday attempted to walk back comments she made the prior day when asked about the future fate and scope of the Space Force, which Trump had established as the US military’s sixth branch in 2019.

    When the subject was broached for the first time in the briefing room she appeared to laugh and mockingly said, “Wow, Space Force… it’s the plane of today,” which also seemed a failed attempt at a joke. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Psaki added in follow-up that she had no idea who the point of contact for Space Force is, further suggesting that it’s unimportant and perhaps irrelevant to the administration.

    The exchange began with the following:

    “May I finally ask whether the President has made a decision on keeping or keeping the scope of Space Force?” Bloomberg’s Josh Wingrove asked Ms Psaki yesterday.

    “Wow. Space Force, it’s the plane of today,” she responded, referring to when she had been asked a question about the paint job on Air Force One. The implication being that it was a question from left-field and, perhaps, a trivial one.

    Wingrove told her it was an “interesting question”.

    “It is an interesting question,” she said.

    “It is an interesting question. I am happy to check with our Space Force point of contact,” she said when a reporter pressed the question . “I’m not sure who that is. I will find out and see if we have any update on that.”

    Her mocking tone immediately provoked criticism from Republican Congressional circles, which had formally authorized the military branch in December 2019, with a projected size of 16,000 troops and initial annual budget of over $15 billion.

    Republican representative Mike Waltz attacked the dismissal from Psaki as meaning the Biden administration is ready to give China free reign in militarizing space: “China is working overtime to become the dominant force in space,” he tweeted. “We need the professionals… to keep Americans safe.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Psaki attempted damage control in a tweet later Tuesday evening. “We look forward to the continuing work of Space Force and invite the members of the team to come visit us in the briefing room anytime to share an update on their important work,” she said.

    Later Mike Rogers, the top Republican on the House of Representatives’ Armed Services Committee, weighed in, demanding an apology for the “disgraceful” quip:

    “It’s concerning to see the Biden administration’s press secretary blatantly diminish an entire branch of our military as the punchline of a joke, which I’m sure China would find funny,” Mr Rogers said.

    “Jen Psaki needs to immediately apologize to the men and women of the Space Force for this disgraceful comment.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    When asked during Wednesday’s briefing whether she was ready to issue an apology, she simply explained, “we invite the members of Space Force here to provide an update to all of you on all of the important work they’re doing, and we certainly look forward to seeing continued updates from their team.”

    “They absolutely have the full support of the Biden administration, and we are not revisiting the decision to establish the Space Force,” while referring to the Congressional mandate.

    And perhaps as expected, there was no apology to follow.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 21:30

  • Defense Secretary Orders 60-Day Stand-Down To Confront Extremism In The Military
    Defense Secretary Orders 60-Day Stand-Down To Confront Extremism In The Military

    Authored by Meghann Myers via MilitaryTimes.com,

    Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin has called on the services to conduct a 60-day stand-down on the issue of extremism in the military, prompted by the Jan. 6 attack on the the Capitol and subsequent reports of both active-duty and former service members attending a rally calling to overturn the 2020 election and the riot that ensued.

    Military explosives arranged in the shape of a swastika. Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin on Feb. 3 called for a stand-down to confront extremism in the services. (Screenshot from Twitter account @Jacobite_Edward)

    Austin held a meeting Wednesday of the service secretaries and Joint Chiefs, Pentagon spokesman John Kirby told reporters, to ask them about their concerns, and ideas for improving the situation.

    “Even though the numbers might be small, they may not be as small as we would like them to be, or we believe them to be, “Kirby said of the prevalence of troops with extremists views, ties or activities. “And that no matter what it is, it is not an insignificant problem.”

    Guidance is forthcoming on what Austin expects to see after the 60 days.

    “It wasn’t a blithe, “Hey, just go talk to your people,’ ” Kirby said of Austin’s direction to the service secretaries and Joint Chiefs.

    “He was very clear that he wants commands to take the necessary time. And I didn’t hear him be overly proscriptive about that .. to speak with troops about the scope of this problem, and certainly to get a sense from them about what they’re seeing at their level.”

    The Defense Department does not centrally track troops who have been investigated for domestic terrorism or extremist sentiment, and neither do the services, making it difficult to get a read on how prevalent the problem is.

    Kirby told reporters on Jan. 28 that the FBI opened 143 investigations into troops and veterans in 2020, 68 of those for domestic extremism.

    DoD does have a 2012 instruction that prohibits extremist activities, though it doesn’t clearly define extremism itself. Generally, the services handle these investigations at the unit level ― or with the FBI, if it comes to plans for attacks, for instance ― and there is no requirement to report those up to service headquarters.

    Military Times’ own polling has shown that, anecdotally, more than one-third of active-duty troops, and more than half of minority service members, have witnessed signs of white supremacy in their colleagues. Further, survey respondents ranked white nationalism as a bigger national security threat domestic terror groups affiliated with Islam, for instance.

    “The events of Jan. 6 served as a wake-up call for this department,” Kirby said.

    At the same time, reports of current or recently discharged service members espousing support for or participating in violent attacks against government officials have popped with regularity in recent years.

    Kirby said details would follow on the guidance for the stand-down. Common for safety issues ― and more recently, for sexual assault and suicide ― stand-downs are usually implemented to carve out time for further training, discussion or other events where units to focus on the issue at hand.

    A two-month window would allow enough time for units to strategize and schedule how they’ll stand down, rather than declaring a specific day for everyone to do the same work.

    “We owe the force, we owe these leaders some training materials, some deeper, more specific guidance about … what the expectations are for the stand-down, and some thoughts about how feedback can be provided,” Kirby said.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 21:10

  • Global COVID Vaccinations Pass Confirmed Cases As Wealthy Countries Lead The Way
    Global COVID Vaccinations Pass Confirmed Cases As Wealthy Countries Lead The Way

    As EU regulators push back against approving the Russian Gameleya Institute vaccine even after Hungary already kicked the doors open by becoming the first member of the block to approve it last week, Brussels is caught between a rock and a hard place. Even CNBC’s Jim Cramer, a long-time booster for western COVID vaccines, acknowledged during Wednesday morning’s premarket show that western consumers must accept that the Russian jab works.

    Why? Because despite all the propaganda against the Gamaleya Institute, the Russian jab, first developed with the backing of the Russian sovereign wealth fund, has basically been proven effective by the latest report in the deeply respected Lancet, a scientific journal based in the UK that published some of the first international research on COVID-19.

    Now, just days after the number of vaccinated patients in the US surpassed the total number of confirmed COVID cases, Johns Hopkins and other repositories of COVID data have announced that the world has reached a similar record.

    As the following chart shows, the number of patients who have received at least one doses has surpassed total confirmed patients by roughly 500K patients.

    And the trend is likely to continue, even if the AstraZeneca-Oxford jab has been only warily embraced by Western Europe, while the Russian jab has been almost entirely blackballed, since new cases have been falling around the world. Even in India, which – as many might remember was one of the worst hit countries last fall – cases are falling to levels not seen since last fall.

    Hospitalizations have also declined substantially around the world.

    The FT doesn’t shy away from pointing out the fact that the figures are incomplete due to the fragmented nature of COVID case reporting. The true number of infections is likely to be many times higher than the total verified by diagnostic tests, since many are bound to have slipped through the cracks.

    However, on the other hand, the WHO recently admitted that high-cycle PCR tests have produced numerous false positives.

    Michael Head, global health research fellow at Southampton university, said: “The fact that we have so many vaccines is a huge good news story which has been fed to us in bits and pieces. This moment brings it together, showing how fast we have moved and far we have come.”

    In another chart, the FT shows how the rich country/poor country divide that the WHO warned about has most definitely emerged around the world.

    Source: FT

    Given this latest piece of evidence, wouldn’t be surprised to hear or see WHO head Dr. Tedros Adhanom tweeting more warnings, alongside his good buddy, Bill Gates, that the West needs to throw more money at the WHO’s Covax international vaccination program.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 20:50

  • Biden Taking Trump's Path? US Dismisses Iran's Offer To Coordinate Nuclear Deal Return
    Biden Taking Trump’s Path? US Dismisses Iran’s Offer To Coordinate Nuclear Deal Return

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    The US State Department dismissed an idea floated by Iranian Foreign Minister Javad Zarif, who suggested the EU could help coordinate the actions needed to be taken by the US and Iran to revive the 2015 nuclear deal, known as the JCPOA.

    When asked about Zarif’s offer, State Department spokesman Ned Price said there are “many steps” the US has to take before engaging “directly with Iran” and before the US is willing to “entertain any sort of proposal.”

    Price restated the Biden administration’s demand for Iran to return to commitments it agreed to when the JCPOA was negotiated. Iran’s argument against this demand is that since the US violated the deal, it is on Washington to return to compliance.

    Prior anti-US demonstration in Tehran, via Reuters

    Price also stressed the need for the administration to consult with US allies, partners, and Congress on Iran before going forward.

    A US official speaking to Reuters on the condition of anonymity said Price’s comments should not be taken as a “rejection” of Zarif’s proposal. The official said the US has not “begun negotiating with Iran, or with anyone else, because our priority is to consult” with allies and partners.

    The focus on consulting with other countries before even talking to Iran shows the Biden administration is in no hurry to revive the JCPOA and give Iran sanctions relief. Most regional US partners, like Israel and Saudi Arabia, are strongly opposed to the JCPOA.

    European signatories to the deal are also signaling opposition to reviving the JCPOA as it was agreed to in 2015. French President Emmanuel Macron called for new, “strict” nuclear negotiations with Iran that include regional countries like Saudi Arabia, something Iran rejected.

    Zarif offered the idea to coordinate a return to the JCPOA in an interview with CNN on Monday. He also said that the time for a possible return to the deal is “not unlimited,” a sign of Tehran’s frustration with the Biden administration’s failure to act.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As per a law passed by Iran’s parliament in the wake of the assassination of Iranian scientist Mohsen Fakrizadeh, if sanctions are not lifted by February 21st, IAEA inspections on Iran’s nuclear program will be slightly restricted.

    “Iran has the strictest IAEA inspection mechanism anywhere in the world,” Zarif said. “We will be limiting that, but there is a very easy way of addressing it, and that is for the United States to come back into compliance before that date.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 20:30

  • Hong Kong Cops Threaten To "Kick Door Down" For Anybody Who Dosn't Open For COVID Test
    Hong Kong Cops Threaten To “Kick Door Down” For Anybody Who Dosn’t Open For COVID Test

    Hong Kongers who hadn’t already seen the worst of Beijing’s heavy handed tactics during the 2019 street marches, including the tear gas, the beatings and the mass arrests, are finally about to see what it really means when Beijing says a round of testing is “mandatory.”

    Because in China, if an individual doesn’t comply with an order from the CCP, there are dramatic and severe consequences. And pretty soon, they will say the same about Hong Kong too.

    To wit, Bloomberg reports Hong Kong authorities are threatening to knock down the doors of residents who don’t respond to authorities conducting mandatory-testing blitzes, as the city tries to end a persistent winter wave of coronavirus cases. While photos of the mainland show flashy young people out partying, in Hong Kong, where some freedoms are still in place, life is a bit more grim.

    In a statement, the government in the increasingly authoritarian territory warned it may take legal action including removing individuals or applying to a magistrate for a warrant to break into and forcefully enter a unit,” authorities said in a statement on Tuesday. Hong Kong been attempting to curb a fourth wave of COVID-19 infections with targeted lockdowns that have seen authorities cordon off an area and restrict movement until residents rec

    It is apparently a gravely serious warning: During surprise lockdowns in Four Hong Kong districts Monday evening, roughly 17% of the 680 households that officers visited didn’t answer the door. The government says it found no positive cases after testing almost 1.7K residents.

    Hong Kong authorities have conducted eight operations and tested about 10K people since authorities discovered a group of 14 positive patients.

    Over the last year, the city has endured wave after wave of the virus, with HK’s chief executive Carrie Lam defending the city’s approach, despite a wave of criticism.

    The city’s top advisors on infectious diseases and its leader warned that lockdowns and mandatory testing aren’t the only options on the table.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 20:10

  • '#AlexandriaOcasioSmollett' Trends On Twitter After NY Rep Rejects Claims She Wasn't At Capitol During Riots
    ‘#AlexandriaOcasioSmollett’ Trends On Twitter After NY Rep Rejects Claims She Wasn’t At Capitol During Riots

    UPDATE: Douglass Braff reports that Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez hit back at claims she lied about her experience during the pro-Trump Capitol riots.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is the latest manipulative take on the right. They are manipulating the fact that most people don’t know the layout the Capitol complex. We were all on the Capitol complex – the attack wasn’t just on the dome. The bombs Trump supporters planted surrounded our offices too,” she wrote.

    Following reports that Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez‘s (D-N.Y.) was not in the U.S. Capitol Building and in her Cannon Office Building office on January 6, the hashtag “AlexandriaOcasioSmollett” has been trending on Twitter, with conservatives referencing disgraced actor Jussie Smollett’s staged hate crime in 2019.

    Here are some popular tweets using the hashtag:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    As Douglas Braff detailed earlier, via SaraACarter.com, Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (D-N.Y.) was not in the U.S. Capitol Building when a mob violently stormed it on January 6 but rather in her Cannon Office Building office.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The second-term congresswoman has since recanted her experience during the deadly siege, which she has described as “near-death.”

    However, no rioters broke into Cannon, a Wednesday report from the conservative publication RedState claims.

    When running through her experience that day, Ocasio-Cortez said that—out of fear that rioters had entered the building—she hid in her personal room’s bathroom. During a Monday livestream, she claimed that rioters had entered her office, according to Newsweek.

    She revealed on an Instagram Live session that she was a survivor of sexual assault and described the feeling she had while locking herself in the bathroom as similar to the one she felt at the time of the assault.

    She also said that she was hiding behind the door “and then I just start to hear these yells of, ‘Where is she?’”

    The yells, it turns out, came from a Capitol Police officer. He reportedly burst into her office, whose presence, she said, “didn’t feel right” and that he was looking at her “in all of this anger and hostility.” One of her staffers reportedly wondered if he would have to fight the officer.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Rep. Nancy Mace (R-S.C.), whose office is two doors down from the New York congresswoman’s, on Tuesday played down Ocasio-Cortez’s story, saying that the extremists never reached their hallway.

    Ocasio-Cortez, Mace tweeted, “made clear she didn’t know who was at her door.

    Breathless attempts by media to fan fictitious news flames are dangerous.  My office is 2 doors down. Insurrectionists never stormed our hallway. Egregious doesn’t even begin to cover it.  Is there nothing MSM won’t politicize?”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The day after Mace’s tweet, without mentioning Mace, Ocasio-Cortez tweeted:

    “To survivors of any trauma who worry about being believed, or that their situation wasn’t ‘bad’ enough or ‘too’ bad, or fear being branded or deemed ‘manipulative’ for telling the truth: I see you. Community is here for you. You are safe with me, & with all of us. You are loved!”

    When firing back at RedState‘s report in a thread, she said the right “are manipulating the fact that most people don’t know the layout the Capitol complex. We were all on the Capitol complex – the attack wasn’t just on the dome. The bombs Trump supporters planted surrounded our offices too.”

    “People were trying to rush and infiltrate our office buildings – that’s why we had to get evacuated in the first place,” she continued. “The attempts of attackers & publicly available communications show how they tried to gain access and share location info on finding members for physical harm.”

    “It is also very damning and revealing that the GOP is now digging both heels in a discrediting campaign,” the Bronx and Queens congresswoman added. “It’s because they know they are implicated, so they’re pivoting to (again) the classic abuse playbook of “it’s not as bad as they say.” It was that bad. It’s actually worse.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 19:50

  • Parler CEO Fired By 'Rebekah-Mercer-Controlled Board'
    Parler CEO Fired By ‘Rebekah-Mercer-Controlled Board’

    John Matze, CEO of beleaguered Twitter competitor Parler, has been fired by the board of directors amid a highly contentious period for the conservative-friendly platform.

    (Photo by Jaap Arriens/NurPhoto via Getty Images)

    “On January 29, 2021, the Parler board controlled by Rebekah Mercer decided to immediately terminate my position as CEO of Parler. I did not participate in this decision,” wrote Matze in a statement obtained by Fox Business. “I understand that those who now control the company have made some communications to employees and other third parties that have unfortunately created confusion and prompted me to make this public statement.”

    Matze wrote that over the past few months he has been met with “constant resistance” to his original vision for the social media platform following Amazon Web Services’ decision to shut Parler down for failure to moderate “egregious content” related to the Jan. 6 Capitol riot. –Fox Business

    Over the past few months, I’ve met constant resistance to my product vision, my strong belief in free speech and my view of how the Parler site should be managed. For example, I advocated for more product stability and what I believe is a more effective approach to content moderation,” Matze’s statement continues.

    “I have worked endless hours and fought constant battles to get the Parler site running but at this point, the future of Parler is no longer in my hands,” he continued. “I want to thank the Parler employees, the people on Parler and Parler supporters for their tireless work and devotion to the company. They are an amazing group of diverse, hardworking and talented individuals and I have the utmost respect for them. Many of them have become my second family.”

    After several Parler users were found to have been participants in the Jan. 6 ‘Capitol riot,’ the company was swept up in a cancel campaign – with Amazon Web Services and several other third-party service providers critical to the service dropped them as a client. Parler subsequently went offline, only to pop back up last week with several posts from Matze – calling for a “respectful conversation to improve our society” and detailing the company’s legal struggles in the wake of the Amazon decision.

    Parler was also dropped from both Google and Apple’s app stores, and has yet to relaunch services.

    According to Fox, Matze says he’ll spend a few weeks off before searching for a new venture.

    “After that, I’ll be looking for new opportunities where my technical acumen, vision and the causes I am passionate about will be required and respected,” he wrote, adding “I want to thank all the people of Parler that supported me and the platform. This has been the true American Dream: an idea from a living room to a company of considerable value. I’m not saying goodbye, just so long for now.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 19:30

  • These Are The Words Colleges Don't Want You To Say
    These Are The Words Colleges Don’t Want You To Say

    Authored by Jezzamine Wolk via CampusReform.org,

    Amid a nationwide movement to remove statues, symbols, and words in the name of inclusion, Campus Reform rounded up recent examples of words that have been banned on college campuses.

    1. MSU eliminates the terms ‘foreign’ and ‘alien’

    Michigan State University announced it would no longer use the terms “foreign” and “alien” in order to create a more inclusive environment. In October, Provost Teresa Woodruff addressed the Associated Students of MSU general assembly to announce the new “non-pejorative” language. Woodruff stated that moving forward, international students should be referred to as “non-domestic” or “international” to help “create a culture of not us vs. them, but of each other.”

    2. UPitt scraps “homecoming king” and “homecoming queen” titles

    After the University of Pittsburgh’s Alumni Association called for a policy change to end the use of the terms “king” and “queen,” the university announced in October that it will no longer use the traditional titles. Vice Chancellor for Alumni Relations Nancy Merritt called the terms “antiquated” language. Instead, the school will provide a “Spirt of Pitt” award to homecoming royalty.

    3. UC tells students ‘do not’ say ‘Chinese Virus’ and do not allow others to say it

    In March, the University of California’s Council of Chief Diversity officers released a “guidance document” regarding how to hold a “positive and inclusive” campus climate during the pandemic. The list tells students and faculty to “reject racism, sexism, xenophobia and all hateful or intolerant speech, both in person and online.” It also instructs students to not use terms such as “Chinese Virus” and to not allow the use of these terms by others.

    4. UVA instructor wants to ban the term ‘student-athlete’ 

    An instructor at the University of Virginia called to abolish the phrase “student-athlete,” claiming it has “arguably racial” undertones. In an op-ed, Molly Harry defended calling the term racially charged by saying that “today, the majority of revenue-producing athletes in the sports of football and men’s basketball are Black. They are coached mostly by White men.” She also pointed out that the man who coined the term student-athlete was a White man. 

    5. Vanderbilt lists “sexual reassignment surgery” as an “outdated” term

    In December, Vanderbilt University published a “Gender Affirmation Toolkit” for its employees in an effort to create a safe work environment. The toolkit explains how to properly use terms like “gender identity,” “gender expression,” and “sexual orientation.” It also listed “sexual reassignment surgery” on its list of “outdated” and “demeaning” words.

    6. Leading ‘anti-racist’ prof calls the term ‘legal vote’ ‘racist’

    In November, Boston University’s Director of the Center for Anti-Racist Research Ibram Kendi said the phrase “legal vote” is racist. He said it is “as fictionally fraught and functionally racist as the terms ‘illegal alien’ and ‘race neutral’ and ‘welfare queen’ and ‘handouts’ and ‘super predator’ and ‘crackbaby’ and ‘personal responsibility’ and ‘post racial.”

    “The misinformation of widespread voter fraud—or ‘illegal voting’ —in Detroit, Philadelphia, Atlanta, and Phoenix where Black and Brown voters predominate is baked into the term ‘legal vote,'” Kendi added. “No matter what GOP propaganda says, there’s nothing wrong with those voters and votes.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 19:10

  • McCarthy Stands By 'QAnon-Supporting' Rep. Greene As Democrats Prepare To Strip Committee Assignments
    McCarthy Stands By ‘QAnon-Supporting’ Rep. Greene As Democrats Prepare To Strip Committee Assignments

    House Minority Leader Kevin McCarthy (R-CA) announced in a Wednesday caucus meeting that while he condemns controversial statements espoused by QAnon-supporting Rep. Marjorie Greene (R-GA), he doesn’t believe she should loser her committee assignments. 

    Past comments from and endorsed by Marjorie Taylor Greene on school shootings, political violence, and anti-Semitic conspiracy theories do not represent the values or beliefs of the House Republican Conference,” said McCarthy in a statement following the meeting. “I condemn those comments unequivocally. I condemned them in the past. I continue to condemn them today. This House condemned QAnon last Congress and continues to do so today.”

    McCarthy, who met with Greene on Tuesday, added:

    “I made this clear to Marjorie when we met. I also made clear that as a member of Congress we have a responsibility to hold ourselves to a higher standard than how she presented herself as a private citizen. Her past comments now have much greater meaning. Marjorie recognized this in our conversation. I hold her to her word, as well as her actions going forward.”

    Democrats, meanwhile, are gearing up for a floor vote to strip Greene her of her posts due to her beliefs.

    I spoke to Leader McCarthy this morning, and it is clear there is no alternative to holding a Floor vote on the resolution to remove Rep. Greene from her committee assignments,” said House Majority Leader Steny Hoyer (R-MD), who rejected a deal from McCarthy to remove Greene from the Education and Labor Committee but allow her to remain on the House Budget panel. “The Rules Committee will meet this afternoon, and the House will vote on the resolution tomorrow.”

    Democrats were perhaps emboldened to take action against Greene after Senate Minority Leader Mitch McConnell threw her under the bus, saying in a statement that: “Loony lies and conspiracy theories are cancer for the Republican Party and our country.”

    McCarthy also annoucned that he supports keeping Rep. Liz Cheney in her leadership role – risking alienation from both establishment anti-Greene Republicans and MAGA anti-Cheney Republicans.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 18:50

  • Men Now Want Access To Uterine Transplants
    Men Now Want Access To Uterine Transplants

    Authored by Jennifer Lahl. op-ed via The Epoch Times,

    It isn’t good enough that men want to compete in woman’s sports and invade women’s spaces, rendering sex-based protections null and void. Now, the Journal of the American Medical Association (JAMA) has published the findings from the largest study on its kind, “Perceptions and Motivations for Uterus Transplant in Transgender Women.”

    This study looked at reproductive aspirations of transgender women (biological males). Surveying 182 transgender women, researchers found that more than 90 percent believed that a uterine transplant might “improve quality of life in transgender women, alleviate dysphoric symptoms, and enhance feelings of femininity.”

    I find it no coincidence that this study was released on Jan. 20, 2021 – the same day President Joe Biden took the oath of office and signed his executive order on Preventing and Combating Discrimination on the Basis of Gender Identity or Sexual Orientation.

    This study concluded that transwomen (biological males) have the “desire to have physiologic experiences unique to cisgender women, such as menstruation and gestation, as well as potentially having a physiologically functioning transplanted vagina.”

    Also, the authors found that transgender women “may expect the ability to menstruate to enhance satisfaction with their desired gender and uterus transplant and anticipate improvements in perceptions of their femininity.” Those surveyed also cited that potentially having a functional vagina transplanted might also enhance sexual function and quality of life.

    Oh boy! When good common sense and human biology 101 are thrown out of the window of reason, we are left with gibberish and nonsense. Here, in a prestigious medical journal, the authors use phrases such as “categorized as female at birth,” which in scientific terms, means when a baby is born and has XX chromosomes, she is a little girl baby. She isn’t categorized as female; she IS female. In the same way, when a baby is born with XY, he isn’t categorized as male, he IS male.

    First, a word or two about uterine transplants. They are, for the most part, still in the experimental stage. To date, there have only been about 70 uterine transplants around the world and most of these have come from living donors. A living donor might be a woman who has completed her family and doesn’t want to have any more children, so she offers to donate her uterus. The first baby born from a uterine transplant was born two months premature in Sweden.

    Current practice is to remove the uterine transplant once the woman has had the children she wants, so that she doesn’t have to stay on anti-rejection medications for the rest of her life. Also, the data isn’t in yet on the effects to the babies born from a transplanted uterus, mainly because we don’t have a large enough sample of these children. Babies are exposed to anti-rejection medications for the duration of their time in utero and are always delivered by c-section, which undoubtedly confers additional risks to mother and baby.

    Of course, in this study, the transgender women reported that “the potential benefits of uterus transplant outweigh the significant risks with which it is associated and may improve quality of life, happiness, and dysphoric symptoms, while enhancing feelings of femininity.”

    There was much hay to be made when Tampax tweeted “People who bleed” and “Fact: Not all women have periods” and then doubled down with “Also, a fact: Not all people with periods are women. Let’s celebrate the diversity of all people who bleed!”

    Women immediately pushed back hard on social media calling out Tampax for such scientific ignorance shouting, “Women Bleed.”

    It isn’t people.

    It isn’t people categorized a particular way.

    It is women.

    Women give birth.

    And women shouldn’t have to compete with men in order to make them feel better and more like women. That’s not our job.

    *  *  *

    Jennifer Lahl is the founder and president of the Center for Bioethics and Culture and producer of the documentary films, “Eggsploitation,” “Anonymous Father’s Day,” “Breeders: A Subclass of Women?” and “Maggie’s Story,” and “#BigFertility,” which was an official selection in the Silicon Valley International Film Festival. She is back behind the camera, producing a film on the ethics of allowing children to medically and surgically transition.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 18:30

  • Reddit's Silver Raid Sparked Highly Unusual Backwardation
    Reddit’s Silver Raid Sparked Highly Unusual Backwardation

    Surveying the wreckage of WallStreetBets raid on the silver markets – which thankfully for many on both sides of the trade – never got as out of hand as the heavily-shorted stock malarkey, offers a few insights into just what happened below the surface as silver prices round-tripped up and down by around 12% from Friday’s close.

    Source: Bloomberg

    So what happened?

    Flows

    The initial Reddit post gave instructions to focus on purchases in the iShares Silver Trust ETF.

    SocGen’s Commodities Research Group note monitored the inflow into this targeted ETF and other major silver ETFs and funds, and found counterintuitively that both saw outflows on 28 January, the first day of the rally.

    Over the following two days, 29 January and 1 February, historically high inflows into the iShares ETFs were met by similarly sized outflows from other silver ETFs and funds.

    As investors who followed Reddit’s blueprint continued to stockpile ETF shares, other investors sold and probably took profits, with silver having already rallied almost 48% in 2020.

    Price

    On the price action side of things, the iShares Silver Trust is physically backed and does not directly impact the silver future market.

    However, during the three-day rally, the aggregated open interest on all silver future contracts (regardless of maturity) jumped by 16,979 contracts, the fifth-largest three-day increase since 2010. Most of the open interest increase was built on 28 January – the 9,480 contract increase represents the second-largest daily increase since 2010.

    As shown in the figure below, such changes in open interest are rare.

    Given that silver ETFs saw outflows on 28 January and the spot price jumped 4.89%, this first leg of the rally seems, in fact, to have been driven by future contracts rather than ETFs.

    As SocGen notes, gold and silver tend to never experience backwardation (spot price higher than long-dated forward prices). Such backwardation appears when a commodity market is tight on the short term due to low inventories and/or low current supply. As a result, large commodity consumers have an incentive to pay a premium to secure short-term deliveries, known as convenience yield.

    In the chart below, we define the front end of the silver forward curve as being ‘in backwardation’ if the 4-month time-spread is positive.

    As discussed above, this is very rare and has happened on only 18 days since 2000 and only twice has the time-spread exceeded $0.02/oz.

    This makes 1 February’s $0.057/oz time spread an outlier and the second-steepest backwardation observed on the front-end of the silver forward curve since 2000.

    This exceptional situation may have happened as Swiss coins sellers were reportedly overwhelmed by online purchases of silver coins.

    To meet their delivery,they paid a premium to secure quick access to rebuild their silver inventories.

    Since then, the market has normalised and as of 2 February close, the silver 4-month time-spread was back in negative territory.

    SocGen concludes with some calming tones, noting that gold and silver have huge above-the-ground stocks in the form of bars, coins, jewellery or silverware. These large inventories are often used as store of value and exposed to opportunistic sales when the price rises. This means, in SocGen’s words, that a shortage of precious metals is very unlikely as supply can instantly flow in if prices move high enough to incentivise precious metals sales.

    However, while SocGen does a great job explaining the mechanics of what happened, back in the real world of supply and demand, US Mint prices for silver coins remain at an extreme premium to paper prices…

    As it admits, albeit subtly, that it’s unable to meet demand.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 18:10

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 3rd February 2021

  • H.R. 127: A New Bill In Congress Would Literally End Your 2nd Amendment Rights Permanently
    H.R. 127: A New Bill In Congress Would Literally End Your 2nd Amendment Rights Permanently

    Authored by Michael Snyder via End of The American Dream blog,

    If a new bill that has been introduced in Congress eventually becomes law, the 2nd Amendment will still be in the U.S. Constitution, but for all practical purposes the rights that it is supposed to guarantee will be dead and gone.  H.R. 127 was submitted on January 4th, and if you have not read it yet you can find the full text right here.  It contains a lot of technical language, and so in this article I am going to try to break down what it means very simply.  Now that the Democrats control the White House, the Senate and the House of Representatives, there is going to be a major push to ram through some form of gun control legislation.  If it is not this bill, it will be another one, so we need to be diligent.

    One of the biggest things that H.R. 127 would do is that it would create a national firearms registration system that would literally be accessible by anyone

    HR 127 establishes a federal firearms registration system that will be accessible by federal, state, and local governments, including the military – even the GENERAL PUBLIC! The system will track the make, model, and serial number of all firearms, their owners, the dates they were acquired, and where they are being stored.

    So if your neighbor, a co-worker, or someone that just wanted to rob your home wanted to know how you were armed, all they would have to do would be to look it up in the firearms registration system.

    This bill would also apply retroactively.

    Within three months, you would have to report to the government where you bought all of your guns, when they were purchased, and where they are currently being stored.

    Needless to say, if the government knows where all of your guns are being stored, it would make it that much easier to grab them from you at some future date.

    H.R. 127 would also require all gun owners to be federally licensed.

    That would mean that owning a gun would no longer be a right.  Instead, it would be reduced to a “privilege” that the government could take away at any time.

    According to the bill, the licensing procedure would include “a psychological evaluation”

    The licensing requirement mandates that the license applicant undergoes a criminal background check, and then submits to a psychological evaluation to determine whether the person is psychologically unsuited to possess a firearm. Successful licensees must show they have an insurance policy which will cost $800.

    I know a lot of guys out there that would definitely not want to go through any sort of a “psychological evaluation” by a government-approved psychologist.

    And it wouldn’t just be you that would get interviewed.

    According to the bill, spouses and other family members would be interviewed as well

    For the psychological evaluation, a licensed psychologist will interview individuals’ spouses and at least two other family members or associates to “further determine the state of the mental emotional, and relational stability of the individual in relation to firearms.” Licenses will be denied to individuals hospitalized for issues such as depressive episodes; no duration for license disability is specified, and it does not matter whether the individual sought help voluntarily.

    The goal, of course, is to make owning guns as difficult as possible.

    Democrats figure that if they can put up as many barriers to gun ownership as possible, a lot less people will end up owning them.

    Thirdly, this bill would also greatly restrict the type of ammunition that you can own

    Finally, HR 127 also criminalizes the possession of “large-capacity magazines” (those carrying greater than 10 rounds) and “ammunition that is 0.50 caliber or greater.”

    I know that all of this sounds utterly ridiculous, but the restrictions in this bill actually sound very, very similar to what Joe Biden has been publicly proposing

    During the 2020 campaign, Joe Biden promised a long list of gun control regulations. There is a reason that Michael Bloomberg spent $125 million helping Biden in Florida and something over $600 million nationally in the general election.

    The agenda includes: classifying many semi-automatic rifles and magazines holding more than 10 bullets as Class 3 weapons (which can require nine months or more for approval and a $200 fee), national gun licensing, “red flag” laws that let judges take away people’s guns without a hearing, background checks on the private transfer of guns, and bans on some semi-automatic firearms that happen to look like military weapons.

    Gun control is very high on the list of things that Joe Biden wants to get accomplished during the next four years.

    So like I said, if it isn’t this bill, it will be another one that is similar.

    They are coming for your 2nd Amendment, and they aren’t going to stop until they get what they want.

    Meanwhile, this is all happening at a time when murder rates all across America are going through the roof

    “Homicide rates were higher during every month of 2020 relative to rates from the previous year,” the report states, calling the 30 percent surge “a large and troubling increase that has no modern precedent.”

    We have never seen major city murder rates jump by an average of 30 percent in a single year.

    Things are getting really crazy out there, and many believe that 2021 will be even worse.

    For almost a year, there has been civil unrest in our cities on an almost nightly basis.  As I write this, civil unrest has erupted in Rochester, New York.  We live at a time when rioting, looting, arson and vandalism have become commonplace, and the senseless violence that we have witnessed so far is just the leading edge of the storm.

    Millions of Americans can see what is happening to our society and they are quite concerned.  2020 was a record year for gun sales in the United States, and dealers have reported that demand is extremely strong so far in 2021 as well.

    The Democrats do not like this one bit, and they are going to do their very best to put a stop to it.

    Please let your friends, family and contacts know about H.R. 127, because an all-out attack on the 2nd Amendment is coming, but at this point most people are not even aware that it is about to happen.

    *  *  *

    Michael’s new book entitled “Lost Prophecies Of The Future Of America” is now available in paperback and for the Kindle on Amazon.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 02/03/2021 – 00:00

  • "Soldiers Of The Future" – Russia Reveals 4th Generation Combat Gear For 2035 
    “Soldiers Of The Future” – Russia Reveals 4th Generation Combat Gear For 2035 

    The Russian military’s future appears to be dominated by advanced hypersonic missile technology, stealth fighter jets, and perhaps in the next 15 years, combat suits for infantrymen that resemble the military gear worn by “Master Chief” in the Halo video games. 

    State-owned defense giant Rostec State Corporation released a press release describing how it has begun work on a new combat suit for the “soldiers of the future.” The effort will result in the new suit being deployed on the modern battlefields by 2035.

    “The fourth-generation outfit is a principally new gear that demands looking into the future. It will unite the Russian military-defense complex’s latest achievements, new protection, and life-support systems, robotized equipment, and integrated information exchange systems. The outfit demands a big volume of research. We have begun the first stage to determine tactical and technical requirements,” Rostec Industrial Director Bekhan Ozdoev said.

    Rostec has already supplied the Russian military with 300,000 second-generation Ratnik combat gear outfits. The company is currently working on third-generation Sotnik gear that could be released by the mid-point of the decade. 

    Rostec’s Third-Generation Sotnik Combat Gear

    Rostec’s press release was vague regarding details about the fourth-generation gear. Ozdoev has said before that the new suit would be made with special armor that could withstand a .50 caliber shot. “The gear will not restrict movement and will allow you to take the extra weight necessary to perform special missions,” according to Ozdoev.

    Russia is also developing an exoskeleton that has already been field-tested in Syria while the US Army is still playing catch up with an exoskeleton still in testing. 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 23:40

  • Our Oligarchs' Crisis Of Confidence
    Our Oligarchs’ Crisis Of Confidence

    Authored by Declan Leary via TheAmericanConservative.com,

    Let’s not attribute to malice that which can be explained by an insecure elite stumbling back into a tenuous grasp on power…

    On November 9, as the first week of election disputes started to wind down, Big Pharma giant Pfizer Inc. announced that its COVID vaccine had been tested and shown to be 90 percent effective.

    The timing was…fortuitous; cue the crazies. 

    Donald Trump, Jr. took to Twitter with the kind of vague suggestiveness that usually only works if you have something to suggest:

    “The timing of this is pretty amazing. Nothing nefarious about the timing of this at all right?”

    Charlie Kirk, a young conservative intellectual renowned for subtlety and nuance, took a similar tack in a Facebook video:

    “The reason is Pfizer wanted to wait until Joe Biden was coronated as president, so that Joe Biden could get the credit for this.”

    (Props to Charlie for the choice of “coronation” there, though his timing was off by a couple months.)

    History repeats itself – and since 2020 took all the good material, in 2021 we’ve already hit the reruns.

    On January 24, word got out that California’s Democratic Governor Gavin Newsom planned to lift his Regional Stay Home Order, one of the strictest anti-COVID measures in the country. Michigan Governor Gretchen Whitmer, another pandemic hardliner whose iron fist inspired a hilariously ineffective kidnapping plot last year, likewise announced suspiciously close to the inauguration that her loyal subjects would be allowed to dine indoors beginning on February 2.

    Once again, murmurs issued from the lower-tier twitterati about the announcements’ suspicious timing. Some of it was serendipity, to be sure. Maybe, like Pfizer’s timeline being pushed back from just before the election to just after the election, it’s just a really bad look dictated by crappy circumstances. COVID numbers in both states are trending downward, and Newsom’s announcement came just as they’d dropped to the same point as when he’d put the order in place a month before. But there is a real question worth asking here, and it lies at the heart of our current political dysfunction: why do the people in power, in government and beyond, consistently act in a way that makes them look like part of some vast left-wing conspiracy? Why are tectonic policy shifts at the state level being arranged around the transfer of power at the federal? Why did the media and big business suddenly change their tune on the miracle date of January 20?

    I think the answer is fairly simple, and a lot less nefarious than some of the alternatives.

    We hear a lot of talk these days about “the politics of fear,” and it’s almost exclusively directed at the right (and almost exclusively in ridiculous ways): the only reason anyone possibly could have voted for Donald Trump is that they’re conditioned to fear Xi Jinping, or Jack Dorsey, or black people; the only reason to oppose progressive social policies is a fear of homosexuals, or of women, or of men who think they’re women; the only reason to reject the candidates of Wall Street—whose names are always tagged with a big, dark capital “D”—is fear that our backwards way of life will be ravaged by Kamala Harris’ lizard-people overlords; et cetera, et cetera, until it becomes apparent that the only possible explanation for any of the left’s electoral failures is some deep terror ingrained in the minds of half the voting public.

    But it’s worth talking too about the fear that drives the left.

    There’s the obvious example of the pandemic – the hysteria that left most of Blue America hunkered down like it was a nuclear apocalypse, only to bravely emerge from their bunkers in droves on November 3. That’s the same kind of fear that underlies the really fanatical climate stuff.

    But there’s another kind too, and it essentially boils down to a fear of opposition, a fear of not being in power.

    It’s a function of our adversarial politics: when you see no way of working with someone, when you can find no common ground, when the stated goals of that person go against everything you believe, you’re probably going to be terrified of any situation in which that person has power and you don’t. And it’s not fear of the extremes, either—call me an optimist, but I don’t think there are many people stupid enough to sincerely believe that Donald Trump is a fascist. We live in a world where four years of sometimes-successful administration by a scattershot, moderate conservative puts the fear of God in about 80 million people.

    So why does everything change the second 45 gives way to 46? It doesn’t require Don Jr.’s hypothetical nefarious plot. All it requires is that people in positions of power—the people who are terrified of losing those positions—act exactly as we would expect them to act under the influence of that terror. That doesn’t just mean Democratic governors who overplayed their hands, and then rethought their moves the second they stepped into a post-Trump world. It means the huge companies that, for the first time (and likely the last time) in a long time, didn’t have a buddy in the White House and now are ready to dive back into the game. It means the legacy media that went through a well-earned hell over the past five years, and now get a little breathing room to lob softball questions at a friendly politician. It means every American who subscribes to the progressive culture and narrative that dominate our institutions, who worried just for a moment that maybe they wouldn’t always be in control.

    Of course Gavin Newsom is going to do a 180 at the end of the age of Trump. He’s spent the last heaven-knows-how-long in a hysteric fugue, wrecking the bottom 90 percent of his state’s economy because he thought the world was ending. He came out of it to realize that there are consequences for the things you do in a panic, and that he was heading into a recall election. I don’t know everything; there’s always the outside possibility that Barack Obama and George Soros instructed Newsom on the necessary timeline during a weekend getaway at Bohemian Grove (or a pricey lunch at the French Laundry). But I find it more likely that the guy is just scrambling.

    Amazon is in a similar situation. On Inauguration Day, CEO Dave Clark sent a very buddy-buddy letter to Joe Biden, tripping over himself in a rush to announce the conglomerate’s eagerness to help with vaccine distribution. Of course, during the months the Trump administration had a vaccine in hand—or the months before, for that matter—the online megacorp made no such public offer. Were they holding the nation hostage? No vaccine until you vote the right way; scratch that, no vaccine until we’re absolutely sure that you all voted the right way and there’s no possible chance of going back. Again, anything’s possible—and speaking of lizard people, I’m suspicious of Jeff Bezos—but there are more probable explanations. Amazon’s profits skyrocketed during the pandemic, but so did negative attitudes among the public—as well as certain players in the federal government. I don’t see any imaginable world, even under Trump, where Amazon takes a real fall, but I can imagine plenty of ways that an unhappy government could make things a little harder for them. If I were Dave Clark, I’d be worried enough to curry favor with the new caudillo. I scratch your back, you stay 3,000 miles away from me.

    There are other reasons too, of course. A contract to help with the distribution of vaccines at the federal level is likely to be lucrative, and Donald Trump may have had the sense to deny it to Amazon. (Not least of all because the evidence has consistently shown that top-down distribution plans are failing, while locally oriented ones have seen remarkable success.) But at an even more fundamental level, Amazon wants to jump to the front of the queue. They’ve been pushing to get their labor force vaccinated as early as possible, including by a direct petition from Clark to the Centers for Disease Control. Can’t very well make record-breaking profits if all of your floor workers catch the WuFlu. A plum deal that keeps the labor force from needing sick days and boosts optics with the public and the feds may be exactly what Amazon needs just a few months after protesters set up a guillotine outside its founder’s Dupont Circle house.

    That’s one of the key takeaways here: these people are far too desperate to be as nefarious as we might think. The more outrageous aspects of the last few months—from Twitter censorship to post-election whiplash—may be best understood not as the first flashes of an ascendant tyranny, but as a flurry of idiotic moves by an elite who clearly have much less faith in their hold on power than we do.

    The wild saga of GameStop’s stock adventures over the past week or so is a perfect illustration of the point. When users of the subreddit r/wallstreetbets decided to invest in the video game chain, the price of the stock skyrocketed to peaks well over $400 (six months ago it was closer to $4). The move resulted in jaw-dropping profits for some of the amateur traders—and a whole lot of anger from the Wall Street establishment. Hedge funds and other big-dollar investors who had shorted the stock have lost over $5 billion altogether from the episode. So what did our robust market system do? Simple: citing market volatility, Robinhood and other day-trading services just restricted transactions on GameStop and other WallStreetBets picks. The big funds, meanwhile, were free to continue trading as normal. Besides giving the big guys a chance to get their ducks in a row, the freeze caused the stock to crash on Thursday morning, costing many amateur investors a pretty penny.

    It’s corrupt and immoral, and I’d be mad as hell if I’d been smart enough to get in on the GameStop craze. But it’s not the kind of thing that confident oligarchs do. It suggests the same fear that’s motivated so many decisions by people in power these past few months. Not to mention it may spark a backlash that will be well worth watching—and that may yet change our course in surprising ways.

    I’m as wary of the Wall Street-Silicon Valley-Washington axis as anyone. But it’s hard to be too afraid of any regime that can be thrown into such a devastating panic by a horde of Redditors buying GameStop stock from laptops in their mothers’ basements—or, for that matter, by a virus, or an election, or the host of The Apprentice.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 23:20

  • India Restricts Internet, Twitter Complies With Blockage Request As Farmers Protest Grows
    India Restricts Internet, Twitter Complies With Blockage Request As Farmers Protest Grows

    Parts of India are facing extended government-ordered internet blackouts as the Indian farmers protest movement has grown. The farmers allege Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s farming law, which ends the government’s programs to keep commodity prices at fixed levels, therefore allowing free markets to dictate prices, favors large corporations over smaller mom and pop farmers. 

    “Internet access remained blocked Monday in several districts of a state bordering India’s capital following violent weekend clashes between police and farmers protesting controversial agricultural reforms,” CNN reports at the start of a fresh week of clashes.

    Via AP

    “Online access would be suspended in at least 14 of 22 districts in Haryana state near New Delhi, until 5 p.m. Monday, according to the Department of Information and Public Relations of Haryana on Sunday,” CNN continues.

    The communications blackout which is intended to slow the unrest and ability of farmers to organize has been extended since it was put in place in a handful of districts last week.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The controversy has ensue since at least last summer with the farmers resisting Modi’s reforms and deregulation program, and have gotten increasingly organized.

    Protests have become especially fierce since the end of November, with tens of thousands of farmers clashing with police since establishing sit-in camps on the outskirts of New Delhi. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Early this week Twitter has moved to block protest-related accounts on orders from the central government which claimed a “grave threat” to public order:

    Twitter on Monday temporarily blocked dozens of accounts and tweets in India at the Hindu nationalist government’s request, including those of a prominent news magazine and farmers staging mass protests in the capital.

    An Information Technology ministry source told the AFP news agency the government had directed the social media giant to act against about 250 Twitter accounts and tweets that posed a “grave threat to public order”.

    An official representing the farmers said the move by the US social media giant is an outrage as the accounts “had not done anything wrong” other than to support freedom of protest and expression.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    An official Twitter statement over the controversy said “it may be necessary to withhold access to certain content in a particular country from time to time.” 

    It said this occurs when “a properly scoped” request is made – whatever that means. 

    Meanwhile, pop singer Rihanna has highlighted the protests in a viral tweet on Tuesday.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    We wonder if Twitter also agrees with the government moving to cut off broad swathes of the population from internet access too?

    At the very least, the company’s blocking of the protest accounts appears to put it squarely on the side of the government crackdown.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 23:00

  • Has Joe Biden Lost His Mind?
    Has Joe Biden Lost His Mind?

    Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

    Are you an accidental dependent of Washington?  Many people are.  And many people don’t even realize it.

    Systems of elaborate folly have been erected with the most impossible of promises.  That wealth can be created without production.  That stimmy checks can be paid without taxes.  That everyone can get free solar power at the expense of their neighbors.

    Central to these promises are the central government and central planning authorities.  They promise ease and comfort and, in return, they make you a dependent.  They promise a secure retirement, and free drugs, while running a scheme that’s beyond Charles Ponzi’s wildest dreams.

    Social Security, no doubt, is a tempting idea.  The government confiscates part of your paycheck every two weeks.  Then, in return, and after putting in 45 years, your retirement is subsidized.  You can enjoy your golden years in comfort.

    According to Rachel Greszler, research fellow at the Heritage Foundation:

    “[Social Security’s] America’s favorite entitlement program, and part of the reason it’s so popular is it’s not solvent.”

    Indeed, the most popular programs are those that promise people they’ll get out more than they put in.  The promise is so appealing people trust that by hook or crook their government leaders will deliver.  Alas, those counting on Social Security may suffer a grave disappointment.

    Collision Course With Disaster

    From the get go, it really didn’t take much abstract thinking to recognize that Social Security would eventually go broke.  Any honest assessment could discern it was doomed to fail.  All Ponzi schemes are.

    In 1939, before the first check was ever cut, John T. Flynn predicted Social Security would be under water by 1970 and insolvent by 1980.  Despite being called a crank by the political elites of the day, Flynn was right.  In fact, without the Greenspan Commission and the Social Security Reform Act of 1983, Flynn’s prediction would have been off by merely three years.

    But Greenspan didn’t solve the Social Security problem.  He merely extended it further into the future.  And in doing so he set up several generations of workers to be dependents…at the worst possible time.

    Right now we’re on a collision course with disaster.  Take government debt, for instance.  Over the last decade, real gross domestic product (GDP) has increased from about $15.6 trillion to about $18.6 trillion.  Over this same period, the national debt has increased from $13.5 trillion to $27.8 trillion.

    Clearly, there’s a fundamental divergence between economic growth and government debt growth.  Over the last decade real GDP has increased by $3 trillion – or by 19.2 percent.  Yet the national debt has increased by $14.3 trillion – or by 105.9 percent.

    Over an extended period, this divergence results in two dramatically different growth curves.  Government debt now dwarfs GDP by $9.2 trillion.  Do you think we’ll grow its way out of this?

    But wait, it gets worse.  The divergence between GDP and government debt is a major problem.  Yet it ignores an even larger story.  Specifically, it ignores the story of unfunded liabilities…

    Has Joe Biden Lost His Mind?

    The current price tag for unfunded liabilities – for Social Security, Medicare (Parts A, B, and D), federal debt held by the public, and federal employee and veteran benefits – is $158.9 trillion.  Again, GDP’s just $18.6 trillion.  Anyone under 50 years old that’s depending on Social Security to supplement them in retirement is toast.  Many people older than 50 are also toast.

    One generation always incubates the bacteria of the ailments which dominate the next one.  Yesterday’s actions reared the things which control the present.  So, too, today’s actions breed the things which will control tomorrow.

    At this very moment, we’re living with several unfavorable gifts from our forbearers.  Namely, social safety nets constructed many decades ago that don’t pencil out.  These safety nets are now stretching and fraying at the seams, at the precise moment when tens of millions of Baby Boomers will rely on them most.

    The first people into a Ponzi scheme always make out like bandits.  For example, Ida May Fuller cashed the first Social Security check, Check No. 00-000-001, dated January 31, 1940, in the amount of $22.54.  With just one check, she nearly recouped the full value of the $24.75 that she paid in.

    However, Fuller continued to cash these checks until she died on January 27, 1975.  In total, the $24.75 she paid in, ended up paying $22,888.92 back out to her.  What a bargain!

    According to official estimated from the Social Security Administration, just 79 percent of promised benefits will be payable in 2035 due to depletion of its trust funds.  Yet even though everyone’s known Social Security was going bust, most people haven’t done a thing to prepare for it.  Instead they’ve buried their collective heads in the sand like an unassuming ostrich.

    If you can believe it, three out of five families headed by a person age 65 or older have no money in retirement savings accounts.  The promise of Social Security misled them in damaging and irreversible ways.  Or did it?

    President Biden is currently preoccupied with delivering the American people from the evils of COVID-19. 

    After that, he intends to save us from global warming.  But that’s not all…

    Biden also promises to reform Social Security. 

    Per CNBC:

    “Under his [Biden’s] plan, eligible workers would get a guaranteed minimum benefit equal to at least 125 percent of the federal poverty level.  People who have received benefits for at least 20 years would get a 5 percent bump.  Widows and widowers would receive about 20 percent more per month.”

    To pay for it, Biden proposes to soak the rich with additional Social Security payroll taxes on those earning $400,000 and up. 

    Regardless, these token promises amount to merely rearranging the deck chairs on the sinking Titanic.

    Surely Biden doesn’t think Social Security can be reformed, does he?

    Perhaps he’s lost his mind.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 22:40

  • China Top Diplomat Warns Biden Not To Cross "Red Line" Of Interests
    China Top Diplomat Warns Biden Not To Cross “Red Line” Of Interests

    In a much anticipated speech which marked the first time China’s top diplomat, Yang Jiechi, addressed an American audience under the new administration at the New York based National Committee on US-China Relations, the top Communist Party official warned the US it must stop interfering Beijing’s “core interests” in Hong Kong, Xinjiang, and Tibet affairs or else it risks crossing China’s “red line”.

    Ostensibly a gesture signaling China wants cooperation with the US under Biden, Yang as director of the Central Foreign Affairs Commission and member of the powerful 25-member Politburo, urged that Biden abandon Trump’s “misguided policies against China” which has plunged the relationship into its “most difficult period since the establishment of diplomatic ties”.

    Yang Jiechi, Getty Images

    In the remote video address Yang laid out, “We believe that peace and development are still the prevailing trend of the times, and that peaceful coexistence and win-win cooperation remain the shared aspiration of all peoples,” according to Bloomberg.

    Listing a number of flashpoints where already since his Jan.20 inauguration President Biden has eyed pressuring Beijing over human rights issues and anti-democracy crackdown, most notably Hong Kong and the Uighur persecution in northwest Xinjiang province (and of course Taiwan continues to loom large), Yang said forcefully:

    “They constitute a red line that must not be crossed. Any trespassing would end up undermining China-U.S. relations, and the United States’s own interests.”

    “We in China hope that the United States will rise above the outdated mentality of zero-sum, major-power rivalry and work with China to keep the relationship on the right track,” he added.

    Yang then spelled out the specific pressing grievances, which include “harassing Chinese students, restricting Chinese media outlets, shutting down Confucius Institutes and suppressing Chinese companies,” according to the speech – all of which were significant Trump policies and escalations of the last year of his administration.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “These issues concern China’s core interests, national dignity, as well as the sensitivities of its 1.4 billion people,” Yang emphasized in the video address. “They constitute a red line which must not be crossed.”

    The firm “warning” comes after newly confirmed Secretary of State Antony Blinken focused some of his first official statements last week on China’s egregious human rights record

    “We’ve seen China act egregiously to undermine the very commitments it made during the handover of Hong Kong,” Blinken said.

    Blinken had also last week affirmed his unwavering support for “standing up for our values when China is challenging them, including in Xinjiang against the Uighurs.” All of this also comes as tensions are soaring around Taiwan in the South China Sea, with both US and Chinese vessels and warplanes conducting show of strength exercises there.

    As The Wall Street Journal has underscored, there’s been a number of such speeches by Chinese government officials in the past days aimed at reaching American leaders, which lay out a vision for improved Sino-US relations, but squarely on Beijing’s terms:

    Vice Premier Wang Qishan told business leaders in the U.S. last week that China seeks a relationship of mutual respect and devoid of conflict and confrontation, according to a summary of the private meeting in the state-run China Daily. An American who joined the video meeting said Mr. Wang was uncompromising in describing China’s governance model as correct.

    Mr. Wang’s message, this person said, was effectively: “Here are the rules of the road.”

    So far it doesn’t look like the Biden administration looks to play by these rules, given the latest words out of the White House in no way appear the kind of departure from the prior Trump/Pompeo hardline tone that China was hoping for…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * *

    Here’s a brief overview of the 25-minute address as provided by Bloomberg:

    • Trump policies have severely damaged U.S.-China ties, Yang says in a virtual speech to the National Committee on U.S.-China Relations
    • U.S.-China relations stand at key moment, both must restore ties to predictable, constructive track
    • Case for greater China-U.S. cooperation is strong, Yang says
    • China prepared to work with U.S. to move ties forward: Yang
    • China will continue to defend sovereignty, security
    • It’s wrong to view China as strategic competitor, Yang says
    • U.S. politicians must not use COVID to stigmatize China: Yang
    • U.S. should stop abusing national security, should increase international cooperation

    Watch the full virtual address below, which took place Tuesday (Beijing time):

     

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 22:20

  • Embattled Pennsylvania Secretary Of State Resigns After Botching Constitutional Amendment
    Embattled Pennsylvania Secretary Of State Resigns After Botching Constitutional Amendment

    Pennsylvania Secretary of State Kathy Boockvar (D), who came under fire for extending deadlines for absentee voters to provide missing proof of identification – has resigned for failing to comply with an unrelated state election law.

    Boockvar botched a constitutional amendment which would have allowed sexual abuse victims more time to sue their alleged abusers. Pennsylvania law requires that the secretary of state’s office must publicize proposed amendments in two newspapers in each of the state’s 67 counties ahead of the election and between two separate votes, which her office failed to do.

    Her last day in office will be Feb. 5.

    “Because of the error, the process to amend the constitution must now start from the beginning, unless the General Assembly pursues this initiative through the bill process,” said Gov. Tom Wolf (D) in a statement.

    Wolf also noted that “This change at the Department of State has nothing to do with the administration of the 2020 election, which was fair and accurate,” adding “The delay caused by this human error will be heartbreaking for thousands of survivors of childhood sexual assault, advocates and legislators, and I join the Department of State in apologizing to you. I share your anger and frustration that this happened, and I stand with you in your fight for justice.”

    Boockvar made headlines in November after she usurped the power of the state legislature and unilaterally sought to accept mail-in ballots three days after the Nov. 3 election, while also extending the deadline for absentee voters to ‘cure’ their ballots by providing missing proof of identification. Both the state and the US supreme courts sided with Boockvar – with the latter after Chief Justice John Roberts joined with the liberal members of the court to block the GOP’s challenge.

    GOP Sen. Josh Hawley (MO) objected to the certification of Pennsylvania’s electoral results for Joe Biden following a riot at the US Capitol by protesters who disrupted proceedings.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 22:00

  • Reddit Trader DeepFuc*ingValue Loses $19 Million In Two Days As He Holds On To Gamestop Stock
    Reddit Trader DeepFuc*ingValue Loses $19 Million In Two Days As He Holds On To Gamestop Stock

    Earlier this week, one of the most notorious and popular WallStreetBets traders, best known by his alias DeepFuckingValue, by his YouTube username Roaring Kitty, and perhaps best known as the mastermind behind the Gamestop short squeeze, revealed himself to the world in concurrent articles from both Reuters and the WSJ (where he was also interviewed). His real name: Keith Patrick Gill, CFA, a title which the 34-year-old used while working in marketing for Mass Mutual, which he joined in 2019. The title then became worthless to Gill after he recently quit the life insurer to focus on just one thing: trading and spreading the gospel about Gamestop stock out of a basement of the home he rents in Wilmington, Mass… and boy was he successful.

    Regular readers know the story: through frequent posts on Reddit’s WallStreetBets thread, Gill became the Pied Piper of GameStop, sharing screenshots of his portfolio which inspired thousands of amateur retail investors to follow him into the ailing retailer too, while orchestrating the biggest short squeeze ever.

    Keith Gill, also known as u/DeepFuckingValue.

    Gill began sharing his bets with the group in September 2019, posting a portfolio screenshot indicating he had invested $53,000 in the company and had already netted a $46,000 profit. By last Wednesday, Gill was up over 4000% on stock and options investments in the company, with his GME position plus cash worth nearly $48 million (the value of his GME investments was $34 million), according to his Reddit posts.

    Source: Reddit

    Sadly for Gill, after his account peaked in the middle of last week, it’s all been downhill, and the money that took Gill over a year to accumulate he lost more than half in just two days: on Feb 1, DFV was down $5.2 million to $35.8 million including the cash, or $22 million in GME securities…

    Source: Reddit

    … followed by a record drawdown earlier today, when he lost a record $13.6 million bringing the value of his GME securities to just $8.4 million.

    Source: Reddit

    While for a hedge fund this sum is pocket change, for a trader who started off with $50,000 and worked diligently for nearly two years to build up a loyal following, the amount means months of hard work flushed down the drain. For most Americans, it’s an amount they can only dream of.

    And just like that, easy come, easy go: in the span of a few days, the value of Gill’s GME stock and call has plunged by 75%.

    Of course, with $22 million still in the account (thanks to $14 million in cash), Gill remains a winner although should GME stock continue to drop – and it most likely will not that the short interest has collapsed – his victory will get smaller… but at least he’ll hold.

    “Your steady hand convinced many of us to not only buy, but hold. Your example has literally changed the lives of thousands of ordinary normal people. Seriously thank you. You deserve every penny,” one Reddit user, reality_czech, responded to one of DFV’s famous P&L screengrabs.

    We are confident that Gill will have lots of pennies left over long after the GME short squeeze is forgotten, but to all those who followed in his footsteps and bought the stock on the furious momentum scramble higher over the past two weeks – all of whom are now underwater if they too held without selling since Jan 26 – and who plan on holding until the bitter end, they may not be so lucky.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 21:50

  • Guess Which Side The Corporate Media Is Taking In The GameStop Story…
    Guess Which Side The Corporate Media Is Taking In The GameStop Story…

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    You would think that a plucky group of Internet rebels standing up to a bunch of notorious hedge funds and short sellers would be a story that even the mainstream media should be able to get right, but apparently that is not the case.  As you will see below, the corporate-controlled media is attempting to convince all of us that the hedge funds and the short sellers are actually “the good guys” and that the “Reddit army” that is taking them on is a bunch of dangerous insurrectionists that are a threat to the entire system.  Of course I suppose that it shouldn’t be a surprise that the corporate-controlled media is standing up for the establishment, because the establishment showers them with millions of advertising dollars.  But it really has been disgusting to watch them totally sell out like this.  If you listen to the mainstream media long enough, you would be tempted to believe that we now live in a “Bizarro World” in which everything that was once evil is now good and everything that was once good is now evil.

    Just within the past few days, the New York Times has called the “Reddit army”“rebellion”, Investing Daily has referred to it as an “insurrection”, and NBC News has used the word “insurgency” to describe it.

    But first prize actually goes to the Washington Post.  They had the gall to run a story entitled “The good guys in the GameStop story? It’s the hedge funds and short sellers”…

    The Gamestop speculators are not merely in a frenzy about one stock. Their goal is to destroy the traders who link stock prices to fair value. To suggest a political analogy, they are not just blindly devoted to their candidate; they deny the legitimacy of the opposition party. They are not just acting within the system; they want to overthrow the system. It’s as though — just imagine — a rabble gripped by conspiracy theories were to attack the rules of democracy itself. The name “Gamestop” is apt.

    Are you kidding me?

    What is next?  Is the Post going to come out with a story about how Luke Skywalker was evil because he wanted to overthrow the established order that Darth Vader and the Emperor had instituted across the galaxy?

    The official slogan of the Washington Post is “Democracy Dies In Darkness”, and that is quite ironic because they have totally gone over to the dark side.  In the same article that I just quoted above, the Post laughably asserted that “a market without short sellers” would be like “a political system without investigative journalists”…

    What about short sellers? These are specialists who research stocks that might go down, sometimes because bosses are illegally covering up bad news about their companies. When short sellers identify a case of fraud or similar, they borrow and sell the stock, hoping to buy it back at a lower price later. Again, there is nothing evil about this. To the contrary, it’s a way of keeping prices honest. A market without short sellers is like a political system without investigative journalists.

    Yes, let us take a moment of silence right now to acknowledge all of the wonderful contributions that short sellers have made to our society.

    It really has been amazing to watch the lengths that some in the mainstream media will go to in an attempt to demonize the retail traders that have banded together to go after the short sellers.  On CNN’s website, Chris Cillizza did his best to try to turn the “woke mob” against the Reddit traders by linking them with Trump.  The following comes from his article entitled “How Trumpism explains the GameStop stock surge”

    The point is that there is no real point beyond showing up the pros — proving to them that they aren’t as smart as they think they are and that they don’t have the ability to control everything.

    Which, again, has its roots in Trumpism. The entire notion of Trump’s candidacy and presidency was to stick it to the elites. And then, well, uh, there wasn’t really a plan beyond that. The screwjob was the point.

    Others have gone even farther.  To me, it was extremely offensive when former SEC Commissioner Laura Unger compared the short squeeze on Wall Street to the rioting at the U.S. Capitol.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Of course whenever something happens that the establishment really doesn’t like, it is just a matter of time before they start blaming Russia.

    The other night, Jimmy Kimmel suggested that “maybe even some Russian disrupters” were at least partially responsible for the chaos on Wall Street, and MarketWatch actually published an article entitled “The GameStop saga is a road map for the Kremlin and other enemies of America”.

    Ever since the 2016 election, Russia has become the ultimate boogeyman.

    If something major goes wrong, Russia has to be blamed for it somehow.

    President Trump at least attempted to keep our relations with Russia fairly stable while he was in office, but now that he is gone I have a feeling that U.S. relations with Russia are going to completely fall apart.

    But that is a topic for another article.

    Getting back to the topic at hand, the short sellers only have themselves to blame for what happened.  The number of GameStop shares that had been sold short was greater than the number of GameStop shares that actually existed, and that was a golden invitation for anyone that wanted to attempt a massive short squeeze.

    If it wasn’t the Reddit army, it was probably going to be someone else.

    What a year this has been already.

    On the first Wednesday of 2021, there was a massive riot at the U.S. Capitol.

    On the second Wednesday of 2021, President Trump was impeached by the House of Representatives.

    On the third Wednesday of 2021, Joe Biden was inaugurated.

    On the fourth Wednesday of 2021, the GameStop short squeeze made headlines all over the globe.

    So will something historic happen this Wednesday?

    We shall see, but without a doubt the chaos that we have witnessed so far is just the very start of our troubles.

    Everywhere you look, people are extremely angry.

    And everywhere you look, our system is being greatly shaken.

    Most Americans are sick and tired of the corruption and injustice that they see all around them, and they know that our “leaders” aren’t going to do anything about it.

    People are increasingly taking matters into their own hands, and the Reddit army is thrilled that the hedge funds and the short sellers can finally feel their fury.

    But fury is not going to fix our system.

    At this point, nothing will.

    *  *  *

    Michael’s new book entitled “Lost Prophecies Of The Future Of America” is now available in paperback and for the Kindle on Amazon.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 21:40

  • JPM Warns Amazon And Google's Blockbuster Results May Have Marked The Top
    JPM Warns Amazon And Google’s Blockbuster Results May Have Marked The Top

    Earlier today we reported that traders were “on edge” ahead of today’s earnings reports by giga-cap tech giants Google and Amazon, because in a “perverse” market such as this one, where even solid beats are punished, a disappointment by either of the two companies could have led to a broader market selloff. We now know, of course, that both companies reported blowout results and the real highlights wasn’t the two FAAMG giants’ Q4 earnings but rather the departure of the world’s 2nd richest man, Jeff Bezos, from the helm of his company.

    For those who missed it, here is a breakdown of the results (via JPM):

    • AMZN – Blow out numbers for Q4 and Q1 guide looks more than enough. More focus likely to be on Bezos’ transitioning to an Exec Chair role by Q3.

      • Q4 net sales +42% FXN (whisper high-30s %) to $125.6b vs St $119.7b, guide$112-121b. AWS +% vs whisper 28-29%. Op Income $6.9b vs whisper $5b+, guide $1.0-4.5b. For Q1, co guiding to net sales $100-106b (+30-37% cc y/y) and opincome $3.0-6.5b vs expectations $99-100b and ~$6b. Co announce that Bezos will transition to an Exec Chair role over in Q3 with Andy Jassy (CEO AWS) hisreplacement.oStock trading +28bps post-market

    • GOOGL – Q4 Properties growth hits +23% (whisper 17-18%) and Margins well ahead.

      • Q4 revenue +23% FXHN (whisper ~20%) to $56.9b vs St $52.8b. Within that,Properties +22% (exp +17%) to $38.8b vs St $35.7b (Search +17%, YouTube+46%). Cloud +47% vs exp ~50%. Google Op Income $15.6b vs St $11.8b, OtherBets -$1.14b vs St -$1.25b. Cloud Op Income margin for 2020 was -13.6% (JPMe +2.0%). Co bought back $7.9b in the Q (expectation ~$8b).oStock trading +5.5% post-marke

    And yet even though both AMZN and GOOGL stocks jumped after hours, one bank warned that despite the favorable response by the market, this could be as good as it gets.

    As JPMorgan’s Andrew Tyler wrote in his daily market intel piece, “with Amazon and Alphabet/Google today, each of the FAAMNG names have now beaten revenue and earnings expectations.”

    The question, however, is now that all the upside catalysts are out of the picture, “what’s next for the group” asks JPM and cautions that “it is possible that you see the group used as a source of funds with no major catalysts on the horizon and lowered risk of a Reddit-inspired move.”

    Which brings up a follow on question: “If FANG+ fail to rally from here, can the broader tape move higher? There has been increasing chatter across the Street that the combination of positioning and valuation may trigger a pullback.”

    On its own, the answer to the latter question would be yes. However, in a world where hedge funds now scramble to delever at the faintest whisper of a short squeeze emerging from the r/wallstreetbets subreddit, could we be on the verge of a perfect storm for stocks, where all the good news are more than priced in, and the smallest turbulence sparks a liquidation cascade?

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 21:20

  • US Mint Warns It Can't Meet "Surging Demand" For Silver & Gold
    US Mint Warns It Can’t Meet “Surging Demand” For Silver & Gold

    With The Fed printing money ‘out the wazoo’, monetizing COVID relief package debt as fast as Congress can pass the bills, demand for bullion was already surging. However, the last week or so, on the heels of the Reddit-Raiders taking aim at Silver, demand for silver (and gold coins) has exploded…

    Sales of U.S. gold bullion coins rose 258% in 2020 while silver coin demand was up 28%, the U.S. Mint said Tuesday.

    Which has led to bullion dealers running dry of stock and physical premium to paper silver prices soaring to record highs.

    “There are massive shortages. We’ll be completely out of stock if it carries on like this – the first time since our company opened in Singapore seven years ago,” said David Mitchell, managing director at Indigo Precious Metals.

    “In the short term, stocks may run out since it takes a long time for sea shipping, but overall supply is ample,” said Peter Fung, head of dealing at Hong Kong-based Wing Fung Precious Metals.

    And now, courtesy of Reuters, we have an answer to the shortage.

    The US Mint is limiting distribution of its gold, silver and platinum coins to specific dealers because of heavy demand, and a limited number of suppliers of metals, it said in a statement.

    The United States Mint said on Tuesday it was unable to meet surging demand for its gold and silver bullion coins in 2020 and through January, due partly to pandemic-driven demand and plant capacity issues… Heavy buying has continued in 2021, it said, squeezing supplies, which had already been tight as the coronavirus affected production.

    The last time the US Mint ‘admitted’ its inability to meet demand was in June 2010.

    And the reaction in precious metals was…

    Trade accordingly.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 21:00

  • Semi Shortage Stings Ford, Forcing More Layoffs And Shift Reductions
    Semi Shortage Stings Ford, Forcing More Layoffs And Shift Reductions

    Automakers are in the midst of dealing with two major supply chain crises at once. First, they are still dealing with the remains of a global supply chain lockup that occurred as a result of Covid-19. And more recently, they have been dealing with a semiconductor shortage, which we have covered extensively on Zero Hedge, that has forced some manufacturers to shutter and slow down production. 

    Now, Ford has announced it is making even more production cuts and temporary layoffs at its Chicago Assembly Plant. The most recent round of layoffs is being attributed to the supply chain disruptions in semiconductors, according to The Pantagraph

    The affected plants, which will be subject to layoffs or shift reductions, are:

    • Dearborn Assembly Plant, which makes the F-150 pickup.

    • Kansas City Assembly Plant, which makes the F-150

    • Louisville Assembly Plant, which makes the Ford Escape and Lincoln Corsair

    • Chicago Assembly Plant, which makes the Explorer, Police Interceptor and Lincoln Aviator

    “At the Chicago Assembly Plant, two shifts will be laid off next week,” the report says. 

    A letter written by UAW Local 551 Chairman Coby Millender that has been circulating in Chicago warns workers to be wise with their finances:

    “The company has informed us that beginning next week, they want to have B and C crew laid off initially for one week with a strong potential for additional weeks. It’s totally based on how soon the supplier resolves this issue. I just wanted to make you aware 551, so that you can begin to plan accordingly. Be wise with your finances.”

    Recall, we wrote just days ago how the industry was “panicked” about the semi shortage. Major players like VW, Toyota and GM are still suffering from a shortage of chips that are becoming more common in everyday vehicles, we noted. The drain on the supply chain has come from a corresponding rise in the sales of gaming consoles, TVs and computers – mostly as a result of the pandemic. The chips are now being used in everything from vehicle entertainment centers to anti-lock brakes. 

    Carlos Tavares, chief executive of Stellantis, told the Financial Times: “I am here to protect the fact that my company is treated fairly. I will look for all possible solutions. If I need to I will fight back [to ensure its chip contracts are met].”

    The unexpected disruption is the first time the industry has truly thought long and hard about the supply chain it uses for semiconductors. Only about 10% of semiconductor fabrication plants are used for automotive parts, FT notes. Since there is no “quick fix”, the shortage is expected to drag on for “at least” 6 months. Companies like Taiwan Semiconductor are, at the same time, still trying to address fallout from U.S. sanctions. 

    One China based supplier told FT: “The sanctions meant some clients redirected their orders from SMIC to other places, such as TSMC. Inside the industry, we are all pretty panickedbecause the scope of the chip shortage is too big, and affects too many types. In the short term, we can’t see any way of resolving it.”

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 20:40

  • No Country For Young Men?
    No Country For Young Men?

    Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk,

    All of the Employment Gains for 20 Years Are From Those Aged 60 and Over

    Here’s a fascinating look at employment trends for the past 20 years and what’s driving them.

    Demographics Plus the Employment Population Ratio

    St. Louis Fed writer William Emmons notes the chart is a function of population growth and the Employment-Population ratio.

    What’s Driving This Outcome

    1. The older population (60 and older) grew much faster than the younger population (16-59). 

    2. The employment-to-population (E-P) ratio among those 60 and older increased significantly while the E-P ratio among the younger population declined, on balance. 

    3. The older population is likely to continue growing faster than the younger group. 

    4. The E-P ratio of the 60 and older group is likely to increase further as the health and educational attainment of older people continues to improve and the demand for older workers persists. 

    The above points from Older Workers Accounted for All Net Employment Growth in Past 20 Years

    Burger Biggie

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This reminds me of something I said just before and during the great recession. Unfortunately, I cannot find a link but it went like this.

    Parents will be competing with their kids and grandkids for jobs.”

    Well here we are. 

    When I grew up there was hardly anyone over the age of 50 working in fast food chains. 

    Now? What percentage of fast food, Sam’s Club, or Walmart greeters are under the age of 50? What percentage are part-time?

    What About Employer Health Care Coverage?

    Note that Health Care Coverage for part-time employees is optional.  

    Those between the age of 60 and 65 cannot wait to reach the age of 65 so they can get on Medicare. 

    Obamacare Impact

    Thanks to Obamacare, younger workers pay more than their fair share as a subsidy to their parents and grandparents.

    Push for $15 Minimum Wage

    The push for $15 in minimum wage plus rapidly rising health care costs further incentivizes part-time work, overseas outsourcing, and robotics to eliminate the jobs altogether.

    That’s the rest of the story.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 20:20

  • Amazon Reports Blowout Quarter, Jeff Bezos Stepping Down As CEO
    Amazon Reports Blowout Quarter, Jeff Bezos Stepping Down As CEO

    With Amazon and Google, together representing a whopping $3.1 trillion in market cap almost as large as the entire Russell 2000, set to report earnings after the close Bloomberg noted that some investors were nervous that anything but a massive beat, well in excess of expectations would be required to avoid a dip in the Nasdaq (recall last week’s drop in AAPL and TSLA stock following stellar earnings reports).

    So what is the absolute lowest numbers that Amazon has to beat in Q4 to avoid sliding? Here are the consensus estimates:

    • Net sales: $119.70 billion
    • GAAP EPS: $7.34
    • AWS net sales: $12.77 billion
    • Operating income: $4.47 billion

    Amazon was expected to post a record year, its sales supercharged by the pandemic with the online retail giant among the main beneficiaries. The debate retail watchers are having now is the extent to which people are going to go back to physical stores when the virus recedes.

    * * *

    So with all that in mind, how did Amazon do? Well, in light of the continued covid lockdowns, it will probably not be a surprise that it was another blockbuster quarter for the retailer which blew away consensus estimates:

    • Q4 Net Sales $125.56B, beating estimates of $119.70B
    • Q4 EPS $14.09, smashing estimates of $7.340, more than double the $6.47 year ago.
    • Q4 Operating Income $6.9B, beating estimates of $4.47B, up 77% Y/Y
    • Q4 AWS Net Sales $12.74B, just missing estimates of $12.77B, up 28% Y/Y
      • Amazon Web Services net sales +28% vs. +34% y/y, estimate +28.3%
    • Fulfillment expense $18.47 billion, estimate $18.52 billion

    Looking ahead, the company’s guidance was also solid:

    • Amazon Sees 1Q Net Sales $100.0B to $106.0B, Est. $95.72B
    • Operating income Q1 expected between $3.0 billion and $6.5 billion, compared with $4.0 billion in first quarter 2020.

    … but the real bombshell in today’s report is that CEO Jeff Bezos will step down as CEO and “transition” to the role of executive chair in Q3 2021, who after 27 years at the helm of the retailer he founder, is ending an era at Amazon.

    Discussing his life plans after Amazon, Bezos says that “as Exec Chair I will stay engaged in important Amazon initiatives but also have the time and energy I need to focus on the Day 1 Fund, the Bezos Earth Fund, Blue Origin, The Washington Post, and my other passions. I’ve never had more energy, and this isn’t about retiring. I’m super passionate about the impact I think these organizations can have.”

    Bezos will be replaced with Andy Jassy – currently the CEO of Amazon Web Services – as CEO of the entire company at that time.

    Jeff’s parting words:

    Amazon couldn’t be better positioned for the future. We are firing on all cylinders, just as the world needs us to. We have things in the pipeline that will continue to astonish. We serve individuals and enterprises, and we’ve pioneered two complete industries and a whole new class of devices. We are leaders in areas as varied as machine learning and logistics, and if an Amazonian’s idea requires yet another new institutional skill, we’re flexible enough and patient enough to learn it.

    Keep inventing, and don’t despair when at first the idea looks crazy. Remember to wander. Let curiosity be your compass. It remains Day 1.

    Here is the letter sent from Bezos to the company’s employees:

    Fellow Amazonians:

    I’m excited to announce that this Q3 I’ll transition to Executive Chair of the Amazon Board and Andy Jassy will become CEO. In the Exec Chair role, I intend to focus my energies and attention on new products and early initiatives. Andy is well known inside the company and has been at Amazon almost as long as I have. He will be an outstanding leader, and he has my full confidence.

    This journey began some 27 years ago. Amazon was only an idea, and it had no name. The question I was asked most frequently at that time was, “What’s the internet?” Blessedly, I haven’t had to explain that in a long while.

    Today, we employ 1.3 million talented, dedicated people, serve hundreds of millions of customers and businesses, and are widely recognized as one of the most successful companies in the world.

    How did that happen? Invention. Invention is the root of our success. We’ve done crazy things together, and then made them normal. We pioneered customer reviews, 1-Click, personalized recommendations, Prime’s insanely-fast shipping, Just Walk Out shopping, the Climate Pledge, Kindle, Alexa, marketplace, infrastructure cloud computing, Career Choice, and much more. If you get it right, a few years after a surprising invention, the new thing has become normal. People yawn. And that yawn is the greatest compliment an inventor can receive.

    I don’t know of another company with an invention track record as good as Amazon’s, and I believe we are at our most inventive right now. I hope you are as proud of our inventiveness as I am. I think you should be.

    As Amazon became large, we decided to use our scale and scope to lead on important social issues. Two high-impact examples: our $15 minimum wage and the Climate Pledge. In both cases, we staked out leadership positions and then asked others to come along with us. In both cases, it’s working. Other large companies are coming our way. I hope you’re proud of that as well.

    I find my work meaningful and fun. I get to work with the smartest, most talented, most ingenious teammates. When times have been good, you’ve been humble. When times have been tough, you’ve been strong and supportive, and we’ve made each other laugh. It is a joy to work on this team.

    As much as I still tap dance into the office, I’m excited about this transition. Millions of customers depend on us for our services, and more than a million employees depend on us for their livelihoods. Being the CEO of Amazon is a deep responsibility, and it’s consuming. When you have a responsibility like that, it’s hard to put attention on anything else. As Exec Chair I will stay engaged in important Amazon initiatives but also have the time and energy I need to focus on the Day 1 Fund, the Bezos Earth Fund, Blue Origin, The Washington Post, and my other passions. I’ve never had more energy, and this isn’t about retiring. I’m super passionate about the impact I think these organizations can have.

    Amazon couldn’t be better positioned for the future. We are firing on all cylinders, just as the world needs us to. We have things in the pipeline that will continue to astonish. We serve individuals and enterprises, and we’ve pioneered two complete industries and a whole new class of devices. We are leaders in areas as varied as machine learning and logistics, and if an Amazonian’s idea requires yet another new institutional skill, we’re flexible enough and patient enough to learn it.

    Keep inventing, and don’t despair when at first the idea looks crazy. Remember to wander. Let curiosity be your compass. It remains Day 1.

    Jeff

    In stepping down from day-to-day leadership and taking and executive chairman role, Jeff Bezos is following the path laid down by Microsoft Co-Founder Bill Gates, who after handing off control to Steve Ballmer, stayed involved in many of Microsoft’s most important initiatives, advising engineers regularly. Bezos’s farewell letter to employees seems to envision a similar role: “I intend to focus my energies and attention on new products and early initiatives.”

    So who is Andy Jassy? As Bloomberg notes, for those of you who haven’t tracked Amazon’s rise to the top of cloud computing, here is a little background:

    • He’s a longtime Amazonian, and a former technical advisor, a sort of chief of staff role, to Jeff Bezos.
    • Colleagues say he’s Bezos-like in his preference for data-driven decisionmaking and customer focus.
    • The unit he led, Amazon Web Services, reshaped how companies buy technology. It is far and away the leader in rented software services and computing power.
    • After the retirement earlier this year of Amazon’s consumer unit CEO Jeff Wilke, Jassy was the natural heir apparent. This makes that official.

    AMZN’s new CEO Andy Jassy.

    Jassy’s ascent to the top comes amid calls to spin out AWS as a separate company, however, today’s decision appears to be the main reason why Bezos resisted that pressure.

    Going back to the Q4 numbers, they will clearly take on a secondary importance after this blockbuster news, we find that the company’s revenue grew by a whopping 44% in Q4, the biggest increase since 2011 (with Q1 midline revenue projected to grow a solid 36.5%.

    At the same time, profit margin dipped modestly in Q4, sliding from 6.4% in Q3 to 5.5%

    While International profit margins dipped (after turning positive for the first time ever in Q2), it was the decline in AWS margins to 27.9%, the lowest since 2019, that may spook some investors.

    The company ends the quarter with a record 1.3 million workers, up 63% Y/Y

    And speaking of Jassy’s AWS, the Amazon cloud segment had another solid quarter, bringing in $12.7 billion in sales, just under analyst estimates. Operating margin was up year over year for a fourth consecutive quarter. That’s going to reassure investors looking for strength from Amazon’s de facto cash machine amid fierce competition from rivals like Microsoft and Google.

    Looking ahead, during the call, CFO Olsavsky said COVID expenses in Q1 will drop to $2 billion from $4 billion in Q4 mostly since the warehouses are less busy than they were during the holiday quarter. Olsavsky also said that Jeff Bezos “will remain deeply involved in product development and innovation” although there is still no announcement on who will run cloud unit.

    The stock initially tumbled on the news of Bezos’ departure, which is already trending on Twitter…

    … only to rip higher as attention shifted back to the company’s blowout earnings and the realization that between his divorce and his shmoozing across Hollywood parties, Bezos had already checked out:

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 20:12

  • Gone In 60 Seconds: Catalytic Converter Theft Erupts Across Country 
    Gone In 60 Seconds: Catalytic Converter Theft Erupts Across Country 

    Local news stations across the country report a dramatic increase in catalytic converter thefts.  

    Catalytic converters, which are part of a car’s exhaust system, are sought out by thieves because they contain precious metals and can be sold for scrap. 

    With metal prices booming, thieves use cordless reciprocating saws to cut a car’s catalytic converter in under 60 seconds. 

    Thieves have been targeting commercial vehicles in industrial parking lots and even cars in residential neighborhoods. 

    In the last few days, there are endless stories of catalytic converter thefts from across the country, from Louisville, Kentucky, to Rochester, New York, to Olmsted Falls, Ohio, to Sherman, Texas.

    Thieves are after platinum, palladium, and rhodium inside the converters. Thieves can easily strip down exhaust part and extract the precious metals, turning around and selling it to scrap yards for a handsome profit. 

    Internet search trends for “catalytic converter thefts” erupted during the beginning of the pandemic when tens of millions of Americans lost their jobs. Simultaneously, trillions of dollars in stimulus via the central bank and federal government resulted in surging asset prices, including different types of metals, which made catalytic converter scrap prices jump. Thieves asked themselves, why steal copper wire when catalytic converters bring more money. 

    What’s also interesting is that during the pandemic, interest searches for “catalytic converter scrap price” have surged to record highs – it seems like a lot of people are interested in scrapping valuable car parts. 

    Earlier this year, AOC said crime in New York City is on the rise due to people “stealing bread to feed their children.” Maybe they’re not stealing bread but rather catalytic converters. 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 20:00

  • At Least 10 Dead, 30 Injured After Mogadishu Hotel Seige Ends
    At Least 10 Dead, 30 Injured After Mogadishu Hotel Seige Ends

    Via Southfront.org,

    On February 1st, the siege at the Afrik Hotel in Mogadishu ended, with security forces taking the upper hand.

    Islamist group al-Shabab claimed responsibility for the assault through their radio station.

    The attack featured clashes with heavy gunfire, which followed a car bombing. The entire incident took longer than 7 hours.

    Among those killed at the popular hotel was the well-known retired General Mohamed Nur Galal, said Somalia’s Information Ministry. Another general and more than 100 civilians were reportedly rescued during the siege.

    According to various reports, anywhere between 9 and 17 people were killed, and at least 30 were injured.

    “The operation is over now,” said police spokesman Sadik Ali.

    “I have never witnessed such a level of devastation,” said bystander Ali Ato, who said he went to the hotel to recover the body of a colleague.

    There are numerous photographs and videos on Twitter and YouTube.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Somalian government condemned the al-Shabab attack.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Somalia is scheduled to hold indirect parliamentary and presidential elections on February 8, but two regional states, Jubbaland and Puntland, have objected to how delegates were selected and electoral management bodies appointed.

    The Associated Press quoted United Nations special representative James Swan warning officeholders that their use of a resolution to stay on would bring “an unpredictable political situation in a country where we certainly don’t need any more of that.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 19:40

  • Nimitz Carrier Departs Mideast For Home As Iran Releases S.Korean Tanker Crew
    Nimitz Carrier Departs Mideast For Home As Iran Releases S.Korean Tanker Crew

    Reflecting the expected shift in Biden administration foreign policy priorities away from the Middle East and toward southeast Asia, especially China, the Pentagon has announced Tuesday afternoon that the USS Nimitz has departed its Mideast region of operation

    It had been sent there at the tail-end of the Trump presidency amid ratcheting tensions with Iran, and as the former president reportedly mulled military action to prevent Iran from taking steps to achieve nuclear weapons. 

    Pentagon press secretary John Kirby issued a statement confirming the “USS Nimitz has left Arabian Sea and 5th Fleet after being deployed for over 270 days amid tensions with Iran.” The aircraft carrier is now “currently in the Indo-Pacific.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This follows a New York Times report on Monday saying the Nimitz had finally been ordered home to its US West coast base:

    The aircraft carrier Nimitz is finally going home.

    …With those immediate tensions seeming to ease a bit, and President Biden looking to renew discussions with Iran on the 2015 nuclear accord that Mr. Trump withdrew from, three Defense Department officials said on Monday that the Nimitz and its 5,000-member crew were ordered on Sunday to return to the ship’s home port of Bremerton, Wash., after a longer-than-usual 10-month deployment.

    The move is a sign that tensions are fast deescalating as both Tehran and Washington looking for openings to return to the JCPOA.

    At the moment the US is requiring Iran to take enrichment back under the caps delineated by the accord, while Tehran is saying Washington must drop sanctions first.

    Via Stratfor

    And in related news which also signals de-escalation of tensions in the region, the South Korean tanker crew which Iran’s IRGC has been detaining for nearly a month has now reportedly been freed.

    “The sailors from a South Korean tanker seized in the Persian Gulf by Iranian troops last month are free to leave the country on humanitarian grounds, Iran’s state TV said Tuesday,” according to the AP.

    “Foreign Ministry spokesman Saeed Khatibzadeh said a legal investigation into the tanker and its captain would continue,” the report continued. Iran used the tanker detention to press Seoul over the some $7 billion in assets frozen in South Korean banks due to US-led sanctions; however, it’s unclear the degree to which South Korea complied on that front. 

    But it is clear the release of the tanker and its crew appears a “goodwill gesture” ahead of negotiations over the frozen funds, also which Iran intended as leverage and as a future “warning” if the outcome to those negotiations are not favorable. 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 19:20

  • Lincoln High School And The Latest Fact-Checking Pitfalls
    Lincoln High School And The Latest Fact-Checking Pitfalls

    Submitted by Kalev Leetaru of RealClearPolitics,

    As Internet fact-checkers have evolved from niche websites into the absolute arbitrators of “truth” on the modern web, they have gone from debunking simple urban myths to tackling far more complex and nuanced topics. One area of particular concern is a growing focus on humor websites and even fact-checking future events.

    On Dec. 16, Not the Bee, which describes itself as a “humor-based news, opinion, and entertainment site,” shared on its Instagram account a photograph of Abraham Lincoln titled “San Francisco to rename ABRAHAM LINCOLN High School because – I swear this is real – ‘he did not show that black lives ever mattered to him.’” Four days later, Facebook fact-checking partner USA Today (which receives funding from Facebook) published a fact check of the post, issuing a verdict that it was “Missing Context.” This means that anyone viewing the Instagram post since then has seen a large red warning label saying, “Missing Context. Independent fact-checkers say information in this post could mislead people.”

    In its fact check, USA Today confirmed that all of the details of the Instagram post, including the quote, were absolutely correct. Why, then, did it flag it as misleading? In the paper’s words, “It is true that a renaming committee included Abraham Lincoln High School on a list of 44 schools whose namesakes met its renaming criteria. But the committee has not finalized its recommendations, and the school board has not voted on the name changes — so at this time, it’s not accurate to say that the school will be renamed.”

    In short, the fact-checker said the post wasn’t true because Not the Bee didn’t explicitly make clear that the renaming was only proposed. Yet humorous social media accounts by their nature must condense complex topics into pithy one-liners that dispense with nuance, raising the question of why USA Today felt the need to fact-check a humor site in the first place.

    USA Today has fact-checked several stories by Not the Bee and its sister site, Babylon Bee. The sites have also been a frequent target of other fact-checkers, such as Snopes, which in 2018 famously fact-checked a Babylon Bee story headlined “CNN Purchases Industrial-Sized Washing Machine to Spin News Before Publication,” determining after extensive research that CNN had not actually installed such a machine in its newsroom.

    Snopes’ decision to rate as false that satirical piece had real-world consequences, as Facebook threatened to reduce Babylon Bee’s visibility on the platform and terminate its ability to monetize or run ads. (Public outcry then caused the company to reverse itself.) In justifying its fact check, Snopes’ founder argued that “some readers … interpreted it literally.”

    Indeed, after Ruth Bader Ginsburg’s death, USA Today made the same argument when it fact-checked another Babylon Bee article that jokingly said the courts had ruled Ginsburg wasn’t really dead and were working on a way to clone her so Donald Trump could not name a replacement. Asked why USA Today believed that readers would mistake such obvious satire, the paper offered that there was “an environment of information disorder” after her death and that “we would rather err on the side of caution, and not assume all readers have the full context behind all headlines they read on social media.”

    But this begs the broader question of why fact-checkers have repeatedly targeted the Bee, which states explicitly that it is a satirical site. Asked about this, USA Today said it merely fact-checks “content that Facebook has identified as potential misinformation” and that Bee content is simply forwarded to them by Facebook as viral misinformation more often than content from other sites.

    This suggests that either Babylon Bee’s content goes far more viral than that of other satirical sites or that Facebook simply flags its posts at a higher rate. Asked for comment on how it decides which satirical posts to flag, Facebook did not respond. The company did, however, state that satirical posts should only be reviewed when “a reasonable user” would not immediately understand the material to be satirical, such as “content from sites not clearly labeled as or widely known as satire.”

    While the Bee clearly self-identifies its content as satire, USA Today contended that satirical sites are often confused with real news. Moreover, it pointed out that some satirical sites exist specifically to confuse users, pointing to its fact checks of “an outfit called America’s Last Line of Defense that creates fake stories intended to ensnare the confirmation bias of conservatives in their views about liberals.”

    In the case of Abraham Lincoln High School’s renaming, the basic facts of Not the Bee’s Instagram post were correct, but USA Today flagged the post because the renaming was still tentative. Yet, USA Today failed to update its fact check when the renaming committee did finalize its list or when the school board accepted the list on Jan. 12 (see minute 5:59:50 of the video). When the board met again two weeks later on Jan. 26 and formally approved the renaming, USA Today again took no action to update its post.

    Does Facebook require fact-checkers to update their verdicts within a certain number of days after new information arises? Asked this, the company responded that for outdated fact checks Facebook takes no action and requires ordinary users to contact fact-checkers directly to request that they correct their verdicts. Only after inquiring with USA Today about why it had not updated its fact check did the paper finally append an editor’s note two days after the board had voted and two weeks after the list had been finalized. Asked why it took so long, the paper said it strives to update its fact checks, but did not comment further.

    Therein lies the danger of “fact-checking the future”: the need for timely updates. At a time when the renaming news was being heavily discussed, users that searched the web for information about it were pointed to the fact check saying the matter was still tentative. Instead of combating misinformation, USA Today actually contributed to it.

    Compounding the issue, even after being contacted, USA Today chose not to update the title of the fact check to reflect the new information and, most importantly, did not update its verdict. Thus, days after the school board finalized the name change, viewers of Not the Bee’s Instagram post still see a warning label telling them that the post is incorrect.

    This is not the first forward-looking fact check that USA Today has failed to update in a timely manner. On Oct. 24, 2020, it labeled as “False” the claim by Donald Trump that a COVID-19 vaccine would be ready around Election Day and that it would become available to the public before the “second or third quarter of 2021.” In reality, the first vaccine’s readiness was announced just a few days after the election and the first members of the public began receiving the vaccine on Dec. 8 in the U.K. and Dec. 14 in the U.S., exactly as Trump had predicted. Yet more than a month after those first shots and two months after the vaccine’s efficacy was announced, USA Today has failed to change its verdict.

    This raises yet another question regarding whether a new rating label such as “Hasn’t Happened Yet” is needed to sidestep this issue.

    Beyond that, there’s the matter of how quickly fact-checkers should be required to update their reviews and whether they should publicly acknowledge their mistakes. Like other fact-checkers, USA Today has simply deleted its mistakes. Readers of its Nov. 19, 2020, fact check on noncitizen voters will today see that Andrew Glen is a West Point professor emeritus. Yet when the fact check was first published, the reference to him looked quite different, implying that Glen had only been a student and was falsely claiming to have been a professor. Despite the news organization’s corrections policy requiring such updates to be visibly flagged, in this case the paper quietly deleted its error with no public acknowledgement.

    From fact-checking satirical fiction to ruling on future events to quietly deleting their errors, fact-checkers continually undermine public trust in their verdicts even as social media platforms rely ever more heavily on their rulings to take real-world action against publishers. With Twitter now experimenting with crowdsourcing fact-checking to the general public, this already muddled undertaking is only going to get messier.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 19:00

  • Florida Gov. Cracks Down On Big Tech – Lets Residents Sue Over Censorship, $100K Daily Fine For Suspending Political Candidates
    Florida Gov. Cracks Down On Big Tech – Lets Residents Sue Over Censorship, $100K Daily Fine For Suspending Political Candidates

    Florida Governor Ron DeSantis (R) has taken bold action against Big Tech – announcing several measures to counter widespread censorship of conservatives and promote the free exchange of information.

    As reported by Breitbart‘s Allum Bokhari, the measures – announced on Tuesday in a 45-minute speech – include mandatory opt-outs on content filters for Floridians, fines, and grants residents the ability to sue over censorship.

    More via Breitbart:

    • Mandatory opt-outs from big tech’s content filters, a solution to tech censorship first proposed by Breitbart News in 2018.
    • A private right of action for Floridian citizens against tech companies that violate this condition.
    • Fines of $100,000 per day levied on tech companies that suspend candidates for elected office in Florida from their platforms.
    • Daily fines for any tech company “that uses their content and user-related algorithms to suppress or prioritize the access of any content related to a political candidate or cause on the ballot.”
    • Greater transparency requirements.
    • Disclosure requirements enforced by Florida’s election authorities for tech companies that favor one candidate over another.
    • Power for the Florida attorney general to bring cases against tech companies that violate these conditions under the state’s Unfair and Deceptive Practices Act.

    “What began as a group of upstart companies from the west coast has since transformed into an industry of monopoly communications platforms that monitor, influence, and control the flow of information in our country and among our citizens, and they do this to an extent hitherto unimaginable,” said DeSantis, adding “These platforms have changed from neutral platforms that provided Americans with the freedom to speak to enforcers of preferred narratives. Consequently, these platforms have played an increasingly decisive role in elections, and have negatively impacted Americans who dissent from orthodoxies favored by the Big Tech cartel.”

    Watch:

    Some 250 million Americans, or around 4 out of every 5 people, have social media accounts.

    Other Florida conservatives weighed in on Tuesday’s announcement.

    “Florida is taking back the virtual public square as a place where information and ideas can flow freely. We’re demanding transparency from the big tech giants,” said State House Speaker Chris Sprowls in a statement.

    “The big tech companies have the duty to allow differing views on their public platforms. No one should be excluded. But let’s be clear: They are targeting conservatives,” said Senate President Wilton Simpson according to local10, adding that it amounts to political censorship.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 18:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 2nd February 2021

  • Islamic Scholar Says Muslims Should Leave The West To Flee LGBT Teachings
    Islamic Scholar Says Muslims Should Leave The West To Flee LGBT Teachings

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    An Islamic scholar gave a controversial interview during which he asserted that Muslims should leave the west and return to their home countries, primarily to avoid their children being taught about LGBT issues.

    The comments were made by AbdulRahman Hassam during an appearance on a YouTube show called Al Madrasatu Al Umariyyah.

    “Anyone that knows they have the ability to migrate, go to their home country where they’re originally from,” said Hassam, adding that Muslims who remain in western countries are “sinning.”

    “You are giving your children to the enemies who are going to destroy your child’s mindset and thinking,” said the scholar, going on to highlight how thousands of Muslim children have been forcibly taken from their parents by social services in the UK.

    “This child has been taken from his parents, maybe because she was forcing him to pray…this child…he can be taken care of (by) an LGBT family,” said Hassam.

    “The west today, we have an issue of morality and a dignity issues against for example homosexuality…hence why we’re saying to the people leave the UK, because however good you are, they’re more than you, they influence you,” he concluded.

    The clash between the teaching of LBGT issues and the Muslim faith came to a head in the UK at the Parkfield Community School in Birmingham, where 98% of the students are Muslim.

    A curriculum implemented in 2016 which taught tolerance of homosexuality and other LGBT subjects was vehemently opposed by the community, with numerous protests taking place outside the school.

    After a judge asserted that the protest had been hijacked by extremist groups which had lied about the program normalizing pedophilia, the protests were effectively outlawed by the creation of an exclusion zone around the school.

    *  *  *

    New limited edition merch now available! Click here. In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Also, I urgently need your financial support here.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 02:00

  • Enemies Of The State Vs. Enemies Of The People
    Enemies Of The State Vs. Enemies Of The People

    Authored by Frank Miele via RealClearPolitics.com,

    I didn’t declare war on the establishment; it declared war on me.

    It declared war on me when it supported energy policies that could enrich Saudi Arabia and Russia and would cost me more money at the gas pump or on my power bill.

    It declared war on me when it told me my ideas weren’t worthy of debate and discussion or that they were even so dangerous they couldn’t be shared publicly.

    It declared war on me when it used the police powers of the FBI and CIA to first spy on a presidential candidate and then worked to undermine the administration of that candidate after he was elected.

    It declared war on me when it told me my religious beliefs did not deserve the protection of the First Amendment.

    It declared war on me when it told me boys could compete against girls in high school sports and that they could shower together afterwards.

    It declared war on me when it offered citizenship to illegal aliens and shipped American jobs to China.

    It declared war on me when it mocked the usefulness of a wall on the Mexican border and simultaneously put up a razor-wire fence around the Capitol.

    It declared war on me when it tried to defund the police so that millions of Americans would be left defenseless against mobs from antifa and Black Lives Matter.

    It declared war on me when it said America was never great.

    It declared war on me when it told my children they are not good enough because they are white.

    It declared war on me when it said that defending the Constitution’s rules on federal elections is sedition.

    It declared war on me when it told me that I was a domestic terrorist if I didn’t believe the government’s official pronouncements about elections, about free speech, and about right and wrong.

    Let’s just say it plainly: The establishment declared war on me and on all conservative Americans when it decided that leftist orthodoxy was more important than the Constitution.

    Don’t believe me? Fine, why should you believe a Trump supporter? You’ve been indoctrinated by the national media, Big Tech oligarchs, the Democratic Party, and academic elites to believe without questioning that people like me can’t be trusted. But you don’t have to take my word for it.

    Listen instead to John Brennan, the former CIA director under President Obama, who speaks authoritatively for the Deep State:

    He said on MSNBC that “the members of the Biden team who have been nominated or have been appointed, are now moving in laser-like fashion to try to uncover as much as they can about what looks very similar to insurgency movements that we’ve seen overseas, where they germinate in different parts of the country and they gain strength and it brings together an unholy alliance frequently of religious extremists, authoritarians, fascists, bigots, racists, nativists, even libertarians.”

    This “guilt by labeling” is the antithesis of fair play or justice. It is a convenient mechanism for the ruling class to herd people into identity clusters so that individual rights can be supplanted by group responsibility. If this reminds you of China’s Cultural Revolution, you are not wrong. The ruling class wants you to conform, confirm and comply. If you step outside the lines, be prepared to be shamed, silenced and ostracized.

    A shocking example was provided Wednesday when Douglass Mackey of Delray Beach, Fla., was arrested for creating memes that allegedly misled voters in 2016 to think they could vote by texting instead of by actually going to the polls. This is the equivalent of arresting Sacha Baron Cohen for exposing the gullibility of the rich and famous. The FBI offered no evidence that Mackey actually convinced anyone not to vote, but even if it did, so what? Would you rather live in a country where the FBI is hunting down pranksters — four years after the supposed transgression — or a country where voters are expected to be able to recognize a joke when they see one?

    But nothing can be taken for granted any more. The people — and even their representatives and senators — are considered enemies of the state because they hold opinions that don’t meet the standards of Joe Biden or (this is even scarier!) Jake Tapper.

    No wonder the people are starting to rise up and rebel against the plutocracy.

    It’s not “We the Oligarchs” who are the source of power in the Constitution, but “We the People,” yet the ruling establishment has forgotten that.

    If people like Donald Trump and Douglass Mackey are deemed to be “enemies of the state,” then those who would suppress them and their freedoms must be considered “enemies of the people.”

    A house divided against itself cannot long stand, but if there is to be a truce it will not come from submission, but from a recognition that all people are created equal, that they all have certain inalienable rights, and that among those are life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness. Those words were worth fighting for once. Are they worth fighting for today?

    I don’t know, but I do know this: If Americans can’t have liberty, we can’t have America either – at least not one that is distinguishable from China. The time has come to make a choice.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 02/02/2021 – 00:00

  • Thousands Of Maskless Orthodox Jews Ignore Israeli Lockdown To Attend Funerals 
    Thousands Of Maskless Orthodox Jews Ignore Israeli Lockdown To Attend Funerals 

    Thousands of Orthodox Israelis poured into Jerusalem’s streets to attend two separate funerals Sunday despite the country’s ban on large public gatherings, according to AP News

    The first funeral procession was for Rabbi Meshulam Dovid Soloveitchik, who died at the age of 99 after contracting COVID-19 three months ago.

    Photographs from Soloveitchik’s funeral procession showed a large group of ultra-Orthodox Israelis’ winding down city streets without face masks nor properly social distancing. 

    Source: AP

    Many of the Orthodox Jews in attendance defied the country’s third coronavirus lockdown. Local media reported police set up roadblocks and were able to turn away twenty tour busses heading to the ceremony. 

    … but still, thousands of Orthodox Jews flooded the streets of Jerusalem. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Deputy Health Minister Yoav Kisch tweeted that the gathering was “very bad in every way.”  

    Source: AP

    On Sunday evening, thousands of mourners attended a second funeral for rabbi, Yitzhok Scheiner, 98, who died from virus-related complications. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Alon Halfon, a Jerusalem police official, told Channel 13 TV that police were overwhelmed by the crowd size and that health violations were issued. 

    Orthodox Jews have been in strong opposition to face masks and pandemic restrictions. Many of them have refused to abide by the rules in Israel and also in New York City. 

    Israel’s Health Ministry recorded 640,000 infections and nearly 5,000 deaths since the start of the pandemic. The country has been averaging around 6,000 infections per day, one of the highest in the world. 

    Time will tell, it could take weeks for infections to flare up following the mass gathering events this weekend. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 23:40

  • How George Washington Responded To "Insurrectionists"
    How George Washington Responded To “Insurrectionists”

    Authored by TJ Martinell via Tenth Amendment Center,

    The recent protests and storming of the US Capitol building on Jan. 6 produced a hysterical reaction from both pundits and the federal government. This contrasts wildly with the response to an actual rebellion during the Republic’s early days.

    The new federal government didn’t respond to the so-called Whiskey Rebellion with crackdowns on civil liberties to “prevent another rebellion” as many seem to want to do today. In 1794 Kentucky and Pennsylvania farmers took up arms in opposition to a federal whiskey excise tax. The Whiskey Rebellion concluded with President George Washington calling up the militia to suppress the rebels, who dispersed before any real fighting occurred.

    Interpretations of the rebellion vary. Some view Washington’s decision as a vital move to preserve the then-fledgling federal government’s legitimacy after Shay’s Rebellion eight years prior had prompted the founders to replace the Articles of Confederation in favor of a stronger central government. However, others consider the rebels as patriots resisting an unjust tax on whiskey, which was frequently used as a means of exchange in frontier areas where coinage was scarce.

    To be sure, Washington reacted initially in a manner utterly restrained compared to what we could expect today. Even after invoking the Militia Act of 1792 allowing him to call up state militiamen, he sent state officials to the rebels and tried to reach a peaceful resolution, without success.

    However, a separate issue to look at is the aftermath of the rebellion. Roughly 150 men were arrested and tried for treason. Yet only two men were found guilty, and they were later pardoned by Washington himself.

    In his seventh state of the union address Washington defended his decision:

    For though I shall always think it a sacred duty to exercise with firmness and energy the constitutional powers with which I am vested, yet it appears to me no less consistent with the public good than it is with my personal feelings to mingle in the operations of Government every degree of moderation and tenderness which the national justice, dignity, and safety may permit.

    As historian Carol Berkin noted in a 2017 lecture, “not a single person really ever served a jail term. Everybody was given amnesty. Nobody was cruelly beaten or destroyed. But the power, the authority of the federal government was upheld.”

    Perhaps Washington and other Founders holding office realized the appearance of hypocrisy for condemning men as traitors who acted as they had just a few decades earlier.

    The Whiskey Rebellion occurred in western Pennsylvania in 1794. Via Shutterstock.

    At the same time, it’s not so much what Washington and Congress did as what they didn’t do or even propose to do. Reading through diaries, letters, and correspondence from founders ranging from George Washington and Alexander Hamilton to Thomas Jefferson written during the rebellion, there is no instance I could find in which they advocated or suggested the civil rights restrictions such as firearms ownership or freedom of speech and assembly. There was no call for a permanent standing army. This is on top of the fact that nothing was actually proposed and then enacted.

    In fact, Jefferson wrote sympathetically of the rebellion in a Dec. 28, 1794 letter to John Adams, calling the whiskey tax “an infernal one. The first error was to admit it by the Constitution.”

    He wrote further that hatred of the law in those states was “universal, and has now associated to it a detestation of the government; & that separation which perhaps was a very distant & problematical event, is now near, & certain, & determined in the mind of every man.”

    Not surprisingly, Jefferson would later repeal the excise tax when elected president.

    Even federalists like Alexander Hamilton in ways sought to avoid violence that might have demonstrated the power of the new government, albeit he did advocate hanging some of the rebel leaders. In an Aug. 29, 1794 letter to Maryland Governor Thomas Lee, he wrote of avoiding “the necessity of using force now & at future periods” by keeping the militia deployed in good morale.

    In all the correspondence Hamilton had with George Washington, not one advocated for the confiscation of firearms from the regions where the rebellion had occurred. Nor was there a call to restrict firearm ownership of any type among the general population to prevent similar rebellions in the future. The federal government didn’t use the “crisis” as an excuse to enlarge itself, as some sought with the Alien and Sedition Act passed four years later

    While Washington’s best opportunity to make himself a military dictator occurred just after the War of Independence ended with him still in charge of the continental army, the Whiskey Rebellion theoretically could have afforded him another chance – one that he likely never even contemplated.

    The comparatively restrained response by Washington to the rebellion demonstrated that it is not necessary to take away liberties to maintain civil order or “keep us safe.”

    Writing in reaction to Shay’s Rebellion, Thomas Jefferson wrote a letter to James Madison saying rebellions were a “medicine necessary for the sound health of government” and that “honest republican governors” should be “so mild in their punishment of rebellions, as not to discourage them too much.”

    What many people fail to grasp is that rebellions and insurrections aren’t always found in physical confrontations, and the “medicine necessary for the sound health of government” can be applied just as effectively through the nullification of unconstitutional federal acts. Incidentally, Jefferson referred to nullification as the “rightful remedy.”

    The histrionic and totalitarian rhetoric coming from the federal government today over a handful of people storming the US Capitol demonstrates how fragile its perceived legitimacy is today. It is a government that overreacts to minor incidents because deep down its members are terrified of any meaningful defiance or resistance to their rule.

    They realize how easily D.C. tyranny could end if the American people were united in common opposition to unconstitutional actions in a manner that reduced their power, rather than give the largest government in the world the further pretext to expand it.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 23:20

  • Iran Launches New Satellite-Carrying Rocket As Biden Plan To Restore Nuclear Deal Falters
    Iran Launches New Satellite-Carrying Rocket As Biden Plan To Restore Nuclear Deal Falters

    In a first since the Biden administration entered the White House, Iran has successfully launched its newest domestic built satellite-carrying rocket, named Zuljanah. 

    Iranian state TV while not specifying the exact date featured video of the launch Monday which occurred in a daytime desert setting. “State TV said the rocket is capable of carrying a 220-kilogram (485-pound) satellite, adding that the three-stage rocket uses solid fuel in the first and second stages and fluid fuel in the third,” according to the AFP.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The launch was a test hailed by officials as utilizing the Islamic Republic’s “most powerful rocket engine”.

    An Iranian defense ministry statement said “the test helped Iran to achieve its most powerful rocket engine… the rocket can be launched using a mobile launching pad.”

    “It is capable of carrying a single 220 kg satellite or up to 10 smaller ones” with the rocket itself capable of reaching a height of 310 miles, according to the statement. 

    And state TV added: “The Zuljanah is able to reach a height of 500 km … The three-stage satellite launcher uses a combination of solid and liquid fuels. It uses solid fuel in the first and second stages and fluid fuel in the third stage.”

    It is precisely the type of launch previously condemned by the prior Trump administration as a breach of past nuclear deal related commitments. The past administration had accused Iran of seeking to develop nuclear capable ballistic missiles under the guise of its “peaceful” space program.

    Iran has in recent years sent small satellites into space, namely the IRGC’s Noor last year successfully put into orbit.

    It’s also expected this latest test will come under Western condemnation at a sensitive moment Iran and the US are teasing the possibility of restoring the 2015 nuclear deal (JCPOA), but with each side telling the other essentially “you move first”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The timing is further interesting given Tehran appears to be continuing to develop leverage aimed at getting Biden to quickly lift sanctions and finally return to the JCPOA.

    At the start of this week US Secretary of State Antony Blinken told NBC News that the administration hopes to negotiate a “longer and stronger” deal, but only after Iran returns to compliance.

    At the same time, Tehran is telling the White House that it must drop the Trump-era sanctions first. Blinken’s statements also grabbed attention because of the following:

    During the interview, taped on Sunday, Blinken said Iran was months away from developing enough nuclear material to create a bomb, in “a matter of weeks”, if Iran continues to lift restraints put in place by the 2015 deal.

    However, this has pretty much been the same refrain across multiple administrations going back years. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 23:00

  • Luongo: What I Want To Know Is How Angry Are You, Really?
    Luongo: What I Want To Know Is How Angry Are You, Really?

    Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

    In another life I used to be a poet and, at times, your classic black-trench-wearing, cigarette-smoking art fag. Angry didn’t begin to cover what was my default state of being in my 20’s.

    My poor Rickenbacker 4003 has taken a lot of abuse over the years with me taking my frustrations out on it rather than going postal. Yeah, musician too folks, but the livestream regulars already know this.

    Fast forward to my late 30’s and the post-Lehman Bros. Era dominated by central bank created fake markets and I’m whiling away away 250+ miles from home watching the acceleration of the degradation of Western society from my man cave cum laboratory breathing enough hydrogen and ethylenediamine to drive even a Mormon missionary to violence.

    It was during this period in 2011 I wrote the following lyrics. For those of you who think this blog is something new for me, something that came out of the potential euphoria of a Trump Presidency as Successful Insurrection Against the Banksters, no.

    My problem is I’ve always been 10 years ahead of the game.

    So, on this morning where the r/WallStreetBets army are taking on the most systemically important and vulnerable market in the world, silver, this song’s for you.

    What I Want to Know

    Why do the worst always get to the top?
    Be it a lawyer, banker or roided-up cop

    Who flies off in a rage when I quote him the law,
    defendin’ myself. Man! That’s the last straw.
    But may it is that’s the gig with The Rules,
    To use by the Rulers on the Ruled.
    Shout down the Speakers, but defend the disturbed
    and throw all those deadbeats and their kids to the curb.
    Let ’em drug up your kids while they Tazer your Granny
    Or else… Here’s Nurse Ratched, the Inquisitor Nanny.

    So, What Do I Want… and Where Am I Going?
    And why is Bernanke seen as all knowing?
    And Where is the Horse and Where is the Rider?
    And Where are my keys, and Why am I wider?
    Why do I hurt when I’m so broken and numb?
    Why do we continue to fight for their crumbs?
    When will the revolts turn from Red to Brown?
    Forget Violet or Orange! Stop trusting in clowns?
    Shantih! Shantih! A seeming finale…
    Conceived and produced by one, Alistair Crowley.

    What I want to know….
    What I want to know….
    What I want to know….

    The Dude’s not abiding, Mr. Wales is plumb mean,
    It’s enough to make even the most rational “Green.”
    The envy, the hate, the statistics, the jokes
    All mask the real problem that everyone’s broke.

    The bridges are falling and the culture’s decaying…
    And even the hair of the dog’s begun graying.
    Everyone’s shouting and fingers are pointed
    But anger makes everything sound so disjointed.
    And it’s that more than terr’ism needs killin’
    Less Hillary, Palin or Limbaugh, more Dylan.

    What I want to know….
    What I want to know….
    What I want to know….

    Just askin’ questions won’t get it done.
    You’d better sack up or they’ve already won.

    Just find your voice along with your balls
    and get hold of this barrel before it reaches the falls…

    But wait there’s much more than I don’t understand
    As I stop and I turn to the guys in my band
    and ask them what they think’s going on…
    Do they like the cut of the jib of this song?
    They turn to me and say that I am in charge
    As long as this ship’s more a cruise than a barge
    Get back in the groove, Man, and make a fresh start
    The whole is much more than the sum of our parts.
    It’s real good advice and it cuts through the thickness
    But doesn’t get down to the source of the sickness.
    So, here’s my best offer Mr. Congressman Thievin’
    Why don’t you go fuck yourself, and we’ll call it even.

    What I want to know,
    is when you will go
    and leave us alone.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 22:40

  • Natgas Prices Jump 11% As Weather Models Point To "Widespread Cold"
    Natgas Prices Jump 11% As Weather Models Point To “Widespread Cold”

    Natural-gas futures jumped 11% to 2.844 per million British thermal units on Monday afternoon after new forecasts suggest energy demand will increase in February as colder weather returns. 

    “An unusually strong response to weekend adjustments to the short-term temperature forecasts,” said Ritterbusch and Associates. The independent consulting firm said prices could reach the $3 mark by the end of the month. 

    BAMWX’s meteorologist Kirk Hinz tweeted, “If you’re a fan of cold & wintry weather ahead, this pattern is for you.” He said a polar vortex is pouring Arctic air into the US’s central part that will “help transition out of the previously warm pattern.” 

    “The pattern ahead as we get deeper into mid-February supports a widespread colder than normal look across the US we haven’t seen since February 2014. A combination of finally tapping into the Polar Vortex and favorable atmospheric tropical forcing has data showing some of the coldest air on the Planet pushing South into the US, starting next week,” Hinz stated. 

    February 2014 Reference 

    Next Two Weeks 

    “I can’t really recall a time where I’ve witnessed a 32 heating degree days gain inside of 11 days on the ensemble runs,” he said. Rising heating degree days means natgas demand is set to increase. 

    He concludes by saying both “GFS & ECMWF” could bring “absolute brutal cold next weekend behind a winter storm.” 

    … and just in time as Goldman Sachs flipped from bearish to bullish on natgas. 

    To sum up, natgas prices are exploding higher on a weather outlook that is much colder than previously expected. There’s also a threat of another system next weekend. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 22:20

  • #SilverSqueeze: Physical Silver Shortage vs. Paper Silver
    #SilverSqueeze: Physical Silver Shortage vs. Paper Silver

    Submitted by Torgny Persson, BullionStar.com

    The silver short squeeze in physical silver at present is unprecedented. Even so, the spot price of paper silver is not even close to the real physical equilibrium price of silver.  BullionStar may soon have no option but to abandon setting prices based on silver spot price altogether and move to fixed prices.

    Thanks to  r/WallStreetBets (WSB) and related spin offs, the wider public is starting to open its eyes to the corruption and cronyism in the financial markets including in the paper gold and paper silver markets.

    For years, BullionStar has been one of the strongest critics of the manipulated precious metals markets where paper issuance of silver (out of thin air) exceeds the physical availability of real silver at a multiple of at least 100 to 1.

    While some in the WSB movement have suggested purchases of SLV shares and call options, many others are recommending physical silver. It’s important to understand that purchases of SLV shares does not equate to putting pressure on bullion banks. Bullion banks provide various services to ETF’s, such as custodial services, and ETF’s are known for colluding with central banks. The only way to put pressure on the corrupted paper silver market and on the bullion banks is to buy physical silver. Only then is there a chance that price discovery for real physical silver will shift to be based on the actual trading of physical silver instead of being inherited from synthetic paper trading prone to manipulation.

    Click here to see what silver bullion items we currently have in stock.

    This week may be the most interesting week for silver savers and investors in decades. The questions asked by this movement are of huge importance for the whole financial and monetary system.

    • Is what we are seeing the start of a seminal silver crisis with the potential of finally bringing down the manipulated paper silver market?
    • Can this movement lead to an attack of the very nature of unbacked fiat currency?
    • Will the bullion banks try to smash the paper spot and paper futures prices back down and if so, will the price of physical silver definitively disconnect from the paper price?
    • Can COMEX and SLV really source the physical silver required amidst the high demand?

    Paper Silver Manipulation

    What was claimed to be a conspiracy theory of bullion banks colluding to manipulate and suppress the paper price of precious metals have been proven true again and again.

    BullionStar has also exposed, for example hereherehere, herehere, and here how the precious metals industry organisations, like the London Bullion Market Association (LBMA), protect the interests of the paper dealing bullion banks rather than further the interest of physical producers and dealers.

    Suppressing the paper price of gold and silver goes to the very core, not only of the financial system, but to the whole monetary system. In Gold & Silver Price Manipulation – The Greatest Trick ever Pulled, we wrote:

    “Manipulating gold and silver prices by spoofing futures trades and cancelling them is one thing. Central bank intervention into physical gold markets to dampen the gold price is another. But perhaps the most far reaching yet unappreciated method of manipulation is sitting there in plain sight, and that is the very structure of the contemporary ‘gold’ and ‘silver’ markets where prices are established by trading in vast quantities of fractionally-backed synthetic gold and silver credit, be it in the form of vast quantities of unallocated positions that are ‘gold’ or ‘silver’ in name only, or in the form of gold and silver futures which haven’t the slightest connection with CME approved precious metals vaults and warehouses.

    By siphoning off demand for real gold and silver and channeling it into unbacked or fractionally-backed credits and futures, the central banks and their bullion bank counterparts have done an amazing job in creating an entire market structure of futures and synthetics trading that is unconnected to the physical gold and silver markets. This structure siphons off demand away from the physical precious metals markets, and in doing so, creates a system of price discovery which is nothing to do with physical gold and silver supply and demand.

    Apart from fractional-reserve banking, precious metals market structure is perhaps one of the biggest cons on the planet. So next time you think of precious metals manipulation, remember that in addition to spoofing and secretive central bank gold loans, the entire structure of the precious metals markets is unfortunately one big manipulation hiding in plain sight.”

    Silver Price Suppression

    Another contributor to the suppression of the paper price for gold and silver is the government manipulation of inflation figures.

    Using ShadowStats Alternate CPI, the real inflation-adjusted All-Time-High for silver is US$ 966.77. Yes, nearly US $1,000!

    Following BullionStar’s post on the real inflation-adjusted ATH for silver, many followers of WSB has referenced to US$ 1,000 as the price target for silver.  A ZeroHedge post from today with more than 2.1M views and 9K comments also makes reference to this price calculated by BullionStar while noting that the silver bullion market is one of the most manipulated on earth.

    It’s important for banks, central banks and governments to ensure that precious metals prices remain subdued.  This is so because precious metals still indirectly backstops the whole monetary system. If the price of gold and silver were to skyrocket, it would expose that the emperor has no clothes, i.e. that fiat currency is intrinsically worthless.

    Central banks and governments have employed a two pronged approach, where on one hand, the money supply is increased via Quantitative Easing to prop up bank and vested interests while on the other hand, the paper price of gold and silver is suppressed.

    The QE Defender Game developed by BullionStar illustrates how central banks are propping up banks while suppressing gold and silver prices. Give the game a go and see which level you can reach!

    Play BullionStar’s QE Defender game that illustrates how the central banks are propping up the banks while at the same time suppressing gold and silver prices.

    Physical gold and silver is measured in weight, has intrinsic value due to its metallic and monetary characteristics and is money in the true sense. The currency of today is not backed by anything and has no monetary properties. Its value is dependent merely on a (false) perception of value. While BullionStar accepts cryptocurrency for order settlement of both buy and sell orders, cryptocurrency cannot replace the age-old monetary properties of precious metals as the ultimate wealth asset.

    BullionStar was one of the first bullion dealers in the world to accept Bitcoin as payment for bullion back in 2014.

    Paper Silver Price vs. Physical Silver Price

    Silver price discovery, which is how the price of silver is established by the market, is akin to a game of charades. Price discovery is based on paper silver spot trading in London and paper silver futures trading in New York. The whole charade is based on the premise of little to no real physical silver ever changing hands. If holders of paper silver were to demand delivery of physical silver, supply would quickly run out, which is exactly what is happening right now. Historically however, almost all paper silver transactions have been digitally cash settled without anyone ever seeing any silver.

    As there is no central market place for the trading of physical silver, the price for physical silver has been inherited from the spot and futures paper markets with an added premium covering the costs for refining, minting, shipping, storage, insurance and retail. With the developments over the last few days of investors shifting away from paper silver and taking delivery of physical silver, the whole market construct for precious metals is changing.

    Price Disconnect between Paper Silver Price and Physical Silver Price

    Despite the 16.2% silver spot price increase from USD 25.58 a week ago to USD 29.72 at the time of writing, the spot price of silver still does not reflect the demand and supply on the physical silver market.

    Spot Price of Silver in US Dollars

    Over the last few days, we have seen unprecedented demand for silver bars and silver coins at BullionStar. We currently have about 25 customers buying silver from us for every 1 customer selling. Typically, this ratio is about 2-3 customers buying for every customer selling.

    To be able to handle the demand pressure, we have had to introduce a minimum order amount of SGD 499 or equivalent in other currencies. Our team members are working around the clock to try to fulfil all orders that have been placed. Our order volume, call volume and email volume is up exponentially, around ten times to normal.

    Furthermore, as the silver squeeze and shortage is getting more serious by the hour, we do not expect to be able to replenish many silver products anytime soon.  As the spot price does not match the demand on the physical market, we have had to significantly increase price premiums for silver.

    We currently offer Canadian Silver Maples – 1 oz 2021 for a price premium from 29.4 %. This is almost double the premium a few days ago. American Silver Eagles – 1 oz 2021 are offered at a premium of 46%, more than double the premium a few days ago.

    Many, if not most, of our competitors worldwide are already sold out of all physical silver bullion. At BullionStar, our strategy is to stock additional physical gold and silver inventory aggressively at higher than normal levels at the first sign of market instability. We therefore still have available supply of the most popular silver products.

    Paper Silver Market Default/Failure – Moving to Fixed Prices

    As more savers and investors take physical delivery of silver, we believe that there is a significant risk that some of the silver paper markets may default in that they are not able to deliver physical silver in exchange for the paper silver. Baring a full default, the paper price of silver may continue to inaccurately reflect the demand and supply of real physical silver.

    With all supply of physical silver drying up at an incredible pace, it is becoming increasingly difficult for us to set prices and price premiums.

    Unless the spot spot price of paper silver starts to reflect the real physical equilibrium price of silver,  BullionStar may soon have no option but to abandon setting prices based on silver spot price altogether and move to fixed prices.

    Worldwide Shipping of Bullion – Reduced Shipping Rates

    With the WSB movement starting in the United States, we note that nearly all US bullion dealers seem to be completely sold out on physical silver.

    We are currently experiencing a record inflow of new customers. Setting up a BullionStar account is a straightforward 1 minute process. Simply open an account by filling in your details and start trading physical precious metals.

    BullionStar ships bullion to most countries worldwide including the United States. To view shipping rates, add the desired bullion to your shopping cart and go to the checkout where you select “Shipping by Courier” to view the shipping cost.

    This article was originally published on the BullionStar.com website under the same title “#SilverSqueeze: Physical Silver Shortage vs. Paper Silver”.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 22:00

  • "Impossible Trinity" Shows PBOC Not In Hiking Mode
    “Impossible Trinity” Shows PBOC Not In Hiking Mode

    By Ye Xie, macro commentator at Bloomberg Markets

    The short squeeze may be largely behind us.

    U.S. stocks rallied Monday as a decline in short interest in GameStop suggested limited room for further squeezing of some of the most-shorted stocks. In fact, the 20 most-shorted stocks in the Russell 3000 have been falling since Jan. 27.

    Their performance between Jan 21-27 is negatively correlated to their returns since then. Retail investors are now setting their sights on pushing silver higher, but the move has caused limited dislocation in other assets.

    In China, the PBOC’s liquidity squeeze looks to be running its course, too. The interbank rates dropped Monday after the PBOC injected cash. Meanwhile, the services PMI missed expectations, underscoring the growth hit by the recent restrictions on activities due to the renewed Covid outbreaks. Bad economic news is good news for markets as it reduces the risk of policy tightening.

    Beyond the near-term, the PBOC’s appetite for monetary tightening is perhaps also somewhat constrained by the yuan — the classic “impossible trinity” problem.

    The theory, developed by Nobel-winning economist Robert Mundell, stipulates an economy cannot have free-flowing capital, a fixed exchange rate and an independent monetary policy all at the same time. Higher rates lead to capital inflows, which pushes the currency stronger.

    The PBOC hasn’t hiked, but near-zero rates in major economies, have effectively done the job for it, pushing a torrent of foreign capital to China. Overseas investors added a record $100 billion to government bonds last year, more than the previous two years combined.

    So far, the central bank has largely tolerated the yuan’s appreciation. The PBOC has been countering the inflows by easing some of the restrictions to encourage outflows. What it perhaps won’t do is to build up rate-hike expectations and create a one-way street for the currency.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 21:40

  • Trump Nominated For Nobel Peace Prize Over Israel-UAE Peace Deal
    Trump Nominated For Nobel Peace Prize Over Israel-UAE Peace Deal

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Former President Donald Trump was nominated for the Nobel Peace Prize on Monday morning by an Estonian member of the European Parliament, Jaak Madison.

    In a post on social media, Madison said:

    “In the last 30 years, Donald Trump is the first president of the United States, who during his tenure, has not started a war. Additionally, he signed several peace agreements in the Middle East which have helped provide stability in the region and peace.”

    Madison was referring to the Abraham Accords, a joint statement between Israel, the United Arab Emirates, and the United States–and later, with Bahrain and other Arab countries.

    “We encourage efforts to promote interfaith and intercultural dialogue to advance a culture of peace among the three Abrahamic religions and all humanity,” according to a statement on the State Department’s website. “We believe that the best way to address challenges is through cooperation and dialogue and that developing friendly relations among States advances the interests of lasting peace in the Middle East and around the world.”

    Trump was nominated for the Nobel Peace Prize last year by Norwegian Parliament member Christian Tybring-Gjedde.

    “For his merit, I think he has done more trying to create peace between nations than most other Peace Prize nominees,” Tybring-Gjedde told Fox last year.

    Separately, Harvard Law professor emeritus Alan Dershowitz nominated Trump’s son-in-law and former presidential advisor Jared Kushner on Monday morning. Dershowitz—who is eligible to nominate individuals because of his status as a former Harvard Law professor—argued that Kushner and his associate Avi Berkowitz helped negotiate the Abraham Accords.

    (L-R) Bahrain Foreign Minister Abdullatif al-Zayani, Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, President Donald Trump, and UAE Foreign Minister Abdullah bin Zayed Al-Nahyan pose from the Truman Balcony at the White House before they participate in the signing of the Abraham Accords where the countries of Bahrain and the United Arab Emirates recognize Israel, in Washington, on Sept. 15, 2020. (Saul Loeb/AFP via Getty Images)

    “The Nobel Peace Prize is not for popularity. Nor is it an assessment of what the international community may think of those who helped bring about peace,” Dershowitz wrote. “It is an award for fulfilling the daunting criteria set out by Alfred Nobel in his will.”

    Under the diplomatic push, Trump’s administration also negotiated deals with Sudan and Morocco.

    Kushner, in a statement Sunday, said that he was honored to be nominated for the prize.

    President Joe Biden’s administration is expected to review all national security deals struck during the Trump administration, including arms packages for the United Arab Emirates and Saudi Arabia.

    Some lawmakers have complained about the Morocco deal because, to win the nation’s agreement, the United States recognized its sovereignty over the disputed Western Sahara.

    Also on Monday, the Black Lives Matter movement was nominated for the Peace Prize by a Norwegian Parliament member, Petter Eide. Eide said that people have messaged him “to say that BLM is a violent organization,” but he rejected the claims.

    The winner of the Nobel Peace Prize will be awarded in November 2021.

    Reuters contributed to this report.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 21:20

  • Massive Chinese Buying Spree Sends Corn Prices To Highest Since 2013
    Massive Chinese Buying Spree Sends Corn Prices To Highest Since 2013

    US corn futures are continuing to soar, hitting a 7-1/2 year high Monday. The bullish continuation in price is the result of “massive US corn sales to China last week,” according to Reuters.

    Chicago Board of Trade March contracts are up 1.23% to $5.53 per bushel, to levels not seen since 2013.

    Germany’s Commerzbank commented on the latest price action in corn, saying “Chinese demand for corn remains robust and unfavorable weather in South America” are some of the bullish catalysts lifting prices. 

    On Friday, the USDA reported China purchased 2.108 million tons of corn, the second-largest daily sale on record. The largest sale was in 1991 to the USSR, where US grain traders sold 3.72 million tons in one day. 

    Last week, US sales to China totaled 3.74 million tons, making it one of the biggest US corn export weeks on record. 

    “The after-effects are still being felt today,” Commerzbank added, regarding Friday’s report of the massive US export sales to China.

    … and it’s only when President Trump is out of the White House that China ramps up its agriculture purchases. 

    So here’s the bad news. Food inflation is rapidly rising. Last month the Food and Agriculture Organization’s Food Price Index showed that prices in December rose for a seventh consecutive month. 

    Everyone’s favorite permabear, SocGen’s Albert Edwards, who, unlike Goldman Sachs, has warned about the latest surge in food prices could result in social instabilities. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 21:00

  • McConnell Calls QAnon-Supporting Congresswoman "Cancer" On GOP, Says Cheney An "Important Leader"
    McConnell Calls QAnon-Supporting Congresswoman “Cancer” On GOP, Says Cheney An “Important Leader”

    Senate Minority Leader Mitch McConnell (R-KY) drew a line in the sand on Monday between the GOP establishment (the big club you ain’t in), and the populist QAnon movement – whose theories on elite pedophiles and a shadow government were deemed plausible by at least one-third of Americans in an October poll reported by Axios.

    McConnell, who voted to go to war in Iraq based in part on a conspiracy theory and fabricated evidence misinformation from some guy, said on Monday – without actually saying her name – that freshman Georgia GOP Rep. Marjorie Taylor Greene’s embrace of “loony lies and conspiracy theories” is a “cancer for the Republican party.”

    “Somebody who’s suggested that perhaps no airplane hit the Pentagon on 9/11, that horrifying school shootings were pre-staged, and that the Clintons crashed JFK Jr.’s airplane is not living in reality,” McConnell said in the “three-sentence statement” reported by The Hill.

    Greene has come under fire in recent weeks for her past support of QAnon – a political sin which Democrats such as Scott Dworkin – a veteran of both Obama campaigns and a Biden super PAC senior adviser – are using to call for Greene’s expulsion from Congress.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, Congressional Democrats are also ganging up to oust Greene from her Committees.

    Democrats are threatening to force a floor vote this week to oust the controversial Georgia Republican from the Education and Labor Committee and the Budget Committee if House Minority Leader Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.) does not remove her first. 

    McCarthy is set to meet with her in Washington as early as Tuesday. Some Republicans said they did not anticipate McCarthy booting her off the committees given that she has the backing of former President Trump, who still holds enormous sway within the GOP. –The Hill

    And McConnell, who’s apparently fine agitating millions of QAnon-believing Republican voters, thinks she’s a cancer.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Greene responded to McConnell’s comments in a Monday tweet, saying “The real cancer for the Republican Party is weak Republicans who only know how to lose gracefully,” adding “This is why we are losing our country.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    For which a Democrat compared her physical appearance to Miss Piggy. (Do as we say…)

    And while McConnell spent Monday bashing one Republican lawmaker, he also gave GOP Rep. Liz Cheney a boost, telling CNN in a statement that she had “the courage” to vote to impeach former President Trump last month.

    “Liz Cheney is a leader with deep convictions and the courage to act on them,” he said, adding “She is an important leader in our party and in our nation. I am grateful for her service and look forward to continuing to work with her on the crucial issues facing our nation.”

    Another GOP lawmaker anonymously told The Hill of Greene: “It remains to be seen how big of an issue she is long-term. She’s had a noisy entrance, but it’s unclear what she will be viewed as and whether she will even be known in the public psyche in November 2022. She’s had a tough transition to Congress. I’m not sure we need to go to the wall on this right now.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsGreene said on Saturday that she had spoken with former President Trump, who is “100% loyal to the people and America first.” She added that she won’t back down or apologize, and will “always keep fighting for the people.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 20:40

  • Top NY Virus Officials Quit As Cuomo Wages "War" With His Own Health Department
    Top NY Virus Officials Quit As Cuomo Wages “War” With His Own Health Department

    While the mainstream media continuously amplified all those unsourced rumors about President Trump’s reported battles with his top public health officials – particularly Dr. Anthony Fauci  – it almost seemed like a miracle when the Pfizer-BioNTech vaccine started rolling off the assembly lines after all that dysfunction. 

    Well, as it turns out, the media narrative doesn’t always perfectly reflect reality. And one of the most glaring examples during the US pandemic response was Andrew Cuomo’s handling of the response in the Empire State.

    Hailed as an effective leader by Democrats, Cuomo’s smiling face graced 1000s of articles; but all of this belies the many mistakes he made both during the early days of the Pandemic, to the botched vaccine rollout, where Cuomo’s policies led hospitals to keep vaccines rotting on shelves in the name of “racial equality”. 

    Things have not gone so well in the PR space for the Governor in recent weeks. New York State Attorney General Letitia James released a report last Thursday detailing the investigations her office has conducted into nursing homes policies and actions during the pandemic. The report shows that the nursing home deaths in New York State were likely undercounted by up to 50 percent.

    The investigation, ongoing since March, when Governor Cuomo issued his directive to send COVID patients back to nursing homes following hospitalizations, was begun due to allegations of “patient neglect and other concerning conduct,” according to The Post-Journal.

    Cuomo made headlines earlier this week for saying that “incompetent government kills people.”

    The situation worsened in recent months as state health officials said they often found out about major policy changes, like, reopening restaurants, via the press.

    In recent weeks, the governor has repeatedly made it clear that he believed he had no choice but to seize more control over pandemic policy from state and local public health officials, who he said had no understanding of how to conduct a real-world, large-scale operation like vaccinations.

    After early problems, in which relatively few doses were being administered, the pace of vaccinations has picked up and New York is now roughly 20th in the nation in percentage of residents who have received at least one vaccine dose.

    Many of Cuomo’s top public health officials were so angry about being left out of the loop (so to speak) they abruptly quit, prompting the NYT to tout in a headline that Cuomo had “declared war” on his own department of public health.

    But at least nine senior state health officials have left the department, resigned or retired in recent months.

    They include Elizabeth Dufort, the medical director in the division of epidemiology; Dr. Jill Taylor, the head of the renowned Wadsworth laboratory — which has been central to the state’s efforts to detect virus variants — and the executive in charge of health data, according to state records.

    Additionally, the Health Department’s No. 2 official left for another job in state government, and another official, who helped oversee contact tracing, is expected to leave the department, also for another state government jo

    Dr. Zucker said in a statement that the state was facing “an intense period of extraordinary stress and pressure and a different job than some signed onto.”

    He added: “The Times’s point is several staff left – true, and many others joined the agency with the talents necessary to confront this new challenge.” The proof, he said, “is in the performance numbers”

    Several top Dems agreed, and told the NYT that the red tape enacted by the governor was unnecessary and unsustainable. 

    “Extensive red tape and unnecessary rigidity over who we could vaccinate and when – all with the looming threat of millions of dollars in punitive fines – made an extraordinarily difficult task all the more challenging in those first initial weeks of the rollout,” said Avery Cohen, a spokeswoman for Mayor de Blasio.

    In his own planning for the vaccine rollout, Mr. Cuomo spoke with hospital executives, outside consultants and a top hospital lobbyist in closed-door meetings. In December, Mr. Cuomo announced that the state would rely on large hospital systems as “hubs” to coordinate vaccinations, not simply for their own staff but also for ordinary New Yorkers.

    In other words, with the return of indoor dining just weeks away in NYC, it’s beginning to look like Cuomo’s vaccine rollout isn’t designed with efficiency in mind; instead it was inspired by a megalomaniac politician desperately trying to sell copies of his new book while virtue-signaling. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 20:20

  • One Bank Throws Up All Over The Surge In COVID Optimism
    One Bank Throws Up All Over The Surge In COVID Optimism

    With every passing day since the Biden inauguration, which also coincides with the day new covid cases in the US peaked

    … and hospitalizations plunged by a record amount

    … the covid-related news gets better and better as blue-city after blue-city rushes to reopen after scrambling to enforce full lockdowns into the presidential election.

    Furthermore, in the best covid-linked news yet, just a few hours earlier, we learned that covid vaccinations in the US topped the number of cases for the first time…

    … and with 1.3 million vaccines now being given out daily, one can argue that it’s only a matter of months before herd immunity is reached.

    To summarize where we stand, the covid newsflow before and after the Biden inauguration is night and day, with cases and hosptializations tumbling while the daily pace of vaccination has risen from around 200k at end of last year to more than 1 million today. Meanwhile, after a widely-anticipated post-holiday surge, cases have dropped 41% from their peak. Are we out of the woods?

    One bank disagrees with this cheerful assessment, and in a note from BofA economist Aditya Bhave, he warns that the worst may be yet to come as he remains “concerned about the new, more contagious virus strains out of the UK, South Africa and Brazil.”

    Why? Because according to BofA simulations, even a very optimistic pace of vaccination cannot fully offset their impact the mutations they become dominant. Therefore the bank’s base case is that cases and hospitalizations will actually return to their post-holiday peaks in the early spring (as shown in the chart below).

    It could get even worse: in BofA’s pessimistic case, the new strains cause a larger increase in underlying transmission, pushing cases and hospitalizations to unprecedented levels and potentially forcing lockdowns in March-April.

    Only BofA’s optimistic case sees no “spring wave” , yet ominously Bhave then says that he views this scenario “as the least likely.”

    However, after the spring doldrums, it then starts getting better again and “by the summer, enough people would have been vaccinated to slow even the more contagious virus strains.” This should allow for significant economic reopening.

    After the summer, BofA expects another wave in the fall due to colder weather pushing activities indoors and holiday super-spreader events. The size of this wave will be a function of the speed of vaccination. And, as the bank finally concedes, “vaccination slows in our baseline scenario because of hesitancy among the younger population. But if a sufficiently rapid rate of inoculation can be maintained through year-end, we might be able to avoid a fall surge and sustain full economic re-opening.”

    Which will be a problem for one simple reason: as we noted earlier, a majority or 51% of Americans, are unlikely to want to get vaccinated, which means that while the rate of vaccinations is currently surging, once the early candidates get vaccinated, the daily pace will fall off a cliff as half the nations refuses the vaccine. What impact that will have on BofA’s pessimistic scenario remains to be seen, although as even the bank admits, in its base case, only about 50% of the population is immune by year-end.

    This is most likely insufficient for herd immunity. Some restrictions will likely remain in place through at least next winter, such as capacity constrains at restaurants, sporting events and concerts. Therefore the economic headwind from the virus will linger.

    Which, of course, is good news for banks and markets, because it means even more stimulus, and as the bank concludes, “we expect about $1tn of President Biden’s proposed package to get passed. This would take the total fiscal response to the pandemic up to nearly 25% of GDP.” In the end, however, the course of the virus pandemic will shape the contours of the US economy, and according to the BofA economist, “in the first half of the year, we expect growth to be largely supported  by fiscal stimulus. By the summer, however, economic re-opening should release pent-up demand for services. Thus we forecast a peak of 10% growth in 3Q. The impact of stimulus fades in the second half of the year, but so does the virus, allowing the economy starts to stand on its own feet.”

    The only question is just how hot will inflation be running at that point, and will the US economy be sliding headfirst into a stagflationary trap, forcing the Fed to take out the Volcker playbook and rapidly hike rates even though doing so would crash the market…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 19:59

  • Financial Services Committee To Hold GameStop Hearing On Feb 18  
    Financial Services Committee To Hold GameStop Hearing On Feb 18  

    Robinhood CEO Vlad Tenev is expected to testify before the House Financial Services Committee on Feb. 18 as lawmakers probe the company’s decision-making to restrict customers from trading GameStop (GME) shares last week, sources told Politico

    The hearing was later confirmed by a press release from the committee describing the virtual hearing will be entitled: “Game Stopped? Who Wins and Loses When Short Sellers, Social Media, and Retail Investors Collide.” The hearing is scheduled for Feb. 18 at 12:00 PM ET. 

    Robinhood’s decision to restrict customers from buying stocks, along with forced liquidations, drew immense criticism from both major parties, including Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez and Sen. Ted Cruz. 

    House Financial Services Chair Maxine Waters wants to investigate the possible role hedge funds had in influencing Robinhood to restrict trading on GME after the video game retailer soared 1,500% in a matter of weeks, pulling off the “mother of all short squeezes.” During the squeeze, multiple hedge funds, including Melvin Capital, were blown up

    “I am concerned about whether or not Robinhood restricted the trading because there was collusion between Robinhood and some of the hedge funds that were involved with this,” Waters told MSNBC this weekend. 

    Rep. Al Green, who chairs the Financial Services Oversight Subcommittee, wants more information on the role if any, Citadel had in influencing Robinhood to act. 

    Green said Monday he wants to know “whether or not there was something about this relationship that caused Robinhood to act, or did Robinhood act because of reasons associated with its liquidity.”

    Meanwhile, Robinhood raised billion of dollars over the last few days to fund capital shortfalls due to catastrophic risk management and disastrous back-office operations. In an open letter to customers, the company covered up its capital deficiencies by telling everyone the new capital is “to invest in record customer growth”…

    Robinhood reiterated that it “limited buying in volatile securities to ensure it complied with deposit regulations,” according to the open letter. Or rather was it because the Depository Trust & Clearing Corporation jacked-up deposit requirements ten-fold?

    While Robinhood and r/WallStreetBets traders trigger marketwide short covers, especially with today’s monster silver squeeze, regulators, including the U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) is “closely monitoring” silver markets, according to Reuters

    Silver prices jumped to eight-year highs as retail traders piled into silver stocks and ETFs, along with some grabbing physical silver, resulting in a massive premium for physical at popular bullion websites. 

    The CFTC “is communicating with fellow regulators, the exchanges, and stakeholders to address any potential threats to the integrity of the derivatives markets for silver, and remains vigilant in surveilling these markets for fraud and manipulation,” acting chairman Rostin Behnam said in a statement.

    To sum up, markets are broken; they’ve been broken for the last decade. Thank the Federal Reserve for that. Let’s hope lawmakers ask the right questions on Feb. 18 and don’t give Wall Street a free pass. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 19:40

  • Florida Town Reviewing Trump's Residency At Mar-A-Lago Resort
    Florida Town Reviewing Trump’s Residency At Mar-A-Lago Resort

    Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times,

    Palm Beach is reviewing whether it’s legal for former President Donald Trump to reside at his Mar-a-Lago resort.

    Town Manager Kirk Blouin told The Epoch Times that the town’s attorney, John Randolph, is conducting a legal review.

    “Our Town Attorney, John Randolph, is reviewing the Declaration of Use Agreement and our Code of Ordinances to determine if former President Trump can live at Mar-a-Lago,” he said via email.

    Randolph didn’t return an inquiry.

    The Trump Organization has said it’s legal for Trump to live at Mar-a-Lago.

    Then-President Donald Trump’s Mar-a-Lago Club is shown in Palm Beach, Florida, on Aug. 31, 2019. (Joe Skipper/Reuters)

    Trump changed his permanent residence from New York to Florida in 2019.

    “I cherish New York, and the people of New York, and always will, but unfortunately, despite the fact that I pay millions of dollars in city, state, and local taxes each year, I have been treated very badly by the political leaders of both the city and state. Few have been treated worse,” he wrote at the time.

    Trump left the White House in Washington on Jan. 20 and flew to Palm Beach as his successor Joe Biden was sworn in.

    Built in 1924 and purchased by Trump in 1985, the resort sits on the coast. The 20-acre grounds is a private club that contains a pool, a spa, and a restaurant.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 19:20

  • Kremlin Tells US 'Back Off' Navalny Case As Viral 'Putin Palace' Story Deflated
    Kremlin Tells US ‘Back Off’ Navalny Case As Viral ‘Putin Palace’ Story Deflated

    For a second straight weekend, Sunday saw more protests break out across major Russian cities in support detained Kremlin critic and opposition activist Alexei Navalny, with Reuters citing that more than 5,300 were detained amid a police crackdown.

    Moscow is again telling the US to butt out of its internal affairs after US Secretary of State Antony Blinken issued a statement condemning the arrests of demonstrators. 

    “The US condemns the persistent use of harsh tactics against peaceful protesters and journalists by Russian authorities for a second week straight,” Blinken tweeted Sunday. “We renew our call for Russia to release those detained for exercising their human rights, including Aleksey Navalny.”

    Via EPA/BBC

    In response Kremlin spokesman Dmitry Peskov lashed out at the “illegal protests” which it had previously cast as being a manufactured controversy driven by outside support for the anti-Kremlin protest movement.

    “We are not prepared to accept or heed American statements about this,” said Peskov.

    “There can be no conversation with hooligans and provocateurs, the law should be applied with the utmost severity,” Peskov added of Navalny’s supporters.

    The dissident has been urging them to take to the streets from his jail cell. Tens of thousands took to the streets this past weekend, with many again clashing with police donned in riot gear.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Russia’s prison service is urging a Moscow court to hand Navalny a sentence of up to three-and-a-half years in jail stemming from a 2014 criminal conviction for which he was on probation when in August of last year he was life-flighted to a Berlin hospital after an alleged nerve agent poisoning by Russian intelligence. He’s been accused of skipping probation and then not returning the Russian soil as was previously mandated by the court.

    Currently Navalny is serving a 30-day jail sentence as the court mulls additional charges which stem initially from the 2014 embezzlement case, which he’s said was “politically motivated”.

    Things have also gotten interesting regarding Navalny’s allegations that Putin has erected a $1.3 billion palace on the Black Sea. Navalny has charged that it was paid for “with the largest bribe in history”.

    YouTube screenshot showing what’s alleged to be “Putin Palace”

    A video produced by Navalny’s team detailing the palace and alleging it was built using stolen government funds has gone viral over the past week. The footage is being featured prominently in Western mainstream media. Time magazine describes

    Two days after Alexey Navalny, head of Russia’s Anti-Corruption Foundation (FBK) was arrested on his return to Moscow from Berlin, he released a video expose that shocked Russians and people around the world. In the video, “Putin’s palace. History of the world’s largest bribe,” Navalny alleged that an opulent property near Gelendzhik, a town in the southern Russian region of Krasnodar, was constructed for Russian President Vladimir Putin with illicit funds of $1.35 billion, provided by members of his inner circle, and that Putin is the real owner of the palace.

    The Time report continues of outrageous expenses:

    The palace’s features apparently include a port, a vineyard, a church, a casino, an underground hockey rink, and toilet brushes costing $850 a piece. “It is a separate state within Russia… And in this state there is a single, irreplaceable tsar. Putin,” Navalny said in the video. Allegedly covering an area of 17,691 square meters, it is the largest private residential building in Russia. Putin denied the claims. “Nothing listed there has ever belonged to me or my close relatives,” he said Tuesday.

    Except the story is already fast being deflated, with massive holes being poked in the allegations.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    For starters, Russian billionaire Arkady Rotenberg has since come forward to say the so-called “Putin Palace” actually belongs to him.

    “A video report about the vast palace, by Kremlin critic Alexei Navalny, went viral across Russia and has now been watched more than 100m times,” begins BBC, before doing to detail that “Mr Rotenberg, a billionaire with close links to Mr Putin, went public claiming to be the owner on Saturday. The revelation came in an interview posted on the pro-Kremlin Mash Telegram channel, before being confirmed to the Interfax news agency.”

    “I have managed to strike a deal with creditors a few years ago, and I became a beneficiary of this site a few years ago,” Rotenberg’s press office said. The statement added that the Russian billionaire plans to turn it into a hotel.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here are clips from the original Navalny-produced documentary which was greatly enhanced with CGI, or computer-generated imagery:

    Meanwhile, an investigative reporter with the Russian media news site Mash published a video which appears to debunk the original Navalny video. The reporter filmed fresh footage from the Black Sea mansion which appeared to reveal that Navalny’s video was “faked” and heavily edited.

    The Mash footage shows what appears to be a partially finished building, but which still looks like an active construction site. 

    Critics have pushed back, however, claiming the Mash correspondent is “Kremlin-linked”.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 19:00

  • How FinTech F**ked Financial Market Structure, Exposed The Social Contract, & What Comes Next
    How FinTech F**ked Financial Market Structure, Exposed The Social Contract, & What Comes Next

    Via The FinTech Blueprint,

    Despite its best efforts to the contrary, Robinhood did end up stealing from the rich and giving to the poor.

    Melvin Capital, the $8 billion hedge fund that didn’t find GameStop funny, lost 53% of its portfolio in January ($7 billion) trying to short against the rallying cries of the Reddit Capitalist Union. Gabe Plotkin also faces the embarrassment of having to get bailed out by your old boss.

    Speaking of, New York Mets owner and former name-on-the-door of SAC Capital, known most recently for its insider trading fine of $1.8 billion, Steven A. Cohen, put $2.8 billion of capital into Melvin’s fund.

    Ken Griffin, owner of the Citadel hedge fund (an investor in Melvin), and Citadel Securities (a massive market maker and buyer-of-order-flow for Robinhood), is seeing capital losses in the former and Washington cries for scrutiny into market structure in regards to the latter.

    Robinhood itself — which for goodness sake is *not Wall Street*, but as *Silicon Valley* as it possibly gets — raised $1 billion immediately to protect itself from class action lawsuits, DTCC capital calls, and a now-rapidly-closing IPO window. That means Yuri Milner of DST Global chipping in yet again.

    That’s at least 4 people that have had a very bad, no good day.

    The Reddit Wallstreetbets army has 8 million members. Robinhood has 13 million users. These are the opposing force. They are, loosely speaking, having a pretty good day.

    But there are other billionaires who are having way more fun with this too. World’s richest man Elon Musk is raising the crypto rallying flag, and ex-Facebook billionaire Chamath Palihapitiya is trading along with Reddit for quick profits. Decentralized hedge fund and all. This isn’t how much money you have. This is about a mindset, and a framing of the world. It’s about who you are, and who you are not. And it’s about what you did and did not do.

    Do you side with the Internet’s gamer heroes, wearing Nyan cat shirts and crying out sarcastically for “moar Stonks, money printer go brrrr, number go up”! A post-Gawker-4chan swirl of human vectors, coalescing into one giant middle finger to every Karen and Ken? Dopamine splashing out from our pituitary glands into a vortex tornado of well-earned resentment.

    Or, do you like your finance suited, ministerial, administrative, and gated? Do you think that it is storied, respectable, and *important*. That you have to go to HYP, and then do your “two and two” at Goldman and HBS, before hopping to KKR or Tiger or SAC and then into your own cozy fund. All that work, all that sweat for the GMAT and the SAT and the bootlicking, to be undone by someone literally making fun of you in the language of money.

    It’s not about some truth about Wall Street, or Silicon Valley, or the Internet, or Bitcoin, or DeFi, and least of all about GameStop. Those are just flags of our armies. And we are at war with ourselves.

    Market Structure on Display

    GameStop is a mall shop that sold video games. The mall shops that rented videos (Blockbuster) or sold books (Borders) are bankrupt and rightly dead. The Internet, and its children Netflix and Amazon, killed them. And yet, their names are etched into the collective childhood memories of millions. GameStop has no chance against Steam or Epic — both brands that are also deeply loved by nerds all over the world. We say this as self-incrimination. And yet, GameStop is a symbol, a feeling, a reminiscence.

    The person building financial models and analyzing this stuff according to economics is “right” to point out bad things about “fundamentals” of the business. Within the game of financial capital markets, the fundamentals are the gears of the economic machines that you evaluate with capital decisions. You buy good fundamentals, says Warren Buffet, and you sell bad ones. Another Warren, Elizabeth Warren, also believes in fundamentals. She believes in them so much she wants government to regulate them into the market to protect consumers from losing a traditional approach to value, and “fair, orderly, and efficient function”.

    All that might be right, and we are not doubting the wisdom of Keynes, or the animal spirits. But Warren Buffet is no longer number one. It’s an Elon Musk world now.

    Fundamentals are what the financial doctors will tell you that you have. Do you think the Internet cares about their diagnosis? No. The Internet cares about being patronized by people in coats. Musk and Chamath are the mushrooms of the Internet. It is in their DNA.

    The GameStop trade itself is worth a pause. While some of the original thinking by DeepF*ckingValue that led to his $30+ million capital gain reflected on the GameStop business, the core insight was market structure. The trade was not about GameStop beating its analyst estimates, or any of that boring-play-by-the-rules stuff. It was about a short squeeze. It was about restricting the supply of the stock in such a way as to blow up a levered short bet that Melvin Capital was putting into play.

    In other words, we are talking about the metagame, not the grunt Excel spreadsheet game. SAC, Tiger, Point72, Melvin Capital and every other hedge fund worth its salt plays the metagame. That’s the whole point. You get a PhD in financial instruments by doing the work and testing the levers, rather than believing in them blindly. And Wallstreetbets dared to play the metagame as well. Retail investors aren’t supposed to self-organize into a hivemind of levered derivatives strategy driven by spite. And here we are.

    To go short, Melvin has to borrow. To borrow, you have to pay an interest rate. To cover your short, you have to buy back the stock. You’re paying an interest rate and have to buy back the stock. Nobody is selling you the stock, because they hate you. Everyone is buying, to troll you specifically. They are levering up with options. And you keep raising your bids until you cover your position.

    Robinhood is a broker/dealer. They came into being in Silicon Valley, a place where consumer services are free, because they are actually not services, but honeypots that aggregate user demand, package it at large scale, and re-sell attention to advertisers. Such is Facebook and Google. Our lives are better because of these services, but also compromised and profoundly insane.

    Robinhood uses this playbook to aggregate consumer demand with the honeypot of free trading, and then sends it to market makers like Citadel Securities and gets paid $600 million for the orders. TD and eTrade and other discount brokers do this too! But Robinhood does it most, and does it best. Check out our prior explanation with Paul Rowady here.

    There is nothing unusually nefarious going on — it is just American capital markets structure and a clever lead-generation arbitrage. That is if customers are still getting best-execution with Citadel. But the structure is ancient by modern technology standards, and far from real-time. It takes 2 days for a trade to settle, and this among other reasons leads to a requirement of capital to be placed with a “clearing house”, in this case the DTCC. Given the volatility in GameSpot caused by the Internet trying to break a hedge fund the way Soros broke the Bank of England, capital requirements skyrocketed ten-fold.

    Robinhood, as well as TD Ameritrade, ended up restricting trading in the instrument as a result of this capital call. If you are burning and raising a USD billion per year, you probably don’t have a “tenfold” of cash lying around to give to the DTCC to make them feel comfy. So, you know, they just removed the “Buy” button for a whole bunch of crusaders on a mission, with their capital on the line. They didn’t remove the “Sell” button, and threw fire on the Internet conspiracy meme machine.

    Was this done on instruction from Citadel billionaires? Was this the banksters colluding against the common person? Was “Wall Street” trying to take away our constitutional freedom to trade on a mobile app? Even Ted Cruz and Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez found common ground in finding someone to blame!

    If it caused losses in reliance, then damages will come. They will follow the class action lawsuits and the rioters.

    The New Social Contract

    It’s not a lot of rioters yet.

    But remember, Fintech — including Robinhood, Revolut, SoFi and the rest — is supposed to democratize access to financial services. That meant very little a decade ago, and “dumb money” was disorganized and uninformed. Now, information is free and available to all. Equities trading is largely costless and frictionless. And the scariest part, for the suited part of finance anyway, is that strength lies in numbers and can now self-organize.

    In addition to this, we have the crypto currency ecosystem. Unlike Fintech, which went after distribution, blockchain goes after manufacturing. If you are a trader or market-maker on Ethereum, there is no clearing house. There is no broker/dealer. There is only you, and the distributed machine with its smart contracts, automated rule sets, and software-enforced property rights. All data is real time. The blocks click into being one after another without a single lawyerly piece of paper in sight. Hundreds of millions of people in the world have touched this asset class, and it renders financial intermediaries unnecessary in their imagination.

    Now don’t get us wrong. A trade on Ethereum is going to cost you $10 to $100 today, and another 1% in slippage. It is going to cost you some immeasurable but ever-present probability of cyber risk and regulatory overhang. But you nobody can take away your “Buy” or “Sell” button, and the speed and scale issues are mere technical problems to be solved by the entrepreneurial gods.

    Here’s the rub. Post-fintech-crypto-democratization and all.

    Humans are social animals. It is on our bones. The concept of fairness has been selected through the evolutionary filter, and fueled a cooperation-based multi-billion person civilization. We’ve shared the below video before, but check out again what it means for our monkey relatives to experience unfairness. After a minute of injustice, you can see the monkey occupying Wall Street.

    Redditors are monkeys in the same way that we at the Fintech Blueprint are monkeys.

    Democracy is not oligarchy. Democracy means that each person has one vote. If you were to vote according to assets under management, which is how finance has done it to date, you get very different outcomes than when you vote person-by-person. James Madison is deeply eloquent around these points in the Federalist Papers, talking of the dangers a democratic majority will impose on its minorities. Unintentionally funny is the mention of an unchecked power to sacrifice the obnoxious individual, i.e., Melvin Capital.

    So we now have a set of promises and representation from companies like Robinhood that suggest a democratic empowerment of individuals to access the storied products of finance. Most people don’t know, or want to know, how the actual machine works. When the promises have a gap to reality, because of whatever reason, this creates kinetic energy for Twitter and Reddit.

    It creates energy for people in position of leverage who understand the machine, and want it to change. Elon Musk hates short-sellers for their dampening, and perhaps manipulating, effect on his promises of Tesla greatness. Certainly Chamath, having launched endless SPACs to take Silicon Valley Fintech distributors like SoFi public, understands the machine as well. For them, this tear in the fabric of reality is a power. It is a rallying cry.

    If we really want to put this into dystopian, let’s at least reference the theory of overcrowding elites from Peter Turchin. The historian eerily predicted the 2020 rioting and disaffection back in 2010, suggesting that too societies fall apart when they over-produce members of the ruling class. Education has minted PhDs, MBAs, and entrepreneurs who have no seat to inherit from a retiring predecessor. As a result, they take on the populist mantle, and position themselves as outsiders to attack the insiders, while of course being fabulously gifted. Thus Donald Trump and all the rest.

    If you are holding power today, you probably don’t want everything to fall apart just because Redditors hate a caricatured notion of hedge funds. So you tweak things at the edges. Edit out the glitches in the current Matrix. It is through this lens that we see Google deleting 100,000 negative Robinhood reviews for being “inauthentic”.

    Of course they were coordinated. But they were very authentic to the people that wrote them. They were, however, “inauthentic” to the current rule-set of the game. Based on fundamentals, market structure, and a variety of other “this is how things work” explanations, Robinhood did nothing wrong. Nor did Melvin, really, as far as we can tell from the media coverage. They just played a game that has become a cartoon that millions of people despise. Google’s app store is also an incumbent, a rule-set as well of what constitutes good behavior and what you should do according to its Terms, and so on. Protecting Robinhood’s reputation because it did not fundamentally err is what you do when you believe the current system works.

    What’s also notable is that TD and other brokers that couldn’t support trading didn’t get such a backlash. The answer as to Why? is obvious — the brand promise of Robinhood is to bring in a new world, which it simply can’t do using old world tools.

    Who wins and who loses?

    This is a rich vein, but we’ve got to wrap up. How does this all shake out?

    In the short term, it’s a bit of a mess. Robinhood is getting amazing publicity, and like Facebook, will flourish in growth despite repeated calls to “cancel it”. It will IPO a year late, but with 10 million more pragmatic users who don’t care about Internet culture. Its Fintech competitors, Public and WeBull, will pick up disenchanted users who still want to trade stocks.

    Crypto/Fintech bridges like FTX or Synthetix will get some of that spill over as well, by creating trading pairs in Reddit darling stocks with derivatives. Coinbase will win, as more people start to believe in the underlying philosophy of crypto assets. They will win so much that their websites will break under new volume.

    Regulators have an urgency here, and scapegoating will be important. It’s possible that order-flow payments are restricted as a result, like they are in Europe, even though that has little to do with collateral calls from the DTCC. Or perhaps, they finally see the benefits of blockchain-based capital markets infrastructure, and open up the gate to stronger innovation in clearing and settlement, however improbable that sounds. We don’t see how the traditional finance world benefits from this at all — as increased scrutiny usually lead to more regulation and downward fee pressure.

    Longer term, the people will win.

    We are in an age of anarchic, capitalist collectivism. This philosophical word soup is important to understand. The populism that seeped out of Donald Trump’s presidency, with roots in the right-wing Internet, and the anarchic trolling pleasures of Anonymous, 4chan, and Crypto Twitter, will continue to put focus on and find leverage in the needs of the “people”. This is at the expense of “those in power”, despite such words holding little meaning but lots of emotion.

    This reactive population is increasingly cohering into decentralized communities with pointed power. We see this as the rise of a type of unionism or collectivism in the Internet age. Unlike unions of the past, which protected against participation in an unfair employment arrangement, our new unions are collectivist digital farms. For example, Google is seeing the organization of its workers according to ethical issues. Or, blockchain-based decentralized autonomous organizations are running financial ecosystems with broad-based governance. And do we have to mention Reddit partnering with the Ethereum foundation?

    Even longer term, however, is where there is a thick fog. As we move more of our economic activity onto decentralized software and participate in DAOs, as decentralized finance eats traditional finance, there is a redistribution of value. Early adopters of the crypto paradigm earn asymmetric returns for the risk they take — the risk of being entirely wrong, and being perceived as anti-social psychopaths.

    This all evens out once the new machine and its digital property rights enforcement mechanisms are up and running. But collectivization is no cakewalk. It can become a tragedy. Taking the crown from Silicon Valley and Wall Street is not a friendly game, as we can already see with something as silly as GameStop. Also, collectivization often fails; it loses to free market capitalism in the annals of history.

    A good answer eludes us. For now, we hold dearly the question.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 18:40

  • Carson Block Defends Short Selling, Says He's "Not Part Of The Establishment"
    Carson Block Defends Short Selling, Says He’s “Not Part Of The Establishment”

    Days after prolific short seller Andrew Left called it quits to focus on long-only research, another well known name in the industry, Carson Block, is stepping in to defend short selling.

    Block reminded Bloomberg on Monday that his firm works to uncover fraud and he “rejected the idea popular on Reddit’s WallStreetBets forum that short sellers are a part of the establishment”.

    The short seller said his firm’s work continues to be important because the supply of people committing fraud hasn’t decreased. In fact, we’d argue, it has increased significantly. 

    Block – standing at odds with several Fed governors over the last 48 hours who have apparently adopted a “see no evil, hear no evil” approach to monitoring the markets – argued that “financial markets are broken” and said that solutions could lie in higher interest rates and taxation.

    Recall, at the end of January, we noted that Block had significantly cut back his firm’s short exposure in names. 

    He told Bloomberg last week: “There are no medals for valor in this business. Being one of the more high-profile short-sellers, it would not be smart for us to have appreciable risk on in any name.”

    Additionally, Carson claimed that the parabolic moves look less like the product of Reddit-driven retail orders than a short squeeze by hedge funds targeting other hedge funds.

    “I’ve wondered, is there coordination with these hedge funds?” Block said in an interview on Bloomberg Television.

    “What constitutes coordination? Did they cross the line? That could be interesting.”

    For now, it’s an unproven theory, but while the history-making retail uprising last week was the catalyst, as other funds smelled blood in the water, they likely piled on (far less sinister sounding than Bloomberg’s suggestion that this was all “a convenient smokescreen for internecine hedge-fund warfare.”)

    Block is one of the most well-known names on Wall Street, cutting his teeth by helping to expose a number of frauds – many U.S. listed and China based – over the course of more than a decade. Block was one of the first people to help make the Luckin Coffee short thesis widely available – a thesis that eventually wound up proving true when the company was found to be guilty of massive accounting fraud. 

    He said he started paring back his positions about two weeks ago when he noticed that a squeeze could be brewing in GSX Techedu, a company his firm has been short, and has been a vocal critic of. After watching GameStop’s run up, Block decided it was time to take more of his firm’s short exposure off the table. One name he has covered is Nano-X Imaging, Ltd., which was added to Cathie Wood’s ARK Israel Innovation ETF in recent days. He continued:

    “The mob is specifically hunting short-sellers. We didn’t have the misfortune of being in GameStop.”

    The firm was able to “reduce risk in [its] last big position” last Wednesday, Block said. “We expected a retail-buying mania,” Block said.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 18:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 1st February 2021

  • The Largest Experiment On Humans Ever Seen
    The Largest Experiment On Humans Ever Seen

    Authored by Rob Slane via TheBlogMiore.com,

    Which is the more reasonable approach a society might take in the outbreak of epidemic:

    1. To quarantine the sick, and take reasonable precautions to stop those who are identified as vulnerable from contracting the illness.

    2. To attempt to “control the virus” by preventing millions of healthy people from having contact with other healthy people.

    To any society prior to 2020, it would have been obvious that the first approach is not only logical and proportionate, but the one least likely to have other unintended and highly destructive consequences. However, to my continued astonishment, many in our society not only believe that the answer is the second, but they somehow believe it to be based on established science.

    Now I understand that many who support Lockdown will object to my characterisation of their position. They will say that it is deliberately misleading, since it talks about healthy people, and does not mention the sick. Such objections founder, however, on this undeniable fact: Lockdowns are, by their nature, an entirely untargeted and indiscriminate approach to a health issue, and the prohibiting by law of millions of healthy people from having contact with other healthy people is a feature, not a bug of a policy that was untried and untested before it was first implemented by the Chinese Communist Party in January last year, then copied by many Governments around the world thereafter.

    For some reason, many Lockdownists seem to think that the onus is on Lockdown opponents to disprove their position. But as Dr Malcolm Kendrick points out in his excellent piece – Does Lockdown Work or Not, this is the opposite of how things are supposed to work:

    “The starting point, for any scientific hypothesis, is for the proponents to disprove the null hypothesis. Demanding that those who believe something may not work, to prove that it doesn’t, is to turn the scientific method upside down. You can never prove a negative.”

    Even so, he goes on to point out that most of the countries with the highest deaths per million are those which had fairly stringent Lockdowns, and therefore the data so far most certainly does not show that Lockdowns are effective, even on their own terms. Of course, Covidian Logic always has an answer to this, which is that these Lockdowns weren’t real Lockdowns. They were too little, too late, too soft, too lenient, too short, too small, too purple or something like that! But they can never be wrong. Low death rates show they work. High death rates show they would have worked if only people hadn’t been bad.

    But the main point I wish to make about them is that they are not something that has been proposed, studied or trialled before, but are an entirely new practice, foisted upon the world for the first time in 2020. Which means what? It means that they are an experiment in real time. It means that our society (along with many others) has for the last year, and continues to be for the foreseeable future, subject to an experiment. In fact, the largest psychological, social and experiment ever conducted.

    When I use this sort of language, it tends to meet the following mocking response: “So are you saying it’s all a mass conspiracy? Who’s the puppet-master then?” But this just misses the point. It does not need some Dark Lord sitting over all of it in order to be an experiment, although it has to be said that the likes of Professor Schwab do seem keen on putting themselves forward as pretty good candidates. No, it simply is by definition a psychological, social and economic experiment by the very nature of the fact that the mass quarantining and mass masking of millions of people, which cannot fail to change the psychology, society and economy, are untried, untested methods, based merely on hypothesis, and not on hard data. In fact, the data is still coming in from this enormous experiment, but as Dr Kendrick says, it doesn’t actually look good for the hypothesis:

    “…I would conclude that the observational studies had – thus far – failed to disprove the null hypothesis. In fact, the evidence up to this point could suggest that lockdowns may actually increase the death rate. In short, I would look for another idea.”

    But the psychological, social and economic experimentation are by no means the end of it. We have now moved on to the medical experimentation, by which I mean the giving of so-called “vaccines” to millions of people (so-called because they don’t actually stop people getting the virus, and it is not yet known whether they prevent transmission).

    Incredibly, if you look at the Pfizer BioNTech SE Clinical Study Trial on the US National Library of Medicine Clinical Trials database, you will notice something very odd, which is that the Estimated Study Completion Date is on January 31st 2023. This is:

    “the date on which the last participant in a clinical study was examined or received an intervention/treatment to collect final data for the primary outcome measures, secondary outcome measures, and adverse events.”

    In other words, the medium to long-term side effects of this product cannot possibly be known, because the study is still ongoing. The long and short of it, as Professor Sucharit Bhakdi points out in this excellent interview (watch it soon before the YouTube Gatekeepers scrub it) is this: every single person now getting these jabs is effectively an unwitting test subject in the largest medical experiment ever carried out, having been asked to give their consent to receive a product injected into their bodies without being properly informed as to the status of the product.

    Simply put, neither those administering these jabs nor those receiving them can have any idea of the potential medium to long-term consequences of these things, because the companies producing them have not completed the studies on them. And no, it is not the mark of an anti-vaxxer to be deeply concerned about this (I am not); it is just the mark of having one’s critical faculties in working order and of caring about what is being done to people – it’s called Loving Your Neighbour as Yourself.

    In summary, both Lockdowns and the “vaccines” are essentially a mass experiment on humanity. The mid to long-term consequences of both are entirely unknown. Future generations will marvel at how the authorities were able to do this, but they will marvel even more at how millions of people acquiesced without much thought. None of this can possibly bode well. We need to humble ourselves and take a long hard look at what we are doing, or allowing to be done to us, as a matter of the utmost urgency.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 02/01/2021 – 02:00

  • China Doesn't Have To Lift A Finger To Push Biden Around
    China Doesn’t Have To Lift A Finger To Push Biden Around

    Authored by Gordon Chang via The Gatestone Institute,

    The Biden administration has just endorsed one of China’s most vicious attack lines against the United States.

    The new administration’s actions look as if they are setting a pattern for its responses to Beijing on the disease and other matters.

    On January 26, Biden signed his executive order titled “Memorandum Condemning and Combating Racism, Xenophobia, and Intolerance Against Asian Americans and Pacific Islanders in the United States.”

    The order states that during the coronavirus pandemic “inflammatory and xenophobic rhetoric has put Asian American and Pacific Islander persons, families, communities, and businesses at risk.”

    There is nothing wrong with protecting minorities from racism, but racism is not the problem. “Political correctness presages policy incorrectness,” writes the Claremont Institute’s Ben Weingarten on the Newsweek site, commenting on Biden’s executive order. “And when it comes to matters of life and limb, political correctness can kill.”

    Weingarten is correct.

    “Xenophobia” has been a constant Biden theme. On January 31 of last year, President Trump announced the “travel ban,” prohibitions and restrictions on arrivals from China.

    Within moments of the announcement, Biden went on the attack. “This is no time for Donald Trump’s record of hysterical xenophobia and fear mongering to lead the way instead of science,” he said.

    Biden’s campaign said the attack was not in response to the travel ban, yet on the following day the candidate expressed the same thoughts in a tweet: “We need to lead the way with science—not Donald Trump’s record of hysteria, xenophobia, and fear-mongering.”

    There was nothing “xenophobic” about Trump’s travel ban. It was imposed on arrivals from the country where the disease first appeared. The ban, therefore, saved lives, and it would have saved even more if it had been stricter, announced sooner, and had been more rigorously enforced.

    Biden was against the China travel ban, and if he had been president then, the disease would almost certainly have spread faster in America. He was, during the campaign, against all such travel prohibitions.

    Then, Biden’s criticisms of the travel ban aligned perfectly with Beijing’s attacks on Trump—and on the United States.

    Now, Biden is supporting another Chinese propaganda campaign. “The Federal Government must recognize that it has played a role in furthering these xenophobic sentiments through the actions of political leaders, including references to the COVID-19 pandemic by the geographic location of its origin,” declares the January 26 executive order.

    The order is expected to result in a ban, across the federal government, of the use of “China virus,” “Wuhan flu,” and variants.

    President Trump emphasized “China virus” early last year, in response to Beijing’s statements. On March 12, the Chinese foreign ministry launched disinformation attacks, accusing the U.S. of being the origin of the coronavirus disease and hiding its source. An official foreign ministry tweet made explicit the claim that official Chinese sources had been hinting for more than a month: The United States was ground zero for COVID-19.

    Beijing has not given up on this malicious line of attack. This month, Beijing, with absolutely no evidence, has been pointing to Fort Detrick in Maryland as the source of the disease.

    The Chinese regime, which to this day uses geographical names for strains of virus, has been trying to ban any identification of China with the pandemic. Biden, with his executive order, is doing Beijing’s work as Chinese leaders try to deflect blame.

    “The Chinese Communist Party would love to see itself delinked from the coronavirus pandemic that originated on its shores, that it sought to cover up, that it helped spread around the world, and that it has cynically sought to exploit at every turn,” writes Weingarten.

    “So Beijing must have been cheering when it got word of a gift, in this regard, from President Joe Biden.”

    Moreover, Biden, within hours of taking the oath, rejoined the World Health Organization (WHO), something else Beijing wanted because, as a practical matter, it controls the political leadership of that body.

    This decision was especially hideous because WHO was complicit in China’s deliberate spread of the disease. WHO disseminated Beijing’s position that the coronavirus was not readily contagious even though the organization’s senior doctors knew it was highly transmissible. Moreover, WHO championed the Chinese campaign against travel bans.

    Americans died because of these and other indefensible actions on the part of WHO, and now Biden will go back to legitimizing and supporting that organization.

    China’s challenge to America is comprehensive, on every front. So far, Biden has taken steps that certainly encourage Beijing. His rejoining the Paris Agreement, his cancellation of the Keystone XL Pipeline, and his repeal of the ban on Chinese equipment in the American electrical grid, among others, favor, directly or indirectly, Beijing. Also of great concern is the failure of Commerce Secretary nominee Gina Raimondo to confirm that Huawei Technologies will remain on the department’s Entity List.

    Analysts say Beijing is testing Biden. Yes, but so far the Chinese do not need to lift a finger. The new president is giving them what they want, and they are not even having to ask.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 23:40

  • Visualizing World Leaders In Positions Of Power Since 1970
    Visualizing World Leaders In Positions Of Power Since 1970

    Who were the world leaders when the Berlin Wall fell? How many women have been heads of state in prominent governments? And who are the newest additions to the list of world leaders?

    This graphic, via VisualCapitalist’s Avery Koop, reveals the leaders of the most influential global powers since 1970. Countries were selected based on the 2020 Most Powerful Countries ranking from the U.S. News & World Report.

    Note: Switzerland has been omitted due to the swiftly changing nature of their national leadership.

    The 1970s: Economic Revolutions

    Our graphic starts in 1970, a year in which Leonid Brezhnev ruled the Soviet Union, while on the other side of the Iron Curtain, Willy Brandt was presiding over West Germany.

    In the U.S., Richard Nixon implemented a series of economic shocks to stimulate the economy, but resigned in scandal due to the Watergate tapes in 1974. In the same time period, China was undergoing rapid industrialization and economic hardship under the final years of rule of communist revolutionary Mao Zedong, until his death in 1976.

    In 1975, the King of Saudi Arabia, Faisal bin Abdulaziz Al Saud was assassinated by his nephew. The decade also marked the end of Park Chung-Hee’s dictatorship in South Korea when he was assassinated in 1979.

    To cap off the decade, Margaret Thatcher became the first female prime minister of the United Kingdom in 1979, transforming the British economy using a laissez-faire economic policy that would come to be known as Thatcherism.

    The 1980s: Reaganomics and the Fall of the Wall

    The 1980s saw Ronald Reagan elected in the U.S., beginning an era of deregulation and economic growth. Reagan would actually meet the Soviet Union’s president, Mikhail Gorbachev in 1985 to discuss human rights and nuclear arms control amid the tensions of the Cold War.

    The 1984 assassination of the Indian prime minister, Indira Gandhi was also a defining event of the decade. She was succeeded by her son, Rajiv Gandhi for only seven years before his own assassination in 1991.

    The ‘80s were clearly turbulent times for world leaders, especially towards the end of the decade. In 1989, the Berlin Wall fell and Germany was reunified under chancellor Helmut Kohl. 1989 was also the year when the devastating events occurred at the Tiananmen Square protests in China, under president Deng Xiaoping. The event left a lasting mark on China’s history and politics.

    The 1990s: War 2.0 and the Promise of the EU

    The beginning of a new decade marked the end of the Cold War and the fall of the Soviet Union, leading to Boris Yeltsin’s position as the first president of the Russian Federation. A sense of peace, or at least the knowledge that a finger wasn’t floating above a nuclear launch button at any given moment, brought a sense of global calm.

    However, this does not mean the decade was without conflict. The Gulf War began in 1990, led by the U.S. military’s Commander-in-Chief George H.W. Bush. In the mid-90s, prime minister Yitzhak Rabin of Israel was assassinated by Jewish extremists.

    In spite of this, the ‘90s were a time of optimism for many. In 1993, the European project began. The European Union was founded with the support European leaders like the UK’s prime minister John Major, France’s president Francois Mitterrand, and chancellor Helmut Kohl of Germany.

    The 2000s: Historic Firsts and Power Shifts

    The dawn of a new century had people feeling both hopeful and scared. While Y2K didn’t end the world, many transformative events did occur, such as the 9/11 attacks in New York and the subsequent war on terror led by U.S. president George W. Bush.

    On the other hand, Angela Merkel made history becoming the first female chancellor of Germany in 2005. A few years later, Barack Obama also achieved a momentous ‘first’ as the first African-American president in the United States.

    The 2000s to early 2010s also revealed rapidly changing power shifts in Japan. Shinzō Abe rose to power in 2006, and after five leadership changes in seven years, he eventually circled back, ending up as prime minister again by 2013—a position he held until late 2020.

    The 2010s: World Leaders Face Uncertainty

    The 2010s were more than eventful. The Hong Kong protests under Chinese president Xi Jinping, and the annexation of Crimea led by Vladimir Putin, uncovered the wavering dominance of democracy and international law.

    UK Prime Minister David Cameron’s move to introduce a Brexit referendum, resulted in just over half of the British population voting to leave the EU in 2016. This vote led to a rising feeling of protectionism and a shift away from globalization and multilateral cooperation.

    Donald Trump’s U.S. presidential election was a shocking political longshot in the same year. Trump’s stint as president will likely have a longstanding impact on the course of American politics.

    Two countries elected their first female leaders in this decade: president Park Geun-Hye in South Korea, and prime minister Julia Gillard in Australia. Here’s a look at which global powers have been led by women in the last 50 years.

    2020 to Today

    No one can avoid talking about 2020 without talking about COVID-19. Many world leaders have been praised for their positive handling of the pandemic, such as Angela Merkel in Germany. Others on the other hand, like Boris Johnson, have received critiques for slow responses and mismanagement.

    The year 2020 packed about as much punch on its own as an entire decade does, from geopolitical tensions to a nail-biting 2020 U.S. election. The world is on high alert as the now twice-impeached Trump prepares his transfer of power following the riot at the U.S. Capitol.

    The newest addition to the ranks of world leaders, Joe Biden, has recently taken his place as the 46th president of the United States on January 20, 2021.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 23:15

  • America's Trust In The Mainstream Media Hits An All-Time-Low (And "Journalists" Are Shocked)
    America’s Trust In The Mainstream Media Hits An All-Time-Low (And “Journalists” Are Shocked)

    Authored by Robert Wheeler via The Organic Prepper blog,

    Given the 24/7 hysterical propaganda coming from mainstream media, it is easy to see how Americans are clueless about current events’ true nature, whether it be politics, COVID, or foreign policy.

    But, there is some good news.

    For the first time, most Americans do not trust the mainstream media

    According to PR firm Edelman’s Annual Trust-Barometer, fewer than half of all Americans trust the mainstream media despite the constant propaganda onslaught. 

    Anyone in journalism or media could have told you long ago this would be the case. The dinosaur knowns as Mainstream Media is dying. Before Google conspired with Zuckerberg and other digital giants to crush alternative media, those alternative outlets competed with and beat MSM.

    MSM and Big Tech attempted to put a stop to that revolution, but the damage was done. Alternative media gave a large portion of the American people a glimpse of real journalism, and, ever since, MSM has been slowly withering.

    Edelman’s “Trust Barometer” shows that Americans’ trust in the media establishment has now hit an all-time low in 2021, falling three more points to 46 percent. For the first time, that figure has dropped below the 50 percent mark.

    Social media is taking blows to the chin, with Americans’ trust ranked at only 27% for content found on Facebook, Twitter, and the like.

    The lack of faith in the mainstream is not exclusive to America. Across the world, belief in social media is only 35 percent. Globally, only 35 percent of people rank social media as trustworthy for “general news and information.”

    Other related information shows that Americans are not happy with journalists or the journalistic profession either. Fifty-six percent of Americans said journalists are “purposely trying to mislead people by saying things they know are false or gross exaggerations.”  Fifty-eight percent agreed that most media outlets were “more concerned with supporting an ideology or political position than informing the public.” This website published an article about how the MSM was goading the public back in 2018.

    Strange and not so strange statistics regarding politics and Big Business

    One unsurprising statistic is that there is a sharp difference between Biden and Trump supporters when breaking up the political party numbers. Only 18 percent of Trump supporters said the mainstream media was trustworthy, while fifty-seven percent of Democrats said MSM was trustworthy. Ironically, though more than half, 57% is far from an overwhelming majority.

    With ties to major corporations and particularly Big Oil, Edelman is not “independent.” These connections were quickly called out by many people online, suggesting the general public may be savvier as to who is behind media outlets than they were before.

    The one strange statistic that emerged from this poll (possibly due to the polling firm’s connections mentioned) was that out of Government, Media, NGOs, and Big Business, the only group trusted by most Americans was Big Business. One factor that might explain more trust in Big Business than other institutions is the veritable war on the American economy declared by the ruling class due to COVID and climate hysteria.

    Journalists respond to Edelman’s report with a plea to help rebuild the infrastructure

    Axios and other “journalists” who responded to Edelman’s 2021 report have seized upon this nugget of trust in Big Business to call on those CEOs to “visibly embrace the news media” to help corporate media outlets.

    “Now it’s time for [CEOs] to use the trust they’ve built up to help rebuild our civic infrastructure,” Axios stated.

    Axios also wanted these CEOs to reach out to Trump supporters who generally have a much more favorable view of Big Business than Biden’s base. Some, however, are wondering if this might hurt the businesses more than help MSM.

    Axios also realized that media distrust was not only an American issue but a global one. Therefore, it was not merely a “function of Donald Trump’s war on ‘fake news.’” But that didn’t stop the “news” site from blaming the audience for daring to put their faith in the journalistic profession. The site even posted links to help worried journalists recognize if they’ve overplayed their hands in their propaganda pieces.

    Note: Trust in companies headquartered in the United States fell four points to another all-time low of 51 percent.

    Many MSM journalists may be shocked at the lack of trust by Americans

    It may be a real eye-opener to many journalists working for mainstream outlets that most of America does not trust them or the corporations they work for. Journalists who are shocked by this seem trapped in their own bubble. After four years of the Russia hoax, “everything is racism” reporting, “largely peaceful” protests immediately turning into “terroristic riots,” Trump supporters know full well they cannot trust MSM. 

    The wave of censorship that has been ongoing in this country for years should confirm that the mainstream media is running scared. Of course, discerning readers already knew mainstream media was nothing more than propaganda, and that’s why, even after Big Tech tried to crush it, the alternative media still survives.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 22:50

  • Here's The App Robinhood Investors Are Using To Join Class-Action Lawsuit Over GameStop Quagmire
    Here’s The App Robinhood Investors Are Using To Join Class-Action Lawsuit Over GameStop Quagmire

    Thousands of pissed off Robinhood investors are using a convenient app to join a class action lawsuit against the trading platform over temporary restrictions placed on GameStop and several other stocks, preventing people from buying securities in a move that artificially suppressed prices.

    The service, DoNotPay.com, typically helps streamline the often-confusing process for consumers to get refunds and cancel subscriptions. As of Thursday, it can also help people join the Robinhood lawsuit, according to CEO Joshua Browder, who says he received hundreds of messages from enraged users, according to CNBC.

    The lawsuit was filed Thursday in the Southern District of New York after Robinhood temporarily restricted GameStop trading on its platform. That enraged many small investors who were trying to get in on the GameStop trading frenzy of the past few days. –CNBC

    “Robinhood is not acting in the consumer’s best interest,” said Browder. “A lot of users who sign up aren’t the most sophisticated investors. They feel betrayed by a platform that has the literal name Robinhood.”

    By Friday afternoon, approximately 26,000 people had joined the class action, while 4,000 had filed complaints with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). According to Browder, 400 more had entered arbitration via DoNotPay.

    In order to participate, DoNotPay users need to detail their losses, and provide information on when their trades were halted. The law firm handling the class action is then notified of the potential participant’s desire to join.

    DoNotPay charges an annual fee of $36 for its services.

    “Some people might disagree with that, but we don’t want to have the same business model as Robinhood,” which, Browder said refers to commission-free trades.

    “If you don’t pay for the product, you are the product.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 22:25

  • Medical Tyranny: CDC Announces All Travelers Must Wear Two Masks, Threatens Arrest
    Medical Tyranny: CDC Announces All Travelers Must Wear Two Masks, Threatens Arrest

    Authored by Joseph Jankowski via PlanetFreeWill.news,

    The Center for Disease Control has issued a new coronavirus order requiring DOUBLE masks to be worn for all forms of public transportation in the United States.

    From CNN:

    The CDC announced an order late Friday that will require people to wear a face mask while using any form of public transportation, including buses, trains, taxis, airplanes, boats, subways or ride-share vehicles while traveling into, within and out of the US.

    The order goes into effect at 11:59 p.m. Monday.

    Masks must be worn while waiting, boarding, traveling and disembarking, it said. The coverings need to be at least two or more layers of breathable fabric secured to the head with ties, ear loops or elastic bands — and scarves and bandanas do not count, the order says.

    The CDC said it reserves the right to enforce the order through criminal penalties, but it “strongly encourages and anticipates widespread voluntary compliance” and expects support from other federal agencies to implement the order.

    The tyrannical order comes after Joe Biden signed an executive order last week requiring all travelers to wear mask on federal property.

    The establishment has been recently pushing double masks despite the ongoing rollout of the COVID-19 vaccines and decline in coronavirus deaths.

    White House coronavirus task force leader Dr. Anthony Fauci is now promoting “double masking”, despite saying in March of last year that wearing ANY masks wouldn’t prevent the spread of COVID.

    “So, if you have a physical covering with one layer, you put another layer on, it just makes common sense that it likely would be more effective and that’s the reason why you see people either double masking or doing a version of an N95,” Fauci said this week.

    “Inside Edition” also lauded Biden, Mitt Romney, and Tom Cruise for double masking recently.

    And the New York Times called for Americans to wear a second mask layer earlier this month in an op-ed titled, “One Mask Is Good. Would Two Be Better?

    With “double masking” now being openly pushed, a new slippery slope of mask wearing has been introduced, with some articles beginning to promote TRIPLE masking to prevent the spread of COVID-19.

    Sen. Rand Paul (R-Ky.) pushed back against the mask insanity earlier this month, urging Americans, “if you’ve had the disease or you’ve been vaccinated and you’re several weeks out from the second dose, throw your mask away.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 22:00

  • US Corruption Hits Highest Since 2012 Amid COVID Bailouts & Democracy Doubts
    US Corruption Hits Highest Since 2012 Amid COVID Bailouts & Democracy Doubts

    Transparency International has released its 2020 Corruption Perceptions Index which gauges levels of perceived public sector corruption in 180 countries and territories around the world. The index scores them on a scale of zero (highly corrupt) to 100 (clean) with the average score just 43 out of 100. As Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes, two thirds of countries scored less than 50. The research found that corruption was rampant across the world in 2020 and that it undermined the response to Covid-19, threatened the global recovery and contributed to democratic backsliding. 

    Transparency International states that 2020 has shown that Covid-19 is not just a health and economic crisis but also a corruption crisis. When it comes to healthcare in particular, corruption takes many forms such as bribery, embezzlement, overpricing and favoritism. Reports of corruption have grown since the pandemic broke out and countless lives were lost due to the issue undermining a fair and equitable global response.

    Countries with high investment in healthcare tended to perform better in the index with corruption diverting money away from essential services. Governments that saw higher corruption levels, regardless of economic development, tended to invest less in their health systems. 

    Infographic: Where Corruption Is Rampant | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    In 2020, the countries with the lowest perceived level of public sector corruption were Denmark and New Zealand with a score of 88, followed by Finland, Singapore, Sweden and Switzerland. The opposite end of the index saw South Sudan and Somalia scoring just 12, making them the worst offenders. Syria, Yemen and Venezuela were also among the lowest-scoring countries.

    The United States only came in 25th with a score of 67, its worst performance since 2012.

    Infographic: The Best and Worst-Ranked Countries For Corruption | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Transparency International attributes this to its unprecedented $1 trillion Covid-19 relief package which “raised serious anticorruption concerns and marked a significant retreat from longstanding democratic norms promoting accountable government.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 21:35

  • Hedge Fund CIO: "No One Stress Tests Their Books For A 7.6 Sigma Move"
    Hedge Fund CIO: “No One Stress Tests Their Books For A 7.6 Sigma Move”

    By Eric Peters, CIO of One River Asset Management

    “Hear that scream?” he whispered from one of those multi-manager monstrosities. “That’s the sound of someone’s face being ripped off,” he said, uneasy, flashing me a couple risk reports. “Another quarter, another million-year flood,” he said, exasperated, the cataclysms appearing ever more frequently.

    “They’re grossing us down, they got to. No choice.” In the background, a cacophony of sickening howls, grown men begging for mercy, crying like babies, to each his own. “My book is airtight, got my head down,” he said, his factors lightly touched. The wrath of deleverage, passing mercifully by. “What a terrible way to earn a living.” 

    Temple of Doom

    “We waited to hear what Powell thinks about asset bubbles,” said Indiana Jones, our industry’s leading archeologist, explorer. “He admitted markets may be ahead of themselves.” Echoes of irrational exuberance reverberated through the ages. “But he said interest rates aren’t the right weapon for whipping asset bubbles,” he explained. “This then frames the issue as a regulatory matter,” he said. “But they never really define matters of financial stability. Powell passed the problem to Yellen without a clear mechanism for the Treasury or the SEC to respond.”
     
    “So what does Yellen think about financial stability?” asked Indiana. “She doesn’t,” he said, exploring her archives. “In her final Jackson Hole speech, she emphasized the Fed had been on a mission to make banks safe, and they were, so market risks were in the hands of private investors who understood what they were doing.” The Fed obviously changed their minds in March 2020, saving over-leveraged investors from themselves. “So Powell just punted issues of macro stability to Treasury, where Yellen will bury them. And we’re left right back where we started.”
     
    Crazy Ivan

    “Monday, Short-Interest factor had a 3 standard deviation move higher. Hedge Fund factor fell -1.3 standard deviations,” said CO2, gasping for air. “Tuesday, Short Interest factor jumped 5.9 STD. HF ownership fell 2.4 STD,” he added. “Wednesday, Short Interest jumped 7.6 STD. HF ownership fell 4.5 STD.” Risk managers swung the scythe. “Thursday, Short Interest fell 2.5 STD. HF ownership was up 2.3 STD. That’s when Robinhood restricted trading,” said CO2. “Then Friday felt like any other day, despite the S&P 500 puking 1.9%.”
     
    “Our biggest prime broker said this week was one of the largest gross downs they’ve ever seen,” continued CO2, his position tiddy. “No one stress tests their books for a 7.6 standard deviation move.” Last time things went wrong was when the momentum factor turned abruptly. This time some minuscule retail stock sparked the short squeeze. “Obviously there are too many funds running highly-leveraged factor-neutral books,” said CO2. “The breadth of the blowups is widening, the depth of pain deepening. But will anything change? Nope.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 21:10

  • Watch: Cargo Ship Battered By Heavy Seas Snaps In Half 
    Watch: Cargo Ship Battered By Heavy Seas Snaps In Half 

    A general cargo ship split in half and sank after it was battered by heavy seas off Turkey’s Black Sea coast, according to Maritime Industry News Agency.

    The vessel ARVIN (International Maritime Organization number: 8874316) was en route from Poti, Georgia to Burgas Bulgaria when the captain made the call to anchor at Bartin to protect the vessel from the storm. 

    Maritime Industry News Agency said, “most probably, the vessel couldn’t stand against strong wind and waves, and either broke in two, or was overwhelmed while being anchored.” 

    ARVIN is a river-sea cargo vessel that is not designed to handle the impact of rough seas. This is the likely reason the cargo ship split in half. 

    An alleged video of the incident was uploaded onto YouTube this weekend. It appears ARVIN’s crew, stationed at the bridge of the ship, captured the moment the cargo ship split in half. 

    Watch: ARVIN Splits In Half 

    It was noted by Maritime Industry News Agency the vessel sank, with six crew members rescued, four dead, and three missing. 

    Continuing down the rabbit hole of recent maritime disasters, we noted a California-bound containership lost 750 containers due to “rough seas.”

    Last month, another containership headed for California lost a record 1,816 units, of which 64 are believed to be Dangerous Goods containers.

    How long until climate change is blamed on these maritime disasters? 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 20:45

  • Trump Names New Lead Lawyers For Impeachment Defense Team
    Trump Names New Lead Lawyers For Impeachment Defense Team

    Update (2035ET): Trump has secured new legal counsel

    Authored by Janita Kan via The Epoch Times

    Former President Donald Trump on Sunday named two attorneys who will lead his impeachment defense legal team.

    The two lawyers who will represent the former president in the upcoming Senate trial are David Schoen, an attorney from Alabama, and Bruce Castor Jr., a former prosecutor in Pennsylvania.

    This comes a day after media reports, citing anonymous sources, said an earlier group of attorneys from South Carolina were no longer participating in the defense.

    South Carolina-based lawyer Butch Bowers had previously been tapped to lead the president’s legal team but parted ways over differing opinions on the direction of the defense arguments, the reports said. Other lawyers on the team who also left were Deborah Barbier and former federal prosecutors Greg Harris, Johnny Gasser, and Josh Howard.

    The Epoch Times reached out to the lawyers for confirmation about their departure.

    Jason Miller, a Trump adviser, confirmed the reports of a reshuffle on Saturday evening, saying that the “final decision on our legal team” had not yet been made.

    On Sunday, Trump’s office released a statement saying that Schoen and Castor would now lead the team, and that Schoen had already been working with Trump and other advisors in preparing for the upcoming trial.

    “It is an honor to represent the 45th President, Donald J. Trump, and the United States Constitution,” Schoen said in the statement.

    The new team has about one week to strategize what direction it will take in the defense. Opening arguments are scheduled to begin on the week of Feb. 8.

    Republicans have begun uniting behind the argument that the Senate impeachment trial of a former president is unconstitutional, a question that has sparked a heated debate among legal scholars and lawmakers.

    “Dem. efforts to impeach a pres. who has already left office is unconstitutional & so bad for our country. In fact, 45 Senators have already voted that it is unconstitutional,” Miller said in a statement.

    On Jan. 26, Sen. Rand Paul (R-Ky.) raised a point of order on the Senate floor, forcing the chamber to take a stance on the constitutionality of the upcoming proceedings. The Senate ultimately voted 55-45, meaning that the trial will go ahead. But it also revealed that nearly half of the chamber is of the view that the proceedings are unconstitutional.

    Castor said the upcoming trial is expected to test the “strength of our Constitution.”

    “The strength of our Constitution is about to be tested like never before in our history. It is strong and resilient. A document written for the ages, and it will triumph over partisanship yet again, and always,” he said in the statement.

    Castor previously served as a solicitor general and acting attorney general of Pennsylvania.

    The Democrat-controlled House on Jan. 13 voted 232–197 to impeach Trump on a single article of impeachment, alleging that the president incited an “insurrection” that caused the U.S. Capitol breach on Jan. 6.

    The impeachment was completed in a single seven-hour session and has been criticized by Republicans for its expediency and lack of due process.

    Although Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer (D-N.Y.) is going ahead with the impeachment trial, the 55-45 vote for Paul’s order could be an indication that a Trump conviction is unlikely as a two-thirds majority is needed to convict.

    Follow Janita on Twitter: @janitakan

    *  *  *

    Attorneys who had planned on representing President Trump in his upcoming impeachment trial have reportedly quit the case over Trump’s insistence that they present election fraud claims as part of their defense, rather than their recommended strategy of arguing the constitutionality of holding a trial for a former president.

    In this Sept. 10, 2009, file photo, attorney Butch Bowers speaks during a news conference at the Statehouse in Columbia, S.C. Bowers is used to defending public officials in ethics cases. (Photo: Mary Ann Chastain, AP)

    The team, led by South Carolina Lawyer Butch Bowers (recommended by Sen. Lindsay Graham (R-SC)) and which includes South Carolina lawyer Deborah Barbier, left in what was described by Politico as a “mutual decision.” A third attorney, Josh Howard, was reported by CNN as also leaving the team.

    In this April 29, 2016, file photo, attorney Debbie Barbier speaks to reporters outside the federal courthouse in Charleston, S.C. (Photo: Bruce Smith, AP)

    New attorneys are expected to be announced shortly.

    The decision by Bowers, Barbier, and Howard to not join the team raised immediate questions, both about what compelled them to part ways and who actually will play the role of lawyer to Trump when the impeachment trial starts in early February.

    Trump has had difficulty finding legal help for his second impeachment, with some of the lawyers who worked on his first trial saying they wouldn’t do the same this go around.

    Bowers’ hiring was first announced by Trump ally and South Carolina Sen. Lindsey Graham. A longtime Republican attorney, Bowers represented former South Carolina Govs. Mark Sanford and Nikki Haley, and had experience in election law. –Politico

    Trump’s first legal filing in the upcoming impeachment is due on Tuesday.

    In a statement, Trump spokesperson Jason Miller largely ignored the legal rumblings – telling ABC News “We have done much work, but have not made a final decision on our legal team, which will be made shortly,” while slamming the impeachment itself as a sham.

    “The Democrats’ efforts to impeach a president who has already left office is totally unconstitutional and so bad for our country,” said Miller, adding “In fact, 45 Senators have already voted that it is unconstitutional. We have done much work, but have not made a final decision on our legal team, which will be made shortly.”

    Trump was impeached by House Democrats on Jan. 13 on a single article for “incitement of insurrection” after a small group of Trump supporters gained access to the US Capitol, where they wreaked havoc throughout Conressional offices and on chamber floors, before being allowed to casually walk out of the complex.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 20:35

  • Morgan Stanley Reveals The "Three Rules For The New D.C."
    Morgan Stanley Reveals The “Three Rules For The New D.C.”

    By Michael Zezas, Head of U.S. Public Policy Research at Morgan Stanley

    New presidential administration, same investor hand-wringing: what might come out of DC to push financial markets? If you’re struggling to pull some signal from the noise that is lawmakers hedging statements and debating mundanities like ‘budget reconciliation’, you’re not alone. So here are three shortcuts for making sense of the policy debates in DC that will affect markets in 2021.

    • The rule of two Joes: What’s the difference between an aspirational and enacted policy? In our view it is the difference between those espoused by President Joe Biden and those of Senator Joe Manchin, who along with other senators (i.e., Tester, Sinema, Kelly, Warner) represents the Democratic party’s more centrist cohort. With Democrats in control of the White House and Congress, they can pass a lot of legislation…assuming all 50 Democratic senators can agree on its content. The most progressive and most moderate member must agree, as losing either’s support will tank legislation. We think that the legislative power accrues towards the electorally vulnerable center, then, consistent with historical analogues.

    • Deficits break deadlocks: Even proposals which appear to have party consensus, like infrastructure and healthcare spending, face a challenge…there’s agreement to spend the money, but not how to finance it. Progressives and moderates appear far apart on their tolerance for tax increases. But we don’t expect that this will prevent policy enactment. Deficits will bridge the gap. Expanding the deficit does not appear to be a political liability, as surveys show that voters may permit such action in exchange for popular policies. This dovetails with the new economic orthodoxy of the party, where progressives’ flirtation with MMT and moderates’ Keynesianism for the moment agree that the US can push deficits further before inflation becomes a challenge. Said differently, we don’t think that Democrats will let tax and deficit disagreements get in the way of their spending agenda.

    • Boundaries from budget reconciliation: There are plenty of reasons to not expect Democrats to be able to get enough Senate Republican votes for any of their major initiatives to avoid a filibuster. This actually helps to clarify the policy path for investors, as it means viable legislation is only that which can be passed by a simple majority through a workaround called ‘budget reconciliation’. At the risk of oversimplifying, it helps to think about this process as one where legislators can change the numbers on the federal income statement, but not add or subtract any line items. Because of its painstaking process, reconciliation typically can only be executed once per fiscal year. With those boundaries, investors should expect two major pieces of legislation in 2021 with a focus on reconcilable items: stimulus first and then either infrastructure or healthcare after the October start of the next fiscal year.

    In our view, one clear takeaway from these rules is that 2021 will be another year of US fiscal expansion: Applying those rules to the plans of the new administration and its allies in Congress, we think you end up with a policy path that is net supportive to US growth in 2021. Fiscal stimulus can likely get done earlier in the year, though the final number after intra-party negotiation (‘the rule of two Joes’) is likely closer to US$1 trillion than the US$1.9 trillion proposal. An infrastructure or healthcare plan can likely follow, but not until later in the year (‘boundaries from budget reconciliation’) and likely with more moderate tax hikes than progressives espouse (‘the rule of two Joes’) that don’t fully cover the spending (‘deficits break deadlocks’).

    Importantly, this policy course reinforces the US growth path and outlook for a multi-year bull market, though it does not preclude a near-term correction: As our economists have pointed out, the economy is increasingly on solid footing, with substantial excess household savings ready to be deployed once vaccines enable the normalization of economic behavior later this year. Further fiscal support only underscores that the US economy is accelerating into a new, sustained growth cycle, which should support a multi-year bull market.

    Yet this outlook is not without risk to markets, particularly in the short term. As our equity strategy colleagues have pointed out, there are pockets of the market where excessive optimism is priced in, warranting investor caution. US policy issues are one potential catalyst to watch. In the coming weeks, investors could easily conflate banal headlines about legislative negotiation with the more legitimate risk that Democrats are at an impasse on stimulus. Unless such headlines also reference a shift in view among moderate Democrats that improvement in the COVID-19 outlook has mitigated the need for further action, we would fade such confusion and view any related market weakness as an opportunity.

    [ZH: translation – despite the record drop in US hospitalizations and plunge in covid cases, expect the fearmongering to only get worse in order to allow the Dems the green light to pass trillions more in stimulus.]

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 20:20

  • Military Coup Underway In Myanmar As Civilian Leaders Arrested – State TV Off Air, Internet Cut 
    Military Coup Underway In Myanmar As Civilian Leaders Arrested – State TV Off Air, Internet Cut 

    It appears a military coup is underway in the Southeast Asian country of Myanmar (formerly Burma), where a state of confusion has descended on the population with soldiers now patrolling major city streets, and given state TV has also been taken off the air, according to Reuters. 

    The national army says a recent major vote won by the National League for Democracy (NLD) party was “fraudulent,” as a breaking BBC report details:

    Aung San Suu Kyi, leader of Myanmar’s governing National League for Democracy (NLD) party, has been arrested, the spokesman for the party said. It comes amid tensions between the civilian government and the military, stoking fears of a coup.

    The NLD won enough seats in parliament to form a government in November, but the army says the vote was fraudulent.

    The army has called on the government to postpone convening parliament, which was due to take place on Monday.

    Image: A rift between Myanmar State Counsellor Aung San Suu Kyi, left, and commander in chief Min Aung Hlaing had been growing over the past week over contested election results.

    Additionally President Win Myint and senior party figures have been detained as of early morning (local time). 

    Reuters is saying the coup was sparked by an overnight raid:

    Spokesman Myo Nyunt told Reuters by phone that Suu Kyi, President Win Myint and other leaders had been “taken” in the early hours of the morning.

    “I want to tell our people not to respond rashly and I want them to act according to the law,” he said, adding he also expected to be detained.

    And Reuters further suggests a state of chaos in the capital given “phone lines to Naypyitaw, the capital, were not reachable in the early hours of Monday,” and with the military initially refusing to speak to international press.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    International reports are also saying that the internet has been cut in the capital of Naypyitaw, further with soldiers having taken over the streets.

    The situation is incredibly tense not only as a near total information blackout is underway, but also also as supporters of the NLD could hit back at the army with sporadic violence or organized militia activity, potentially sliding the country into civil war.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 19:55

  • Yes, Virginia, The System Is Clearly Rigged
    Yes, Virginia, The System Is Clearly Rigged

    Authored by Omid Malekan via Medium.com,

    Before sharing my opinion on the WallStreetBets events of last week, I want to make one thing clear: I believe strategies like the ones used to drive the price of Gamestop stock higher are reckless and dangerous. I would never participate in them. They are likely to end badly for the majority of those who get involved.

    With that out of the way, let’s review something important that happened last year, when big cap tech stocks like Tesla and Apple started exhibiting unusual volatility to the upside. It turned out that Softbank, one of the largest institutional investors in the world, had been executing a dangerous strategy of buying record amounts of out of the money call options on those stocks. Their actions forced some of the options trading establishment into something called a gamma squeeze, a positive feedback loop that can be thought of as the options markets’ equivalent of a short squeeze. Here’s the FT:

    The surge in purchases of call options — derivatives that give the user the right to buy a stock at a pre-agreed price — has been the talk of Wall Street, as the sheer size of the trades appears to have exacerbated a “melt-up” in many big technology stocks over the past few months. In August alone, Tesla’s share price shot up 74 per cent, while Apple gained 21 per cent, Google’s parent Alphabet rose 10 per cent and Amazon 9 per cent.

    One person familiar with SoftBank’s trades said it was “gobbling up” options on a scale that was even making some people within the organization nervous. “People are caught with their pants down, massively short. This can continue. The whale is still hungry.”

    As the article also points out, it was generally understood that what Softbank was doing (with billions of dollars, no less) was dangerous. Not only could it end badly for them, but it had painted other players into a corner, creating a dangerous dynamic that could reverse abruptly.

    Now, knowing all of that, and having seen the systematic crackdown on retail investors executing a similar strategy last week, we can ask a few simple questions:

    1. How many of Softbank’s service providers refused to execute their trades? How many banks, prime brokers or options dealers said “sorry, this a dangerous strategy that will end badly, plus it puts the rest of the market at risk. You can no longer buy call options on these particular stocks”?

    2. How many veteran financial reporters working in TV or print expressed shock and outrage? How many pontificated out loud about the blatant disregard for fundamental analysis?

    3. How many people at the SEC, Federal Reserve, U.S. Treasury or even the White House actively monitored the situation and worried about the safety of the market?

    4. How many people within the traditional financial establishment argued that perhaps we need tighter regulations to prevent this sort of thing from happening?

    You already know the answer to all of these questions. Even if you don’t understand the technical aspects of how Wall Street works, you know in your heart that so-called institutional investors often do risky, dangerous, and (in retrospect) stupid things, but nobody ever stops them. This despite the fact that every once in a while those same strategies end in disaster and put the rest of the financial system, not to mention the broader economy, in jeopardy.

    You know this because in the back of your mind, you remember something about a fund called Long Term Capital, which was run by Nobel prize winners, blowing up in the late 1990s. You lived through the 2008 crisis and may have read a book like Too Big to Fail or seen a movie like The Big Short. You vaguely remember reading about something called a repo crisis in 2019. You recall how just last year, at the start of the Covid crash, central banks like the Federal Reserve had to pump ten times more money into Wall Street than Main Street, even though ordinary people needed the money more.

    What you understand intuitively about all of these events is that the pros — the supposedly sophisticated investors who control the vast majority of capital in the world — somehow fucked up. They did things that enriched them, but ended up costing society as a whole. And yet, not only did nobody in a position of power try to stop them, but regulators and government representatives — the people who are supposed to be looking out for your best interests — argued that your tax dollars should be used to bail them out. Their gambling didn’t make you any richer, but their crapping out still cost you.

    Despite what the financial media would like you to believe, the most surprising thing about last week wasn’t the fact that a bunch of beaten down stocks went flying. Crazy shit happens in the stock market all of the time, especially in an era of record monetization when the Federal Reserve prints money faster than Taylor Swift releases albums.

    Most of the self-righteous hand wringing was an act. Aggressive investors utilizing leverage in herd-like fashion to pursue a risky bet is nothing new. It’s called trading, and that’s what most money mangers do. They don’t invest. There’s a reason why banks and hedge funds have trading desks and people call it the trading day.

    No. The real controversy last week was about who was winning and who was losing. Retail people on apps like Robinhood aren’t supposed to stick it to the big boys. They are supposed to be the so-called dumb money, the schools of tiny fish that exist so whales like Softbank and Citadel have something to feast on. People who go to Davos aren’t supposed to lose money to kids from Denver. But last week, they did. That’s why the financial establishment reacted so strongly.

    Let me pause here to reiterate my belief that I think this kind of trading is extremely risky and not that far removed from betting at the track, regardless of who is doing it. I strongly advise everyone I know to stay way from margin trading, options and short squeezes. That said, I think people should be free to do whatever they want with their money, especially now that their central bank is doing everything it can to destroy its integrity.

    I am outraged by the hypocrisy of the financial services industry. Any doubt that the system is rigged has been eliminated. Why do the rich only ever get richer? Because of what happened last week.

    In all my years of working in this industry, I have never heard of brokers pulling the plug on their clients because they were making too much money.

    If anyone is to be banned from putting on risky trades, it should be the supposedly sophisticated hedge funds who’ve needed to be bailed again and again, not your cousin who recently bought a few shares of GME in her Robinhood app. Your cousin wasn’t the one who fucked up in 1998 or 2008 or 2019 or 2020. She didn’t drive Lehman Brothers into the ground or destroy MF Global.

    But the financial establishment — the same establishment who’s always gone out of its way to celebrate people like John Meriwether, Dick Fuld and John Corzine — decided that your cousin wasn’t allowed to play the same game, and had the audacity to pretend this was for her own protection.

    The fact that she was making money off of hedge funds like D1 (one of Robinhood’s biggest investors) and Citadel (one of Robinhood’s biggest sources of revenues) had nothing to do with it. The fact that Ben Bernanke has been a senior advisor to Citadel and Janet Yellen has collected almost a million dollars in speaking fees from the same firm had nothing to do with it.

    The issue here isn’t how the aggressive buying of stocks like Gamestop ends, because it’ll probably end badly. The issue is that nobody ever tries to stop hedge fund managers from doing the same exact thing. When they gamble with our futures, it’s called capitalism. But when retail people do it, it’s a menace to society that must be stopped.

    Firms like Robinhood are now claiming that they didn’t freeze trading in a handful of stocks because of some nefarious conspiracy. They did it because the back-end clearinghouses like DTCC who process their trades forced them to put up too much capital for those names. Here’s the New York Times:

    A more detailed explanation: Brokerages post money with the D.T.C.C. to cover customers’ transactions while they wait for the trades to settle. With such a big surge in trading, the clearing hub wanted more assurance: “It’s the D.T.C.C. saying ‘This stuff is just too risky,’ ” said the Bloomberg Intelligence analyst Larry Tabb.

    Other online brokerages also cited the D.T.C.C. as a factor in decisions to impose trading restrictions.

    The brilliance of this excuse is that it only proves the skeptics and conspiracy-theory believers right. DTCC is a for-profit monopoly that sits at the heart of America’s financial system. It is controlled by the biggest Wall Street institutions and responsible for all public equity settlement. A subsidiary of it literally owns every single share of publicly traded stock in America. Yes, you read that correctly. You don’t actually own your shares of Apple or Microsoft, they do. You are only allowed to enjoy the financial benefits of being an investor because your corporate overlords let you. Why? Because the government wants it that way (the fact that financial firms like DTCC always donate a lot of money to politicians has nothing to do with it.)

    It’s quite possible that the above justification for the crackdown is technically true: clearinghouses and firms like DTCC suddenly jacked up their collateral requirements because they were afraid the short squeeze would reverse and end badly. On the surface, this is plausible.

    But why have we never heard of the same thing happening to the institutions who also pursue risky trades, use margin, trade options, and often pile into the same crowded trades? Why didn’t this sort of thing happen last year, at the start of the pandemic? Surely an environment where everything is crashing is more dangerous to the back-end plumbing of Wall Street than one where only a few stocks are going up.

    And therein lies the rub. Hedge funds and billionaires didn’t have to be restricted last year because the government intervened and used trillions of dollars of your money to make sure “the system” kept working for them. Just like it had in 2019, 2008 and 1998.

    Ordinary people don’t get that kind of protection, so they aren’t allowed to play. The billionaires who build ridiculous mansions too close to the water get free flood insurance, but you are a mere renter, so you don’t qualify.

    If our financial system was remotely fair, or at least consistent in its response to unusual developments, then the Fed would have been on the phone with DTCC and Robinhood all week, offering liquidity injections and credit lines to keep the system working. The Treasury department would have begun planning an emergency fund to bail out Gamestop and AMC shareholders if the need arose, and Congress would have begun deliberations on the Troubled Retail Investor Relief Program.

    If.

    Years from now, when most of the world has moved on to a different kind of financial system, a fully transparent one built on fundamental properties of equality and censorship resistance, we will look back on the events of this past week as a key turning point.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 19:30

  • Make Standard Oil Great Again: Exxon, Chevron Have Discussed A Merger
    Make Standard Oil Great Again: Exxon, Chevron Have Discussed A Merger

    Just this past Friday, we lamented that amid the marketwide meltup, one of the very few companies that actually deserves to be higher with or without the help of WSB, oil giant Exxon, simply refuses to do so, and so we begged Melvin Capital to short it (although it now appears that Gabe Plotkin is busy razing a 1930s house to build a tennis court on his Miami mansion).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    That was, of course a joke, but what isn’t a joke is that the two largest US oil companies clearly believe they are undervalued because as the WSJ reported on Sunday afternoon, the CEOs of Exxon and Chevron “spoke about combining the oil giants after the pandemic shook the world last year, according to people familiar with the talks, testing the waters for what could be one of the largest corporate mergers ever.”

    The discussions – which took place after the plunge in oil prices last year – between the Exxon CEO Darren Woods and Cheveron CEO Mike Wirth, “were described as preliminary and aren’t ongoing but could come back in the future” according to the WSJ sources.

    And with XOM’s market cap of $190BN and Chevron’s $164BN, a combination would result in a $350BN E&P behemoth, which would be the world’s second largest oil company by market capitalization and production, producing about 7 million barrels of oil and gas a day, based on pre-pandemic levels, second only in both measures to Saudi Aramco.

    Such a deal would significantly surpass in size the mega-oil-mergers of the late 1990s and early 2000s, which included the combination of Exxon and Mobil and Chevron and Texaco Inc.

    It also could be the largest corporate tie-up ever, depending on its structure. That distinction currently belongs to the roughly $181 billion purchase of German conglomerate Mannesmann AG by Vodafone AirTouch PLC in 2000, according to Dealogic.

    If it proceeds, a deal would also reunite the two largest descendants of John D. Rockefeller’s Standard Oil monopoly, which was broken up by U.S. regulators in 1911, and reshape the oil industry. In other words, if this deal happened, it would go a long way to making Standard Oil Great Again:

    Which is also why such a merger would likely encounter regulatory and antitrust challenges under the Biden administration. President Biden has said climate change is one of the biggest crises the country faces. In October, he said he would push the country to “transition away from the oil industry” whatever that means (conventional energy is responsible for about 90% of US energy production); Still, a deal is not impossible: Biden hasn’t been as vocal about antitrust matters, and the administration has yet to nominate the Justice Department’s head of that division.

    As the Journal adds, in an interview discussing Chevron’s earnings Friday, Wirth, who like his Exxon’s Woods also serves as his company’s board chairman, said that consolidation could make the industry more efficient. He was speaking generally and not about a possible Exxon-Chevron merger.

    “As for larger scale things, it’s happened before,” Wirth said, referring to the 1990s and early-2000s megamergers. “Time will tell.”

    It now appears that he was explicitly envisioning a merger with Exxon.

    According to energy analyst Paul Sankey, who first floated the idea of a merger between Chevron and Exxon last October, a combined company would have a market capitalization of about $300 billion and $100 billion in debt. A merger would allow them to cut a combined $15 billion in administrative expenses and $10 billion in annual capital expenditures, he wrote.

    As for the stock price of XOM and CVX, they certainly wouldn’t need a massive short squeeze to soar, which would be welcome news to the activists who have recently circled around Exxon.

    Some investors have grown increasingly concerned about Exxon’s direction under Mr. Woods as the company faces a rapidly changing energy industry and growing global consciousness about climate change. Some are also worried that Exxon may have to cut its hefty dividend, which costs it about $15 billion annually, due to its high debt levels. Many individual investors count on the payments as a source of income.

    The company’s woes have helped draw the attention of activist investors. One of them, Engine No. 1 LLC, has argued that the company should focus more on investments in clean energy while cutting costs elsewhere to preserve its dividend. The firm nominated four directors to Exxon’s board Wednesday and called for it to make strategic changes to its business plan. Last month it also emerged that Exxon had been in talks with activist hedge fund D.E. Shaw and is preparing to announce one or more new board members, additional spending cuts and investments in new technologies to help it reduce its carbon emissions.

    Unlike virtue signaling European peers BP and Shell, both of which would love to be included in some ESG basket, Exxon and Chevron have had the intellectual honesty of staying the course and haven’t invested substantially in renewables, instead choosing to double down on oil and gas. Both companies have argued that the world will need vast amounts of fossil fuels for decades to come, and that they can capitalize on current underinvestment in oil production.

    They are of course right, and after the next crash, when the faddish ESG idiocy is long forgotten, shareholders will reward the two companies handsomely for having been honest in a time when every company lies.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 19:05

  • Los Angeles County Bans TVs At Bars Just In Time For The Super Bowl
    Los Angeles County Bans TVs At Bars Just In Time For The Super Bowl

    Authored by Rick Moran via PJMedia.com,

    Los Angeles County has decided that bars and restaurants can reopen for outdoor dining only starting on Friday. But there are new draconian restrictions that will kill even more businesses in the end.

    One of the new restrictions involves TVs. There will be no viewing TVs in the outdoor dining areas. With the Super Bowl coming up on February 7, county health officials are worried that having the ability to watch the game at a bar would lead to a “superspreader” event for the coronavirus.

    Super Bowl watch parties are an American tradition and the Super Bowl is one of the biggest days all year for bars and restaurants. Preventing watch parties may be the coup de grace for some small businesses.

    Fox News:

    According to the health order issued by the county, televisions or other screens that broadcast programming must remain off. The rule comes a week ahead of the Super Bowl on Feb. 7.

    L.A. County Health Director Barbara Ferrer said Wednesday she’s worried that the giant sporting event, which usually drives crowds to bars and restaurants for celebrations and watch-parties, will become a “superspreader” event.

    “It will be tragic if the Super Bowl becomes the Super Spreader of coronavirus,” Ferrer said, according to KTLA5. She added that residents should avoid large gatherings and refrain from throwing Super Bowl parties to prevent a situation where the virus can further spread.

    I don’t think there are a lot of football fans working at the county health department.

    Some restrictions are a part of the micromanagement of people’s lives and others make no sense. There is a limit of 50 percent capacity except if the business has a certificate of occupancy with a specific number of patrons allowed. That number will vary depending on the certificate.

    Some of these restrictions make you shake your head in disbelief.

    Eater:

    Another big enforcement issue this time around will be the proper use of all personal protective equipment. As before, servers will need to wear both a face mask (can be cloth) and a face shield, and that mandate has now been extended to anyone who interacts with diners, including runners, bussers, and all front of house personnel. Given the more transmissible new strains of coronavirus going around right now, expect this one to receive particular scrutiny from visiting public health officials in the coming weeks.

    The county has also said no (again) to any live entertainment (including DJs and bands), and that includes televisions — so no Super Bowl parties. Furthermore: “Restaurants may not host receptions, banquets, or other coordinated, organized or invited events or gatherings.” Oh, and no fun tableside preparations or shows like salad spinning or guacamole making, either.

    I guess that means no flaming deserts.

    It’s all for our own good, of course, so if you want to watch the game, you’ll have to do it at home.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 18:40

  • De Blasio Warns Of "Dangerous" Snowstorm As Two Feet Expected
    De Blasio Warns Of “Dangerous” Snowstorm As Two Feet Expected

    Update (1830 ET): The National Weather Service reports New York City’s official snowfall forecast could total around two feet. Snow has already begun falling in the metro area, with the heaviest expected on Monday. Meteorologists are predicting the storm could be one of the worst in years. By Tuesday, as much as 21 inches could blanket all five boroughs.

    “This is not a storm to underestimate,” NYC Mayor de Blasio said Sunday. “Take it seriously. This is a dangerous storm. Tomorrow is going to be a very tough day. If you do not need to be out and about on Monday, stay home.”

    A live shot of Times Square already shows snow is falling as of 1830 ET.

    * * * 

    A powerful snowstorm will impact Mid-Atlantic and Northeast states on Sunday into Tuesday. More than 100 million people are in the path of this “monumental storm,” AccuWeather Chief Broadcast Meteorologist Bernie Rayno said over the weekend. 

    As we noted last week, the storm already struck parts of California with torrential rain and heavy snow, depending on altitude, due to an atmospheric river emanating from over the Pacific Ocean.  

    Rayno said “from the western shores of Lake Michigan, including Chicago and Milwaukee, across northern parts of Indiana and Ohio” will see 6-12 inches of snow by Monday. 

    By Sunday morning, the snow has already begun to fall in the Baltimore–Washington metropolitan area. 

    The impending Nor’easter could dump “most snowfall to Philly in five years,” said CBS Philly.

    Winter storm warnings from Chicago to Richmond to Baltimore–Washington metropolitan area to New York City have already been declared. 

    As we’ve continued to warn about this system and how impactful it could be, more accurate snow total forecast have been posted for the Northeast. 

    “Biggest storm in 5 years?! Impending Nor’easter forecast to bring the most snow to Philly since Jan. 23rd, 2016,” tweeted CBS Philly’s Lauren Casey.

    Across the Northeast, precipitation will increase in intensity overnight through Monday. 

    Weather models are pivoting to much colder weather in the week ahead. Meteorologists at BAMWX are forecasting “a legit colder and wintry period is coming.” 

    … and what does this mean for natural gas prices? Well, BAMWX models are suggesting “16-30 day outlook from Friday AM might turn out to do pretty well. This is the first time this season I’ve seen the NAEFS go cold like this in the 8-14 day. I think a legit cold & wintry pattern looms for much of February esp. from the Plains to Great Lakes to NE.”

    With colder weather on the way, US-Lower 48 heating degree days suggests energy demand to heat commercial and residential structures will increase in the first half of February. 

    Commodity traders could certainly view the shift in cold weather as bullish. 

    BAMWX also forecasts a “big winter storm to track next weekend too!”

    Goldman Sachs will be happy… 

     

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 18:30

  • Ray Dalio: Recent Market "Rebellion" Shows Growing "Anger" And "Intolerance" In U.S.
    Ray Dalio: Recent Market “Rebellion” Shows Growing “Anger” And “Intolerance” In U.S.

    The GameStop controversy has undoubtedly been the “effect” of a much bigger “cause”. 

    And while some of our contributors have offered their take on what, exactly, is behind the revolt, it wouldn’t be commentary about the “economic machine” without Ray Dalio chiming in.

    Dalio weighed in on the recent events involving GameStop and Reddit, which he called a “rebellion”, claiming that last week’s chaos was “another sign of the growing intolerance among those with opposing views”, according to Bloomberg.

    “What concerns me more is the general anger — and almost hate — and the view of bringing people down that now is pervasive in almost all aspects of the country,” Dalio said. “That general desire to hurt one another,” Dalio pointed out.

    He said recent events show that the everyday trader is “beginning to understand the mechanics of the markets”. 

    And what would an interview with Ray Dalio be without him eventually turning the conversation back unto himself. “They remind me a lot of me at that age. I started investing at an early age and I was rebellious and wanted to do it my way and bring it down,” he concluded. 

    And while that’s a lovely anecdote, the truth of the matter is that Dalio may not have any idea of what kind of revolt could actually be on its way.

    He is right, of course, that people are angry. But if those people are also part of a group of hundreds of thousands of brokerage clients who all of a sudden find their “winnings” trapped in a bankrupt broker, the current “anger” may wind up looking like a walk in the park. 

    And as we pointed out days ago, Robinhood’s balance sheet looks all but rock solid, given the circumstances.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 18:15

  • Why Hasn't The House Held Hearings To Establish "Incitement To Insurrection"?
    Why Hasn’t The House Held Hearings To Establish “Incitement To Insurrection”?

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    We recently discussed how the Senate will have to decide whether to call witnesses in the second impeachment trial of former President Donald Trump. The use of a snap impeachment raises a basis for some senators to oppose such witnesses on institutional or prudential grounds. Democrats opposed any witnesses in the Clinton impeachment and there were no witnesses in the first Trump impeachment trial. Not surprisingly, the House is demanding witnesses. The initial vote in the trial shows that it is substantially short of the number of senators needed to convict and Trump could be acquitted on a virtual 50-50 vote. So here is my question: why has the House not used the last few weeks to call these witnesses and build the needed case to show intent to incite an insurrection? Weeks have gone by with key witnesses speaking to the press but not to the House.  Why?

    I raised this possibility weeks ago since such House hearings could influence the Senate trial. Even if the transcripts were barred by the Senate, senators would be aware of the evidence and testimony. There has been limited testimony on the response to the riot but most key witnesses have not been called to public hearings on evidence related to Trump’s conduct or intent. Many are clearly willing to testify since they are speaking openly with the media.

    I have no idea if such evidence exists but I, like most Americans, would like to know if it does. I was critical of Trump’s speech while he was giving it. I also opposed the challenge to the electoral votes and criticized the President’s false statements about the authority of Vice President Mike Pence to “send back” these votes. However, I have also said that, without evidence of intent, this case of incitement would fail in the Senate. Indeed, while many legal experts have claimed that this is a strong case for criminal incitement, I believe it would ultimately collapse in the federal courts on free speech grounds.

    The House can show intent directly and circumstantial from evidence of the President’s conduct and statements before and after the speech.  The National Guard deployment is clearly a place to start.  Did Trump delay or obstruct deployment?  We still do not know despite this being one of the easier questions to answer.  Those questions will not be answered by calling the “Shaman” on whether he felt that Trump wanted him to riot or engage in insurrection. Such testimony will show how Trump’s words were received (which is relevant) but not what he intended.

    There is a tendency in Congress to follow the litigation rule not to ask witnesses questions that you do not know the answer to in advance.  However, the absence of hearings on Trump’s role is glaring as the House managers claim that many in the Senate do not want to hear the truth.  There are two houses of Congress and the Democrats are in total control of the House.

    There has clearly been inquiries and limited testimony but very little information has been made publicly, including information that is clearly in the possession or available to the House. Instead reports indicate that the House is building what was described as an “emotionally charged” case before the Senate with cellphone calls and witness testimony rather than evidence focusing on the intent element. I admit that I have the bias of a criminal defense attorney but that is not a case for conviction. It is a case of public appeal.

    This question is even more striking given the public statements of key witnesses like former Acting Secretary of Defense Chris Miller and his two closest aides, Kashyap “Kash” Patel and Ezra Cohen. Miller says that Trump told him the day before the riot that “You’re going to need 10,000 people.” Miller added  “No, I’m not talking bullshit. He said that. And we’re like, ‘Maybe. But you know, someone’s going to have to ask for it.’” He said Trump responded “You do what you need to do. You do what you need to do. You’re going to need 10,000.’”

    That account shows Trump knew that there might be problems with the rally the next day. Many voiced the same concern. However, it also shows Trump warning that troops would be needed.  The question is whether he did anything to prepare for such a deployment or interfere or delay with deployment. Witnesses like Miller would know. Yet, they are giving interviews but not public testimony under oath.

    The House has held hearings on the riot but those hearings seem weirdly tailored to avoid core issues related to the trial. For example, U.S. Capitol Police chief Yogananda D. Pittman testified but did so in a closed session.  She reportedly apologized to Congress “and the American people” for the obvious securing failures on Jan. 6th. She also said that they were aware of the danger of a riot in advance but failed to take adequate steps” “Let me be clear: the Department should have been more prepared for this attack.”

    Maj. Gen. William Walker, the commanding general of the D.C. National Guard, has also given interviews and said that deployment of his troops were delayed by over an hour because he needed approval from the Pentagon. He said that he usually has authority to deploy without approval. If that is true, why was he not called for testimony in the House to explain the timeline and whether the authority was removed specifically for that day?

    There is a great deal of information in the hands of Congress on the requests for deployment and interaction with the Trump Administration. There are records and other non-witness sources of evidence that could also be used to create a record. Yet, the House has been comparatively passive in calling those witnesses that it wants to hear from in the Senate. Again, why?

    This is the same pattern with the first Trump impeachment when the House waited weeks demanding witnesses that it could have called or subpoenaed before the House Judiciary Committee.  It did nothing and then denounced the lack of testimony on key issues. Both trials turned on intent and the House could not expect to prevail without such evidence.

    It was like a case of planned obsolescence in building a case to collapse.

    There are by my count at least ten key witnesses who have already spoken publicly or would be easily attainable including Miller, Walker, Pittman, Patel, Cohen and others.  Yet, there is nothing but crickets from the House.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 17:50

  • Goldman Warns If The Short Squeeze Continues, The Entire Market Could Crash
    Goldman Warns If The Short Squeeze Continues, The Entire Market Could Crash

    Last Friday (Jan 22) we advised readers who thought they had missed the move in Gamestop (they hadn’t), to position appropriately in the most shorted Russell 3000 names which included such tickers as FIZZ, DDS, BBBY, AMCX, GOGO and a handful of other names, as it was likely that the short-squeeze was only just starting.

    We were right and all of the stocks listed above – and others – exploded higher the coming Monday, and all other days of the week, with results – encapsulated by the WallStreetTips vs Wall Street feud – that have become the only topic of conversation across America (remember the Trump impeachment?), while on WSB the only topic has been the phenomenal gains generated by going long said most shorted stocks. To wit, the basket of top shorts we compiled on Jan 22 has tripled in the past week.

    And while some are quick to blame last week’s fireworks on the “dopamine rush” of traders at r/wallstreetbets who seek an outlet to being “copped up with little else to do during the pandemic” (as Bloomberg has done, while also blaming widespread lockdowns and forgetting that it has been Bloomberg that was among the most vocal defenders of the very lockdowns that have given us the short squeeze of the century), the reality is that at the end of the day the strategy unleashed by the subreddit is merely an extension of the bubble dynamics that were made possible by the Federal Reserve (of which Bloomberg is also a very staunch fan) pumping trillions and trillions of shotgunned liquidity into a financial system where there are now bubble visible anywhere one looks. In short, main street finally learned that it too can profit from the lunacy of the money printers at the Marriner Eccles building, and some are very unhappy about that (yes, it will end in tears, but – newsflash – $300 trillion in debt and $120BN in liquidity injections monthly will also end in tears).

    That aside, one week later, Goldman has finally caught up with what Zero Hedge readers knew one week ago, and all the way down to a chart showing a basket of the most-shorted Russell 3000 stocks…

    … Goldman’s David Kostin has published a post-mortem of what happened last week, writing that “the most heavily-shorted stocks have risen by 98% in the past three months, outstripping major short squeezes in 2000 and 2009.”

    He then points out something we discussed in “Hedge Funds Are Puking Longs To Cover Short-Squeeze Losses“, noting that while aggregate short interest levels are remarkably low (imagine what would have happened has shorting been far more aggressive marketwide)…

    “the -4% weekly return of our Hedge Fund VIP list of the most popular hedge fund long positions (GSTHHVIP) showed how excess in one small part of the market can create contagion.”

    As an aside, and as we showed previously, as the most shorted stocks soared…

    … hedge funds were forced to cover (as well as paying for margin calls), and as part of the broader degrossing they also had to sell some of the favorite hedge fund names across the industry, in this case represented by the Goldman Hedge Fund VIP basket.

    Yet what may come as a surprise to some, even as hedge funds deleveraged aggressively and actively cut risk this week, gross and net exposures “remain close to the highest levels on record” (something which may come as a huge surprise to Marko Kolanovic who has been erroneously claiming the opposite), suggesting that if the squeeze continues, hedge funds are set for much more pain.

    According to Goldman Sachs Prime Services, this week “represented the largest active hedge fund de-grossing since February 2009. Funds in their coverage sold long positions and covered shorts in every sector” and yet “despite this active deleveraging, hedge fund net and gross exposures on a mark-to-market basis both remain close to the highest levels on record, indicating ongoing risk of positioning-driven sell-offs.”

    With that in mind, here are Kostin’s big picture thoughts:

    It was a placid week in the US stock market – provided one was a long-only mutual fund manager. US equity mutual funds and ETFs had $2 billion of net inflows last week (+$10 billion YTD). Although the typical large-cap core mutual fund fell by 2% this week, it has generated a return of +1.3% YTD vs. S&P 500 down -1.1%. However, life was very different last week if one managed a hedge fund. The typical US equity long/short fund returned -7% this week and has returned -6% YTD.

    With the average WSB portfolio up double digits this past week, one can see why hedge funds are upset. Anyway, moving on:

    The past 25 years have witnessed a number of sharp short squeezes in the US equity market, but none as extreme as has occurred recently.In the last three months, a basket containing the 50 Russell 3000 stocks with market caps above $1 billion and the largest short interest as a share of float (GSCBMSAL) has rallied by 98%.  This exceeded the 77% return of highly-shorted stocks during 2Q 2020, a 56% rally in mid-2009, and two distinct 72% rallies during the Tech Bubble in 1999 and 2000. This week the basket’s trailing 5-, 10-, and 21-day returns registered as the largest on record.

    Thanks Goldman, and yes, your “brisk assessment” would have been more useful to your clients if it had come before the event (like, for example, this) instead of after.

    Kostin then goes on to point out that the “mooning” in the most shorted stocks took place even though aggregate short interest was near record low (imagine what would have happened had short interest been higher), which is odd because historically, “major short squeezes have typically taken place as aggregate short interest declined from elevated levels. In contrast, the recent short squeeze has been driven by concentrated short positions in smaller companies, many of which had lagged dramatically and were perceived by most investors to be in secular decline” to wit:

    Unusually, the rally of the most heavily-shorted stocks has taken place against a backdrop of very low levels of aggregate short interest. At the start of this year, the median S&P 500 stock had short interest equating to just 1.5% of market cap, matching mid-2000 as the lowest share in at least the last 25 years. In the past, major short squeezes have typically taken place as aggregate short interest declined from elevated levels. In contrast, the recent short squeeze has been driven by concentrated short positions in smaller companies, many of which had lagged dramatically and were perceived by most investors to be in secular decline.

    Of course, there is nothing “historical” about what happened last week, because – as we all know – the biggest difference between the typical short squeeze of the past and the recent rally in heavily-shorted stocks “was the degree of involvement of retail traders, who also appear to have catalyzed sharp moves in other parts of the market.” Why thank you WSB, but that’s ok – you will be handsomely rewarded.

    Last week we discussed the surging trading activity and share prices of penny stocks, firms with negative earnings, and extremely high-growth, high-multiple stocks. These trends have all accompanied a large increase in online broker trading activity. A basket of retail favorites (ticker: GSXURFAV) has returned +17% YTD and +179% since the March 2020 low, outperforming both the S&P 500 (+72%) and our Hedge Fund VIP list of the most popular hedge fund long positions (GSTHHVIP, +106%).

    So why does this matter? One simple reason: contrary to the bizarrely nonchalant optimism spouted earlier this week by JPMorgan’s Marko Kolanovic who said “any market pullback, such as one driven by repositioning by a segment of the long-short community (and related to stocks of insignificant size), is a buying opportunity, in our view,” Goldman has a far more dismal take on recent events, and writes that “this week demonstrated that unsustainable excess in one small part of the market has the potential to tip a row of dominoes and create broader turmoil.”

    He then picks up on what he said last weekend when responding to Goldman client concerns about a stock bubble, which we summarized in “Goldman’s Clients Are Freaking Out About A Stock Bubble: Here Is The Bank’s Response“, and which turned out to be 100% warranted, and writes that “most of the bubble-like dynamics we highlighted last week have taken place in stocks constituting very small portions of total US equity market cap. Indeed, many of the shorts dominating headlines this week were (prior to this week) small-cap stocks. But large short squeezes led investors short these stocks to cover their positions and also reduce long positions, leading other holders of common positions to cut exposures in turn.”

    As a result, Goldman’s Hedge Fund VIP list declined by 4%. Which is a problem because as Kostin concludes, “in recent years elevated crowding, low turnover, and high concentration have been consistent patterns, boosting the risk that one fund’s unwind could snowball through the market.

    Translation: if WSB continues to push the most shorted stocks higher, the entire market could crash.

    And since Kostin admits that “the retail trading boom can continue” as “an abundance of US household cash should continue to fuel the trading boom” with more than 50% of the $5 trillion in money market mutual funds owned by households and is $1 trillion greater than before the pandemic, what happens in the coming week – i.e., if the short squeeze persists – could have profound implications for the future of capital markets.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 01/31/2021 – 17:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 31st January 2021

  • Only You Can Beat Big Tech Censorship
    Only You Can Beat Big Tech Censorship

    Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

    When Facebook censors Ron Paul, or Twitter bans President Trump, is that censorship?

    Or because these are private companies, does that automatically make it NOT censorship?

    Amazon banned Parler, but is it their right as a private company to choose their customers?

    That’s the crux of the issue I need to address with you in today’s post-Trump world of social media.

    Because make no mistake “Big Tech” repression is a foundational problem facing any society that considers itself even somewhat free. In the wake of the allowed ‘assault on the Capitol’ and the confirmation of Joe Biden as the 46th president of the U.S., the big tech firms which control access to speech went ballistic.

    Conservatives along with President Trump himself were wiped from the public square. Any mention of the election being stolen or open support on Twitter of Trump himself was flushed down the memory hole.

    This is censorship of the highest order by these firms to put parameters around political speech in the U.S. where such a right is enshrined in the Constitution. None of it is constitutional.

    But the problem is far deeper than that. The deplatforming of Parler, one alternative social media platform to Twitter, via corporate collusion by Apple, Google and Amazon was something far more sinister than Twitter silencing the sitting president of the U.S.

    This was a blatant hit job by companies stifling competition in the public square for hosting material which is constitutionally protected as ‘free speech.’

    But these firms, especially Amazon, who terminated Parler’s server hosting agreement with 24 hours’ notice, lazily applied their vague and ever-changing ‘Terms of Service” to single out Parler and hide behind their status as a private company.

    The worst part about this is that libertarians see this as a rational and defensible free market action. And for years adolescent libertarian arguments about corporations being private actors preferable to governments have now been turned around by authoritarians who hang us with our own words.

    And we wonder why conservatives look at us like we have four-heads when we make such arguments?

    When this attack on free speech began, during the 2016 presidential campaign with the first deplatforming of alt-right provocateurs like Richard Spencer and Andrew Anglin of the Daily Stormer website, it was obvious then that these were dry runs for the mass action we’re seeing today, in the name of creating an information-free literal one-party police state.

    It was this that prompted former Silicon Valley programmer Andrew Torba to start Gab. Crazed liberals then said, “If you don’t like Twitter, leave and build your own.”

    So, he did. And after the attack on the Pittsburgh Synagogue in 2018, Gab was given the even worse treatment than Parler got last week.

    They survived that.

    All the while myself and people like Torba were screaming about the duopoly controlling the on-ramp to the mobile web, and no one cared. But we could see this day coming.

    And now it’s here.

    But this is most certainly not a private property issue as much as it is a contract law issue allowed to fester because of government interference into the marketplace for communications.

    Government interference altered the landscape these companies operate in. The grew to the size they are now because of government largesse and federal and state tax revenue into the networks and systems they depend on.

    It doesn’t matter that the duopoly is Google and Apple. It could have been Palm and Microsoft. Or Blackberry and IBM. What matters is that the environment wasn’t a level playing field between the companies and the people using the services.

    They were paying not only for access but at the same time subsidizing the revenue streams by accepting costs these companies outsourced to government.

    It is a cozy arrangement.

    The companies outsource their fixed costs and the government outsources their censorship desires that pesky First Amendment forbids them from doing directly.

    No wonder the response to the allowed assault on the Capitol was so swift and coordinated.

    Think it through folks.

    Amazon’s AWS doesn’t become a dominant player without those vaunted contracts with the CIA. Parler, at a minimum should have an expectation of service per any legal contractual arrangement, and as such is due damages from Amazon for unilaterally breaching that basic trust.

    Facebook doesn’t grow to become the monster it is without strategic investments by quasi-governmental companies like Goldman-Sachs and Morgan Stanley.

    Google doesn’t become the ad revenue generating machine if it had had to properly pay its bandwidth costs for the content they forced on us.

    Trump nixing ‘Net Neutrality’ put some of that onus back on them, giving ISP’s some latitude to price usage according to their needs rather than Google’s.

    All of the above companies, including Microsoft, have been chosen by our government to succeed in this tilted marketplace.

    Apple doesn’t dominate the mobile internet in the U.S. without all those user fees and taxes tacked onto the cost of your monthly cellphone bill.

    If these companies were operating on their own private satellite and wire networks then they would absolutely be in the right, via the application of private property rights, to set whatever terms of service they wanted.

    I, as a libertarian, fully support that.

    And also, as a libertarian, understand that public property always creates a tragedy of the commons scenario.

    But when you operate in the public sphere, when you move your goods and services on the digital equivalent of the public road system (not a digression I want to get into today) and your corporate charter exists within the framework of U.S. and state contract law it is clear that these companies are neither wholly private entities with respect to their customers nor neutral actors trying to enforce public decency standards.

    They are acting in their best interest to stifle competition – Gab, Parler, Minds, etc. – while setting precedents to allow for even further restrictions of speech through lawfare thanks to a complicit and fully cowed legal system.

    And herein lies the smart path to reining them in, if it is at all possible at this point, since it’s clear the Biden Administration is ready to reframe all speech critical of the U.S. government as ‘domestic terrorism’ giving all of these companies the legal justification into the future to unperson all dissent.

    Removing their Section 230 immunity under the Communications Decency Act is paramount. It will not happen now. The government is in on the grift, folks, so looking ahead to the 2022 election cycle isn’t an option.

    They just proved to you your vote doesn’t count, so it means hitting them in the only place they truly care about, their bottom lines.

    So, the first thing to do is sue them into the ground. It will be up to the people themselves to hound these companies through both contract law violations and shareholder revolts because they have done irreparable damage to their brands and their future revenue streams.

    That is what has to happen right now. Parler’s suit against Amazon is a good start. A class-action lawsuit by every small business in America now wondering about Amazon’s policies should end this nonsense quickly.

    A good judge in a sympathetic jurisdiction should side with anyone making a strong case that modern tech company Terms of Service are ‘contracts of adhesion,’ defined as contracts entered into where one party is so much stronger than the other the weaker party is, in effect, coerced into signing it.

    The second thing to do is to simply jack-out. Put the screen down. Stop using it as a substitution for real communications and pull back from the brink.

    De-google your life, as I have. Close your Facebook account permanently. You will feel better immediately, trust me. I did this two years ago, to the detriment of the marketing efforts of my business, and I have never looked back.

    If you need a social network, use Twitter for keeping tabs on things but save your thoughts and your content for Gab or some other, smaller private community you are a part of.

    Being a global citizen is a canard they sold us as some true net positive. But it was something designed wholly to drive us mad and deracinate us to the point of having no home, no culture and no real friends.

    It’s no wonder they are trying so hard to shut off the escape routes and only allow certain platforms to exist forcing us to interact with people we don’t like while locked in our homes over a wholly contrived public health emergency.

    It was always part of the globalist plan.

    Ending this starts with the very libertarian idea of simply opting-out. We don’t need to be plugged into their reality-generating nightmares every moment of every day.

    But the thing about the web is that it is built on protocols which are themselves censorship resistant. So, the tyrants of today will be the footnotes of tomorrow. We’ve seen early attempts at censorship-proof blockchain platforms like Steemit. It’s still running even though its growing pains nearly killed it.

    The next great service is just around the corner because necessity is the mother of innovation. But the first step is accepting the fact that they’ve won this round and it is now time to change the rules of the game.

    P.S.: If you want to see what this looks like, just look at what the guys at Wall Street Bets are doing to the capital markets today. Brokerage outages, trading suspended, newly-minted millionaires.

    All because a bunch of hedgies got over-confident of their one-way skimming and thinking no one would press their luck to the breaking point.

    They have and it is glorious.

    You beat them by turning their supposed advantages and bought-and-paid-for rules of the game back on them.

    *  *  *

    Join My Patreon if you like watching the bad guys take it on the chin

    Donate via crypto:
    BTC: 3GSkAe8PhENyMWQb7orjtnJK9VX8mMf7Zf
    BCH: qq9pvwq26d8fjfk0f6k5mmnn09vzkmeh3sffxd6ryt
    DCR: DsV2x4kJ4gWCPSpHmS4czbLz2fJNqms78oE
    DASH: XjWQKXJuxYzaNV6WMC4zhuQ43uBw8mN4Va
    XLM: GC4S6XUG6CGI7DLKFTLCUKIKYS3BHYE56AF7BQRIWX5EZM355JQYDRHD

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 23:00

  • WHO Team 'Tightly Controlled' By CCP During COVID-19 Origins Investigation
    WHO Team ‘Tightly Controlled’ By CCP During COVID-19 Origins Investigation

    The World Health Organization (WHO)’s probe into the origins of SARS-CoV-2, the virus which causes COVID-19, appears to be nothing more than the media blitz that most skeptics predicted.

    Members of the WHO team tasked with investigating the origins of COVID-19 (photo: Thomas Peter, Reuters)

    According to Reuters, the team’s visit is being “tightly controlled by its Chinese hosts” as they visited a hospital on Saturday in Wuhan which treated early COVID-19 patients.

    On its second day after two weeks in quarantine, the team went to Jinyintan Hospital, where doctors had collected samples from patients suffering from an unidentified pneumonia in late 2019.

    Important opportunity to talk directly w/ medics who were on the ground at that critical time fighting COVID!”, team member Peter Daszak said on Twitter.

    Team members leaving the hospital did not speak to journalists, who have been kept at a distance since the group left its quarantine hotel on Thursday.

    And of course, the team will visit the Wuhan ‘wet’ market tied to the first cluster of cases – except the CCP razed and sanitized the site months ago. Maybe the WHO team can take some memorable photos?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The WHO origins probe prominently includes Peter Daszak – president of EcoHealth Alliance, a non-profit group that has received millions of dollars of U.S. taxpayer funding to genetically manipulate coronaviruses with scientists at the Wuhan Institute of Virology. Of note, Daszak drafted a February, 2020 statement in The Lancet on behalf of 27 prominent public health scientists which condemned “conspiracy theories suggesting that COVID-19 does not have a natural origin.”

    Via USRTK.org:

    [E]mails obtained via public records requests show that EcoHealth Alliance President Peter Daszak drafted the Lancet statement, and that he intended it to “not be identifiable as coming from any one organization or person” but rather to be seen as “simply a letter from leading scientists”.

    Daszak wrote that he wanted “to avoid the appearance of a political statement”.

    The 27 authors “strongly condemn[ed] conspiracy theories suggesting that COVID-19 does not have a natural origin,” and reported that scientists from multiple countries “overwhelmingly conclude that this coronavirus originated in wildlife.” The letter included no scientific references to refute a lab-origin theory of the virus.

    The emails show how members of EcoHealth Alliance played an early role in framing questions about possible lab origin of SARS-CoV-2 as “crackpot theories that need to be addressed,” as Daszak told The Guardian.

    In short, the guy leading the WHO’s faux-investigation was working directly with the Wuhan Institute of Virology’s bat research team, and who insists COVID-19 has a natural origin (and couldn’t possibly have escaped the WIV), has a massive conflict of interest.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 22:30

  • 'Black Lives Matter' Nominated For The Nobel Peace Prize
    ‘Black Lives Matter’ Nominated For The Nobel Peace Prize

    Authored by Monica Showalter via AmericanThinker.com,

    If the Nobel committee’s handing over of the Nobel peace prize to newly elected President Obama seemed like the nadir of the prize’s prestige, there’s now another thing coming.

    According to The Guardian:

    The Black Lives Matter movement has been nominated for the 2021 Nobel peace prize for the way its call for systemic change has spread around the world.

    In his nomination papers, the Norwegian MP Petter Eide said the movement had forced countries outside the US to grapple with racism within their own societies.

    “I find that one of the key challenges we have seen in America, but also in Europe and Asia, is the kind of increasing conflict based on inequality,” Eide said.

    “Black Lives Matter has become a very important worldwide movement to fight racial injustice.

    “They have had a tremendous achievement in raising global awareness and consciousness about racial injustice.”

    That’s right, a group led by self-described “trained Marxists” who literally spent time with Hugo Chavez in Venezuela and then triggered night after night of violent looting riots at a cost of at least 25 lives and a record $2 billion in insured property claims, (probably much more in uninsured property), and grotesque Red Guard-style repudiation scenes such as forcing restaurant diners to wave their fists in solidarity or face overturned tables and assault, is somehow … is worthy of the world’s top award for peace.

    Back in 1964, when Martin Luther King, Jr. was awarded the same prize for calls to judge people on the content of their character over color, along with non-violent resistence, there was a recognizable standard for peace. Now, such approaches don’t cut it anymore for this Norwegian bunch. And to place BLM in the same league as MLK, Jr., is kind of obscene.

    The Norwegian pol who put the nomination out cited BLM’s capacity to mobilize as his criteria. But that seems to be pretty shaky grounds, given that so many leftists out there really just wanted to Get Trump. BLM has since morphed into what appears to be a corporate shakedown racket and managed to get its Marxist identity politics party line into every corporate boardroom in America. But the capacity to use muscling community organizer tactics is no evidence of morality, or more pointedly, peace. BLM is never going to be satisfied no matter how much kowtowing is done, each victory it wins brings a bigger demand to its marks, without ceasing, until its will to absolute power is achieved. Sound like peace? Only of the grave.

    What it highlights is how low the Nobel peace prize has fallen. Sure, this Norwegian socialist clown doing the nominating likely has no idea what’s going on in the states, given that he lives in isolated Norway, takes in meetings with activists, and only reads the leftist press. The idiocy of his proposal tops that of the Norwegians handing out a Nobel prize to Barack Obama just for getting elected president for being black without doing anything else.  

    In both instances, the Nobel committee nominators seem to relish anyone with the ability to exert leftist power, equating that kind of power-mongering with ‘peace.’ It’s a sorry act they’ve come to, to worship power over any semblance of authentic peace. If this is peace, what a sorry state of affairs we have, mau-mauing’s triumph over actual creating of peace. Will all Nobel peace prize recipients have to show proof of starting riots to qualify now? How, exactly, is riot-making ‘peace’? One likes to suppose that this nomination will go nowhere, but with the current nonsense going on, don’t bet on it. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 22:00

  • Caveat Emptor – Are You A WSB 'Useful Idiot'?
    Caveat Emptor – Are You A WSB ‘Useful Idiot’?

    While high-fives and smily-faces abound on the interwebs over the destruction wrought on numerous hedge funds amid the short- and gamma-squeezes in GME and the rest of the heavily-shorted names, some are at least taking a moment to pause and reflect on other possibilities about how this all ends…

    Via ‘The_Law_of_Pizza’:

    I don’t work on the trading Floor, but I’m an attorney who services a variety of financial institutions, including broker/dealers.

    This isn’t the exciting, hilarious answer you want, but a lot of people had no idea it was even happening until the past 48 hours, and even now, it’s mostly just a funny news article about some internet trolls making a bubble.

    This is a big deal to the shorting community, but to the other 99% of the financial world, nobody gives a shit.

    As much as young people on the internet like to imagine this as an epic, David vs Goliath, Wall Street vs Main Street showdown for the history books; from a bird’s eye view its actually just a brief dumpster fire where a couple hedge funds lost their shirts betting on one little small cap stock. It has happened before, and it will happen again.

    In 6 months, nobody will remember or care, except that (maybe) it will become more difficult for retail investors to trade options.

    And not because the greedy hedge fund oligarchs forced the SEC to crack down on retail investors.

    But rather because, when this is all said and done, there is going to be a black hole where most of these retail investors’ brokerage accounts used to be, and the SEC and brokerage community will be lambasted for failing to protect unsophisticated investors from a bubble.

    I have been monitoring the WSB threads, and while the WSB veterans know that they’re making a suicide charge for the memes, they have brought thousands of naive, new investors with them – who predominantly think that they’re going to somehow come out on top, not realizing that they’re cannon fodder for the more savvy WSB users to exit with gains.

    Redditors never seem to stop and think about why the WSB guys know so much about derivatives trading.

    Or how they seem to know how to access and read from a Bloomberg Terminal.

    Or why there are so many users there that can seemingly drop tens or hundreds of thousands of dollars on complicated meme plays.

    How do you think that WSB knew that GME was open to a short squeeze and a gamma squeeze play?

    WSB’s power users are younger finance bros. It’s 30-something investment bankers and portfolio managers memeing with each other a. cosplaying as “autists.”

    If you didn’t know what a gamma squeeze was 48 hours ago, you are their exit strategy and the down payment on their next Porsche.

    Caveat Emptor indeed.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 21:30

  • Virginia Task Force Drops Gang Database After Complaints It Has Too Many Minorities In It
    Virginia Task Force Drops Gang Database After Complaints It Has Too Many Minorities In It

    Via Southfront.org,

    A tolerant country needs tolerant databases…

    The Northern Virginia Regional Gang Task Force would stop using the GangNet database that catalogs thousands of gang members and gang-affiliated persons in the DC Metropolitan area over complaints that the database includes a ‘disproportionate number of minorities’.

    According to the Washington Post, it will be the first law enforcement entity in the area that would stop using GangNet.

    The database is widely used by more than 120 law enforcement agencies in the greater Washington, DC area that includes densely populated counties in both Maryland and Virginia. GangNet had been in use for about 10 years and has about 7,800 gang members in its database.

    The database is used for intelligence purposes and can’t be used for the basis of probable cause to arrest someone.

    Nonetheless, collecting the data about any crimes that may involve the ‘disproportional number of minorities’ appeared to be too much for the new neo-liberal era in the US.

    It may soon appear that the entire concept of the ‘ethnic crime’ can appear to be banned in the US because it is not enough tolerant.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 21:00

  • Jessica Alba's "Honest Company" Files Confidentially For IPO
    Jessica Alba’s “Honest Company” Files Confidentially For IPO

    At times of peak ESG mania, what’s one more dubious company to add to the IPO mix? Will anybody notice? Will anybody care?

    Perhaps Jessica Alba is hoping that people won’t. Because Alba’s Honest Company – the same one that was exposed years ago for having harmful chemicals it railed against in its detergent – is apparently lining up for an IPO. The company’s schtick is claiming to offer products without the harmful chemicals of normal consumer products – a perfect nonsense story for the snowflakes setting the tone of today’s ESG fueled market.

    “The Los Angeles-based company backed by L Catterton is preparing to file confidentially for an initial public offering with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission as soon as Friday, said the people, who asked to not be identified because the matter isn’t public,” Bloomberg BNN reported on Friday. 

    The company is reportedly seeking a $2 billion valuation at IPO. The company was previously looking to sell itself for a valuation of about $1 billion, the report notes. Recall, back in September of 2016, Alba was reportedly laughing off $1 billion offers for her company. It seems that, since then, its valuation hasn’t expanded much, if at all. 

    About six or seven years ago, we wrote about how Alba’s “Honest” company may not have been so honest after all. We noted a 2014 Wall Street Journal article that alleged that the company hadn’t really been honest in disclosing which chemicals were used to make their “non-toxic” diapers and detergents.

     

    We noted: “One of the primary ingredients Honest tells consumers to avoid is a cleaning agent called sodium lauryl sulfate, or SLS, which can be found in everyday household items from Colgate toothpaste to Tide detergent and Honest says can irritate skin. The company lists SLS first in the ‘Honestly free of’ label of verboten ingredients it puts on bottles of its laundry detergent, one of Honest’s first and most popular products.”

    And then, of course, two independent lab tests determined that Honest’s liquid laundry detergent did in fact contain SLS:

    “Our findings support that there is a significant amount of sodium lauryl sulfate” in Honest’s detergent, said Barbara Pavan, a chemist at one of the labs, Impact Analytical. Another lab, Chemir, a division of EAG Inc., said its test for SLS found about the same concentration as Tide, which is made by P&G. “It was not a trace amount,” said Matthew Hynes, a chemist at Chemir who conducted the test.

    In Alba’s 2013 book, “The Honest Life” she lists SLS as a “toxin” that consumers should avoid. She started Santa Monica, Calif.-based Honest in 2011 after she said she had an allergic reaction to a popular brand of laundry detergent.

    The unfortunate truth is that this is the exact type of “honesty” that Wall Street loves, and the IPO will probably become a resounding success despite Alba’s checkered track record. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 20:30

  • Taibbi: Suck It, Wall Street!
    Taibbi: Suck It, Wall Street!

    Authored by Matt Taibbi via TK News,

    In a blowout comedy for the ages, finance pirates take it up the clacker

    In the fall of 2008, America’s wealthiest companies were in a pickle. Short-selling hedge funds, smelling blood as the global economy cratered, loaded up with bets against finance stocks, pouring downward pressure on teetering, hyper-leveraged firms like Morgan Stanley and Citigroup. The free-market purists at the banks begged the government to stop the music, and when the S.E.C. complied with a ban on financial short sales, conventional wisdom let out a cheer.

    “This will absolutely make a difference,” economist Peter Cardillo told CNN. “Now, if there is any good news, shorts will have to cover.”

    At the time, poor beleaguered banks were victims, while hedge funds betting them down as the economy circled the drain were seen as antisocial monsters. “They are like looters after a hurricane,” seethed Andrew Cuomo, then-Attorney General of New York State, who “promised to intensify investigations into short selling abuses.” Senator John McCain, in the home stretch of his eventual landslide loss to Barack Obama, added that S.E.C. chairman Christopher Cox had “betrayed the public’s trust” by allowing “speculators and hedge funds” to “turn our markets into a casino.”

    Fast forward thirteen years. The day-trading followers of a two-million-subscriber Reddit forum called “wallstreetbets” somewhat randomly decide to keep short-sellers from laying waste to a brick-and-mortar retail video game company called GameStop, betting it up in defiance of the Street. Worth just $6 four months ago, the stock went from $18.36 on the afternoon of the Capitol riot, to $43.03 on the 21st two weeks later, to $147.98 this past Tuesday the 26th, to an incredible $347.51 at the close of the next day, January 27th.

    The rally sent crushing losses at short-selling hedge funds like Melvin Capital, which was forced to close out its position at a cost of nearly $3 billion. Just like 2008, down-bettors got smashed, only this time, there were no quotes from economists celebrating the “good news” that shorts had to cover. Instead, polite society was united in its horror at the spectacle of amateur gamblers doing to hotshot finance professionals what those market pros routinely do to everyone else. If you’ve ever seen Animal House, you understand the sentiment:

    The press conveyed panic and moral disgust. “I didn’t realize it was this cultlike,” said short-seller Andrew Left of Citron Research, without irony denouncing the campaign against firms like his as “just a get rich quick scheme.” Massachusetts Secretary of State Bill Galvin said the Redditor campaign had “no basis in reality,” while Dr. Michael Burry, the hedge funder whose bets against subprime mortgages were lionized in “The Big Short,” called the amateur squeeze “unnatural, insane, and dangerous.”

    The episode prompted calls to regulate Reddit and, finally, halt action on the disputed stocks. As I write this, word has come out that platforms like Robinhood and TD Ameritrade are curbing trading in GameStop and several other companies, including Nokia and AMC Entertainment holdings.

    Meaning: just like 2008, trading was shut down to save the hides of erstwhile high priests of “creative destruction.” Also just like 2008, there are calls for the government to investigate the people deemed responsible for unapproved market losses.

    The acting head of the SEC said the agency was “monitoring” the situation, while the former head of its office of Internet enforcement, John Stark, said, “I can’t imagine there isn’t an open investigation and probably a formal order to find out who’s on these message boards.” Georgetown finance professor James Angel lamented, “it’s going to be hard for the SEC to find blatant manipulation,” but they “owe it to look.” The Washington Post elaborated:

    To establish manipulation that runs afoul of securities laws, Angel said regulators would need to prove traders engaged in “an intentional act to push a price away from its fundamental value to seek a profit.” In market parlance, this is typically known as a pump-and-dump scheme…

    Even Nancy Pelosi, when asked about “manipulation” and “what’s going on on Wall Street right now,” said “we’ll all be reviewing it,” as if it were the business of congress to worry about a bunch of day traders cashing in for once.

    The only thing “dangerous” about a gang of Reddit investors blowing up hedge funds is that some of us reading about it might die of laughter. That bit about investigating this as a “pump and dump scheme” to push prices away from their “fundamental value” is particularly hilarious. What does the Washington Post think the entire stock market is, in the bailout age?

    America’s banks just had maybe their best year ever, raking in $125 billion in underwriting fees at a time when the rest of the country is dealing with record unemployment, thanks entirely to massive Federal Reserve intervention that turned a crash into a boom. Who thinks the “fundamental value” of most stocks would be this high, absent the Fed’s Atlas-like support in the last year?

    For context, Goldman, Sachs posted revenues of $44.56 billion in 2020, its best year since 2009, a.k.a. the last year Wall Street cashed in on a bailout. Back then, the shortcut back to giganto-bonuses was underwriting fees for financial companies raising money to purge themselves of TARP debt. This time it’s underwriting fees for bond issues and IPOs. The subtext of both bailouts was that anyone who owned or underwrote financial assets got richer, while everyone else got the proverbial high hat. It’s no accident that income inequality dramatically accelerated after the last bailouts, and that the only people to see net gains in wealth since 2008 have been the richest 20% of Americans, a pattern almost certain to continue.

    The constant in the bailout years has been a battery of artificial stimulants sent through the financial sector, from the TARP to years of zero-interest-rate policies (ZIRP) to outright interventions like the multiple trillion-dollar rounds of Quantitative Easing. All that froth allowed finance companies to suck out hundreds of billions in fees, encouraged lunatic risk-taking in every direction and rampages of private equity takeovers, and kept a vast stable of functionally dead companies alive on cheap credit.

    Those so-called “zombie companies” make up roughly 30% of all corporations in America now, and they racked up over a trillion dollars in new debt since the pandemic alone. While policymakers may have stabilized the economy with the bailouts, they may also “inadvertently be directing the flow of capital to unproductive firms,” as Bloomberg euphemistically put it back in November.

    In other words, it was all well and good for investment banks and executives of phoney-baloney companies to gorge themselves on funhouse profits on a funhouse economy, but when amateurs decided to funnel just a bit of this clown show into their own pockets, finance pros wailed like the grave of Adam Smith had been danced upon. The worst was Morgan Stanley CEO James Gorman, who issued a somber warning that those behind the recent market frenzy are “in for a very rude awakening,” adding, “I don’t know if it is going to happen tomorrow, next week or in a month, but it will happen.”

    This is the same James Gorman whose company just saw its 2020 fourth-quarter profits go up 51% versus the year before, with total revenues up 16% to $48.2 billion, matching almost exactly the 16% rise in the stock market last year. If you’re going to rake in $33 million as Gorman did last year captaining a firm that just siphoned off billions in essentially risk-free profits underwriting a never-ending bailout, should you really be worrying about someone else getting a “rude awakening”? There are 19 million people collecting unemployment who might be reading those profit numbers. Does this man know how to spell “pitchfork”?

    GameStop has prompted more pearl-clutching than any news story in recent memory. Expert after grave-faced expert has marched on TV to tell Reddit traders that markets are complicated, this isn’t a game, and they wouldn’t be doing this, if they really understood how things work.

    “I’m not sure everybody fully understands what’s happening here,” was the melancholy comment on CNBC of Wall Street’s famed fluffer-in-chief, Andrew Ross Sorkin. The author of Too Big to Fail added in pedagogic tones that while this “stick it to the man moment” might feel good, betting up the value of GameStop above Delta Airlines just isn’t right, because “there are no fundamentals here”:

    Fundamentals? How much does Sorkin think his exalted Delta Airlines would be worth now, if the Fed hadn’t stopped its death plunge last March? How much would any of the airlines be worth in the Covid age, with their fleets of mothballed jets? What a joke!

    Furthermore, everybody “understands” what happened with GameStop. Unlike some other Wall Street stories, this one isn’t complicated. The entire tale, in a nutshell, goes like this. One group of gamblers announced, “Fuck you!” Another group announced back: “No, fuck YOU!”

    That’s it. Or, as one market analyst put it to me this morning, “A bunch of guys made a bet, got killed, then doubled and tripled down and got killed even more.”

    Regarding improprieties, leaving aside that the Redditors were doing exactly what billion-dollar hedge funds do every day — colluding to move a stock for fun and profit — the notion that this should be the subject of a federal investigation is preposterous.

    Is it completely outside the realm of possibility that the GME fiasco isn’t just day traders giving the finger to Wall Street, that “major players” are behind the stock’s movement, in an illegal manipulation scheme? No. Probably it’s not that, but it could be, just as some of the usual suspects may have piled on the long side once the frenzy started. But if there’s anything to investigate here, the obvious place to start is with the hedge funds and their brokers.

    While it isn’t a complicated story, some of the awesome humor of GameStop is in the mechanics.

    Unlike betting on a stock to go up (i.e. betting “long”), where you can only lose as much as you invest, the losses in shorting can be infinite. This adds a potential extra layer of Schadenfreude to the plight of the happy hedge fund pirate who might have borrowed gazillions of GameStop shares at five or ten hoping to tank the firm, only to go in pucker mode as Internet hordes drive the cost of the trade to ten, twenty, fifty times their original investment.

    Short-sellers bet by borrowing shares from so-called prime brokers (Goldman, Sachs and JP Morgan Chase are among the biggest), selling them, and waiting for the price to drop, at which point they buy them back on the open market at the lower price and return them. The commonly understood rub is that prime brokers don’t always really procure those original borrowed shares, and often give out more “locates” than they should, putting more shares in circulation than actually exist (as in this case). GameStop is exposing this systematic plundering of firms using phantom shares and locates, by groups of actors who now have the gall to complain that they’re the victims of a “get rich quick” scheme.

    Short-sellers are not inherently antisocial. They can be beneficial to society, instrumental in rooting out corruption and waste in whole sectors like the subprime industry, or in single companies like Enron. Moreover, the wiping out of such funds isn’t necessarily to be cheered. Sorkin correctly notes that many hedge funds invest on behalf of entities like pension funds, though maybe they shouldn’t, given their high cost and relatively mediocre performance, as I’ve noted before.

    However, that’s the point. The degree to which even the beneficial functions of short-sellers are cheered or not is dependent upon whose corruption they’re uncovering. Let the record show that when the S.E.C. imposed a ban on shorts of financial stocks in 2008, they routed short-sellers who were dead right about the insolubility of America’s banking sector. The state prevented their correct judgment about companies like Wachovia and Washington Mutual, whose stocks kept plunging even after the ban and went bust soon after.

    The shorts were right about all the other banks, too. The Inspector General of the TARP, Neil Barofsky, eventually told the Financial Crisis Inquiry Commission that 12 of the 13 biggest banks were on the brink of failure when they got saved — by the short ban, by emergency overnight grants of commercial bank licenses to companies that weren’t commercial banks, by the bailouts, by the subsequent avalanche of underwriting fees, and most of all, by the lies about all of the above.

    The home of James “rude awakening” Gorman, Morgan Stanley, got its bank holding company license (and the lifesaving Fed credit lines that came with it) late on a Sunday night in September, 2008, because the firm couldn’t have opened its doors without it the next Monday morning. They’d have been blown to bits, by “fundamentals.” Instead, they got rescued, given a forever pass to keep feeding at the neck of society while claiming, falsely, to be not-failures and not-welfare recipients, better somehow than the “dumb money” they think should be theirs alone to manage.

    The rank selectivity of this makes any moral argument against the GameStop revolt moot. There’s no legitimate cause here, just an assertion of exclusive rights to plunder, which will doubtless be exercised now in the form of bans, investigations, and increased barriers to market entry. Probably also, in the political spirit of our times, there will some form of speech crackdown on platforms like Reddit, to protect us from the mob.

    About that: there are many making hay of a description found on a Subreddit, to the effect that wallstreetbets is “like 4Chan found a Bloomberg terminal.” A columnist at the Guardian, settling into the rhetorical line sure to find acceptance among the wine-and-MSNBC crowd, admitted to finding the rampaging-id dynamic on 4chan funny as a young person, but strange now to “witness a brief and regretful adolescent occupation re-emerge as a prominent cultural force.” The author wanted to admit to laughing at this “intentionally senseless” behavior, but ultimately decried the “transgressive attitudes” of the Redditors.

    This is where society will ultimately come down, of course, uniting to denounce $GME as financial Trumpism, even though it actually comes closer to being an updated and superior version of Occupy Wall Street. It’s likely not any evil manipulation scheme, but ordinary people acting — out of self-interest, but also out of sheer enthusiasm for one of the best reasons to do just about anything, because you can — on a few simple, powerful observations.

    They’ve seen first that our markets are basically fake, set up to artificially accelerate the wealth divide, and not in their favor. Secondly they see that the stock market, like the ballot box, remains one of the only places where sheer numbers still matter more than capital or connections. And they’re piling on, and it’s delicious, not so much because they’re right, but because the people running for cover are so wrong, and still can’t admit it.

    Buy the ticket, take the ride, nitwits. If you earned anything, it’s this.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 20:00

  • Bill Gates Aghast Over 'Crazy And Evil Conspiracy Theories' About He And Fauci, Hints At Social Media Censorship
    Bill Gates Aghast Over ‘Crazy And Evil Conspiracy Theories’ About He And Fauci, Hints At Social Media Censorship

    Bill Gates is apparently shocked over ‘crazy and evil conspiracy theories’ which claim that he and Dr. Anthony Fauci are participating in a nefarious scheme to push vaccines, profit from the pandemic, and reduce the population.

    In Wednesday comments to Reuters, Gates said that there are “millions of messages out there” targeting he and Fauci, and suggested that “social media companies” might be able to censor discussion on the topic.

    “Nobody would have predicted that I and Dr. Fauci would be so prominent in really kind of evil theories about – did we create the pandemic, are we trying to profit from it? – and on and on,” said Gates, adding “We’re going to have to get educated about this over the next year and understand, how does it change people’s behavior?”

    “How should we have minimized this, either working with the social media companies or explaining what we were up to in a better way?

    Gates’ motives have come under fire over his foundation’s 2019 participation in Event 201 – a collaboration between the Johns Hopkins Center for Health Security, the World Economic Forum and the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation which simulated a global pandemic after a fictional coronavirus broke out among pigs in Brazil, before spreading to farmers. In the simulation, the virus infected the globe within six months, and killed 65 million people, triggering a global financial crisis. All of this took place just months before COVID-19 emerged.

    In an April 2020 interview, Gates told the BBC: “Now here we are. We didn’t simulate this, we didn’t practice, so both the health policies and economic policies, we find ourselves in uncharted territory.”

    In April 2018, Gates told the Massachusetts Medical Society that “millions could die” if the United States doesn’t prepare for a coming pandemic. Specifically, Gates said the U.S. government is falling short in preparing the nation and the world for the “significant probability of a large and lethal modern-day pandemic occurring in our lifetimes.”

    In 2017, Gates told the Munich Security Conference that world leaders should “imagine that somewhere in the world a new weapon exists or could emerge that is capable of killing millions of people, bringing economies to a standstill, and casting nations into chaos. If it were a military weapon, the response would be to do everything possible to develop countermeasures,” adding that a “sense of urgency is lacking” over biological threats.

    And according to Robert F. Kennedy, Gates was involved in a Polio immunization program in India which paralyzed 490,000 children.

    Promising his share of $450 million of $1.2 billion to eradicate Polio, Gates took control of India’s National Technical Advisory Group on Immunization (NTAGI) which mandated up to 50 doses (Table 1) of polio vaccines through overlapping immunization programs to children before the age of five. Indian doctors blame the Gates campaign for a devastating non-polio acute flaccid paralysis (NPAFP) epidemic that paralyzed 490,000 children beyond expected rates between 2000 and 2017. In 2017, the Indian government dialed back Gates’ vaccine regimen and asked Gates and his vaccine policies to leave India. NPAFP rates dropped precipitously.

    In 2017, the World Health Organization (WHO) reluctantly admitted that the global explosion in polio is predominantly vaccine strain. The most frightening epidemics in Congo, Afghanistan, and the Philippines, are all linked to vaccines. In fact, by 2018, 70% of global polio cases were vaccine strain.

    India barred the Gates Foundation from funding part of its immunization program, citing concerns over ‘non-governmental organizations’ asserting control over decision making in key policy areas.

    Gates has also opined on the need to control population growth – for which a plethora of theories exist involving vaccines. In 2012, Gates said: “The problem is that the population is growing the fastest where people are less able to deal with it. So it’s in the very poorest places that you’re going to have a tripling in population by 2050. (…) And we’ve got to make sure that we help out with the tools now so that they don’t have an impossible situation later.

    So, in case Gates is wondering just why people are skeptical over his push to vaccinate the world and take a key outside role in advising the Biden administration’s COVID-19 response, the above evidence may offer some clues.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 19:30

  • 6 Warning Signs From Biden's First Week In Office
    6 Warning Signs From Biden’s First Week In Office

    Authored by Kit Knightly via Off-Guardian.org,

    The “progressive” candidate praised as a “woke bloke” seems to be carrying on where all his authoritarian Imperialist predecessors left off…

    It’s been a busy first week for the 46th President of the United States, there are the 20,000 troops occupying the capital city to organise, as well as the totally unprecedented show-trial of his immediate predecessor.

    You know, usual democracy type stuff.

    On top of that, Biden has now signed at least 37 executive orders in his first week. The record for any President, and more than the previous four presidents combined.

    What do these orders, or any of his other moves, tell us about the future plans of the recently “elected” administration? Nothing good, unfortunately.

    1. VACCINATION PASSPORTS

    I still remember people claiming the introduction of vaccination passports (or immunity passes or the like) was just a “conspiracy theory”, the paranoid fantasy of fringe “covidiots”. All the way back in December, when they were getting fact-checked by tabloid journalists who can’t do basic maths.

    These days they are rebranded as “freedom certificates” which are “divisive, politically tricky and probably inevitable”.

    Many countries are already preparing to roll it out, including Iceland the UK and South Africa. Biden’s “Executive Order on Promoting COVID-19 Safety in Domestic and International Travel” adds the US to this list:

    International Certificates of Vaccination or Prophylaxis. Consistent with applicable law, the Secretary of State, the Secretary of HHS, and the Secretary of Homeland Security (including through the Administrator of the TSA), in coordination with any relevant international organizations, shall assess the feasibility of linking COVID-19 vaccination to International Certificates of Vaccination or Prophylaxis (ICVP) and producing electronic versions of ICVPs.

    2. CABINET APPOINTMENTS

    Biden’s cabinet is praised as the “most diverse” in history, but will hiring a few non-white people really change the decades-old policies of US Imperialism? It certainly doesn’t look like it.

    His pick for Under Secretary of State is Victoria Nuland, a neocon warmonger and one of the masterminds of the Maidan coup in Ukraine in 2014. She is married to Robert Kagan, another neocon warmonger, co-founder of the Project for a New American Century and senior fellow at the Brookings Institute and one of the masterminds behind the 2003 invasion of Iraq.

    The incoming Secretary of State, Antony Blinken, is also an inveterate US Imperialist, arguing for every US military intervention since the 1990s, and criticised Trump’s decision to withdraw from Syria.

    Biden’s pick for Defence Secretary is the first African-American ever appointed to this role, but former General Lloyd Austin is hardly going be some kind of “progressive” voice int his cabinet. He’s a career soldier who retired from the military in 2016 to join the board of Raytheon Technologies, an arms manufacturer and military contractor.

    As “diverse” as this cabinet may be in skin colour or gender…there is most certainly no “diversity” of opinion or policy. There are very few new faces and no new thoughts.

    So, it looks like we can expect more of the same in terms of foreign policy. A fact that’s already been displayed in…

    3. IRAQ…

    Despite heavy resistance from the military and Deep State, Donald Trump wanted to end the war in Iraq and pledged to pull American troops out of the country. This was one of Trump’s more popular policies, and during the campaign Biden made no mention of intending to reverse that decision.

    Then, on the very day of Biden’s inauguration, ISIS conducted their deadliest suicide bombing for over three years, and suddenly the situation was too unstable for the US to leave, and Biden is being forced to “review” Trump’s planned withdrawal.

    The Iraqi parliament has made it clear it wants the US to take its military off their soil, so any American forces on Iraqi land are technically there illegally in contravention of international law. But that never bothered them before.

    4. …AFGHANISTAN…

    Turns out the US can’t withdraw from Afghanistan either. Last February Trump signed a deal with the Taliban that all US personnel would leave Afghanistan by May 2021.

    Joe Biden has already committed to “reviewing” this deal. Sec. Blinken was quoted as saying that Biden’s admin wanted:

    to end this so-called forever war [but also] retain some capacity to deal with any resurgence of terrorism, which is what brought us there in the first place”.

    As a great man once said, nothing someone says before the word “but” really counts. The US will not be withdrawing from Afghanistan, and if there is any public pressure to do so, the government will simply claim the Taliban broke their side of the deal first, or stage a few terrorist attacks.

    5. …AND SYRIA

    Far from simply continuing the on-going wars, there are already signs Biden’s “diverse” team will look to escalate, or even start, other conflicts.

    Syria was another theatre of war from which Donald Trump wanted to extricate the United States, unilaterally ordering all US troops from the country in late 2019.

    We now know the Pentagon ignored those orders. They lied to the President, telling Trump they had followed his orders…but not withdrawing a single man. This organized mutiny against the Commander-in-Chief of the US Armed Forces was played for a joke in the media when it was finally revealed.

    There will be no need for any such duplicity now Biden is in the Oval Office, he was a vocal critic of the decision to withdraw, claiming it gave ISIS a “new lease of life”. Indeed, within two days of his being sworn in a column of American military vehicles was seen entering Syria from Iraq.

    6. DOMESTIC TERRORISM

    We called this before the inauguration. They made it just too obvious. Before the dirty footprints had been cleaned from Nancy Pelosi’s desk it was clear where it was all going.

    Within 24 hours of being sworn in as president, Biden had ordered a “review of the threat posed by domestic terrorism”.

    As usual, the press are laying down the covering fire for this. Talking heads have been busily comparing MAGA voters to al Qaida in television interviews. The Washington Post and New Yorker Journal have cut-and-paste pieces about this supposed threat. Politico published an article titled “Biden vowed to defeat domestic terrorism. The how is the hard part”, which outlines what Biden could do:

    Direct the Justice Department, FBI and National Security Council to execute a top-down approach prioritizing domestic terrorism; pass new domestic terrorism legislation; or do a bit of both as Democrats propose a crack down on social media giants like Facebook for algorithms that promote conspiracy laden posts.

    That last part is key. The “crack down on social media” part, because the anti-Domestic Terrorism legislation will likely be very focused on communication and so-called “misinformation”.

    Alexandra Ocasio-Cortez has publicly called for a congressional panel to “rein in” the media:

    We’re going to have to figure out how we rein in our media environment so you can’t just spew disinformation and misinformation,”

    And who will be the target of these crack downs and new legislations? Well, according John Brennan (ex-head of the CIA and accomplished war criminal), practically anybody:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    They’re casting a wide net. Expect “extremist”, “bigot” and “racist” to be just a few of the words which have their meanings totally revised in the next few months. “Conspiracy theorist” will be used a lot, too.

    Further, they are moving closer and closer toward the “anyone who disagrees with us is literally insane” model. With many articles actually talking about “de-programming” Trump voters. The Atlantic suggests “mental hygiene” would cure the MAGA problem.

    Again AOC is on point here, clearly auditioning for the role of High Inquisitor, claiming that the new Biden government needs to fund programs that “de-radicalise” “conspiracy theorists” who are on the “spectrum of radicalisation”.

    *  *  *

    As I said at the beginning, it’s been a busy week for Joe Biden, but you can sum up his biggest policy plans in one short sentence: More violence overseas, less tolerance of dissent and strict clampdowns on “misinformation”.

    How progressive.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 19:00

  • Goldman Warns If The Short Squeeze Continues, The Entire Market Could Crash
    Goldman Warns If The Short Squeeze Continues, The Entire Market Could Crash

    Last Friday (Jan 22) we advised readers who thought they had missed the move in Gamestop (they hadn’t), to position appropriately in the most shorted Russell 3000 names which included such tickers as FIZZ, DDS, BBBY, AMCX, GOGO and a handful of other names, as it was likely that the short-squeeze was only just starting.

    We were right and all of the stocks listed above – and others – exploded higher the coming Monday, and all other days of the week, with results – encapsulated by the WallStreetTips vs Wall Street feud – that have become the only topic of conversation across America (remember the Trump impeachment?), while on WSB the only topic has been the phenomenal gains generated by going long said most shorted stocks. To wit, the basket of top shorts we compiled on Jan 22 has tripled in the past week.

    And while some are quick to blame last week’s fireworks on the “dopamine rush” of traders at r/wallstreetbets who seek an outlet to being “copped up with little else to do during the pandemic” (as Bloomberg has done, while also blaming widespread lockdowns and forgetting that it has been Bloomberg that was among the most vocal defenders of the very lockdowns that have given us the short squeeze of the century), the reality is that at the end of the day the strategy unleashed by the subreddit is merely an extension of the bubble dynamics that were made possible by the Federal Reserve (of which Bloomberg is also a very staunch fan) pumping trillions and trillions of shotgunned liquidity into a financial system where there are now bubble visible anywhere one looks. In short, main street finally learned that it too can profit from the lunacy of the money printers at the Marriner Eccles building, and some are very unhappy about that (yes, it will end in tears, but – newsflash – $300 trillion in debt and $120BN in liquidity injections monthly will also end in tears).

    That aside, one week later, Goldman has finally caught up with what Zero Hedge readers knew one week ago, and all the way down to a chart showing a basket of the most-shorted Russell 3000 stocks…

    … Goldman’s David Kostin has published a post-mortem of what happened last week, writing that “the most heavily-shorted stocks have risen by 98% in the past three months, outstripping major short squeezes in 2000 and 2009.”

    He then points out something we discussed in “Hedge Funds Are Puking Longs To Cover Short-Squeeze Losses“, noting that while aggregate short interest levels are remarkably low (imagine what would have happened has shorting been far more aggressive marketwide)…

    “the -4% weekly return of our Hedge Fund VIP list of the most popular hedge fund long positions (GSTHHVIP) showed how excess in one small part of the market can create contagion.”

    As an aside, and as we showed previously, as the most shorted stocks soared…

    … hedge funds were forced to cover (as well as paying for margin calls), and as part of the broader degrossing they also had to sell some of the favorite hedge fund names across the industry, in this case represented by the Goldman Hedge Fund VIP basket.

    Yet what may come as a surprise to some, even as hedge funds deleveraged aggressively and actively cut risk this week, gross and net exposures “remain close to the highest levels on record” (something which may come as a huge surprise to Marko Kolanovic who has been erroneously claiming the opposite), suggesting that if the squeeze continues, hedge funds are set for much more pain.

    According to Goldman Sachs Prime Services, this week “represented the largest active hedge fund de-grossing since February 2009. Funds in their coverage sold long positions and covered shorts in every sector” and yet “despite this active deleveraging, hedge fund net and gross exposures on a mark-to-market basis both remain close to the highest levels on record, indicating ongoing risk of positioning-driven sell-offs.”

    With that in mind, here are Kostin’s big picture thoughts:

    It was a placid week in the US stock market – provided one was a long-only mutual fund manager. US equity mutual funds and ETFs had $2 billion of net inflows last week (+$10 billion YTD). Although the typical large-cap core mutual fund fell by 2% this week, it has generated a return of +1.3% YTD vs. S&P 500 down -1.1%. However, life was very different last week if one managed a hedge fund. The typical US equity long/short fund returned -7% this week and has returned -6% YTD.

    With the average WSB portfolio up double digits this past week, one can see why hedge funds are upset. Anyway, moving on:

    The past 25 years have witnessed a number of sharp short squeezes in the US equity market, but none as extreme as has occurred recently.In the last three months, a basket containing the 50 Russell 3000 stocks with market caps above $1 billion and the largest short interest as a share of float (GSCBMSAL) has rallied by 98%.  This exceeded the 77% return of highly-shorted stocks during 2Q 2020, a 56% rally in mid-2009, and two distinct 72% rallies during the Tech Bubble in 1999 and 2000. This week the basket’s trailing 5-, 10-, and 21-day returns registered as the largest on record.

    Thanks Goldman, and yes, your “brisk assessment” would have been more useful to your clients if it had come before the event (like, for example, this) instead of after.

    Kostin then goes on to point out that the “mooning” in the most shorted stocks took place even though aggregate short interest was near record low (imagine what would have happened had short interest been higher), which is odd because historically, “major short squeezes have typically taken place as aggregate short interest declined from elevated levels. In contrast, the recent short squeeze has been driven by concentrated short positions in smaller companies, many of which had lagged dramatically and were perceived by most investors to be in secular decline” to wit:

    Unusually, the rally of the most heavily-shorted stocks has taken place against a backdrop of very low levels of aggregate short interest. At the start of this year, the median S&P 500 stock had short interest equating to just 1.5% of market cap, matching mid-2000 as the lowest share in at least the last 25 years. In the past, major short squeezes have typically taken place as aggregate short interest declined from elevated levels. In contrast, the recent short squeeze has been driven by concentrated short positions in smaller companies, many of which had lagged dramatically and were perceived by most investors to be in secular decline.

    Of course, there is nothing “historical” about what happened last week, because – as we all know – the biggest difference between the typical short squeeze of the past and the recent rally in heavily-shorted stocks “was the degree of involvement of retail traders, who also appear to have catalyzed sharp moves in other parts of the market.” Why thank you WSB, but that’s ok – you will be handsomely rewarded.

    Last week we discussed the surging trading activity and share prices of penny stocks, firms with negative earnings, and extremely high-growth, high-multiple stocks. These trends have all accompanied a large increase in online broker trading activity. A basket of retail favorites (ticker: GSXURFAV) has returned +17% YTD and +179% since the March 2020 low, outperforming both the S&P 500 (+72%) and our Hedge Fund VIP list of the most popular hedge fund long positions (GSTHHVIP, +106%).

    So why does this matter? One simple reason: contrary to the bizarrely nonchalant optimism spouted earlier this week by JPMorgan’s Marko Kolanovic who said “any market pullback, such as one driven by repositioning by a segment of the long-short community (and related to stocks of insignificant size), is a buying opportunity, in our view,” Goldman has a far more dismal take on recent events, and writes that “this week demonstrated that unsustainable excess in one small part of the market has the potential to tip a row of dominoes and create broader turmoil.”

    He then picks up on what he said last weekend when responding to Goldman client concerns about a stock bubble, which we summarized in “Goldman’s Clients Are Freaking Out About A Stock Bubble: Here Is The Bank’s Response“, and which turned out to be 100% warranted, and writes that “most of the bubble-like dynamics we highlighted last week have taken place in stocks constituting very small portions of total US equity market cap. Indeed, many of the shorts dominating headlines this week were (prior to this week) small-cap stocks. But large short squeezes led investors short these stocks to cover their positions and also reduce long positions, leading other holders of common positions to cut exposures in turn.”

    As a result, Goldman’s Hedge Fund VIP list declined by 4%. Which is a problem because as Kostin concludes, “in recent years elevated crowding, low turnover, and high concentration have been consistent patterns, boosting the risk that one fund’s unwind could snowball through the market.

    Translation: if WSB continues to push the most shorted stocks higher, the entire market could crash.

    And since Kostin admits that “the retail trading boom can continue” as “an abundance of US household cash should continue to fuel the trading boom” with more than 50% of the $5 trillion in money market mutual funds owned by households and is $1 trillion greater than before the pandemic, what happens in the coming week – i.e., if the short squeeze persists – could have profound implications for the future of capital markets.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 18:30

  • DoorDash Scam Found To Be Fraudulently Charging People Who Didn't Even Have The App
    DoorDash Scam Found To Be Fraudulently Charging People Who Didn’t Even Have The App

    By Becky Robertson of Eat & Drink

    Food delivery has been absolutely booming amid pandemic lockdown, which is perhaps what made a new DoorDash scam all the more easy to pull off.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    People across Canada and the U.S. recently found themselves hit with random debit charges from the California-based takeout delivery service — even those that have never even heard of the app.

    North of the border, the scam appeared to be limited to TD customers, some of who lost hundreds of dollars in phony charges for orders they didn’t place and DashPass memberships they didn’t sign up for.

    An exposé from the CBC found multiple citizens across six provinces including Ontario had been charged, even those who live in remote areas where DoorDash isn’t even offered. 

    It also seems that many of the targets weren’t even existing DoorDash customers, making the methodology of how the fraudsters got their banking info all the more sketchy.

    The origins of the scam and who is behind it have yet to come to light, but DoorDash has said that it is taking the situation very seriously and has worked with TD to resolve the issue through reimbursements.

    The company is in hot water for a number of other reasons as of late, including a class action lawsuit claiming it has been purposely diverting business away from restaurants who didn’t partner with it, creating phony landing pages and then listing them as “closed” to customers.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 18:00

  • Biden Plagiarizes Again After Bloomberg Points Out Virus Plan Is Basically Trump's
    Biden Plagiarizes Again After Bloomberg Points Out Virus Plan Is Basically Trump’s

    While President Biden has done nothing but disparage President Trump’s COVID-19 vaccination plan – while promising on the campaign trail to ‘introduce his own,‘ it now appears there was no ‘new’ plan whatsoever – and his team is essentially using Trump’s playbook with “modest changes,” according to Bloomberg.

    Biden has said vaccine distribution was in “worse shape than we anticipated.” White House Chief of Staff Ron Klain said a Trump administration plan “did not really exist.” Adviser Cedric Richmond said they “didn’t leave a plan.” Xavier Becerra, Biden’s choice for health secretary, said it was like taking over a plane in a nosedive.

    But while Biden’s approach to the virus — frank warnings about the pandemic, mask mandates on federal property — is a reversal from Trump’s policies, his administration’s distribution of vaccines so far looks little different from that of its predecessor. Before Biden was sworn in, vaccines already were being delivered at a pace to meet his goal of 100 million doses in his first 100 days as president.

    The Biden administration has said they’ll order new doses, but will do so by exercising options in contracts negotiated by the previous administration, which thought it premature to do so. They say they’ll use the Defense Production Act, which Trump used repeatedly. Rather than a total overhaul, they have otherwise made course corrections and modest shifts. Data released Friday by Johnson & Johnson will fuel hopes that a third vaccine soon could hit the U.S. market. –Bloomberg

    Biden – who has a history of plagiarism – was essentially lying, especially when one considers the mammoth effort involved in distribution efforts which would make major changes costly and risk setbacks to the program. Bloomberg adds that “some aspects of the program don’t offer much wiggle room to begin with, while the trickiest part are yet to come.”

    Bloomberg does toss Biden a bone, however, reporting that Trump ‘undercut’ Biden’s efforts to shape the program by delaying the transition while disputing the results of the election. Trump’s team, however, says they had over 300 transition briefings with health officials – which Biden officials claim contained little useful information until just days before the inauguration.

    Meanwhile, officials from the Operation Warp Speed – the joint effort between the Trump administration’s Departments of Health and Human Services and DoD, say the partisan sniping from Biden’s team is hurting morale among career staff who are handling the vaccine rollout.

    The transition is happening less well than I, and my team, had been hoping,” said Moncef Slaoui, chief scientific adviser to Operation Warp Speed. “The team doesn’t understand why the Operation is being criticized as it is. It is so unfair and unjustified.”

    “If it wasn’t for this Operation, we may not have as many vaccines as we will now.”

    Also pushing back against the Biden team’s besmirchments is Anthony Fauci, the highest-paid employee in the federal government and ongoing COVID-19 advisor to the Office of the President.

    We certainly are not starting from scratch,” Fauci said earlier this month. “It’s taking what’s gone on, but amplifying it in a big way,” he added. Even Biden said that “credit is absolutely due” to the Trump administration for launching the vaccine program.

    The differences

    According to Bloomberg, “Biden is endorsing federally run community vaccination centers and mobile clinics,” and will attempt to provide states with a three-week supply, along with an increase in the number of people who can administer it. Trump officials, however, say the limitation is the number of vaccines, not healthcare professionals.

    Biden is also focusing on communities of color instead of devoting all resources to first vaccinating essential workers and those at most risk of dying from the virus. According to Biden, communities of color have been disproportionately affected by the virus.

    Yet, most of the plan remains unchanged.

    Via Bloomberg:

    [T]he biggest pieces of the distribution effort remain unchanged, undercutting claims from some Biden advisers that they inherited no plan. Many of the most stubborn bottlenecks don’t stem from the federal government’s decisions: Companies simply can’t produce vaccines fast enough and supplies are scarce; even if distribution goes smoothly, the administration of doses gets backed up at the local level.

    What we’re seeing here is them marching through the playbook of Operation Warp Speed,” added Michael Pratt, a former Health and Human Services official under Trump. “Something cannot simultaneously be a dismal failure and have already accomplished the ‘ambitious goal’ you set.”

    Nearly every industrialized nation has been beset by vaccine delays. The European Union has moved to restrict vaccine exports. The U.S. has administered 8.3 doses per 100 people, trailing the U.K. and Israel yet outpacing Germany, Canada, France and the EU overall, according to Bloomberg’s Vaccine Tracker. –Bloomberg

    The Biden team has also retained many key Trump personnel, including the co-leader of Operation Warp Speed, General Gustave Perna.

    Furthermore, one of Biden’s key tools to move quickly on the virus response is the use of the Defense Production Act to prioritize the availability of certain materials and supplies – which the Trump administration used extensively.

    It is really incorrect to say there was no plan — because we’re already achieving 1.3 million doses in arms per day, which exceeds the first goal President Biden had,” said Brett Giroir, who led the Trump administration’s program to ramp up widespread virus testing.

    One wild card is whether another vaccine will hit the market anytime soon. Late Friday, Johnson & Johnson announced that its single-dose vaccine generated strong protection against COVID-19 in a large, late-stage trial. The company expects it to be ‘quickly brought to market without the missed delivery timelines of the Pfizer shots.’ If authorized for use, the J&J vaccine could allow the Biden team to reach 2 million total doses per day according to a former Trump official.

    And that’s, the rest of the story…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 17:31

  • Our Tech Minders & The Future Of Public Discourse
    Our Tech Minders & The Future Of Public Discourse

    Authored by Edward Morse, op-ed via The Epoch Times,

    Both Apple and Google have deplatformed Parler, a social media app widely used as an alternative channel for group communication.

    Amazon soon joined this effort by denying access to cloud services hosting Parler content. Other service providers apparently followed suit, constricting and perhaps exterminating Parler from among the options available to consumers.

    Parler was offline for over a week, until it eventually found a new platform, albeit one deprived of the convenient access allowed by apps. Parler users have also effectively been cancelled, regardless of their actual posting conduct, based on a professed concern about violent discourse on the site.

    Anyone who doubts that the large tech platforms have market power should take notice.

    Although competition provides alternatives in the long run, concentration within channels for app distribution and cloud hosting allowed Parler’s operations to be disrupted. In addition, competition in the marketplace of ideas became a little less robust—all based on discretionary judgments from minders in Big Tech. They profess a desire to protect us, but we have reason to question the evenhandedness of this putative protection and its contribution to our wellbeing.

    Bans and Suppression

    Twitter’s recent decision to ban President Donald Trump from its platform embraces a prophylactic approach to censorship. Twitter explained that it suspended Trump’s account “due to the risk of further incitement of violence.” (Of course, this presumes that he has incited violence in the first place.) In a blog the company describes as “your official source to what is happening,” Twitter officials explained that this decision depended on their contextual interpretation of two statements sent out by Trump:

    First, On Jan. 8 the president tweeted: “The 75,000,000 great American Patriots who voted for me, AMERICA First, and MAKE AMERICA GREAT AGAIN, will have a GIANT VOICE long into the future. They will not be disrespected or treated unfairly in any way, shape or form!!!!”

    Second, according to Twitter, “shortly thereafter” the president tweeted: “To all of those who have asked, I will not be going to the Inauguration on January 20th.”

    Twitter explains:

    “Due to the ongoing tensions in the United States, and an uptick in the global conversation in regards to the people who violently stormed the Capitol on January 6, 2021, these two Tweets must be read in the context of broader events in the country and the ways in which the President’s statements can be mobilized by different audiences, including to incite violence, as well as in the context of the pattern of behavior from this account in recent weeks. After assessing the language in these Tweets against our Glorification of Violence policy, we have determined these Tweets are in violation …”

    On their face, neither of the statements by the president incite violence. (Trump supporters do, indeed, face adverse consequences, making the first statement incorrect. But that’s another matter.) Neither asks for violent action nor expresses support for past violence. And if context is important, Twitter fails to note that the president clearly asked for peaceful demonstration in his speech to supporters, as well as in a subsequent Tweet, which Twitter suppressed. He also swiftly condemned the violence and promised prosecution for the perpetrators.

    Twitter bases its assessment solely on predictions about how different audiences might respond to these statements. Likewise, Facebook (including its Instagram service) issued its ban based solely on the perceived risk of what the speaker might say in the future, which is even more speculative than Twitter’s approach. Democrat political leaders cheered them on, even claiming that these efforts were too little, too, late. Apparently, they would have preferred that Trump had been banned instead of censored during the campaign.

    Keeping Dissent in the Open

    Political campaigns are indeed much easier and, on the surface, more harmonious if you can suppress competing voices. But this is not the way of a free society. If messages can be cancelled based on predictions about how audiences will read them, then there’s a lot more inciting going on than we’ve previously realized. Twitter allowed repeated posts that approved of violence. Did those posts incite more violence, too?

    And predictions about likely effects on the audience is all we need to suppress speech: Consider the repeated tag of “false” or “baseless” added to claims of election wrongdoing in news reports going back to the days immediately after the election—before there was time to investigate. Based on the likely impact of those words on Trump supporters, is that a form of incitement, too?

    Big Tech minders are also intervening in this arena. On Dec. 10, while considerable litigation and investigation of alleged voter fraud and official misconduct remained under investigation, YouTube announced that it would ban videos addressing possible election fraud or claiming that errors changed the outcome of the election, attaching the presumption that all such allegations are “false.” YouTube thus became the judge of election outcomes, at least for its own platform.

    Suppression has a superficial appeal by clearing dissent from a channel. This gives the appearance of harmony and squelches the expression of similar views by sending a judgment of inferiority to others. However, the source of that dissent likely remains, and the channel for expression simply moves elsewhere.

    Trump’s opponents expressed dissent after the 2016 election, but instead of suppression, our nation undertook a lengthy public investigation of claims about Russian meddling in the election. The media dutifully reported every conspiratorial claim, including those debunked as false after the facts emerged. In some cases, the mainstream media arguably proved too gullible. But at least dialogue and debate were not suppressed based on contestable predictions about how people might react. Other protests likewise raised alternative theories about racial and economic justice. Some of these theories are based on flawed factual predicates, but those faults were left to be exposed by debate.

    Allowing these processes of investigation and dialogue did not eliminate the left’s animosity toward the president or their desire to remove him from office. But choosing the path of suppression eliminates even the possibility for dialogue and reason to prevail over alternatives that might include violence.

    Maintaining Competition

    Suppression is an exercise of power, not reason. Even when exercised by private actors instead of the government, it erodes the public trust by treating people as wards and not citizens. Our system is designed to restrict government suppression, but we haven’t yet wrestled with conditions that involve private suppression to the extent we’re now experiencing. Ordinarily, market forces provide options—and that’s likely to occur in the long run if collusion doesn’t restrict new entrants. But in an environment of concentrated market power, we face new challenges.

    Cancelling and suppressing may not be limited to speech or speakers but could also extend to other channels. Consider Signal, which is one of the top-rated communication apps on both the Google and Apple platforms. It permits encrypted messaging to escape the prying habits of the Big Tech giants who profit from collecting and selling your information. However, it also avoids the surveillance efforts of law enforcement. If the effects of a channel involve carrying speech that might involve crime or violence, will Signal be deplatformed, too? Ironically, Jack Dorsey, CEO of Twitter, is prominently featured on Signal’s website as endorsing the service.

    Our Big Tech minders must stop this suppression. Other legal means to address violent conspiracies exist without the overbroad decision to cancel speakers or channels, particularly based on speculative concerns about what might be said rather than what was actually said. We must also recognize that other encrypted channels exist, such as Signal, which allow communications to be undetected—creating a privacy cloak that benefits both lawful and unlawful activity.

    Suppressing future speech because of a desire to suppress violence is not a persuasive reason—wouldn’t it be better to have that speech out in the open for all (including law enforcement) to witness? We are capable of minding ourselves and making our own judgments about the truth. Cancellation and suppression threatens all of us. It’s not just Trump supporters saying this; even the ACLU shares this concern.

    We must somehow come to terms with our history and tradition of robust debate in this country. Competition is good for us in the economic realm, and it’s good for us in the quest for truth. Competition provides a much-needed dose of humility, cautioning us that we might not have it all right and that we might have to cooperate with our fellow citizens, despite our disagreements.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 17:00

  • Has The Robinhood Exodus Begun? 
    Has The Robinhood Exodus Begun? 

    There’s no telling how many Robinhood users are infuriated with the discount brokerage after last week’s GameStop snafu following trading restrictions and forced liquidations. Still, the evidence is mounting of a possible mass exodus. 

    First, Google spent late last week removing nearly 100,000 negative reviews from the Robinhood app in the Google Play Store. Disgruntled Robinhood users, many of whom were restricted in buying GameStop shares or options or were forced to liquidate after the “mother of all short squeezes.” 

    Here’s a screenshot from the Google Play store when Robinhood had a one-star rating and nearly 275,000 reviews:

    Meanwhile, internet searches for “delete Robinhood” have gone parabolic in recent days, with other search queries including “how to delete Robinhood,” “delete my Robinhood account,” and, “how to delete a Robinhood account” surging across the country. 

    On Friday evening, in Google’s search engine, typing the word “delete” followed with “delete Rboinhood account” in the number two search spot.

    Someone created a petition on Change.org titled “Remove Robinhood From App Store,” which already has 32k signatures, with the needed goal of 35k. 

    The petition reads: 

    It’s clear that Robinhood doesn’t want individuals to make their own decisions, but large institutions like hedge funds can do as they please.

    Robinhood is in CLEAR violation of Apple’s Terms of Service to “plan or engage in any illegal, fraudulent, or manipulative activity.” You can find Apple’s full terms of service here: https://www.apple.com/legal/internet-services/itunes/us/terms.html

    Robinhood MANIPULATED the market today, and this is completely unacceptable. We need to remove Robinhood from the App Store. Move all your funds out of Robinhood today, do not give them your business. 

    … and an interesting few tweets from Tesla Uber-Bull Ross Gerber on the subject: 

    “Robinhood is basically not letting people trade anymore. This is the precursor to a potential BK filing on Monday morning. They’ll be calling their VC backers for billions more this weekend. And when they say No… this is like LTCM,” Gerber tweeted. 

    He said, “So if Robinhood goes under the SEC will freeze all the accounts. The SIPC protects up to $500k in accounts. It takes months to unwind and get your money back. Move the money now. This could become a nightmare.” 

    “Robinhood is dealing with the classic run on the bank scenario. Everyone wants out but they can’t process it fast enough depleting needed capital as fast as they can get new VC Capital in. So they need to put up more margin and they are losing Capital out the door,” Gerber warned. 

    There’s good news for Robinhooders fleeing the platform, brokerage WeBull announced late last week that GME, AMC, and KOSS were no longer restricted.

    Something bad is about to go down at Robinhood… 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 16:30

  • "Republicans Need To Suffer": Drake Prof Triggers Free Speech Debate With Hateful Tweets Against Men, Conservatives
    “Republicans Need To Suffer”: Drake Prof Triggers Free Speech Debate With Hateful Tweets Against Men, Conservatives

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    There is a free speech debate at Drake University over hateful and vulgar tweets from Associate English Professor Beth Younger, who called for Republicans “to suffer.” We have seen increasing vulgar attacks from academics, including such high-profile figures as Laurence Tribe in the last few years. Notably, Twitter did not suspend Younger’s account for calling for harm to all Republicans. I do not believe that she should be barred from social media or fired from Drake as a matter of free speech. Even with professors who have justified the murder of conservatives or killing police are protected in such hateful expressions. 

    The solution to such hate speech is more (and better) speech.  I would rather we denounce such speech than censor it.

    Beth Younger tweeted on October 26th that  “I was just pondering how much hatred I feel towards all the Republican a**holes. They need to suffer.”

    Younger also declared that all “men are trash.” and sent a message to U.S. Senator Josh Hawley on Jan. 7 that stated “f**k of you piece of shit.” She also attacked Melania Trump and called Secretary Mike Pompeo a “f**king moron and a traitor.”

    Such sentiments are obviously concerning given many Republican students and presumably faculty on campus. It also have an impact on male students taking her class with her stated hatred for their gender.  In a compelling and well-considered email, President Marty Martin  correctly condemned Younger’s comments as “unacceptable.” Martin however stressed freedom of speech in her email this week:

    The Drake University Statement of Principles declares that freedom of thought and freedom of expression are central to our educational mission. We therefore carefully refrain from restricting the exchange of ideas or regulating the content of speech. We recognize that the frank and open discussion of social, cultural, artistic, religious, moral, scientific, and political issues may be disturbing and even hurtful for some individuals, but the principle of free exchange and inquiry takes precedence because of its fundamental role in our educational enterprise. We seek to create through this robust exchange of ideas a community in which shared purpose transcends difference and respect for human dignity transcends conflict.

    Younger’s tweets raise serious questions over sexist and political intolerance.  However, there is no allegation that she has engaged in discriminatory or hateful conduct in classes.  The question is whether universities would maintain such a position in favor of free speech if the statements targeted other groups like a male professor saying the same thing about women. It is not clear if there is a coherent line or policy on such cases. Free speech demands bright lines but the record among universities has been conflicted. I often hear from conservative and libertarian faculty about what they view as a double standard.  They do not believe that the universities would show equal tolerance for criticism, let alone hateful attacks, of other groups. Certainly many liberal faculty and students have not shown the same tolerance.

    As many on this blog are aware, I tend to be predictable on free speech issues.  My natural default is to protect speech, particularly when exercised off campus or on social media. These are difficult cases when statements reflect prejudice and sexism as in the case of Professor Younger.  However, there is a fear of a slippery slope once universities begin to punish those with unacceptable views expressed in their private capacity.  We have been discussing efforts to fire professors who voice dissenting views of the basis or demands of recent protests including an effort to oust a leading economist from the University of Chicago as well as a leading linguistics professor at Harvard and a literature professor at Penn. The silence of many faculty in the face of crackdowns on free speech has been chilling in the last few years.

    There is a palpable sense of fear among many conservative and libertarian faculty and students that they cannot express themselves on campus or in classes without be ostracized or even subjected to retaliatory measures, including attacks by the student government. While faculty member like Professor Younger might not show the same tolerance for opposing views, we have a greater responsibility to regain the trust of our communities in the tolerance for opposing views and expression on our campuses. She is the cost of free speech.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 16:00

  • Reddit Preparing To Unleash "World's Biggest Short Squeeze" In Silver
    Reddit Preparing To Unleash “World’s Biggest Short Squeeze” In Silver

    While all eyes have been focused on GameStop and a handful of other heavily-shorted stocks as they exploded higher under continuous fire from WallStreetBets traders igniting a short-squeeze coinciding with a gamma-squeeze, the last few days saw another asset suddenly get in the crosshairs of the ‘Reddit-Raiders’ – Silver.

    On Thursday, we asked “Is The Reddit Rebellion About To Descend On The Precious Metals Market?”One WallStreetBets user (jjalj30) posted the following last night:

    Silver Bullion Market is one of the most manipulated on earth. Any short squeeze in silver paper shorts would be EPIC. We know billion banks are manipulating gold and silver to cover real inflation.

    Both the industrial case and monetary case, debt printing has never been more favorable for the No. 1 inflation hedge Silver.

    Inflation adjusted Silver should be at 1000$ instead of 25$. Link to post removed by mods.

    Why not squeeze $SLV to real physical price.

    Think about the Gainz. If you don’t care about the gains, think about the banks like JP MORGAN you’d be destroying along the way.

    Tldr- Corner the market. GV thinks its possible to squeeze $SLV, FUCK AFTER SEEING $AG AND $GME EVEN I THINK WE CAN DO IT. BUY $SLV GO ALL IN TH GAINZ WILL BE UNLIMITED. DEMAND PHYSICAL IF YOU CAN. FUCK THE BANKS.

    Disclaimer: This is not Financial advice. I am not a financial services professional. This is my personal opinion and speculation as an uneducated and uninformed person.

    …and judging by the unprecedented flows into the Silver ETF (SLV) they just got started…

    SLV saw inflows of almost one billion dollars on Friday, almost double the previous record inflow for this 15 year-old ETF.

    Source: Bloomberg

    Which helped prompt a spike in SLV off Wednesday’s lows of over 11% (and note that every surge in price was mimicked by gold, but gold was instantly monkey-hammered lower after the spike).

    Source: Bloomberg

    And judging by the asset flow, SLV has room to run here…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Just as short-interest in the ETF has been building…

    Source: Bloomberg

    This surge came after Reddit user ‘TheHappyHawaiian’ posted the following thesis on buying silver noting that “the worlds biggest short squeeze is possible and we can make history.”

    ‘TheHappyHawaiian’ cites two reasons to buy – The Short Squeeze and Fundamentals.

    The short squeeze:

    Buy SLV shares (or PSLV shares) and SLV call options to force physical delivery of silver to the SLV vaults.

    The silver futures market has oscillated between having roughly 100-1 and 500-1 ratio of paper traded silver to physical silver, but lets call it 250-1 for now. This means that for every 250 ounces in open interest in the futures market, only 1 actually gets delivered. Most traders would rather settle with cash rather than take delivery of thousands of ounces of silver and have to figure out to store and transport it in the future.

    The people naked shorting silver via the futures markets are a couple of large banks and making them pay dearly for their over leveraged naked shorts would be incredible. It’s not Melvin capital on the other side of this trade, its JP Morgan. Time to get some payback for the bailouts and manipulation they’ve done for decades (look up silver manipulation fines that JPM has paid over the years).

    The way the squeeze could occur is by forcing a much higher percentage of the futures contracts to actually deliver physical silver. There is very little silver in the COMEX vaults or available to actually be use to deliver, and if they have to start buying en masse on the open market they will drive the price massively higher. There is no way to magically create more physical silver in the world that is ready to be delivered. With a stock you can eventually just issue more shares if the price rises too much, but this simply isn’t the case here. The futures market is kind of the wild west of the financial world. Real commodities are being traded, and if you are short, you literally have to deliver thousands of ounces of silver per contract if the holder on the other side demands it. If you remember oil going negative back in May, that was possible because futures are allowed to trade to their true value. They aren’t halted and that’s what will make this so fun when the true squeeze happens.

    Edit for more detail: let’s say there’s one futures seller who gets unlucky and gets the buyer who actually wants to take delivery. He doesn’t have the silver and realizes it’s all of a sudden damn difficult to find some physical silver. He throws up his hands and just goes long a matching number of futures contracts and will demand actual delivery on those. Problem solved because he has now matched the demanding buyer with a new seller. The issue is that the new seller has the same issue and does the exact same thing. This is how the cascade effect of a meltup occurs. All the naked shorts trying to offload their position to someone who actually has some silver. My goal is to ensure that I have the silver and won’t sell to them until silver is at a far higher price due to the desperation.

    The silver market is much larger than GME in terms of notional value, but there is very little physical silver actually readily available (think about the difference between total shares and the shares in the active float for a stock), and the paper silver trading hands in the futures market is hundreds of times larger than what is available. Thus when they are forced to actually deliver physical silver it will create a massive short squeeze where an absurd amount of silver will be sought after (to fulfill their contractually obligated delivery) with very little available to actually buy. They are naked shorting silver and will have to cover all at once and the float as a percentage of the total silver stock globally is truly miniscule.

    The fundamentals:

    The current gold to silver ratio is 73-1. Meaning the price of gold per ounce is 73 times the price of silver. Naturally occurring silver is only 18.75 times as common as gold, so this ratio of 73-1 is quite high. Until the early 20th century, silver prices were pegged at a 15-1 ratio to gold in the US because this ratio was relatively known even then. In terms of current production, the ratio is even lower at 8-1. Meaning the world is only producing 8 ounces of silver for each newly produced ounce of gold.

    Global industry has been able to get away with producing so little new silver for so long because governments have dumped silver on the market for 80 years, but now their silver vaults are empty. At the end of WW2 government vaults globally contained 10 billion ounces of silver, but as we moved to fiat currency and away from precious metal backed currencies, the amount held by governments has decreased to only 0.24 billion ounces as they dumped their supply into the market. But this dumping is done now as their remaining supply is basically nil.

    This 0.24 billion ounces represents only 8% of the total supply of only 3 billion ounces stored as investment globally. This means that 92% of that gold is held privately by institutions and by millions of boomer gold and silver bugs who have been sitting on meager gains for decades. These boomers aren’t going to sell no matter what because they see their silver cache as part of their doomsday prepper supplies. It’s locked away in bunkers they built 500 miles from their house. Also, with silver at $23 an ounce currently, this means all of the worlds investment grade silver only has a total market cap of $70 billion. For comparison the investment grade gold in the world is worth roughly $6 trillion. This is because most of the silver produced each year actually gets used, as I have mentioned. $70 billion sounds like a lot, but we don’t have to buy all that much for the price to go up a lot.

    **If the squeeze happens, it would be like 40 years worth of their gains in 4 months **

    The reason that only 8 ounces of silver are produced for every 1 ounce of gold in today’s world is because there aren’t really any good naturally occurring silver deposits left in the world. Silver is more common than gold in the earth’s crust, but it is spread very thin. Thus nearly every ounce of silver produces is actually a byproduct of mining for other metals such as gold or copper. This means that even as the silver price skyrockets, it wont be easy to increase the supply of silver being produced. Even if new mines were to be constructed, it could take years to come online.

    Finally, most of this newly created silver supply each year is used for productive purposes rather than kept for investment. It is used in electronics, solar panels, and jewelry for the most part. This demand wont go away if the silver price rises, so the short sellers will be trying to get their hands on a very small slice of newly minted silver. The solar market is also growing quickly and political pressure to increase solar and electric vehicles could provide more industrial demand.

    The other part of the story is the faster moving piece and that is the inflation and currency debasement fear portion. The government and the fed are printing money like crazy debasing the value of the dollar, so investors look for real assets like precious metals to hide out in, driving demand for silver. The $1.9 trillion stimulus passing in a month or two could be a good catalyst. All this money combined with the reopening of the economy could cause some solid inflation to occur, and once inflation starts it often feeds on itself.

    What to buy:

    I will be putting 50% directly into SLV shares, and 50% into the $35 strike SLV calls expiring 4/16.

    This way the SLV purchase creates a groundswell into silver immediately that then rockets through a gamma squeeze as SLV approaches $35.

    Price target of $75 for SLV by end of April if the short squeeze happens.

    Edit: for the part of your purchases going into shares, some people recommend PSLV because they think SLV might start lying about having the silver in their vault. Or that the custodian will be double counting, ie claiming that the same silver belongs to multiple people (banking on the fact that people wont all try to get their silver at once). So if you buy SLV shares and calls, that’s great. But I think it could be prudent for us to buy options in SLV (no options on PSLV) and shares in PSLV. It all depends on how paranoid you want to be. There is a lot of paranoia in the precious metals world.

    Alternate options:

    • buying physical silver; this also works but you pay a premium to buy and sell so its less efficient and you take fewer silver ounces off of the market because of the premium you pay

    • going long futures for February or March; if you are a rich bastard and can actually take physical delivery of 1000s of ounces of silver by all means do so. But if you simply settle for cash you are actually part of the problem. We need actual physical delivery, which is what SLV demands and is why SLV is the way to go unless you are going to take delivery

    • miners; I don’t recommend buying miners as part of this trade. Miners will absolutely go up if SLV goes up, but buying them doesn’t create the squeeze in the actual silver market. Furthermore, most silver miners only derive 30-50% of their revenue from silver anyways, so eventually SLV will outperform them as it gets high enough (and each marginal SLV dollar only increases miner profits by a smaller and smaller percentage)

    Details on SLV physical settlement:

    When SLV issues shares, the custodian is forced to true up their vaults with the proportional amount of silver daily. From the SLV prospectus:

    “An investment in Shares is: Backed by silver held by the Custodian on behalf of the Trust. The Shares are backed by the assets of the Trust. The Trustee’s arrangements with the Custodian contemplate that at the end of each business day there can be in the Trust account maintained by the Custodian no more than 1,100 ounces of silver in an unallocated form. The bulk of the Trust’s silver holdings is represented by physical silver, identified on the Custodian’s or, if applicable, sub-custodian’s, books in allocated and unallocated accounts on behalf of the Trust and is held by the Custodian in London, New York and other locations that may be authorized in the future.”

    ‘TheHappyHawaiian” ends with a call to (financial) arms:

    Join me brothers. Lets take silver to the moon and take on the biggest and baddest manipulators in the world.

    Please post rocket emojis in the comments as desired.

    Disclaimer: do your own research, make your own decisions, everything here is a guess and hypothetical and nothing is guaranteed, not a financial advisor, I have ADHD and maybe other things too.

    Bear case: silver does tend to sell off if the broader market plunges so it’s not immune to broad market sell off. It’s also the most manipulated market in the world so we are facing some tough competition on the short side

    Interestingly, ‘TheHappyHawaiian’ dropped this update on 1/29:

    Due to the manipulation and collusion of citadel, hedge funds, and brokers to change the rules and rig the game in their favor. Who likely knew ahead of time and bought puts right before and calls at the bottom, GME is too important to abandon still. SLV is still my next play but GME needs to go to $1000 and these people need to go to jail.

    However, judging by the massive physical premiums for silver we are seeing this weekend at APMEX

    … and JM Bullion

    …there are more than a few who are already rotating to SLV from GME.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 15:30

  • Revolution, Revenge Of The Nerds, Or The Matrix Reloaded?
    Revolution, Revenge Of The Nerds, Or The Matrix Reloaded?

    Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

    I have to say as revolutions go, this one is hilarious.

    GameStop opened Friday morning above $330 per share, a sentence I never thought in a million years I’d ever write.

    This open nearly ensures that all the attempts Thursday to push the price back down to bail out the hedge funds desperately short have failed spectacularly.

    There’s options expiration today which will fundamentally change the way we look at markets if Game Spot closes in this range.

    Because it shows that when people act in the aggregate they can overwhelm the attempts by a few central planners to control you.

    Your best proof that this is at least a part of what’s going on is the way Wall St. and the regulators in D.C. are reacting. Because they are screaming that this is outrageous, that we need stronger enforcement tools to ‘ensure the integrity of our markets.’

    That’s just code for ‘only we’re allowed to game the markets not the little people.’

    And with options expiring on GameStop nearly every week in February and March this game isn’t over by any stretch of the imagination.

    Populist is a Four-Letter Work

    In fact, It’s the beginning of a new form of populist revolt.

    We’ve seen what they think of populist revolts. They have utter disdain for them. They squash them and hope to ignore the consequences.

    Vote for Trump? Can’t have that happen again.

    Speak out against any facet of the Great Reset? Get censored.

    Try to build a new platform not controlled by them? Get deplatformed.

    Show up at the Capitol to peacefully assemble? Get caught up in a false flag to justify arresting you and shaming you into submission.

    Today’s price action in Game Spot and other stocks heavily-shorted by hedge funds is simply the next iteration of the people finding ways to make their voices heard.

    If you remove someone’s ability to speak in one arena they will find a way in another.

    And don’t for a second think the irony of this evolution of Occupy Wall St. occurring during the World Economic Forum’s virtual Davos is lost on me.

    It isn’t.

    In an age where we are forced to wear masks in ritual submission to oligarchic control they hide behind ever bigger barriers to our hatred of them.

    As we saw on Capitol Hill three weeks ago, public assembly in the age of COVID is a recipe for even more ‘wound collecting‘ by the oligarchy, who have their media quislings turn into it bad PR for how unruly the little people are to scare the ‘normies.’

    Black-Scholes Event Horizon

    But what happens when the little people don’t care about making money or any of those other ‘rational’ investor/actor assumptions which undergird the value-at-risk equations used by most hedge funds and Wall St. quants?

    What happens when someone finally blows the lid off the assumption that the risk-free rate of return, R* in the Black Scholes Equation, is anything less than 1000% for $100 call option on Game Spot?

    Well, today it means a few rich people will be made poor and a lot of poor people richer.

    The bigger question however, about all of this is what happens when, finally, the markets admit that R* for U.S. Treasuries is not zero?

    Because that’s what this whole Game Spot Revolution is really about, opening up major cracks in the confidence and validity of the institutions that are supposed to be so unassailably powerful that markets rely on to justify insane valuation models.

    They made a mistake staging their failed Tiananmen Square moment at the Capitol. No one other than them was really upset about it other than people getting shot (Her name was Ashli Babbitt).

    It means that for a moment, and possibly a few more moments, given how screwed up our financial system is, the little guy’s anger just got capitalized.

    They Hate US for Our Freedoms

    And the irony is the seed capital for this came from their own disdain for us.

    When the last round of stimulus checks showed up, I don’t know about you but I was angry. My wife and I stared at it for a few days and doing so made us viscerally mad.

    It represented just how little they thought of all the people whose lives they’d ruined. Paying out the bare minimum to hold us over until they’d fully consolidated power behind barricades and 25,000 troops in D.C.

    When asked about what I would do with my stimmy check I replied the same way every time, “Pay my taxes with it.”

    But even if 2020 was good for you financially as it was, admittedly for me, all of this COVID-destruction destroyed something far more important: quality of life.

    It wasn’t about the money, it was about what was truly lost. The personal bonds broken, the psychological damage to my daughter trying to school via Zoom while going slowly insane.

    The destruction of my weekly ‘guys night out’ board gaming group and, now, my martial arts school, a staple in our lives for over 25 years. We shared one last pitcher of beer last night holding back tears.

    The haunted looks of my friends and favorite local vendors trying to keep it together.

    We all have those stories. They take their toll. The scar tissue builds.

    So, when that check showed up after six months of Nancy Pelosi burning down people’s lives even more to burn down her nemesis Donald Trump, we all knew what the score was.

    They care about you like a virus cares about its host.

    And finally, after a year of this, instead of sitting around wondering what DLC to buy for Fortnight with their stimulus check a bunch of really angry smart guys said, “You know what? Fuck these assholes.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And they got a whole lot of people with nothing left to lose (except their payola to not disturb Queen Nancy) to go along with them.

    Revenge of the Nerds?

    That anger, as I said, is now pretty well capitalized, the same way that 2017’s cryptocurrency rally capitalized a whole lot of committed anarcho-assholes of all political stripes to build on top of bitcoin’s reserve status.

    The early fruits of that labor are also on display today. Not because these guys are pushing their GameStop profits into Dogecoin but because after a massive coordinated attack to break Bitcoin after the peak near $42,000 two weeks ago, it couldn’t be beaten back below $20,000, the previous all-time high.

    All of a sudden there were places to park crypto-profits which weren’t U.S. dollars, the asset where all the off-ramps could be shut off and the little people trapped inside Coinbase getting slaughtered while it’s ‘down for maintenance.’

    That’s why today is so fascinating. Wall St. thought all they had to do was double down on their GameStop shorts and use their hammer to beat the nails back into the board.

    It didn’t work. By then this thing had gone global.

    Now, you have to wonder who was helping the rabble push GameStop back above the $210 Maginot Line? Once something like this starts Wall St.’s enemies start coming out of the woodwork to piggy back on the chaos and change the board state of global markets.

    Think China, Russia and everyone else sanctioned to hell and gone by Neocons in our government in the service of Israel.

    And yesterday’s close forced a lot of people to scramble and find the money they need to cover their losses or these meme-lords will own enough shares to not only own Game Spot’s board but also have money left over to go after someone else.

    Maybe American Airlines? Maybe Blackberry? Maybe Nokia?

    This is the first real battle in an asymmetric war.

    And those stocks would be very interesting to see successful populist raids on. Can we say hostile takeover and a recapitalization of Blackberry or Nokia outside of the Apple/Google mobile web duopoly?

    I’d sell my iPhone if that happened.

    Hey, I’m just vamping here, but if these guys are serious about doing damage and re-leveling the playing field that financial advice I’m not allowed to give you can have for free.

    Reality is that which, when you stop….

    At the same time there’s also the reality that when the masses storm the financial Bastille like this there’s a lot of bystanders run over in the process.

    The guys at r/WallStreetBets understood the structure of the markets. They understand that Robinhood had to shut down trading on Game Spot and others simply because Robinhood wouldn’t have enough cash to post the required collateral thanks to Dodd-Frank.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Moreover, it’s going to cause real problems with clearinghouses and primary banks. Robinhood had to tap more than a billion dollars to cover the collateral.

    And today’s close will make that number bigger. Which makes me wonder if this chaos unleashed by the Game Spot Revolution doesn’t have a more sinister angle.

    One where an upstart retail brokerage was stealing too much market share for trading fees and, like the proles on Reddit, was making too much money threatening the someone else’s business.

    … Believing in it Doesn’t Go Away.

    So, is this an elaborate hit job inside of this populist uprising like what we saw at the Capitol on January 6th?

    Like I said at the outset the usual suspects are all out their today saying we need wealth taxes and trading fees on stock trades. There will be punishment for upsetting the sanctity of our capital markets.

    Are we all just, as always, having our chain jerked by a bunch of psychopaths looking to advance a new regulatory environment where the validity of capital markets themselves are undermined?

    Because, you don’t think the Commies who just performed a coup in D.C. through blatant election fraud and whose Masters are bloviating about ‘rebooting capitalism’ as I type this would concoct such a thing would you?

    Surely things couldn’t be that corrupt? No. Power to the Short Squeeze and all hail Elon Musk!

    If you don’t think that’s possible then I’ve got some GameStop January 2023 Leaps at $250 strike price to sell you. As many as you like… 140% of the float even.

    I sincerely hope I’m wrong but something tells me I’m not being cynical enough.

    *  *  *

    Join My Patreon if you want a real revolution

    Donate
    BTC: 3GSkAe8PhENyMWQb7orjtnJK9VX8mMf7Zf
    BCH: qq9pvwq26d8fjfk0f6k5mmnn09vzkmeh3sffxd6ryt
    ETH: 0x1dd2e6cddb02e3839700b33e9dd45859344c9edc
    DCR: DsV2x4kJ4gWCPSpHmS4czbLz2fJNqms78oE
    DASH: XjWQKXJuxYzaNV6WMC4zhuQ43uBw8mN4Va
    XMR: 48Whbhyg8TNXiNV2LNkjeuJJU55CNt5m1XDtP3jWZK2xf5GNsbU2ZwHLDJTQ5oTU3uaJPN8oQooRpSQ2CPMJvX8pVTqthmu

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 15:00

  • Mark Cuban Presents A "Little Trick" For Creating The Mother Of All Short Squeezes
    Mark Cuban Presents A “Little Trick” For Creating The Mother Of All Short Squeezes

    A few days ago when Wall Street was panicking over the unprecedented short squeeze that had sent the most shorted names soaring and streamrolling hedge funds such as Melvin Capital, Maplelane and countless others, we said that instead of engaging in damage control already perhaps Wall Street should consider how much worse it could still get. To wit, late on Jan 26 we said that a “little trick” that is available (for those with cash accounts) was for holders of GME stock to call back shares they owned of the heavily shorted names.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Just a few hours later, early in the Thursday premarket session, things started to really move: that’s when GME hit an all time high of $513.12 which has yet to be topped.

    So did people call back their shares? Perhaps, we don’t know, or maybe that’s about to happen. According to S3 Partners, the total short interest is still a whopping 113% of the float, which means the squeeze could easily go on for a long time if the buyers kept applying pressure.

    And none other than Mark Cuban may have assured of just that.

    In a series of tweets on Friday, the iconic investor and “shark” compared the lending and rebate payment mechanism in stocks vs DeFi crypto tokens (where the bearer gets the benefit of the borrow fee and not the broker) and said – in an almost verbatim paraphrase of our “tricky” tweet from two days earlier – the following:

    one trick that I have been on both sides of is to lend out stock to shorts at a high APY and then call back my shares, which forces the short to cover. Now if #WSB did this en masse, it would be the mother of all short squeezes “.

    Cuban made another point which we also addressed previously, namely that with millions of new users signing up to r/WallStreetBets where each trader has an average brokerage account of $5,000 (soon to get another $1,400 “stimmy check” infusion), the subreddit has become the world’s biggest distributed, decentralized hedge fund with a “hive mind”, where all the individual traders coordinate and work as one, and one which can steamroll over virtually any Wall Street veteran. In fact, at this rate, Once WSB has 15 million or so members – which should happen by the end of the week, as it now has a whopping 7 million up from 2 million at the start of the week…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … it will have more monetary firepower than the world’s biggest hedge fund (central banks not included) Bridgewater:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And here’s Cuban on this topic too: “The beauty of what has happened with #WSB is that Wall street is learning an expensive lesson that The Way Things Have Always Been Done is not How Things Should Be Done. There is power in numbers working together. Buy and Trade Together can be a whole lot more powerful than old-school buy and hold. Im not saying HODLing stocks is bad. It can be great and have the same impact as HODLing crypto. And the same principals even apply. The number of shares outstanding and their growth is comparable to coins mined (without the algorithmic control).”

    His full thread is below (source):

    Lets talk $GME shorts vs De-Fi. When someone shorts a stock that is already heavily shorted, they have to pay a fee to borrow that stock. In the case of $GME that fee has been hovering around 30% this week. Shorts have to pay (Price x .30)/360 per day. In DeFi thats a 30% APY.

    For RH Traders that own $GME that money, as best I can tell, is held in street name. Which means that 30% APR goes 100pct to @RobinhoodApp 😬😬😬. Imagine if you pooled your crypto and the platform was getting 30% APY and didnt pay all but fees to you ? What would happen ?

    This is one more way that Wall St takes advantage of the little guy. If you are moving from RH, look to see if you can find some place that allows you to hold the shares and lend them in YOUR name, so you get the Yield (Yield Farming in stocks !). Not all will allow it.

    But if they do, one trick that I have been on both sides of is to lend out stock to shorts at a high APY and then call back my shares, which forces the short to cover. Now if #WSB did this en masse, it would be the mother of all short squeezes .

    The beauty of what has happened with #WSB is that Wall street is learning an expensive lesson that The Way Things Have Always Been Done is not How Things Should Be Done. There is power in numbers working together. Buy and Trade Together can be a whole lot more powerful than old-school buy and hold. Im not saying HODLing stocks is bad. It can be great and have the same impact as HODLing crypto. And the same principals even apply. The number of shares outstanding and their growth is comparable to coins mined (without the algorithmic control).

    If small trades can work together and share information together the power to move stock pricing moves quickly from the analyst on Wall Street to the people working together. There is one VERY IMPORTANT caveat. No amount of trading together can keep a bad company in business.

    But if individual traders educate each other and use their combined strength to focus on good companies , with strong prospects, the power shifts from wall street to main street, particularly now that Direct Listings are changing the IPO game. Thoughts ? Comments ?

    So for all those wondering how and when GameStop will Stop, and if the squeeze is finally over, as long as iconic figures with a chip on their shoulder and a desire to inflict more pain on Wall Street continue to chime in with perspectives on how to keep the pain up, it is likely that the unprecedented short squeeze mania is not over by a long shot. And furthermore, with borrow costs now at 50%, even in the absence of further painful gains in the stock price the cost of carry alone will force the shorts to cover in the coming days should the price of GME fail to drop.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 14:45

  • COVID Lockdowns Spark Biggest Cigarette Sales Spike In Years
    COVID Lockdowns Spark Biggest Cigarette Sales Spike In Years

    During the first months of quarantine, when nobody really had any idea whether they’d be seeing their colleagues again next week, next month, or next year, reporters churned out stories about people walking, jogging or otherwise exercising to try and squeeze out a little endorphin boost while also helping to prepare one’s body for the worst-case scenario (after all the stories we have published about COVID “long haulers”, those risks, however slight, should be widely understood).

    But as the months dragged on, it appears Americans turned instead to a quick buzz as rates of drinking alcohol, using drugs and, now, smoking cigarettes climbed. As WSJ reports, 2020 was the first year in decades that cigarette use among Americans increased, instead of declining.

    Even though the “vaping illness” has been largely attributed to an additive in illegal marijuana vaping products, sales of nicotine vaping products never rebounded from the paranoia it caused. A sense of pervasive skepticism lingers, as several of the WSJ’s sources pointed out. In the US, cigarette sales topped sales from five years’ ago when many consumers switched back to cigarettes after trying first-generation vaping devices.

    Before the pandemic, cigarette sales had been falling at an accelerating rate. Sales declined by 5.5% in 2019. But in 2020, the trend suddenly reversed, and sales were flat.

    The reasons for the spike in cigarette sales aren’t too difficult to deduce: Being stuck at home all the time gave people more opportunities to smoke, while the inability to go out and see and meet people essentially forced them to save money on gas, travel and entertainment, which they could then spend on cigarettes). The Virginia-based company posted EPS of $1.03 (or 99 cents per share on an adjusted basis). That’s a couple cents shy of what Wall Street had expected. Still, cigarettes outperformed many other consumer products, and sales in 2020 were even stronger than in 2015, when a drop in gas prices gave consumers more discretionary money to play around with.

    Despite the success in cigarette sales during the prior 12 months, Altria didn’t offer a projection for cigarette sales in 2021, saying Thursday that it would depend in part on the rollout of the COVID-19 vaccine, an excuse that has been offered by pretty much every publicly-traded US company.

    E-cigarette sales were booming by the fall of 2019 as the popularity of the Juul vaporizer, which caught on among teens and got a whole new generation of Americans addicted to nicotine and tobacco, were blamed for reviving the practice, especially in the US. But many of those same users have apparently now made the switch to cigarettes.

    Recognizing this, ederal regulators under Dr. Scott Gottlieb, who ran the FDA before Dr. Stephen Hahn, moved to crush cigarette sales when they raised the federal age for legal tobacco purchases to 21, while pushing President Trump to bar flavored vapes and menthol cigarettes, though the president ultimately demurred.

    And if the COVID-19 vaccination process takes even longer than Dr. Anthony Fauci & Co. are saying, we imagine next year might be another big year for tobacco sales as well, especially as the Biden Administration roles out the stimulus checks and unemployment benefits.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 01/30/2021 – 14:30

Digest powered by RSS Digest